N M IM S Business Law COURSE DESIGN COMMITTEE Chief Academic Officer Dr. Shalini Kalia NMIMS Global Access – School for Continuing Education TOC Reviewer Mr. Mario Sequeira Mr. Mario Sequeira Visiting Faculty, NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Specialization: Intellectual Property Law, E-Commerce, Corporate Law and Dispute Resolution Visiting Faculty, NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Specialization: Intellectual Property Law, E-Commerce, Corporate Law and Dispute Resolution IM S Content Reviewer N M Author: Dr. Manish Arora Advocate Supreme Court of India President Universal Institute of Legal Studies Member Board of Legal Studies, Amity University President Harvard Club of India 2008 -2010 Reviewed By: Mario Sequeira Copyright: 2021 Publisher ISBN: 978-93-90457-95-3 Address: 4435/7, Ansari Road, Daryaganj, New Delhi–110002 Only for NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education School Address V. L. Mehta Road, Vile Parle (W), Mumbai – 400 056, India. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education O N T EN T S CHAPTER NAME PAGE NO. 1 The Indian Contract Act, 1872 1 2 Sale of Goods Act, 1930 69 3 Laws Related to the Formation of Businesses 97 4 Laws that Commonly Affect Businesses 149 5 Laws Related to Enforcement and Redressal Mechanism in Business 205 6 Consumer Protection Act, 2019 239 7 Right to Information Act, 2005 273 Competition Act, 2000 295 Employee Related Laws 335 10 Environment-Related Laws 369 11 Case Studies 399 9 M N 8 S CHAPTER NO. IM C NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education B usin e ss Law c u rr i c u l u m The Indian Contract Act, 1872: Agreements and Contracts, Classification of Contracts, When an Agreement becomes a Contract: Essential Conditions, Offer/Proposal and Acceptance, Standard Form of Contract/Boilerplate Contract/Adhesion Contract, Consideration and Privity of Contract, Free Consent, Capacity to Contract, Void, Valid and Voidable Agreements, Quasi-Contracts, Discharge of Contracts, Remedies for Breach of Contract, Contracts of Indemnity and Guarantee, Contract of Bailment and Contract of Pledge, Contracts Dealing with Agency, Explaining Agreements using a Template IM S Sale of Goods Act, 1930: Concept of Goods, Sale of Goods Act, 1930, Difference between the Contract of Sale of Goods and the Contract for Work and Labour, Doctrine of Caveat Emptor and Exceptions, Performance of the Contract of Sale, Unpaid Seller, Hire Purchase and Hypothecation Agreements M Laws Related to the Formation of Businesses: Unincorporated and Incorporated Forms of Business, Sole Proprietorship—Meaning, Features, Advantages and Disadvantages, Limited Liability Partnership (LLP) Act, 2008, Companies Act, 2013 N Laws that Commonly Affect Businesses: Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881, Types of Negotiable Instruments, Recent Amendments in the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 and their Impact, Payment and Settlement Systems Act, 2007 and its Features, Penalties and Punishment under Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 and Payment and Settlement Systems Act, 2007, Intellectual Property Law, Prevention of Sexual Harassment, Impact of Sexual Harassment Cases on Indian and Foreign Organisations Laws related to Enforcement and Redressal Mechanism in Business: Alternative Dispute Resolution, Meaning and History of Alternate Dispute Resolution, Features of Alternative Dispute Resolution, Advantages of Alternative Dispute Resolution, Types of Alternate Dispute Resolution, Negotiation, Mediation, Conciliation, Lok Adalats, Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996, AntiCorruption Laws, Anti-Corruption Laws in India, Difference between US Anti-Corruption Laws and Indian Anti-Corruption Laws Consumer Protection Act, 2019: Consumer Protection Act, 2019, Objective of the Act, Scope of the Act, Important Provisions and Features of the Consumer Protection Act, 2019, Difference between Consumer Protection Act, 1986 and Consumer Protection Act, 2019, Rights of a Consumer, Consumer Protection Councils, Functions of Consumer Protection Councils, Central Consumer Protection Council, State Consumer Protection Councils, District Consumer Protection Councils, Consumer Disputes Redressal, Consumer Disputes Redressal Machinery, Procedure of Dispute NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education v Resolution, Procedure for Filing a Complaint before the Consumer Protection Body, Nature and Scope of Remedies, Appeals and Limitations, Comparison of Consumer Law in Other Countries Right to Information Act, 2005: The Right to Information (RTI) Act, 2005, Public Authorities (Chapter II of the Act), Procedure for Obtaining Information (Sections 6 and 7), Information Exempted from Disclosure (Section 8), Information Commissions (ICs), Impact of the RTI Act, 2005 S Competition Act, 2000: Competition—What and Why, Competition Act, 2002, Anti-competitive Agreements, Competition Commission of India (CCI), Combination, Penalties Imposed Under the Competition Act, 2002, Leading Cases under the Competition Law in India IM Employee related Laws: Factories Act, 1948, Objectives and Applicability, Key Provisions and Features of the Law, Occupation of Occupier (Employer) and Responsibilities of Occupier, Industrial Disputes Act, 1947, Minimum Wages Act, 1948, Employees Compensation Act, 1923, Employees Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act, 1952, Calculation of Provident Fund and Apportionment of the Fund against Various Schemes, Payment of Bonus Act, 1965, Payment of Gratuity Act, 1972, Maternity Benefit Act, 1961, Code on Labour Laws N M Environment related Laws: Laws Aimed at Protecting and Conserving the Environment, Environment Protection Act (EPA), 1986, National Green Tribunal (NGT) Act, 2010, Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981, Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974, Hazardous and Other Wastes (Management and Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016, Wildlife Protection Act, 1972, Forest Conservation Act, 1980, Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991, Biological Diversity Act, 2002 NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education S IM M N C h 1 a pt e THE INDIAN CONTRACT ACT, 1872 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.3 N M 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.3.4 Introduction Agreements and Contracts Contracts – Historical Perspective Promise and Contract – Two Sides of the Same Coin Self Assessment Questions Activity Classification of Contracts According to Initiation According to Enforceability/Validity According to the Method of Formation According to Performance Self Assessment Questions Activity When an Agreement becomes a Contract: Essential Conditions Self Assessment Questions Activity Offer/Proposal and Acceptance What Constitutes an Offer Difference between Offer and Invitation to Offer Acceptance Communication of Offer and Acceptance Self Assessment Questions Activity Standard Form of Contract/Boilerplate Contract/Adhesion Contract Self Assessment Questions Activity Consideration and Privity of Contract Essentials of a Valid Consideration IM 1.1 1.2 S Contents 1.4 1.5 1.5.1 1.5.2 1.5.3 1.5.4 1.6 1.7 1.7.1 NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education r Business Law CONTENTS Exceptions to the Rule of No Consideration, No Contract (Section 25) Doctrine of Privity of Contract (Rule of a Stranger to a Contract) Exceptions to the Rule of Privity of Contract Self Assessment Questions Activity 1.8 Free Consent 1.8.1 Consent vs. Free Consent Coercion 1.8.2 1.8.3 Undue Influence 1.8.4 Fraud Misrepresentation 1.8.5 Mistake 1.8.6 Self Assessment Questions Activity 1.9 Capacity to Contract 1.9.1Disqualifications for Capacity to Contract – Minors, Persons of Unsound Mind and Disqualified Persons Self Assessment Questions Activity Void, Valid and Voidable Agreements 1.10 Void Agreements with Unlawful/Illegal Consideration or Object 1.10.1 Expressly Declared Void Agreements 1.10.2 Effect of Void, Valid and Voidable Agreements 1.10.3 Self Assessment Questions Activity 1.11 Quasi-Contracts Self Assessment Questions Activity Discharge of Contracts 1.12 Discharge by Performance 1.12.1 Discharge by Mutual Agreement 1.12.2 1.12.3 Discharge by Impossibility of Performance (Force Majeure Clause) Discharge by Lapse of Time 1.12.4 Discharge by Operation of Law 1.12.5 1.12.6 Discharge by Breach of Contract 1.12.7 Appropriation of Payments (Clayton’s Rule of Appropriation) Self Assessment Questions Activity Remedies for Breach of Contract 1.13 1.13.1 Damages 1.13.2 Specific Performance M IM S 1.7.2 1.7.3 1.7.4 N 2 NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education THE INDIAN CONTRACT ACT, 1872 3 CONTENTS Injunctions Self Assessment Questions Activity 1.14 Contracts of Indemnity and Guarantee 1.14.1Contract of Indemnity and Contract of Guarantee – Meaning and Examples 1.14.2 Rights of the Indemnified and Indemnifier 1.14.3 Commencement of Indemnifier’s Liability Contract of Guarantee 1.14.4 1.14.5 Kinds of Guarantee 1.14.6 Rights and Liabilities of Surety Discharge of Surety 1.14.7 Difference between Contract of Indemnity and Contract of Guarantee 1.14.8 Self Assessment Questions Activity Contract of Bailment and Contract of Pledge 1.15 Kinds of Bailment 1.15.1 1.15.2 Termination of Bailment Duties and Rights of a Bailor 1.15.3 Duties and Rights of a Bailee 1.15.4 Bailee’s Lien 1.15.5 1.15.6 Types of Lien 1.15.7 Pledge Rights and Duties of a Pledgee (Pawnee) and a Pledger (Pawnor) 1.15.8 Self Assessment Questions Activity Contracts Dealing with Agency 1.16 1.16.1 Meaning of Principal and Agent 1.16.2 Types of Agents Authority of an Agent 1.16.3 Liability of Principal and Agent 1.16.4 1.16.5 Termination of Agency Self Assessment Questions Activity 1.17 Explaining Agreements using a Template Self Assessment Questions Activity 1.18 Summary Descriptive Questions 1.19 Answers and Hints 1.20 1.21 Suggested Readings & References N M IM S 1.13.3 NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law Introductory Caselet FORMATION OF CONTRACTS Case Objective This caselet discusses the importance of an agreement for the formation of a contract and how it is different from an invitation to enter into an Agreement. The presence of an agreement is the first requirement for the formation of a legally binding contract. Mr Ayush puts up a property for sale at an auction. Mr Pushkar makes a bid of ` 75 lakhs, whichwas the highest bid. Mr Ayush did not accept the bid because he was doubtful of the ability of Mr Pushkar to pay the amount of the bid. This matter was brought to the court, where Mr Pushkar was the plaintiff and Mr Ayush was the defendant. S Mr Pushkar claimed that he and Mr Ayush had entered into a legally binding contract because he had made the highest bid. The court heard both the parties and pronounced the following judgement: M IM Bidders at any auction are entitled to make an offer but that offer may or may not be accepted by the seller. In other words, auctions are an invitation to offer. Therefore, it was held that no agreement was reached because the seller refused the offer made by Mr Pushkar. The court held that no legally enforceable contract was entered into because there was a lack of agreement. Mr Ayush won the suit. Hence, an invitation to offer does not give rise to any rights or obligations. N 4 NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education THE INDIAN CONTRACT ACT, 1872 5 Learning objectives After studying this chapter, you will be able to: Explain the concept of agreements and contracts Describe the classification of contracts and essential conditions of a contract Explain the concept of an offer/proposal and its acceptance Describe the meaning of communication of offer and acceptance Describe the Standard Form of Contract/Boilerplate Contract/Adhesion Contract Describe the meaning of consideration and privity of contract Explain the concept of free consent and capacity to contract Outline various disqualifications to contract including minors, persons of unsound mind and disqualified persons Discuss the meaning of void, valid and voidable agreements Explain quasi-contracts Explain various modes of discharge of contracts Describe various remedies for a breach of contract Explain the contracts of indemnity and guarantee Describe the contract of bailment and contract of pledge Explain the essential elements of agreements using a template >> >> >> >> >> S >> M N >> >> >> >> >> >> >> IM >> >> 1.1 Introduction The Contract Act, 1872 is the most important law that governs various types of contracts to be applied for transactions affecting Indian goods and properties. Section 2(h) of the Contract Act, 1872 defines a contract as an agreement enforceable by law. An agreement cannot become a contract unless it is enforceable by law. To be enforceable by law, a contract must contain all the essential elements of a valid contract. The first step in the formation of a contract is ‘proposal’. An accepted proposal is a ‘promise’ and an ‘agreement’ is a promise or a set of promises. A ‘contract’ is an agreement enforceable by law. Essential elements of enforceability of a contract are defined in Section 10 of the Contract Act, 1872 and include competency of parties, free consent of parties, lawful object, lawful consideration, not expressly declared to be void and legal formalities like written registration, etc. In this chapter, you will study about the elements of agreements and contracts under the Contract Act, 1872 at length. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 6 Business Law 1.2 Agreements and Contracts Under Section 2(e) of the Contract Act, 1872, an ‘agreement’ means every promise or a set of promises that forms a consideration for each other. In other words, an agreement is an exchange of promises between two or more parties. As per Section 7 of the Contract Act, 1872, in order to convert a proposal into a promise, the acceptance must: (1) be absolute and unqualified (2) be expressed in some usual and reasonable manner Under Section 2(b) of the Indian Contract Act, 1872, when the person to whom the proposal is made, signifies his assent thereto, the proposal is said to be accepted. A proposal, when accepted, becomes a promise. ‘Offer’ and ‘proposal’ can be used interchangeably; while the English law uses the term ‘offer’ and in the Indian law, ‘proposal’ is used. Thus, Agreement = Offer (Proposal) + Acceptance of Offer (Proposal) + Consideration S NOTE IM Example: A offers to buy a television for ` 5,000 from B and B accepts this offer. In this case, the offer after acceptance becomes a promise and this promise is called an agreement between A and B. Essential Elements of Agreement An agreement consists of the following five essential elements: 2. One of the parties must make an offer to the other party. 3. The offer must be accepted by the other party. 4. Both the offer and the acceptance must coincide in relation to the same subject matter and context which is called ‘making the agreement in the same sense’ or consensus-ad-idem. N Consensus-ad-idem is a phrase in the contract law that is used for a situation where there is a common understanding of both the parties in the formation of the contract. 1. There must be two or more parties. M Know More 5. There must be the intention to enter into a legal relationship. Meaning of Contract According to Section 2(h) of the Contract Act, 1872, a ‘contract’ is an agreement enforceable by law. From the above definitions, it can be revealed that a contract has two elements, namely: 1. Agreement 2. Enforceability Thus, it can be summarised as follows: Contract = Agreement under Section 2(e) of Contract Act, 1872 + Enforceability of the agreement under Section 10 of the Act NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education THE INDIAN CONTRACT ACT, 1872 7 What is Enforceability of an Agreement? It has already been defined that an agreement is an important part of a contract. An agreement becomes a contract when it becomes enforceable by law. When a contract involves offer, acceptance and consideration, it is enforceable in the court of law. A detailed explanation of offer and consideration is given later in the chapter. Enforceability is the recourse available if all the essentials of the Contract Act, 1872 are adhered to provide protection against the breach of contract by any of the parties. 1.2.1 Contracts – Historical Perspective S The law governing contracts in India is the Indian Contract Act, 1872 came into force on 1 September 1872. Since then, the Indian Contract Act, 1872 has been amended from time to time by the Central Government and the state governments as per the state requirements. IM The Contract Act, 1872 defines the meaning of contracts, their execution and implementation in addition to describing the provisions for the breach of contracts. The Contract Act, 1872 that we see today has been developed into its current state by going through a lot of transformation. The different phases through which the Contract Act, 1872 has passed to reach its current shape are explained as follows: N M 1. Early and medieval period (Vedic and medieval period and Islamic law): There was no general rule governing contracts in the ancient and medieval periods in India. However, the principles mentioned within various scriptures, such as Vedas, Dharmshastras, Smritis and Shrutis, mention laws similar to contracts. Various studies have revealed that contracts originated in the Vedic period. These scriptures mention various transactions that are similar to contracts, such as debt deposit, pledges, sale without ownership, mortgage, gifts, etc. These scriptures mention various rules of contracts that are similar to the Modern Law of Contract. As an example, Manusmriti mentions that the competence of parties is the first requirement for the formation of a contract. In Manusmriti, dependents, minors and persons devoid of limbs were considered incompetent to the contract. Vedic scriptures also mention the concept of liability. ? DID YOU KNOW The Arthashastra is an ancient Indian Sanskrit treatise on statecraft, economic policy and military strategy. Kautilya, also identified as Chanakya, wrote this treatise 2400 years ago. NOTE In medieval times, the law of contract was governed by moral and economic factors and activities. Contracts were made for business and commercial transactions, such as transfer of property, performance of services, etc., on the basis of agreements and promises. Another important medieval scripture to mention contracts is the Kautilya’s Arthashastra. yyContracts made in a forest Contracts were also made during the Mauryan period and involved free consent and consensus. yyContracts made in any secret place NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education In the Mauryan period, the following types of contracts were considered to be void: yyContracts formed during the night 8 Business Law In the medieval period, contracts were void if made under undue influence. The rule of ‘damdupat’, according to which the amount of principal and interest recoverable at one time in a lump sum couldn’t be more than double the money lent, was also followed. During the Mughal rule in India, contracts were governed according to the Mohammedan Law of Contract. In Arabic, Aqd means a contract which literally means conjunction. Aqd means a combination of proposal (Ijab) and acceptance (Qabul). Know More 2. Early law of contract (Rome): Romans recognised various types of promises. The Roman law recognised that promise itself might give rise to an enforceable duty. Romans also recognised that a promise was not legally enforceable until it was considered as a stipulation, real contract or consensual contract. S The Rule of Damdupat is a branch of the Hindu Law of debts according to which the amount of interest that can be recovered at any one time cannot exceed the principal amount. M A covenant is considered to be an equivalent of the modern day contract. Actions related to covenant majorly included the cases related to breaches of agreements, such as building, sales, lease of land, etc. The cases were presented in royal courts and were related to the claims for the performance of the contract and claiming damages. Actions related to debt included claims for the prices of goods sold and delivered. Claims were made for monetary compensation for the benefit received. IM NOTE 3. Early law of contract (England): There were two assumptions given by common law courts (courts in England) in the medieval times. The first assumption was that promises were generally enforceable and then exceptions could not be created for promises that were not desirable for being enforced. The second assumption was that promises were generally unenforceable and then exceptions were created for promises that were desirable to enforce. The courts in those times believed that a mere promise did not give rise to an action. N In the 15th and 16th centuries, common law courts were able to develop a general criterion for enforcing promises within a framework. Two forms of action for enforcing (contractual) rights, namely ‘debt’ and ‘covenant’ were developed. In the 16th century, the concept of ‘assumpsit’ was developed. Assumpsit was an implied promise on which an action for the recovery of damages caused due to the breach of contract could be taken. In the 17th and 18th centuries, concepts such as transferability of contract rights were recognised. Also, some legislations were passed that required some contracts to be in the written form. 4. English Law in India: In India, the formal contract law was introduced with the rule of Englishmen. The English common law and statute law came in India with the Chartered Courts of the 18th century. Various Courts of Justice were established in the presidency towns of Calcutta, Madras and Bombay. The English law was applied across India, which led to various inconveniences to the indigenous population of India including Hindus and Mohammedans. To handle this situation, the law gave powers to the Supreme Court located at Calcutta, Madras and Bombay to determine the type, actions and suits related to contractual nature in cases related to Hindus and Mohammed- NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education THE INDIAN CONTRACT ACT, 1872 9 ans. For cases between Hindus, Hindu Law was applied and in cases between Mohammedans, Mohammedan Law was applied. In cases between Hindus and Mohammedans, the law of the defendant was applied. These laws continued to be applicable till the Contract Act, 1872 was enacted. 5. Enactment of Contract Act, 1872: In 1872, the Contract Act was enacted. It became enforceable from 1 September 1872. It continues to exist till date with various amendments. 1.2.2 Promise and Contract – Two Sides of the Same Coin IM S ‘Promise’ and ‘contract’ are said to be the two sides of the same coin. Section 2(e) of the Contract Act, 1872 states agreement as every promise or a set of promises that forms a consideration for each other. It means that the presence of a promise is quintessential for the formation of an agreement that, if legally enforceable, becomes a contract. self assessment Questions 1. For making an agreement, there must be two or more parties and one of the parties must make a/an __________ to another party. a. Dependents N b. Minors M 2. In Manusmriti, who were considered incompetent to the contract. c. Persons devoid of limbs d. All of these Activity Using the Internet, study the Contract Act, 1872 thoroughly and analyse the rationale of the law. 1.3 Classification of Contracts Contracts are categorised on the basis of their initiation, enforceability, formation and performance. Let us discuss different categories of contracts in detail. 1.3.1 According to Initiation Based on initiation, contracts are classified as follows: Unilateral contract: It is an offer made by a party without any reciprocation from another. On the fulfilment of conditions NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law attached with the offer, the initiating party is irrevocably bound to honour its promise, such as in ‘offer of reward for missing person’. In India Unilateral contracts are not recognised. Bilateral contract: It involves a mutual exchange of promises between two or more parties, such as between buyers and sellers. 1.3.2 According to Enforceability/ Validity According to enforceability, contracts are classified as follows: Valid contract: A valid contract is one that fulfils essential conditions prescribed in Section 10 of the Contract Act, 1872 and is, thereby, legally enforceable. agreement [Section 2(g)]: An agreement that is not enforceable by law is said to be a void agreement. It may become void due to the absence of the following essential elements of a valid contract: S Void IM Lack of contractual capacity of any of the contracting parties in case of minority, unsoundness of mind or legal disqualification Agreement formed without any consideration in terms of Sec- tion 25 Unlawful consideration or unlawful object in terms of Sec- M tion 23 Agreement being per se void in terms of Sections 26-30 Voidable N 10 agreement [Section 2(i)]: An agreement that is enforceable by law at the option of one or both the parties but not at the option of the defaulting party is a voidable contract. A voidable contract arises if the consent of either of the parties has been obtained by coercion, undue influence, fraud, mistake or misrepresentation of the contract. In case of voidable contracts, the law gives the aggrieved (suffering) party an option to either (i) adopt or (ii) rescind the transaction. In case the transaction is adopted or the aggrieved party fails to rescind the contract within a reasonable time, the contract shall become a valid contract due to acquiescence or implied consent. However, the aggrieved party may get the voidable contract rescinded by filing a suit for declaration after producing evidence of his consent not being free. In addition to the rescission of the contract, the affected party may also receive compensation. Void contract [Section 2(j)]: A contract becomes void as soon as it ceases to be enforceable by law. Such contracts are initially valid, but, subsequently, become unenforceable by law and hence, void (Doctrine of Frustration) because of the following reasons: i. Supervening impossibility due to unforeseeable and uncontrollable events specified in Section 56, such as change of law, NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education THE INDIAN CONTRACT ACT, 1872 11 government intervention, outbreak of war/disease, epidemics, pandemics, death of a contracting party and natural events, etc. ii. A contingent contract dependent on the happening of an event shall become void when happening of that event becomes impossible (Section 32). Example: A contract signed by X to import goods from a foreign country may subsequently become void when war breaks out between the two countries. Unenforceable agreement due to procedural lacunae: It is a valid Non-registration S contract, but it cannot be enforced through a court of law because of some technical defect or noncompliance with the prescribed formalities as follows: of an agreement under the Registration Act, 1908 or inadequate stamping of a document as per the requirements of the relevant Stamp Act, 1899 not being in writing where contracts are required to be compulsorily in writing Contract not being duly notarised or attested M Contract IM Non-stamping 1.3.3 According to the Method of Formation According to the method of formation, contracts may be of the following types: Express Contract is made in words, whether spoken or written, such as a will, sale or purchase of property. An N An Implied Contract is inferred from the (a) conduct of parties or (b) circumstances of the case arisen during the formation of the contract. A Quasi-contract is one that is neither made expressly nor impliedly by conduct. It arises due to the legal prescription designed to prevent unjust enrichment at the expense of the other party, such as restoring found goods to its owner by the finder thereof. Example: A courier man delivers a birthday cake to a wrong addressee X. Now, X is under an obligation either to pay for the cake or return it to the courier man. 1.3.4 According to Performance According to performance, contracts may be of the following types: Executed contract: When the contracting parties have performed their obligations under the contract, the contract is said to be NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education NOTE Express contract = Express offer + Express acceptance Implied contract = Implied offer + Implied acceptance Business Law executed. Under the executed contract, the contract is fully discharged and the parties are free from their respective liabilities. Executory contract: When both the parties to the contract or either of the parties have/has to still perform their/its contractual obligation, the contract is said to be an executory contract. In case of an executory contract, it remains incomplete and the concerned party is still to perform its obligations and shall not be discharged of its obligations under the contract. Self Assessment Questions 3. __________ is a contract made in words, whether spoken or written, such as a will, sale or purchase of property. IM S 4. Outbreak of war is a type of supervening impossibility. (a) True (b) False Activity Using various sources, study the rationale of a bilateral contract and write down your findings. When an Agreement Becomes a Contract: Essential Conditions M 1.4 An agreement that is enforced by the law is a contract. Section 10 of the Contract Act, 1872 states that an agreement becomes a contract if it is made by the out of free consent of the parties who are competent to contract in exchange for a lawful consideration and a lawful object and are not expressly declared void. N 12 Various conditions essential for an agreement to become a contract are as follows: Free consent: It is essential that the agreement between parties must not be made by the following means: Coercion Undue influence Fraud Misrepresentation Mistake – bilateral or unilateral When the consent of a party to the agreement is not free, the contract is voidable. The party whose consent is not free, has the option to either accept the contract or reject the same. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education THE INDIAN CONTRACT ACT, 1872 13 Contractual capacity of the parties: As per Section 11 of the Con- tract Act, 1872, the parties into the contract must have a contractual capacity to fulfil the following requirements: The party has attained the age of majority. The party is not of unsound mind. The party is not disqualified to enter into a contract by any law to which the party is subject. Thus, if all the above factors are present, it is assumed that the party is capable to enter into the contract. consideration: Consideration means something in return for something (Quid Pro Quo). Consideration can be in the form of money or in the form of some benefit to the party. An agreement has a lawful consideration only if both the parties get something and give something. S Lawful IM Example: A agrees to sell his car to B for ` 4 lakhs. In this case, ` 4 lakhs is the consideration for A and A’s promise to sell the car is the consideration for B. object: An agreement is valid and becomes a contract if it has a lawful object. Lawful object means that the object or the purpose of entering into an agreement must not be fraudulent, illegal, immoral or opposed to any public policy. It must also not cause any injury or damage to any person or property of another. Agreements made for any unlawful object are considered to be illegal and void. M Lawful N Example: If A promises to pay ` 2 lakhs to B and B robs the house of D, then this agreement has an unlawful object which makes it illegal and void. Not expressly declared void: An agreement must not be of such a nature that has been expressly declared to be void as per Sections 24 to 30 of the Contract Act, 1872. The following agreements shall be treated as expressly declared as void: Agreements for unlawful object or unlawful consideration Agreements devoid of consideration Agreements in restraint of marriage Agreements in restraint of trade Agreements restraining legal proceedings Uncertain Wagering agreements agreements Example: A promises B to pay her ` 8 lakhs if B does not marry C. This agreement is expressly declared to be void because it is restraint of marriage. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education NOTE Consideration is also defined as the price paid by one party for the promise of the other. 14 Business Law self assessment Questions 5. When the consent of a party to the agreement is not free, the contract is __________. a. void b. voidable c. valid d. None of these 6. __________ means something in return for something. Activity S Make a list of at least three types of contracts that have been expressly declared as void under the Contract Act, 1872. 1.5 Offer/Proposal and Acceptance N M IM There must be a ‘lawful offer’ and ‘lawful acceptance’ for the formation of a valid contract. If an individual expresses his willingness to enter into a legally binding contract based on certain terms with some other party, it constitutes an offer to contract or a proposal. The person making the offer/proposal is called an offeror/promisor and the one to which the offer/proposal is made is called an offeree/promisee. Both the offer/proposal and acceptance must be made out of the free will of the offeror and offeree who intends to enter into a legally binding agreement. If the offeree agrees to all the conditions of an offer without placing any counter-condition(s), the communication of this approval of offer is called acceptance. 1.5.1 What Constitutes an Offer As per Section 2(a) of the Act, a person is said to make an offer when he signifies to the other person his willingness to do or to abstain from doing anything with a view to obtaining the assent of the other person. According to the definition, there are three important elements of an offer: i. There must be an expression of willingness from one person to another to do or not to do something. ii. The expression is made by one person to another. iii. The expression must be made in order to obtain the consent of the other person. NOTE Essentials of a Valid Offer When a person expresses his intention, this will not amount to offer. A valid offer consists of the following essential elements: An offeror must convey his willingness to do or not do something. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education THE INDIAN CONTRACT ACT, 1872 15 An offer must be made with an intention to obtain the acceptance of the other party/offeree. An offer must be made with an intention to create a binding legal relationship. The formation of legal relationships also means that the breach of such relationships will be followed by legal consequences. The terms of the offer must be defined clearly and must not be vague or ambiguous (unclear). An offer may be general or specific. A general offer means an offer S that is made to the world at large or to public in general. Any person from the general public can accept the general offer if he/she fulfils the terms of the general offer. A specific offer, on the other hand, is an offer that is made to a specific person or a group of persons. The specific offer must be accepted by the person or group to whom it has been made. NOTE The deemed acceptance of a contract refers to under what conditions a contract will be judged to be accepted by the party it is being offered to. An IM Example: A offers a reward of ` 500 to anyone whosoever finds his lost pet. This is a general offer. On the other hand, if A offers ` 500 to B to find his pet, it is a specific offer because only B can accept this offer and no one else. offer may be expressed or implied. offer may be positive or negative. An offer to do something is known as a positive offer. On the contrary, an offer not to do something is known as a negative offer. Both these types of offers are valid. An M An offer may be a definite offer or a standing offer. N Example: A definite offer means an offer that is made to supply specific goods or services. On the contrary, when an offer is made to supply goods periodically and in accordance with the requirements of the offeree, it is called a standing offer or an open offer. Every offer must be communicated. An offer should not contain any terms, the non-compliance of which may lead to acceptance (Deemed Acceptance). All terms and conditions including special terms and conditions should also be communicated. Two identical cross offers do not create a contract. An offer is not the same as an answer to a question. An offer is not the same as invitation to an offer. 1.5.2 Difference between Offer and Invitation to Offer An invitation to offer refers to an action to invite other parties to make an offer to form a contract and is made with an intention to invite NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education ? DID YOU KNOW Many a time, a standing offer is also called a continuous offer. Business Law others to enter into a contract. For instance, when you go to a shop, the goods are displayed there to invite proposals from the customers. When a customer selects goods that he wants to buy, the customer makes a proposal to buy those goods to the shopkeeper. Table 1.1 lists major differences between an offer and an invitation to offer: Table 1.1: Distinction between Offer and an Invitation to Offer S. No. Offer Invitation to Offer An offer implies the An invitation to offer does not imply willingness of a party to a final willingness, but only an invitacreate legal relationships. tion to the public to make an offer. 2. An offer is defined under Section 2(a) of the Contract Act, 1872. The Contract Act, 1872 does not define an invitation to offer. 3. An offer is essential for forming a contract. An invitation to offer is not essential for forming a contract. It becomes relevant only when it becomes an offer. 4. When an offer is accepted, it becomes an agreement. When an individual or a group from the public accepts the invitation to offer, it becomes an offer. 5. The main objective of making an offer is to enter into a contract. The main objective of making an invitation to offer is to receive offers from the public and negotiating the terms of contract before entering into it. M IM S 1. 1.5.3 Acceptance N 16 A contract comes into existence when a valid offer is validly accepted. There are two modes of acceptance: Express acceptance: It is an acceptance made orally or in writing, such as by telephone, the e-mail or by sending a letter. Implied acceptance: When acceptance is interpreted from the con- duct of parties or from circumstances of the case, it is considered as implied. However, acceptance cannot be implied from silence. Essentials of a Valid Acceptance The essentials of a valid acceptance are as follows: Acceptance may be express or implied. Example: A makes an offer to B to sell his old LED television for ` 40,000 over telephone and gets his acceptance by telephone. Here, an acceptance of B is express. On the other hand, eating food in a restaurant, withdrawing cash from ATM, etc., are examples of implied acceptance. Acceptance may be specific or general. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education THE INDIAN CONTRACT ACT, 1872 17 Acceptance must be absolute and unqualified. It means that the offeree must accept the offer with the same terms and conditions as offered without even the slightest of change in them. If the offeree suggests that he/she can accept the offer with certain changes, it is a case of counter offer and not offer. Acceptance must be conveyed only to the offeror or to any authorised persons. Acceptance must be conveyed only from the offeree. Communication of acceptance is extremely important because uncommunicated acceptance or only the mental acceptance is not sufficient to form a contract. Silence of the offeree cannot be regarded as acceptance of con- S tract. the offer contains any specific mode for acceptance of the offer, the acceptance must be made in the prescribed mode only. If acceptance is communicated using any other mode, the offeror may refuse to be bound by such acceptance. However, in cases where the mode of acceptance is not prescribed, the acceptance can be communicated in any reasonable mode which depends on a particular case. IM If the offer contains any specific timeline for acceptance of the offer, the acceptance must be made within the prescribed timeline only. If acceptance is communicated outside the timeline, it shall not be binding on the offeror. However, in cases where timeline for acceptance is not prescribed, the acceptance can be communicated within a reasonable time, which depends on a particular case. N M If Acceptance succeeds offer. Acceptance must be given by the person to whom the offer has been made. It 1.5.4 must be communicated to the offeror. Communication Of Offer And Acceptance According to Section 4 of the Contract Act, 1872, communication of offer is complete when it comes to the knowledge of the person to whom the offer is made. The person to whom the offer has been sent is deemed to have come to the knowledge of offer on the date and time when such an offer is received by him. The mode of communicating the offer may vary, such as letter, e-mail or telephone. Example: A wants to sell his building to B. A posts a letter containing the offer on 25th July, that reaches B on 30th July. In such a case, the communication of the offer is completed on 30th July on receipt of the letter by the intended party. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 18 Business Law The communication of a proposal is complete when it comes to the knowledge of the person to whom it is made. Example: Continuing the above example, assume that B posts his letter of acceptance from Mumbai on 1st August, that reaches A in Delhi on 4th August. The communication of acceptance is complete on 1st August as against the offeror irrespective of whether or not the letter of acceptance has reached the offeror. However, the communication of acceptance is complete as against B on 4th August, enabling him to revoke his acceptance if he wishes to before 4th August. Section 5 of the Contract Act, 1972 talks about the revocation of proposals and acceptance. The communication of a revocation of an offer is complete as against the offeror when the message containing the details of revocation is sent to the intended person and when the message sent is put in course of transmission and is out of the power of the offeror to recall. IM Study Hint S Under the law of contract, the contract is considered to have been made on 1st August in Mumbai in the above example. In the case of any dispute between parties relating to the contract, the suit will be filed in Mumbai where the contract has been legally concluded. Self Assessment Questions M 7. The person making an offer/proposal is called offeror/ promisor and the one to which the offer/proposal is made is called __________. N 8. A standing offer means an offer that is made to supply the specific goods or services. (a) True (b) False 9. The person to whom the offer has been sent is deemed to have come to the knowledge of offer on the date and time when such offer is received by him. (a) True (b) False 10. The communication of acceptance is complete as against the offeror when the acceptance is put in a __________. Activity Using the Internet, study more on Section 4 of the Contract Act, 1872. Standard Form OF Contract/ 1.6 BoilerPlate Contract/Adhesion Contract A standard form of contract, also known as an adhesion contract or a boilerplate contract, refers to a contract drafted by one party (generally with stronger bargaining power) and signed by another party (usually with weaker bargaining power, for example, a consumer in NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education THE INDIAN CONTRACT ACT, 1872 19 need of goods or services). In such contracts, one party can exploit the weakness of the other party by imposing terms and conditions that ensure no liability falls on the first party. In such contracts, the other party often falls prey to abuse and various instances have been observed when the courts have come to the rescue of such parties, but with difficulty. These contracts are made without any negotiation. is no pre-knowledge of full terms of contract for lack of access to the relevant document. Due IM There S Customers in such contracts are not allowed to have the terms of the contract customised or modified. They are given a standard preprinted document containing various terms and conditions which they simply have to sign. Such contract documents are given on the basis of ‘take it or leave it’. Such contracts usually contain unacceptable clauses that contain written express terms developed in advance. The terms are fixed by conducting negotiations and brainstorming by experts other than the contracting parties. Some of the important features of standard form contracts are as follows: to an unequal bargaining position, there may arise an unfair contract. signing of the contract, parties are bound by its terms. There M On is a possibility of exploitation of the weaker party because traditional law of contracts regards contracts as private legislation (a separate law unto itself) and hence, binding. N There are various instances where organisations and individuals have to accept the standard form contracts because the terms and conditions are fixed by the party that is in the stronger position and enjoys better bargaining power. The following are the examples of standard form contracts: Insurance policies: Insurance companies offer multiple types of policies and each policy comes by a unique name and its own set of standardised terms and conditions. The terms and conditions are decided by the insurance company (insurer). In such contracts, there is a high possibility of customers being exploited. Such contracts usually contain unacceptable clauses. Loans: Banks and other financial institutions offer various types of loans. The terms and conditions of each type of loan are determined and fixed by the bank or the financial institution. The loan terms remain unchanged for each person who is taking the loan. Others: Parking tickets, theatre tickets, package receipts, debit card purchase slips, bills of lading, sale contracts, etc., are also standard form contracts. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Study Hint Bargaining power refers to the ability of a firm’s customers to influence the prices of the products and services it sells and suppliers to set the prices the firm pays for materials and services that it buys. NOTE Standard form of contracts are non-negotiated contracts. 20 Business Law self assessment Questions 11. In __________ contracts, the customers are not allowed to have the terms of the contract customised or modified. 12. Adhesion contracts are given on the basis of ‘take it or leave it’. (a) True (b) False Activity Find some examples of standard form contracts. Privity of contract refers to a type of relationship between the parties to a contract according to which the parties can sue each other. However, no third party can sue any of the parties to contract. Such third parties are also restrained from seeking enforcement of a contract. In simple words, contracts cannot confer rights nor can they impose any obligations arising out of contracts on any party other than the parties to a contract. N When at the desire of the promisor, the promisee or any other person has done or abstained from doing or does or abstains from doing or promises to do or to abstain from doing something, then such an act of abstinence or promise is called a consideration for the promise. IM According to Section 2(d), consideration means the following: Consideration is one of the essential requisites of a valid contract. An agreement made without consideration is void. Consideration denotes the price paid to purchase the promise of the other party. The term is always used in the sense of ‘quid pro quo’, i.e., something in return. In a contract, both the parties will get as well as give something to another, which is called consideration in legal sense. It may also consist of a ‘loss to one or benefit to another’ or benefit to both. M Know More Consideration and Privity of Contract S 1.7 1.7.1 Essentials of a Valid Consideration The essentials of a valid consideration are as follows: It must express the desire of the promisor that must not be done gratuitously. It may move from the promisee or any other person. It may be past, present or future. It may comprise doing or abstaining from doing something. It need not be adequate although inadequacy is a factor in proving the absence of free consent. It must be of real value and not illusory. It cannot consist of something which the promisor is already bound to do. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education THE INDIAN CONTRACT ACT, 1872 21 1.7.2 Exceptions to the Rule of No Consideration, No Contract (Section 25) According to Section 25, an agreement without consideration is void. Without any consideration, an agreement is no more than a bare agreement (nudum pactum), no more than a gift. Some of the important exceptions to the Rule of ‘No Consideration, No Contract’ are as follows: Written and registered agreement made out of natural love and affection between parties standing in near relationship to one another [Section 25 (1)] to compensate a person for services rendered voluntarily [Section 25(2)] S Promise Written and registered promise by the debtor to pay a time-barred debt [Section 25 (3)] gifts are binding, though there is no consideration (explanation to Section 25) No IM Completed consideration is required to create an agency (Section 185) M 1.7.3 Doctrine of Privity of Contract (Rule of a Stranger to a Contract) N A contract establishes the privity of contract between the contracting parties. In other words, a contract does not create any legal obligations or right in the favour of third party. The third party is a ‘stranger to contract’. A third party is neither liable nor vested with any legal rights under a contract. It is known as the rule of ‘privity of contract’. Example: If a petitioner D supplied tyres to X on the condition that X should not sell any tyre below the price list issued by D. X supplied the tyre to S who sold it at a price below the price list. D filed a suit against S to forbid him from selling the tyres below the specified rate. D cannot take an action against S as he is a stranger to contract between X and S. 1.7.4 Exceptions to the Rule of Privity of Contract The rule of privity of contract does not apply in the following cases: Beneficiary of a trust can claim benefits or rights conferred on him in terms of the trust deed. Beneficiary of a charge which has been created on specific immov- able property for his benefit can file suit to enforce the charge. When a contract is made under a family settlement or partition of the joint property or any other family arrangement in order to benefit a stranger. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law In case contracts are made by the agent, the principal has the right to enforce those contracts. In case an acknowledgement of receipt of money has been made on behalf of another (Estoppel), the rightful claim from the party which had made the acknowledgement. self assessment Questions 13. __________ refers to a type of relationship between the parties to a contract according to which the parties can sue each other. S 14. Which of the following is not an exception to the rule of ‘No Consideration, No Contract’? IM a. Written and registered agreement made out of natural love and affection between parties standing in near relationship to one another b. Written and registered promise by the debtor to pay a time-barred debt c. Promise to compensate a person for services rendered voluntarily M d. Written and registered promise by the debtor to pay a statute-barred debt Activity N 22 Using the Internet, read the rule of ‘No Consideration, No Contract’ thoroughly and find out the exceptions to the ‘No Consideration No Contract’ Rule. 1.8 Free Consent As studied earlier, consent is said to be free when an agreement is made with the approval of both the parties and is free from any kind of force or pressure. Consent is said to be free when it is not caused by: Coercion Undue Fraud (Section 15) Influence (Section 16) (Section 17) Misrepresentation Mistake (Section (18) (Sections 20, 21 and 22) NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education THE INDIAN CONTRACT ACT, 1872 23 1.8.1 Consent vs. Free Consent The usual meaning of the word ‘consent’ is giving an assent or approval to an offer. According to the Section 13 of the Contract Act, 1872 two or more persons are said to consent when they agree upon the same thing in the same sense. Example: A wants to sell his car to B at a certain price, but does not specify which car as A has numerous cars. On the other hand, B also wants to purchase A’s car which A may not be intending to sell. In this case, there is no consent as both the parties are not agreeing upon the same thing in the same sense. S Free consent of contracting parties is essential for a valid contract. The consent of the parties is said to be free if it has not been caused by any of the vitiating factors which include coercion, undue influence, fraud, or misrepresentation or mistake. IM There is a minute difference between consent and free consent. The consent of an individual can be obtained by illegal means, such as use of force or threat. However, free consent is the consent given by an individual without using any force or pressure. 1.8.2 Coercion Know More Section 15 of the Contract Act, 1872 states coercion as committing or threatening to commit, any act forbidden by the Indian Penal Code (45 of 1860) or the unlawful detaining, or threatening to detain, any property, to the prejudice of any person whatever, with the intention of causing any person to enter into an agreement. M Coercion means making someone do something or prohibiting someone by using force or threat. In other words, coercion refers to the practice of compelling another party to act in an involuntary manner by use of threat or force. N Example: B executing a promissory note in A’s favour on the basis of a threat by the latter that if B does not comply with his order, he would kill his daughter, is a case of the use of coercion. 1.8.3 Undue Influence To put simply, a contract is said to be induced by undue influence when a party is in a position to dominate the other party and uses its position to take an undue advantage over the other party. Circumstances in which a party is considered to be in a dominant position are: A party holding real or apparent authority over the other party, such as master and servant or principal and agent When a party stands in a fiduciary position, such as a doctor and patient or guru and disciple When a party contracts with a person whose mental condition has been temporarily or permanently debilitated because of old age, prolonged sickness, or physical or mental distress NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Know More Section 16 of the Contract Act, 1872 states that a contract is said to be induced by ‘undue influence’ where the relations subsisting between the parties are such that one of the parties is in a position to dominate the will of the other and uses that position to obtain an unfair advantage over the other. 24 Business Law Study Hint Section 17 of the Contract Act, 1872 states fraud as an act by a party with an intention to deceive the other party in any of the following conditions: yyFalse representation of facts done purposely or recklessly yyConcealment of facts by anyone who has knowledge or belief of the facts yyAny other act to deceive 1.8.4 Fraud Fraud refers to an intentional misrepresentation of material existing facts made by one person to another with knowledge of its falsity and for the purpose of inducing the other person to enter into a contract. CASE LAW Rajagopala Iyer vs. South India Rubber Works (1942), MLJ 228 Facts: The prospectus of a company showed certain persons as its directors. The statement was true; however, before allotment, some of the named directors retired. This fact was not communicated to the applicants for shares. It was held to be a fraud consisting of concealment; therefore, the applicants could seek refund of their money. IM yyAny act or omission which the law has specifically declared as fraudulent Example: A poor Hindu widow agreed to pay the lender 100 percent rate of interest on the money which she had borrowed to establish her right to maintenance. It was held that the agreement has been induced by undue influence as the lender has abused his dominant position. S yyAny promise made without an intention to perform it There is a presumption of law against the dominant party that he/she must have abused his/her dominant position in making the contract in the aforementioned cases. Misrepresentation M 1.8.5 Section 18 of the Contract Act, 1872 describes misrepresentation to involve the following: N Making unwarranted statements which are not factually true, though one believes them to be true, e.g., quoting production figures of a factory from guess work Committing a breach of duty without the intent to deceive, but obtaining an advantage by conveying wrong information unintentionally Causing another party to make a mistake which causes him loss which means inducing a mistake about the subject matter. Any contract that is made by misrepresentation may either be rescinded or the affected party may accept the contract along with the restitution of his loss. 1.8.6 Mistake Mistake is an innocent or erroneous belief in a certain state of things. A mistake may either be of law or of facts. A mistake of law may relate to mistake of either the Indian law or a foreign law during the formation of the contract. In the case of mistake of the Indian law, the rule is that the ignorance of law is not an excuse. However, in the case of mistake of foreign law, it may be taken as a mistake of fact. In other words, parties may have to face consequences of the fallout due to ignoring Indian law. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education THE INDIAN CONTRACT ACT, 1872 25 Example: If a party commits an error of applying service tax for the contract instead of Goods and Service Tax (GST), the party shall still be liable for non-compliance under GST. As regard to the mistake of fact, it may be either a bilateral mistake or a unilateral mistake. According to Section 20 of the Contract Act, 1872, a bilateral mistake about a matter essential to the agreement will lead to making the agreement void if both the parties are under a mistake and the mistake relates to an important and material fact. CASE LAW Galloway vs. Galloway (1914) S A bilateral mistake may relate to the existence of the subject matter of a contract; identity of the subject matter; quality, quantity, or price of the subject matter; title to the subject matter or possibility of performance. IM Facts: A man and a woman executed a separation deed believing themselves to be lawfully married to each other. Later, it was discovered that they were under a bilateral mistake as to the legality of their marriage as the marriage was not duly registered leading to the annulment of the separation deed. M A unilateral mistake is one in which only one of the parties is under mistake. CASE LAW Ayekam Angahal Singh vs. Union of India (1970) N Facts: There was an auction for sales of fisheries rights on an annual contract basis and the lease for a period of three years. Mr. Singh was the highest bidder but he mistook the bid to be for all the three years of lease, whereas the bid price was on an annual basis. However, Mr. Singh could not get any relief from the court since it was a case of unilateral mistake. self assessment Questions 15. Free consent of contracting parties is essential for a valid contract. (a) True (b) False 16. A party holding real or apparent authority over the other party is considered to be in a __________ position. Activity Mrs. X has been coerced by her husband to enter into a property contract. Now, she wants to cancel the contract. Can she do so? What are the remedial provisions available with Mrs. X against her husband? NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education NOTE According to Section 22 of the Contract Act, 1872, a contract does not become void because of any unilateral mistake. Unless the unilateral mistake is related to a fundamental fact, the contract validity is not affected. 26 Business Law 1.9 Capacity to Contract According to Section 11 of the Contract Act, 1872, every person is competent to enter into a contract if: He/she is of the age of majority according to the law to which he/ she is subject; He/she is of a sound mind; and He/she is not legally disqualified from contracting by any law to which he is subject. It means that the contractual capacity of individuals is determined in accordance with their age, soundness of mind and legal qualifications. As per the Indian Majority Act, 1875, in computing the age of any person, the day on which he was born is to be included as a whole day and he shall be deemed to have attained majority at the beginning of the eighteenth anniversary of that day. The analysis of Section 11 reveals that the following persons are incompetent to contract: Minors (till they are being classified as minors under the law they are subject) Persons of unsound mind M NOTE IM S 1.9.1 Disqualifications for Capacity to Contract – Minors, Persons of Unsound Mind and Disqualified Persons Persons disqualified by law to which they are subject Let us study about the persons who are incompetent to contract: N Minors: According to the Indian Majority Act, 1875, a person below the age of 18 years is considered as a minor. However, the age of majority is extended to 21 years where the guardian of a person or his property has been appointed by a court or the minor has been put under the guardianship of the court of wards. Legal Position of Agreements by a Minor The following points explain the legal position of agreements by a minor: An agreement with a minor is void ab initio (Mohiri Bibee vs. Dharmodas Ghose) so that a minor is not under any legal obligation. A minor can be a promisee or a beneficiary so that he can enforce the agreement. There can be no ratification of the agreement made with a minor during or after he attains majority. There can be no specific performance of a minor’s agreement. There can be no estoppel against a minor as per Section 115 of the Evidence Act, 1872. It means that a minor cannot be es- NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education THE INDIAN CONTRACT ACT, 1872 27 topped from setting up the plea or a minors statements cannot be used as final and binding covenants. The Contract Act, 1872 allows that a principal may appoint a minor as an agent and he/she can bind the principal by his acts but the agent cannot be held personally liable for the breach of contract. A minor can be admitted to the benefits of partnership, though he cannot become a partner in the partnership firm. of unsound mind: The soundness of mind of a person for the purpose of making a contract is to be adjudged at the time when the contract is being made. Unsoundness of mind may be consistent or occasional. A person cannot make a contract when he is not of a sound mind even if he is generally of sound mind. On the other hand, a person who is under usual circumstances of sound mind, but on certain occasions, the person is of unsound mind, then he cannot make the contract when he is of unsound mind. IM S Persons Example: An individual is of unsound mind when he is under the influence of liquor or heavy medication. Therefore, he can make a contract only after the influence of liquor or medication has veered off. Contracting during the unsoundness of the mind of a party makes the contract void. disqualified from contracting: The following persons have been declared incompetent from making a contract: enemies: All the persons who are not Indian citizens are called aliens. The aliens may be enemies or friends depending upon their country’s relations with India. Citizens of a foreign state whose country is at war with India or does not have diplomatic relations with India are called alien enemies. Foreign N Alien M Persons sovereigns and ambassadors: These persons can enter into contracts and enforce those contracts in courts, but they cannot be sued in any court without the sanction of the Central Government unless they choose to submit themselves to the jurisdiction of the court. This immunity is enjoyed by them under the International law. Convicts undergoing imprisonment: A convict is one who is found guilty by a court and is undergoing sentence of imprisonment. During the period of his imprisonment, he is incompetent to enter into contract. However, after the expiration of the period of sentence or when the convict is on parole, he/she can enter into a contract and may also sue on a contract. Company under Companies Act, 2013 or statutory corporation under the Special Act of Parliament (entering into contract outside its objects or purpose): A company/corporation is an artificial person created by the law. The contractual capacity of a company NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education NOTE According to Section 12, a person is said to be of sound mind if, at the time of making the agreement, he or she is (a) capable of understanding the terms and conditions of the contract; and (b) capable of forming a rational judgement of the effect of the contract on his interests. Business Law is determined by the objects clause of the Memorandum of Association (MOA) and Articles of Association (AOA). It cannot enter into the contract outside the powers conferred upon it by the objects clause since it will be ultra vires. In case of statutory companies, its capacity to contract depends on the statute through which it was created. Insolvents: When a person’s debts exceed his assets, he is adjudged insolvent. Such a person cannot enter into contracts relating to his property. Such persons also cannot sue or be sued. Self Assessment Questions a. Age S 17. Which of the following conditions do not affect the capacity of a person to contract? b. Soundness of mind c. Presence of all limbs d. Qualification as per law IM 18. A person cannot make a contract when he is not of a sound mind if he is generally of __________. Activity M Research on the Internet and find out the essentials of a valid contract under the Contract Act, 1872. 1.10 N 28 Void, Valid and Voidable Agreements On the basis of enforceability or validity, agreements can be classified as being valid, void or voidable. When a contract is in dispute, the terms ‘voidable’ and ‘void’ may seem similar but these have different meaning. These terms as defined in the Contract Act, 1872 are explained as follows: Valid agreement: When an agreement has all the five essential ele- ments (mentioned under Section 1.2 of this chapter), it is termed as a valid agreement. Void agreement: According to Section 2(g) of the Contract Act, 1872, an agreement that is not enforceable by law is called void. The Contract Act, defines certain types of agreements as void. These are as follows: Agreements made by incompetent parties (Section 11) Agreements where the consideration and/or the objectives are unlawful either in whole or in part. (Section 24) Agreements without consideration (Section 25) NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education THE INDIAN CONTRACT ACT, 1872 29 Agreements that have expressly been declared void (Sections 26-30, 36 and 56): 99 Agreements in restraint of marriage (Section 26) 99 Agreements in restraint of trade (Section 27) 99 Agreements in restraint of legal proceedings (Section 28) 99 Uncertain 99 Wagering Agreements (Section 29) Agreements (Section 30) 99 Agreements that are contingent on happening of specified event within fixed time (Contingent Contracts) (Section 36) 99 Agreement to do impossible acts (Doctrine of Frustration) S (Section 56) Voidable agreement: According to Section 2(i) of the Contract Act, IM 1872, an agreement which is enforceable by law at the option of one or more of the parties thereto, but not at the option of the other or others, is a voidable contract. 1.10.1 Void Agreements with Unlawful/Illegal Consideration or Object M Unlawful agreements are those in which the consideration and/or object is/are unlawful. Object or consideration is considered unlawful under Section 23 if it is: Illegal by law (bigamy among Hindus) N Forbidden Defeating the provisions of any law like furnishing bail after taking deposit from the defendant Fraudulent Involving/implying injury to the person or property of another Immoral Opposed to public policy It is relevant to discuss the meaning of public policy and the agreements that are opposed to the public policy. There is no precise definition of ‘public policy’ as its meaning keeps on changing with the exigencies of time. However, over a period of time, various matters have been held to fall within the ambit of public policy, such as: Trading with enemy Stifling of prosecution, i.e., absolving offenders of criminal liability or withdrawing a criminal case after receiving compensation Maintenance (filing frivolous litigation) and Champerty (rendering assistance in pursuing legal remedy and sharing its benefits) NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law Interference Trafficking Marriage with the course of justice in public offices brokerage agreements Agreements restricting personal liberty Agreements in restraint of parental rights Agreements interfering with marital rights Agreements creating interest opposed to duty Agreements for varying the period of limitation 1.10.2 Expressly Declared Void Agreements in Restraint of Marriage (Section 26): Any agreement that is made in restraint of marriage of any individual or forcing/inducing an individual to enter into marriage. IM Agreements S Sections 26-30, 36 and 56 of the Contract Act, 1872 describe various types of agreements that have been expressly declared as void. These are as follows: in Restraint of Trade (Section 27): As per Article 19 (1)(g), every person in India has a right to engage in any lawful trade, business, occupation, profession or employment of any kind. However, there are certain exceptions to such agreements restraining trade which means that apart from these exceptions, all other agreements in restraint of trade are void. The exceptions are as follows: M Agreements N 30 Sale of goodwill Non-compete 99 with newly admitted or retiring partner(s) 99 between lution 99 with agreements under the Partnership Act, 1930: existing partners upon or in anticipation of disso- the buyer of a firm’s goodwill Other exceptions to Section 27 subject to reasonable restrictions include: 99 Service contracts prohibiting double employment 99 Employee bonds where an employee has to deposit security upfront or submit a bond to serve the company for a specified period in consideration of training; or bond with guarantee from a third party 99 Agreements relating to non-disclosure, no poaching, non-solicitation, confidentiality, etc. Agreements in Restraint of Legal Proceedings (Section 28): Agreements in which parties agree not to resort to courts for a NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education THE INDIAN CONTRACT ACT, 1872 31 legal remedy in the case of a dispute are called agreements in restraint of legal proceedings. All such agreements are void. There is an exception to this section. When two parties to an agreement mutually agree that in the case of any disputes that arise between them with respect to the agreement, such dispute will be referred to arbitration rather than courts. Such an agreement is valid. Uncertain Agreements (Section 29): Agreements with an uncertain meaning or agreements, the meaning of which cannot be made certain, are void. CASE LAW Guthina vs. Lynn (1831) S Facts: A horse was bought for a certain price with a promise to pay some additional money if the horse proved lucky. The agreement was held to be void for the want of certainty. Agreements (Section 30): In general, a wager is ‘an agreement by a party to pay money or money’s worth to another on the happening of some uncertain event in consideration of other person’s promise to pay on the non-happening of the event’. The Contract Act, 1872 does not define a wagering agreement, but states that agreements by the way of wager are void. IM Wagering There It M The following are the essential ingredients of a wager: must be two persons. must consist of a promise to pay money or money’s worth. The payment must be conditional on the happening or non-hap Event N pening of an event. must be uncertain. Parties must have equal chance of winning or losing. Neither party has any control on the event, nor any other inter- est except winning. 1.10.3 Effect of Void, Valid and Voidable Agreements A valid agreement has potential legal effects, whereas a void agreement has no legal effects. A voidable agreement can have two types of effects, either it can be rescinded or be adopted. If a voidable agreement is avoided by the party at whose option the agreement becomes void, then the other party need not perform the agreement. Also, if the party that rescinds the contract has received any benefit from the other party, it must restore the same. A valid contract is recognised under the law while a void agreement has no recognition under law. The recognition of a voidable agreement is dependent on whether the affected party adopts or rescinds the agreement. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education NOTE Adoption of the agreement would make the agreement a valid contract, while rescission would make it void. 32 Business Law Self Assessment Questions 19. Which of the following agreements have not been expressly declared as void? a. Agreements in restraint of marriage b. Agreements in restraint of trade c. Agreements whose meaning is certain d. Agreements in restraint of legal proceedings Activity S 20. Object or consideration is considered unlawful if it is illegal. (a) True (b) False IM Differentiate between void and voidable agreements. 1.11 Quasi-Contracts N M ? DID YOU KNOW Quasi-contracts are also called contracts implied in law. Usually, contracts are made between two or more parties wherein a promisor voluntarily undertakes to do or not to do something for the promisee. However, at times, the law imposes certain restrictions upon one party for the benefit of the other party even in the absence of a contract. In such cases, the law assumes the presence of a contract when, in reality, no agreement (either express or implied) exists between the parties. Such a contract is called a quasi-contract. Obligations are imposed by law upon a person to prevent unjust enrichment at the expense of another person. Quasi-contracts are not contracts in a pure sense. There are various types of quasi-contracts as specified in Sections 68-72, which are explained as follows: Supply of necessaries to incompetent persons (Section 68): When a person supplies any necessaries to a person who is incapable of entering into a contract or to any incompetent person who requires support, then such a person is entitled to be reimbursed from the property of the incapable person. Example: A’s minor children are looked after by B due to A’s illness, B is entitled to be reimbursed for the expenses made by him towards the minor children, though there is no agreement. Payment by an interested person (Section 69): When a person is interested in making the payment on behalf of a person who was bound by the law to pay, the person who has made the payment is entitled to be reimbursed from the person who has the original responsibility to make the payment. For example, a man paying the entire sum of property tax including the tax amount that was NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education THE INDIAN CONTRACT ACT, 1872 33 payable by his brother in order to save his property from being attached for the non-payment of government dues. Obligation of a person enjoying a benefit of a non-gratuitous act (Section 70): When a person does anything or delivers anything non-gratuitously for another person who enjoys the benefits of such an act, the person who benefitted is bound to compensate the person who has done that act. Responsibility of the finder of goods (Section 71): When any person finds things belonging to another and takes goods under his custody, then he must fulfil the responsibility of a bailee. In other words, the finder of goods is put in the position of a bailee and has to discharge the following obligations: take reasonable care of the goods found Not To to make personal use of those goods make efforts to trace the owner restore the goods to its original owner if the original owner is found IM To S To paid or goods delivered by mistake or under coercion (Section 72): It is the legal liability of a person to return the goods or refund (repay or return) the money that has been delivered to him by mistake or under coercion. M Money N Example: A and B have taken a loan of ` 2,000 from C. A returns the whole amount to C on his and B’s behalf. B was not aware of the payment made by A and also returned ` 1,000 to C. In this case, C is bound to pay back ` 1,000 to B. Table 1.2 differentiates between a contract and a quasi-contract: Table 1.2: Differences Between Contract and Quasi-Contract S. No. Point of Distinction Contract Quasi-contract 1. Purpose A contract results from the will of both the parties expressed with a view to create an obligation. A quasi-contract is a contract that resembles the creation of a contract but in reality no contract is created in express or implied terms. Such contracts have obligations similar to those created by a contract. 2. Agreement A contract is Quasi-contracts are not formed formed on the basis on the basis of any agreement. of an express or implied agreement. 3. Essential elements A contract has certain essential elements. Essentials for the formation of a contract are not applicable. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law S. No. 4. Point of Distinction Nature Contract It is a full-fledged contract and is binding. Quasi-contract A quasi-contract resembles a contract. It is not a full-fledged contract but still is a binding contract and resembles a contract and all obligations of contract shall apply. Self Assessment Questions 21. A contract results from the will of both the parties expressed with a view to creating an obligation, whereas a _____________ is an obligation resembling to that created by a contract. IM S 22. When a supplier supplies any necessaries to a person who is incapable of entering into a contract or to any incompetent person who requires support, then such a person is entitled to be reimbursed from the property of the incapable person. (a) True (b) False Activity M From the Internet, find some examples of quasi-contracts. 1.12 Discharge of Contracts Discharge of a contract in general means the fulfilment, termination or discontinuation of the contractual relationship between the parties. A contract is discharged when the rights and obligations of both the parties to a contract come to an end. In other words, when the parties to a contract are released or have completed their respective obligations under the contract, the contract is discharged. It puts an end to the contract. N 34 1.12.1 Discharge by Performance Performance is the usual and preferred mode of discharge of a contract. A contract is discharged by performance when both the parties to a contract have fulfilled their respective responsibilities under the contract within the prescribed time. The discharge must be in a manner as prescribed in terms of the contract. 1.12.2 Discharge by Mutual Agreement Just like contracts can be made by a mutual agreement between two parties, they can also be discharged through mutual agreements. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education THE INDIAN CONTRACT ACT, 1872 35 The nature of mutual agreement may be of the following types: Novation: It means that a new contract is substituted in place of an existing contract between the same or different parties. Rescission: It means the cancellation of contract by one or both parties to the contract. Alteration: It means changing one or more terms of the contract by mutual consent of the parties. Due to alteration, the previous contract stands discharged and new terms become effective. Remission: It means that the promisee accepts a lesser performance than what was actually promised. Remission does not require any consideration. It means that the promisee intentionally relinquishes its contractual rights by exempting the promisor from carrying out its duties as per the contract. S Waiver: IM 1.12.3 Discharge by Impossibility of Performance (Force Majeure Clause) A contract is said to be impossible to discharge when it cannot be performed due to circumstances beyond the control of the parties to the contract. Impossibility may be of two types: M Initial impossibility: An impossibility that exists at the time of the N formation of the contract is known as initial impossibility. Such impossibility may or may not be known to both the parties. Such contracts are void. However, if the impossibility is known only to one of the parties, the contract is voidable at the option of the other party. Supervening impossibility: A supervening impossibility refers to an impossibility which did not exist at the time of creating the contract but it arose subsequently after the contract was made. Subsequent impossibility renders a contract impossible or illegal to perform. Such contracts are void. There are certain cases when a contract is discharged on the grounds of supervening impossibility as follows: Destruction of the subject matter of contract Declaration of war Death or personal incapacity Non-occurrence or non-existence of particular state of things necessary for performance Change of law Epidemic or Pandemic Riots Lockouts or strikes NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law However, there are certain other cases where the contract suffers from supervening impossibility. Such contracts cannot be said to be discharged and even with such impossibility parties are expected to perform the contract and avoidance of obligations would lead to breach of contract. The rationale behind this is that the purpose of frustration is to put an end to the contract. This doctrine is not to be lightly invoked. Difficulty of performance: Difficulty of performance arises when the performance of the contract becomes more difficult due to increased expenses or decreased profits than what was estimated at the time of the formation of contracts. Commercial impossibility: It has become commercially non-profitable or expected profits cannot be realised under the contract. Impossibility due to default of a third party: If the contract could impossibility: A contract cannot be simply considered as discharged because of impossibility of one of the several objects of a contract. Then the obligations that cannot be performed are severed to the extent they can be severed from the contract and the rest of the contract is expected to be performed. IM Partial S not be discharged due to the default of a third party on whose promise the performance of contract was based, it cannot be considered as discharged. Discharge by Lapse of Time M 1.12.4 If a contract is expected to perform within a specified time and where time is the essence of the contract, then such a contract would stand discharged and the parties failing to perform would be held liable for breaching (breaking) the contract. If no time is mentioned in the contract, an unreasonable or inordinate delay would be treated as discharge of the contract. N 36 1.12.5 Discharge by Operation of Law A contract is discharged due to operation of law in the following cases: Death of either of the parties Insolvency of either of the parties If the contract is a personal contract where the individual has to perform and such individual turns to be of unsound mind 1.12.6 Discharge by Breach of Contract The usual meaning of breach of contract is the refusal to perform a contract. When any party to a contract refuses or fails to perform the contract as per the specified time and place, it is a case of breach of contract. In this case, it is said that the contract is discharged by the NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education THE INDIAN CONTRACT ACT, 1872 37 breach of contract. If one party refuses to perform, it is considered that the other party has discharged its obligations as per the contract. In case of breach of contract, the aggrieved party can proceed legally against the defaulting party. The breach of contract may be of two types: anticipatory breach or actual breach. ANTICIPATORY BREACH If a party declares its intention of not performing the contract before its performance is due, it is called anticipatory breach. S Example: If A appoints a teacher to give 15 lectures on a subject and the teacher, without a sufficient reason, does not turn up after taking 9 lectures and A has not come to know that he cannot take the next 5 lectures due to conflicting appointment. Then A if informs the class in advance of such breach and this is anticipatory breach the remaining 6 lectures. IM ACTUAL BREACH If any party to a contract refuses to perform or fails to perform his/ her obligations on the due date of performance or during the course of performance, it is considered to be an actual breach of contract. A contract can be breached by any of the parties to a contract. N M Example: In case of a contract for sale, a buyer is said to have breached the contract if he refuses to accept the delivery which has been made as per the terms of contract or if he fails to make the payment or delays the payment after the delivery has been made. On the other hand, the contract can be considered as breached by the seller if he fails to deliver according to the terms of the contract. What Constitutes Breach? Whenever one or more parties to a contract reach out to the legal system and claims/claim that the contract has been breached, the courts need to decide whether or not the case concerned is indeed a case of breach of contract. Breach of contract means the failure to perform the promise related to the entire contract or of some clauses of the contract. To decide if a claim of breach is indeed true, the courts need to answer certain questions as follows: Did a contract exist in the first place? Is such a contract a valid contract? Did a valid contract exist? What were the duties of each party? Was the contract modified at any point of time? Did the breach take place as claimed? What was the nature of breach – material breach or non-material breach? NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law Does the defaulting party have any legal defence against the enforcement of the contract? What damages were caused by the breach? Difference between Breach and Material Breach S There are two major types of breach based on materiality, namely material breach and non-material breach. A material breach of contract means a major or complete failure to perform the obligations of a contract, that also severely affects the rights of the parties. On the contrary, a failure to complete some minor obligation as per the contract is called non-material breach. Such breaches could not lead to discharge of the contract but the contract shall continue upon payment of damages. IM 1.12.7 Appropriation of Payments (Clayton’s Rule of Appropriation) Appropriation of a payment means the application of payment to some debt. If the performance consists of payment of money and there are several debts to be paid to a creditor in part payments, such payment shall be appropriated as per Sections 59-61 of the Contract Act, 1872 as follows: M Application of payment where debt to be discharged is indicated N 38 by the debtor (Section 59): If a debtor who owes various debts to a creditor makes a payment and intimates the creditor expressly that the payment must be applied to discharge a particular debt, the payment must be applied accordingly (if accepted). This is called appropriation as per the will of a debtor. Application of payment where debt to be discharged is not indicated by the debtor (Section 60): If a debtor who owes various debts to a creditor makes a payment but fails to intimate against which debt the payment has been made by the debtor, the creditor can apply the payment according to his will to any of the lawful debts. This is called appropriation as per the will of creditor. Application of payment where neither party indicates appropri- ation (Section 61): If neither the debtor nor the creditor makes any appropriation, the payment should be applied in a chronological order, which means that the discharge of debts will be done according to time (First In First Out). The amount to the earlier debt will be first appropriated in order of time. self assessment Questions 23. __________ performance of a contract occurs when both the parties fulfil their obligations arising out of the contract as per the terms of the contract. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education THE INDIAN CONTRACT ACT, 1872 39 24. In which of the following cases will the contract not be discharged? a. Declaration of war b. Death c. Difficulty of performance d. Change of law Activity S Identify a contract that includes a specified date of performance on part of one of the parties to the contract. Describe in brief the anticipatory breach of contract and the actual breach of contract in the context of this contract. IM 1.13 Remedies for Breach of Contract Whenever there is a breach of contract, the aggrieved party is relieved from performing his/her obligations under the contract and can pursue any of the following courses of action or remedies: Rescission of the contract for damages Suit for specific performance Suit for injunction M Suit N You have already studied that if one party refuses to perform his/her duties as per the contract, the other party can rescind the contract and refuse to perform his/her obligations. 1.13.1 Damages Section 73 of the Contract Act, 1872 deals with the compensation of loss or damages caused by the breach of contract. In case of the breach of contract, the aggrieved party, in addition to rescinding the contract, has the right to claim for damages. Damages mean that the defaulting party will pay compensation to the aggrieved party because he/she has suffered due to the breach of contract. There are four major types of damages, namely ordinary damages, special damages, exemplary damages and nominal damages. In case of an ordinary damage, the compensation is given in a manner that can reasonably be explained for the amount of loss suffered. The compensation is calculated on the basis of the real loss suffered by the aggrieved party. When the parties are affected by some unusual circumstances which result in the breach of a contract, it is a case of special damages. ExemNMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law plary damages are awarded to the aggrieved party in order to set an example and punish the defaulting party and not just to compensate the loss suffered by the aggrieved party. Lastly, nominal damages are awarded keeping in mind that the aggrieved party has not suffered substantial loss and the compensation is more directed towards acknowledging the fact of occurrence of breach by the defaulting party. 1.13.2 Specific Performance Specific performance is ordered at the discretion of a competent court as per Section 10 of the Specific Relief Act (1963). S It is granted in the following cases: Where money is not an adequate remedy Where there are no standards for ascertaining actual damage IM However, no specific performance is ordered if: The A contract is of personal nature court cannot supervise execution Money is an adequate remedy M There are certain cases involving the breach of contract wherein awarding damages or monetary compensation may not be an adequate remedy. It is also possible that the aggrieved party may not be interested in monetary compensation. In such cases, the court may give instructions to the defaulting party to perform his obligations or fulfil his/her promise as per the terms of the contract. In other words, the court may order the defaulting party to perform the contract. This is called specific performance of a contract. It is regulated by the Specific Relief Act, 1963. Specific performance is ordered by a competent court as per Section 10 of the Specific Relief Act (1963). N 40 Example: An event management company had a contract with a celebrity for a dance show. The tickets for the show were sold out. The celebrity now wanted to terminate the agreement as she had some other lucrative offers. The celebrity offered to compensate but the event management company chose to get the contract specifically performed by the celebrity through the court. AMENDMENT TO SPECIFIC RELIEF ACT, 2018 Specific Relief (Amendment) Act 2018 has been effective since 1 October, 2018 which has inter-alia amended provisions of the Specific Relief Act, 1963 more specifically provided in Sections 10 and 14 of the Specific Relief Act, 1963. The amendments were initiated with an aim of realigning the provisions to foster ease of doing business in NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education THE INDIAN CONTRACT ACT, 1872 41 India by strengthening investor protection and stronger contractual enforcement. These amendments provide greater protection to the non-defaulting party by ensuring the performance of the contract he bargained for. Specific performance will be a general rule rather than a limited right. The provision provided under Section 10 of the Specific Relief Act, 1963 has been changed. One of the major changes is that now enforcement of the specific performance of contracts has become mandatory by courts, except for the contracts in which performance is not specifically enforceable. Prior to amendments, the courts often offer the provision of awarding damages against breach of contract rather than granting specific performance because of wide discretionary powers. S Engagement of Experts M IM In Section 14A of the Specific Relief Act, 1963, the court may engage experts for their opinion on any subject matter, within the purview of the Specific Relief Act, 1963, in order to get assistance on any specific issues involved in the cases for contractual disputes. A suit may require more experts to accumulate or provide evidence or include the production of documents on the issue that shall be based upon the relevant information and part of a record. Therefore, according to Section 14A, the court has the power to engage experts in a suit. Substituted Performance N Section 20 of the Specific Relief Act, 1963 has been changed under the Specific Relief (Amendment) Act, 2018 to substitute the performance of a contract. As per the new provisions, the aggrieved party has a choice to get the contract performed by the third party at the same cost as the party that has not performed or breached the contract. The condition is that the victimised party needs to give in writing, a notice to the breaching party of not less than 30 days, to perform the contract. So, the breaching party needs to perform the contract signed within the specified time frame mentioned in the notice; otherwise, the aggrieved party can get the same contract performed by a third party or his own agency, and the costs and expenses incurred from performing the contract shall be borne by the breaching party. Contracts Not Specifically Enforceable As per Section 14 of the Specific Relief Act, 1963, the following contracts now cannot be specifically enforced: (a) where a party to the contract has obtained substituted performance of the contract as per Section 20 of the Act; (b) a contract the performance of which involves the performance of a continuous duty that the court cannot supervise; NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law (c) a contract that is so dependent on the personal qualifications of the parties that the court cannot enforce the specific performance of its material terms; and (d) a contract which is, in its nature, determinable 1.13.3 Injunctions IM S At times, a party may not perform the contract, which has been promised, causing the breach of contract. In such a case, a competent court may issue an order to prohibit the party from either performing the act or preventing him from doing any act that leads to the loss of the aggrieved party. Such orders of the court are called injunctions. More specifically, an injunction can be defined as a mode of securing the specific performance of the negative terms of the contract. In other words, injunction is a court order requiring a party in, to refrain from doing something which may lead to a breach. Injunction may be a temporary injunction or a perpetual injunction [Section 36 of Specific Relief Act (1963)]. While the scope of temporary injunction is temporary, i.e., till the disposal of the suit; permanent injunction gives a permanent relief. M Example: If a person agrees to sell a property and thereafter refuses to sell it, the court may pass an order of injunction against the seller from selling the property to any third party, thereby securing the interests of the buyer. self assessment Questions 25. List the four types of damages. N 42 26. No specific performance is ordered if the compensation in terms of money is an adequate remedy. (a) True (b) False Activity ABC Company entered into a contract with the Government of India in order to build a highway in two years. After one year of the contract, it refuses to make the highway and goes back on the statements made by it during the formation of the contract. Discuss in detail the doctrine of the law applicable to the contract and the remedy available to the Government of India. 1.14 Contracts of Indemnity and Guarantee The Contract Act, 1872 has provided for certain special contracts, such as contracts of indemnity, contracts of guarantee, bailment and pledge. Let us study about contracts of indemnity and guarantee. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education THE INDIAN CONTRACT ACT, 1872 43 1.14.1 Contract of Indemnity and Contract of Guarantee – Meaning and Examples Indemnity means protection against damage or loss in order to compensate the party who has suffered any loss. In such contracts, two parties, namely indemnifier and indemnified are involved. Indemnifier is the person who promises to compensate for the loss, whereas the person to whom the promise is made is called indemnified. In other words, the indemnifier makes good the loss of the indemnified. Insurance contracts are a typical example of a contract of indemnity where the insurance company undertakes to compensate the insured for any loss which his property may sustain from catching fire. Know More According to Section 124 of the Contract Act, 1872, a contract of indemnity means a contract by which one party promises to save the other from loss caused to him by the conduct of the promisor himself, or by the conduct of any other person. 1.14.2 IM S Example: X and Y enter into a contract for software licensing where X represents that he is the owner of the software. The deal was for ` 10 lakhs. X has indemnified Y under a contract for any claims of ownership of software from any third party. Now Z, who claims to be the real owner of software, has filed a case against Y. Z has claimed software infringement and sought ` 1 crore against damages. Z has obtained an order from the court. Now Y can claim damages from X as X has indemnified Y. Rights of the Indemnified and INDEMNIFIER M RIGHTS OF INDEMNIFIED The indemnified is entitled to the following rights when sued: to recover damages: Right to recover all damages that the indemnified has to pay any amount to the third party in the legal suit related to the contract of indemnity. Right N Right to recover costs: Right to recover all the legal costs that are payable to the third party. Right to recover sums paid under settlement or compromise: Right to recover all sums paid or payable under the terms of any compromise or settlement of any suit. Right to sue for specific performance: The indemnified has the right to sue the indemnifier for specific performance if he has incurred absolute liability and the contract covers such liability. RIGHTS OF INDEMNIFIER The Contract Act, 1872 does not mention the rights of the indemnifier expressly. In Maharana Shri Jasvaisingji Fatesingji v. Secretary of State for India 14 BOM 299, it was decided that the rights of the indemnifier are similar to the rights of a surety mentioned under Section 141 of the Act. As per Section 141, the indemnifier becomes entitled to the benefit of all securities that the creditor has against the principal debtor whether he was aware of them or not. Where a person agrees to NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education ? DID YOU KNOW Section 125 of the Contract Act, 1872 mentions the rights of the indemnified who is also known as indemnity holder. Business Law indemnify, he will, upon such indemnification, be entitled to succeed to all the ways and means by which the person originally indemnified might have protected himself against loss or set up his compensation for the loss. A detailed explanation of rights of surety is given in later sections of this chapter. 1.14.3 Commencement of Indemnifier’s Liability An indemnified cannot hold the indemnifier liable till the time such indemnified has suffered an actual loss. In relation to the contracts of indemnity, it is relevant to determine when an indemnifier becomes liable to pay. In other words, it must be determined when an indemnified becomes entitled to recover his indemnity. Contract of Guarantee S 1.14.4 IM According to Section 126 of the Contract Act, 1872, a contract of guarantee is a contract to perform the promise or discharge the liability of a third person in case of his default. In a contract of guarantee, there are three persons involved. The person who gives the guarantee is called surety. The person for whom the guarantee is given is called the principal debtor. Lastly, the person to whom the guarantee is given called the creditor. M Example: X and Y go to a shop to buy some grocery. X buys some items and pays for them. Y also buys some items but did not have the money to pay to the shopkeeper. The shopkeeper, Z, tells Y that he can give him the goods on credit provided X provides a guarantee for payment that in case Y fails to pay Z, then X will have to pay Z. Y and X agrees to the proposition of the shopkeeper Z. In this case, Y is the principal debtor, X is the guarantor or surety and Z is the creditor. N 44 1.14.5 Kinds of Guarantee Contracts of guarantee are of two types, viz., specific guarantee and continuing guarantee. When a surety gives the guarantee for a single debt or a specific transaction, it is called specific or simple guarantee. Specific guarantee ends when the guaranteed debt is paid or when the promise has been performed. When a surety agrees to give guarantee for a series of transactions, it is called continuing guarantee. A continuing guarantee continues till all the transactions have been completed or performed. In the case of continuing guarantee, the liability of transactions is not discharged until it is revoked. 1.14.6 Rights and LiabilitIES of Surety Under a contract of guarantee, the surety enjoys all the rights that are usually available to any party under a usual contract. Apart from NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education THE INDIAN CONTRACT ACT, 1872 45 these, there are certain specific rights that are enjoyed by the surety under a contract of guarantee, which are as follows: Rights against principal debtor: The following are the rights of surety against principal debtor: Right of indemnity: The surety has the right to recover any amount from the principal debtor that he has legitimately paid to the creditor towards the debt under the contract of guarantee. Right of subrogation: After the surety has paid the liability of the principal debtor towards the creditor, the surety gains the rights of the creditor and assumes the same rights that the creditor had against the principal debtor. against creditor: In the case of fidelity guarantee (guarantee on behalf of employee), the surety can direct the creditor to dismiss the employee whose honesty he has guaranteed, in the event of proved dishonesty of the employee. The creditor’s failure to do so will exonerate the surety from his liability. The following are the rights of surety against principal creditor: IM to securities: The surety has the right to receive the securities of the principal debtor that he may have deposited with the creditor at the time of making the contract of guarantee. Upon the payment of debt, the creditor shall provide the surety deposited by the principal debtor. If the creditor loses or, without the consent of the surety, parts with any securities (whether known to the surety or not), the surety shall stand discharged to the extent of the value of such securities and the surety will be exempted from payment of debt to that extent. Right N M Right S Rights to set-off: The surety has the right to set-off the principal debtor’s claims against the creditor. Right of subrogation: After the payment of the guaranteed debt, the surety is invested with the position of the creditor against the principal debtor. Rights against co-sureties: Where a debt has been guaranteed by more than one person, they are called ‘co-sureties’ among themselves. The following are the rights of surety against co-sureties: Right to contribution: If there are two or more co-sureties for a debt jointly or individually and the co-sureties know or do not know about the same and are under same or different contracts, then the co-sureties have to pay an equal share of debt or of the unpaid debt. Example: A, B and C are sureties to D for the sum of ` 3,000 lent to E. E defaults in making payment. A, B and C are liable among themselves to pay ` 1,000 each. If any one of them has paid more NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law than their share of ` 1,000, they can claim contribution from others in excess of ` 1,000. Effect of releasing a surety: The release of one surety of co-sureties by the creditor does not discharge other sureties, nor is the surety, so discharged, released from his obligation vis-a-vis other co-sureties. 1.14.7 S You studied about the rights of surety. However, there are liabilities of the surety and co-sureties as well. The nature and extent of the liability of a surety depends on whether there is a single surety or two or more co-sureties. According to the Contract Act, 1872, the liability of a surety is co-extensive with the liability of the principal debtor except in case the contract provides for the contrary. As a general rule, co-sureties are jointly and severally liable for the debt. It means that all sureties have to contribute equally for the repayment of debt. Discharge of Surety M IM Under a contract of guarantee, a surety is discharged from his/her liability under the circumstances shown in Figure 1.1: Notice by Surety By Revocation Death of Surety Novation N 46 Variance in Terms of Contract Release or Discharge of the Principal Debtor Discharge of Surety By Conduct of Creditor Arrangement between Principal Debtor and Creditor Creditor’s Act or Omission Impairing Surety’s Eventual Remedy Loss of Security Guarantee Obtained by Misrepresentation By Invalidation of the Contract of Guarantee Guarantee Obtained by Concealment or Fraud Failure of Co-surety to Join Surety Figure 1.1: Discharge of Surety NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education THE INDIAN CONTRACT ACT, 1872 47 A surety can be discharged by revoking the contract of guarantee in the following ways: Notice by surety: In the case of a specific guarantee, the guarantee cannot be revoked by giving a notice if the liability has already accrued. In other words, if the principal debtor receives the credit from the creditor, the surety cannot be revoked. However, in the case of continuing guarantee, the guarantee can be revoked by surety by giving a notice to the creditor with respect to the future transactions that have not been accrued. Death of surety: In the case of continuing guarantee, the death of a surety leads to revocation of the guarantee with respect to future transactions. A surety is discharged by revoking a contract if a fresh contract is made and entered into by the same parties or other parties and the consideration for contract is the mutual discharge of old contract. S Novation: IM A surety can be discharged by the conduct of creditor in the following cases: Variance in terms of contract: If the creditor conducts himself in a way that results in material alteration of the terms of the contract, the surety is discharged from his liability. Release or discharge of the principal debtor: If the creditor enters between principal debtor and creditor: If a creditor makes an arrangement with the principal debtor for composition or promises to give him time for fulfilling the promise without the knowledge of the surety, then the surety is discharged. N Arrangement M into a contract with the principal debtor that results in the discharge of the principal debtor or if any act or omission of the creditor results in the discharge of the principal debtor, it also results in the discharge of the surety. Creditor’s act or omission impairing surety’s eventual remedy: When a creditor engages in any activity that is against the rights of the surety or if he does not perform an act that is his duty towards the surety, then the surety is discharged from his liability. Loss of security: If the principal debtor gives any security to the creditor at the time of forming contract and the creditor parts with or loses the security given to him without the consent of the surety, the surety is discharged from his liability to the extent of the value of security. A surety can be discharged by invalidation of the contract, i.e., when the contract becomes void or voidable at the option of surety, in the following cases: Guarantee obtained by misrepresentation: If a creditor or princi- pal debtor misrepresents any material fact related to the contract of guarantee, the contract becomes invalid. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law Guarantee obtained by concealment: If a creditor conceals any material fact related to circumstances relating to the contract, the contract becomes invalid. Failure of co-surety to join surety: The guarantee becomes invalid if there is a condition that the creditor will not act till all co-sureties have joined the contract and the condition is not fulfilled. 1.14.8 Difference between Contract of Indemnity and Contract of Guarantee The differences between the contract of indemnity and the contract of guarantee are listed in Table 1.3: S Table 1.3: DISTINCTION between the Contract of Indemnity and the Contract of Guarantee Contract of Indemnity Contract of Guarantee IM There are two parties, namely There are three parties, namely surety, indemnifier and indemnified. creditor and principal debtor. Liability of the principal debtor is primary, but surety becomes liable in the case of default by the principal debtor. There is only one contract between indemnifier and indemnified. There are two contracts, one between the principal debtor and creditor and the other between guarantor and creditor. M Liability is solely of the indemnifier. Liability of indemnifier arises Liability of surety arises after the default after the happening of a con- of principal debtor. tingency. N 48 There is no existing debt in the contract of indemnity. There is always some existing debt or duty in the contract of guarantee. The indemnifier cannot sue any third party for any loss. The surety has the right to sue the principal debtor if he has discharged his guarantee by invalidation of the contract. self assessment Questions 27. __________ contracts are typical examples of the contract of indemnity. 28. The indemnified has the right to sue the indemnifier for specific performance of indemnity if he has incurred absolute liability and the contract covers such liability. (a) True (b) False Activity Find some real life examples where contracts of guarantee and contracts of indemnity are applied. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education THE INDIAN CONTRACT ACT, 1872 49 1.15 Contract of Bailment and Contract of Pledge The term ‘bailment’ has been derived from a French word ‘bailer’ which means to deliver or hand over goods under the contract. Section 148 of the Contract Act, 1872 talks about bailment. According to the Act, 1872, “Bailment is the delivery of goods by one person to another for some purpose, upon a contract that they shall be returned when the purpose is accomplished or otherwise disposed of ,according to the directions of the person delivering them. The person delivering the goods is called the ‘bailor’. The person to whom they are delivered is called the ‘bailee’. IM S Example: If A visits B, who is a tailor, and gives 50 metres of cloth to make sofa covers, A is the bailor and B is the bailee. This transaction creates a relationship of bailment between A and B. Other examples include safe deposit of goods except where keys are retained by the depositor, lending of books by library, delivery of goods to carrier, dry cleaner, garage, keeping of goods in a warehouse or deposit of luggage in the cloakroom. The essential features of a bailment relationship are as follows: Agreement transfer and delivery of movable goods (it is of essence for a contract of bailment) Return M Voluntary (express or implied) of the specific goods of possession of goods can be actual or constructive Delivery is made as per a contract except in the case of finder of goods Delivery N Delivery is made for some purpose A bailee must return the goods to the bailor after accomplishment of purpose of bailment or on the expiry of period of bailment 1.15.1 Kinds of Bailment Bailment is classified on two basis, namely reward and benefit. On the basis of reward, the bailment is classified as gratuitous bailment and non-gratuitous bailment. The bailment that involves no consideration is gratuitous bailment. Example: Arun gives his novel to Bala for reading and says that Bala can return the novel after reading. It is a case of gratuitous bailment. The bailment that involves consideration is termed as non-gratuitous bailment. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law Example: Arun gives his novel to Bala for reading and says that Bala can return the novel after reading if he pays Arun ` 15. It is a case of non-gratuitous bailment. On the basis of the benefit accruing to the parties, the contract of bailment is classified into the following categories: Bailment for exclusive benefit of the bailor: In such a bailment, the bailment is executed solely for the benefit of bailor and the bailee derives no benefit. Example: Arun gives his novel to Bala for safe-keeping because his house is being renovated. for the exclusive benefit of the bailee: In such a bailment, the bailment is executed solely for the benefit of bailee and the bailor derives no benefit. S Bailment Example: Arun has five cows and gives one cow to his poor friend Bala so that he may sell its milk to manage his household for one year. IM Bailment for mutual benefit of both the bailee and the bailor: In such bailment, the bailment is executed for the mutual benefit of both the bailor and the bailee. M Example: Arun gives a gold bar to Bala, who is a jeweller, to make a ring from it and Bala charges money for the services undertaken by him. 1.15.2 Termination of Bailment A contract of bailment may be terminated in the following four cases: Accomplishment N 50 of purpose: When the purpose, for which the contract of bailment was created, has been accomplished and the goods are returned to the bailor, the contract is terminated. Expiry of time: If a contract of bailment is created only for a fixed period of time, then the contract is terminated at the expiry of the term of the bailment contract. Death of the party: A contract of bailment is terminated in case of death of the bailor or bailee. Bailee’s inconsistent act: A contract of bailment is voidable at the option of the bailor if the bailee does any act with regard to the goods bailed that is inconsistent with the conditions of the bailment. 1.15.3 Duties and Rights of a Bailor The duties of a bailor are as follows: Duty to disclose known facts: The bailor must disclose all the known faults in the goods bailed to the bailee. If the bailee experiences any damages due to faulty goods, the bailor is held liable for the same. In the case of gratuitous bailment, the bailor can be held NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education THE INDIAN CONTRACT ACT, 1872 51 liable for known faults only. However, in the case of non-gratuitous bailment or bailment for reward, the bailor is held liable even for the unknown defects. Duty to repay bailee’s expenses (bear expenses of bailment): The bailor has to repay all the expenses incurred by the bailee under the contract of bailment. Duty to indemnify the bailee: A bailor has to indemnify the bailee for any loss that arises due to his/her imperfect or defective title of the goods or due to premature termination of the contract. to compensate the bailee for the breach of warranty: In every contract of bailment, the bailee assumes that the bailor’s title to the goods is defect free. However, if the bailee suffers any loss due to the bailor’s title being defective, the bailor must compensate the bailee for the breach of warranty. S Duty to claim back the goods: After the expiration of the term of bailment or after the fulfilment of the promise under the contract, the bailor must take back the goods. The rights of a bailor are as follows: Right IM Duty to enforce a bailee’s performance/duties: A bailor has the right to sue the bailee for enforcing his liabilities and duties. to claim damages: The bailor has the right to claim damages in case the goods bailed by him are damaged or lost due to the negligence or conduct of the bailee. M Right Right to claim compensation against unauthorised use of goods: N If any damage has been caused to the goods bailed due to unauthorised use or used as opposed to the directions and conditions of bailment, the bailor can claim compensation from the bailee. Right to demand return of goods: When the bailor bails the goods for some consideration, the bailor has a right to demand their return, when he wants, whether or not the specific time has been elapsed or the specific purpose has been met or not. 1.15.4 Duties and Rights of a Bailee The duties of a bailee are as follows: Duty to take reasonable care of the goods bailed: A bailee must take reasonable care of the bailed goods as he would take care of his/her own goods. It is the duty of the bailee to prove that he had indeed exercised reasonable care. The bailee is held liable if the goods get damaged due to his negligence. However, if the bailee had managed the goods with reasonable care but the goods still get damaged, then the bailee cannot be held liable. Duty not to make unauthorised use of the bailed goods: A bailee must use the goods only as per the terms of the contract. If the goods are put to use which is inconsistent with the terms of the contract, then the bailee can be held liable. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law Not to mix the bailed goods with other goods: It is the duty of the bailee not to mix the bailed goods with any other goods held by him. There can be three cases when the bailee mixes the goods which are: 1. When the goods are mixed with the approval of the bailor, the bailor and the bailee have an equal proportion of interest in the mixed goods. 2. When the goods are mixed without the approval of the bailor and the goods can be separated, the bailee has to bear the costs related to division, separation and damages. 3. When goods are mixed without the approval of the bailor and the goods cannot be separated, the bailee has to bear the costs of loss to the bailor. S Duty to return the goods to the bailor in time: It is the duty of the bailee to return the goods to the bailor after the expiry of the time of contract or when the purpose of bailment has been achieved. IM Duty to return accretion to the goods: The bailee must return the goods to the bailor along with any profit or increments. The rights of a bailee are as follows: Right to receive compensation for loss due to faulty goods bailed: M The bailee has the right to recover the loss that he has incurred from the bailor due to a fault in the goods which were not disclosed to him during the creation of the bailment contract. Right N 52 to receive the necessary expenses: The bailee has the right to receive expenses that he has incurred in maintaining the bailed goods for keeping it in his custody, transporting it or repairing it from the bailor. Right against premature termination of bailment: In case of non-gratuitous bailment, wherein a bailor demands return of goods before the expiry of the term of contract due to which the bailee suffers loss beyond the benefit that is actually derived by him from bailed goods, then the bailee can claim such expenses from the bailor. Right to compensation in case of defective title: When a bailor holds a defective title to goods and the bailee had to undergo a loss, the bailee can claim damages from the bailor. Delivery of goods to one of the joint owners: If the goods have been bailed by several joint owners, then the bailee can deliver the goods back to the person(s) as indicated in contract or to any one of the joint owners, without the consent of all the joint owners, if there is no agreement to the contrary. Right of a particular lien: If the bailor does not pay the charges to the bailee for the goods bailed, the bailee may retain the goods. The case in which the bailee can only retain the goods is called NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education THE INDIAN CONTRACT ACT, 1872 53 particular lien. It must be remembered that the bailee cannot sell the bailed goods under lien. 1.15.5 Bailee’s Lien Lien is the right of a person to retain possession of goods until some debt or claim outstanding in respect of them is paid. Since lien is dependent on possession, it is called ‘possessory lien’. Lien may arise by statute, contract or general course of dealings in the particular trade. 1.15.6 Types of Lien S There are two types of lien, namely particular lien and general lien, which are explained as follows: Lien: According to Section 170 of the Contract Act, 1872, a bailee’s particular lien is defined as where the bailee has, in accordance with the purpose of the bailment, rendered any service involving the exercise of labour or skill in respect of the goods bailed, he has, in the absence of a contract to the contrary, a right to retain such goods until he receives due remuneration for the services he has rendered in respect of them. IM Particular M It means that a bailee may retain the goods only in case he has not received his legal and rightful remuneration for the services provided by him. Lien: According to Section 171 of the Contract Act, 1872, general lien is a lien that bankers, factors, wharfingers, attorneys of a High Court and policy brokers may, in the absence of a contract to the contrary, retain, as a security for a general balance of account, any goods bailed to them, but no other persons have a right to retain, as a security for such balance, goods bailed to them, unless there is an express contract to that effect. N General It means that certain categories of persons, such as attorneys, insurers, bankers and wharfingers have the right to retain goods not only for payments outstanding in respect of the goods retained, but for a general balance of account. Example: A borrows ` 1,000 from his bank XYZ without any security. After three months, A again borrows ` 1,000 from XYZ, but this time he keeps a security of some gold ornaments. Now, if A has returned the second loan of ` 1,000, then XYZ can retain the gold ornaments till A pays off the rest amount of loan. 1.15.7 Pledge Section 172 of the Contract Act, 1872 describes three terms, namely pledge, pawnor and pawnee. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law When goods are bailed as a security for the payment of a debt or for the performance of a promise, it is called pledge. The bailor here becomes the pawnor/pledger, whereas the bailee becomes the pawnee/pledgee. Pledge is a specific case of bailment. In case of pledge, the ownership of the goods is not changed. The essential features of a contract of pledge are: Bailment for security for payment of debt or performance of a promise. Goods are the subject matter of contract. Goods pledged must exist. of goods from pawnor to pawnee. S Delivery IM In both bailment and pledge, only movable goods are delivered. The bailment and pledge contracts are both created by mutual agreement between the parties. In the case of bailment, the bailee may use goods as per the terms of contract, whereas the pawnee cannot use the goods pledged. M In the case of pledge, the pawnee has a right to sell the goods pledged if the pawnor defaults on debt repayment after giving a due notice to him. On the contrary, in case of default by the bailor, the bailee can only retain and have lien on the goods or sue the bailor. 1.15.8 Rights and Duties of a Pledgee (Pawnee) and a PledgEr (Pawnor) N 54 The rights of a pledgee are as follows: Right of retention: A pledgee has the right to retain the goods pledged for the payment of debt or of interest, or for the performance of the promise, or for the necessary expenses incurred by him. Right to retention of subsequent debts: The pledgee has the right to retain the pledged goods for any money lent by him to the pledger after the date of pledge except in case there is a contract to the contrary. Right to recover extraordinary expenses: If the pledgee has incurred any extraordinary expenses for the maintenance of the pledged goods, then he has the right to sue the pledger for these expenses. However, the pledgee cannot retain goods in such a case. Right to sue pledger in case of default: If the pledger fails to repay the debt or perform his promise at the stipulated time, the pledgee can file a suit against the pledger and may retain the pledged goods as a security. The pledgee may also sell the goods after giving a notice to the pledger. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education THE INDIAN CONTRACT ACT, 1872 55 The rights of a pledger are as follows: Right to redeem: The pledger has the right to receive back his goods, provided he has paid the pledgee the expenses incurred by him and before the goods have been sold. Pledge where pledger has limited interest: In case the pledger has only limited interest in the pledged goods, the pledge is valid only up to the extent of the interest. DUTIES OF A PLEDGEE (PAWNEE) AND A PLEDGER (PAWNOR) The duties of a pledgee are as follows: A pledgee must take reasonable care of the pledged goods. pledgee must not engage in the unauthorised use of the pledged goods. S A A pledgee must return goods after the pledger has fulfilled his promise or has paid his debt. pledgee must not mix the pledged goods with any other goods. IM A A pledgee must not engage in any activity that is inconsistent with the terms of contract. pledgee must return any profits or gains accrued by pledged goods. M A The duties of a pledger are as follows: A pledger must fulfil his promise or pay his debt, as the case may be. pledger must compensate the pledgee for the extraordinary expenses incurred by him. A N A pledger must disclose all the known faults about the pledged goods which might put the pledgee at risk. A pledger must indemnify the pledgee if he incurs any loss due to defect in the pledger’s title to goods. A pledger must pay the deficit amount if the pledgee sells the pledged goods, but not able to recover the entire amount. Table 1.4 shows the difference between pledge and bailment: Table 1.4: Difference between pledge and bailment Pledge Bailment A pledge involves the delivery of goods as a security against the debt or performance of a contract. A bailment arises when goods are handed over temporarily to another person for a specific purpose. Section 172 of the Act deals with pledges. Section 148 of the Act deals with bailments. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law Table 1.4: Difference between pledge and bailment For instance, Mr A pledges gold to a bank for gold loan. For instance, Mr A sent his bike to Mr. B for repairing. Consideration is always present in a pledge. Consideration may or may not be present in a bailment. 1.16 CONTRACTS DEALING WITH AGENCY 1.16.1 S In business law, contracts enforcing a relationship of the agency are general. The law of agency is an important part of the Contract Act, 1872. The authority provided can be implied or expressed. This law is based on Latin words ‘Qui facit per alium, facit per se’, which means ‘he who acts through another is deemed in law to do it himself’. MEANING OF PRINCIPAL AND AGENT M IM It is not easy for organisations to perform every business transaction itself due to business complexity, expertise and time constraint. Therefore, another person is involved in the business to perform various activities. This person is called an agent. In other words, when a person performs some activities on behalf of a person or an organisation, he/she is known as an agent. The principal is defined as a person who is represented and for whom the services or acts are performed by an agent. As mentioned in Section 182 of the Contract Act, 1872, an agent is a person employed to do any act for another (called ‘principal’) or to represent another in his dealings with third parties. The person for whom such an act is done or whom the agent represents is called the ‘principal’. According to Section 183 of the Act, any person competent to contract can appoint an agent. The agreement signed between the principal and its agent is known as the contract of agency. Under Section 184, even a minor can be appointed as an agent. However, a minor will not be responsible to his principal or to third parties. N 56 Example: X appoints Y to buy some property on his behalf. Here, X is the principal and Y is the agent. The relationship established between X and Y is known as ‘agency’. 1.16.2 TYPES OF AGENTS An agent is described on the basis of the authority provided to him on behalf of the principal. There are various types of agents available, some of which are as follows: Special agent: It refers to an agent who is appointed for a singular specific act, for example, an agent is involved in the sales of goods. As soon as the specific act is over, the authority of the agent comes NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education THE INDIAN CONTRACT ACT, 1872 57 to an end. When an agent has the authority to perform a particular transaction, he is termed as a special agent. General agent: It refers to an agent who is appointed for all acts relating to a specific job. He has the authority or right to perform all the acts related to a particular trade and business. The general agent’s authority goes on till the termination of agency. Sub-agent: It refers to an agent who is appointed by another agent. Co-agent: It refers to an agent who is appointed together to perform an act jointly. It refers to an agent who receives and sells goods on commission (called factorage). He has the right to sell goods on credit and, in return, gets the price from the buyer and provides the amount to the principal seller. The possession of goods provided to this agent is merely for the selling purpose as he sells goods in his own name. S Factor: It refers to an agent who has to create a contractual relationship between two parties. He has the power to negotiate on behalf of the principal. He does not possess the ownership of goods. He negotiates and establishes a contract between the principal and the third party. It refers to an agent who acts as a seller in an auction for the principal. He gets rewarded in the form of commission on the sale. He is entrusted with the good’s possession for sale at a public auction. M Auctioneer: IM Broker: Commission agent: It refers to an agent who is appointed to make Del N a purchase (buy/sell goods) for his principal. It is a general term that can also be used for a broker or a factor. Credere: It refers to an agent who acts as a salesperson, guarantor and broker for the principal. He is known as the agent who guarantees the act’s performance by the third party. He offers guarantee to his principal that the third party who has entered into the contractual agreement will perform its obligations. 1.16.3 AUTHORITY OF AN AGENT The authority of an agent is described as the agent’s capacity to bind his principal. The actual authority of an agent is stated in Section 189 of the Contract Act, 1872. An agent can bind the principal by all his acts as if those have been done by the principal himself. An agent’s authority can be of the following types: Actual authority, expressed or implied, conferred on him under the contract (Section 186) and every lawful thing necessary for a particular business (Section 188). This authority has been really delegated to the agent and it can be expressed or implied. Ostensible authority, which appears to third parties to be necessary in the context of the relevant business even if the agent may NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Know More As per the Contract Act, 1872, a ‘sub-agent’ is a person employed by, and acting under the control of, the original agent in the business of the agency. Business Law have acted without authority (Section 237). In this case, an agent is employed for a particular task and all people employed with him can presume that the agent has the authority to perform all the acts necessary for business. Authority, in an emergency, is necessary when an agent exceeding his authority in an emergency may bind the principal, provided he could not communicate with the principal, had acted bonafide and had taken all steps to protect the principal from loss as would be done by a person of ordinary prudence in his own case (Section 189). 1.16.4 LIABILITY OF PRINCIPAL AND AGENT IM S The Law of Agency states that an agent is not personally liable except in a few conditions which are stated as: ‘In the absence of any contract to that effect, an agent cannot personally enforce contracts entered into by him on behalf of his principal, nor is he personally bound by them’. However, there are certain circumstances that make the agent personally liable. Figure 1.2 shows the circumstances under which an agent is personally liable: Circumstances under which an Agent becomes Personally Liable M In case of foreign principal [Section 230] N 58 In case of undisclosed principal [Section 230] In case of acts not ratified [Section 235] In case of incompetent principal [Section 230] In case of acts in his own name In case of principal not in existence In case of express agreement In case of custom or usage of trade Figure 1.2: Circumstances under which an Agent Becomes Personally Liable An agent is personally liable if he acts for: A foreign principal: The Law of Agency states that if a contract is created for the sale and purchase of goods by the agent for a merchant residing abroad, the agent is held or presumed to be personally liable. An unnamed or undisclosed principal: As per the Law of Agency, an agent is held personally liable in the circumstances where the contract is established by an agent for the undisclosed principle. A disclosed principal who cannot be sued, i.e., an incompetent person: A minor, lunatic or foreign ambassador cannot be sued if the contract is made with such entities. The agent is held personally liable for the contract. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education THE INDIAN CONTRACT ACT, 1872 59 A non-existent principal: When an agent makes a contract with the unincorporated company which is yet to be formed, only the agent is held personally liable for such a contract. A pretended agent (in case of acts not ratified): When an agent acts as a pretended agent, i.e., falsely represents himself as agent of another and the alleged principal declines to adopt. However, if the principal ratifies such acts, the principal will be liable for the same. When an agent acts on his own name: When an agent signs a contract/negotiable instrument in his own name, he is personally liable for such contract because he acts without disclosing that he is contracting as an agent. When an agent expressly agrees to be personally liable: The Law IM S of Agency states “When an agent has, without authority, done acts or incurred obligations to third persons on behalf of his principal, the agent is personally bound by such acts or obligations, if he has by his words or conduct induced such third persons to believe that such acts and obligations were within the scope of the agent’s authority.” In case of custom or usage of trade: In such cases, if there is absence of contract, the agent is held personally liable for the contract. TERMINATION OF AGENCY M 1.16.5 N The termination of an agency is defined as the end of relationship between the principal and his agent. It can be done either by the act of parties or by the operation of laws. Figure 1.3 shows the modes of the termination of agency: Modes of Termination of Agency I. By act of parties II. By operation of law By mutual agreement By revocation of authority by the principal On completion of the business of agency On death/or becoming of unsound mind of principal or agent On destruction of the subject matter By renunciation of agency by the agent On insolvency of principal On dissolution of company On expiry of fixed period On principal becoming an alien enemy Figure 1.3: Modes of Termination of Agency NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law Both the agent and the principal can terminate the agency by the following ways: By mutual agreement: An agency between the principal and his agent can be terminated by mutual agreement in the similar way an agency is formulated. By revocation of an authority by the principal: An agency gets ter- minated if the principal revokes the authority of his agent. The principal has the right to revoke the authority of its agent at any time. By renunciation of agency by the agent: An agency is terminated when an agent himself renounces the business’s agency. On S Apart from the above-mentioned circumstances, an agency itself gets termination under various other cases, such as when it becomes impossible for the agency to function due to force majeure. Some of the other cases where the termination of agency is done are as follows: completion of agency business death or insanity of the principal or agent, but acts done prior thereto, shall remain valid IM On On expiry of time if agency has been created for a fixed period of time destruction of subject matter of agency On dissolution of the company On the principal becoming a foreign alien M On N 60 self assessment Questions 31. A/An __________ is a person employed to perform any act for another (called principal) or to represent another in his dealings with the third parties. 32. The third party has to perform the business activities of the principal as per the principal’s direction. (a) True (b) False Activity Explore the roles and responsibilities of a subagent. 1.17 Explaining Agreements Using a Template You have already studied about the types of agreements in the initial sections of this chapter. Different types of agreements are used for different purposes. The essential elements for the formation of an agreement are as follows: Two or more parties NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education THE INDIAN CONTRACT ACT, 1872 61 One of the parties must make an offer to another party Offer must be accepted by the other party Consensus-ad-idem (The offer should be accepted in the same context without any ambiguity) Intention to enter into a legal relationship Some important agreements and their templates used in businesses are discussed herein. Figure 1.4 presents the template agreement for underwriting shares of a company as follows: Place of the Agreement AGREEMENT FOR UNDERWRITING SHARES OF A COMPANY The name of the Parties should mention the full name. Special care should be taken when you mention the type of organisation (For example an individual, a sole proprietorship, partnership company, private limited company and public limited company Two Parties IM This Agreement made at ................. on this .................. of ................... 2000, between ABC Ltd., a company incorporated under the Companies Act, 1956 and having its registered office at .................... hereinafter called “the company” (which expression shall, unless it be repugnant to the context or meaning thereof be deemed to mean and include its successors and assigns) of the ONE PART and M/s. XYZ a partnership firm registered under the Partnership Act, 1932 and having its place of business at .................. hereinafter called “the underwriters”, (which expression shall unless it be repugnant to the context or meaning thereof, be deemed to mean and include every partner for the time being of the said firm, the survivor or survivors or the legal representatives, executors or administrators of the last partner) of the Other Part. S Date when the Agreement is executed Whereas the company proposes to issue ............... equity shares of to Rs ..................... each and offer the same for public subscription at Rs ....................... per share in accordance with the terms of the draft prospectus, a copy of which is annexed hereto, or with such modifications therein as may be mutually agreed upon between the company and the underwriters. Proposal to make an offer and acceptance Whereas the underwriters have agreed to underwrite the subscription of the said shares on the terms and conditions hereinafter appearing. Now it is hereby Agreed between The Parties as Follows: 2. N 3. The company shall issue ...................... equity shares of Rs ............. each for public subscription in terms of the draft prospectus, a copy of which is annexed hereto or with such modification therein, as may be mutually agreed upon between the parties, on or before the ................... day of …………. 2000, or such later date as shall be mutually agreed upon by the parties hereto not after the .......... day of ....................... 2000. The underwriters shall on or before the closing of the subscription list apply for the .................... shares or cause the same to be applied for by the responsible persons, who shall pay on application, the application moneys payable on the shares applied for by them respectively and who shall not withdraw their applications before notification of allotment of shares to them. If on the closing of the list under the said prospectus the said ...................... shares shall be allotted on the applications received from the public, the responsibility of the underwriters will cease and no allotment is to be made to the underwriters under this agreement, but if the said ............ shares shall not be allotted to the public, but any smaller number of such shares is so allotted, the underwriters undertake to stand for the difference between the said .......................... shares and the number of the shares allotted to the public and company may allot to the underwriters all the shares which shall not have been applied for by such members of the public or such responsible persons as aforesaid and the underwriters shall accept the shares so allotted and pay all application and allotment money in respect of those shares in accordance with the said prospectus. The underwriters irrevocably authorise the company to apply for the said ............... shares or any part thereof in the name and on behalf of the underwriters in accordance with the terms of the said prospectus and authorise the directors of the company to allot the said ..................... shares of the company or part thereof to the underwriters and in the event of the company making an application for such shares in the names of the underwriters, the underwriters shall hold the company harmless and indemnified in respect of such application. The company shall pay to the underwriters in cash a commission of .............................. per cent on the nominal value of the shares within ............. days from the allotment of the said ...................... shares. But should any allotment of the shares be made to the underwriters in accordance with the terms of this agreement, the commission shall not be payable until the underwriters pay the application and allotment moneys payable in respect of all the shares so allotted to the underwriters. It is hereby agreed that time is the essence of this agreement. This agreement shall be executed in duplicate. The original shall be retained by the company and the duplicate by the underwriters. M 1. 4. 5. 6. 7. In Witness Whereof the parties have signed these presents and a duplicate hereof the day and year first hereinabove written. Signed and delivered by A 8 Ltd., the within named Legal relationship Consensus ad idem Recitals: Recitals introduce the parties and the transaction to be entered between them. The Object of the Parties to enter into a contract Consideration Timely Performance of the obligations. If the obligations are not performed as per the timelines in the contract. If not then the Agreement shall be breached Execution of the Agreement is important for a contract to be concluded company by its Managing Director Shri .................. Signed and delivered by M/s. XYZ the within named under writers by their partners WITNESSES; 1. Witness 2. Source: https://www.advocatekhoj.com/library/agreements/companylaw/22.php Figure 1.4: Agreement for Underwriting Shares of a Company NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law Figure 1.5 presents the template of agreement for license between a trademark owner and a manufacturer: Place of Agreement Date of the Agreement AGREEMENT FOR LICENSE BETWEEN TRADEMARK OWNER AND A MANUFACTURER Title of Agreement AGREEMENT is made this _____________day of ________ between __________M/s ______________, a Company registered under the Companies Act,____, and having its registered office at ___________ hereinafter referred to as ‘the Licensor’ of the One Part and Mr. ._________________carrying on business of ________________ Hereinafter referred has ‘the Licensee’ of the Other Part Parties have to be identified WHEREAS 1. 2. 3. The Licensor is the proprietor of a trade mark more particularly described in the schedule hereunder written and which is duly registered under the Trade and Merchandise Marks Act 1958. The Licensor is manufacturing and selling the goods viz ____________________ under the said trade mark. The Licensee who is running a small scale industry has requested the Licensor to grant him a license to manufacture the said goods with the trade mark embossed or printed thereon as is being done by the Licensor and which the Licensor has agreed to do on the following terms and conditions agreed to between the parties hereto. Recitals of Agreement NOW IT IS AGREED BY AND BETWEEN THE PARTIES AS FOLLOWS: 2. 3. 4. IM 5. The Licensor hereby grants to the Licensee a license to manufacture the said goods as a job work by applying the said trade mark, particulars of which are described in the Schedule hereunder written. The Licensee agrees and undertakes that all of the said goods manufactured by the Licensee in his factory at ______________or elsewhere shall be sold to the Licensor and not to anybody else at the price of Rs __________ per item or article. The Licensee undertakes to manufacture and supply to the Licensor a quantity of not less than _________________every month. The goods so manufactured with the said trade mark applied to them will be supplied and delivered by the Licensee to the Licensor at the latter s business premises at _______ at his own costs of transport. The price of the said goods so supplied will be paid by the Licensor against delivery after deducting there from the royalty payable by the Licensee to the Licensor as hereinafter provided. The Licensor shall have the right to reject any goods supplied if they are not as per specifications or quality which are made known to the Licensee and in the event of such rejection the Licensee shall take back the rejected goods from the Licensor’s premises at his own costs and until such removal they will be at the risk of the Licensee. The Licensor agrees that during the subsistence of this agreement, the Licensor will not get the said goods manufactured from anybody else. The ownership of the said trademark will always remain with the Licensor and the Licensee will not pass off the said goods as if he is the owner of the said trademark. The Licensee will be at liberty to put a label or advertise that the said goods are manufactured by him but it will also be mentioned that the trade mark belongs to the Licensor and that the goods are manufactured for the benefit of the Licensor. In consideration of the Licensor allowing the Licensee to manufacture the said goods with the said trade mark the Licensee agrees to pay to the Licensor by way of royalty a sum equal to ______________per cent of the price of the goods at which they will be sold to the Licensor by the Licensee as aforesaid. The Licensee shall keep an account of the goods manufactured and sold to the Licensor and the price received by him and royalty paid in respect thereof and such account shall be open to inspection by the Licensor from time to time as may be required by the Licensor. The Licensor will also have the right to enter upon the premises of the Licensee where the goods are manufactured and to take inspection of the goods manufactured. This agreement will remain in force for a period of ______ years from the date hereof and on the expiration of the said period or earlier termination thereof as herein provided, the Licensee shall stop manufacturing the said goods under the said trade mark and all the goods till then manufactured and lying undelivered to the Licensor will be delivered to the Licensor in terms of this agreement as aforesaid. If the Licensee commits breach of any term of this agreement, the Licensor will be entitled to terminate this agreement by fifteen days prior notice in writing to the Licensee and on the expiration of the notice period, this agreement shall stand terminated unless in the mean while the breach complained of is remedied to the satisfaction of the Licensor. The Licensee may get himself registered as a registered user under the provisions of the Trade & Merchandise Marks Act 1958 subject to the terms of this agreement. If the Registrar of Trade Marks while registering the Licensee as a registered user puts any condition which is not acceptable to the Licensor, the Licensee will withdraw the application for registration or the Licensor will have the option to terminate this agreement. If any person is found by the Licensee to infringe the said trade mark either by passing off or otherwise, the Licensee will bring that fact to the notice of the Licensor to enable him to take necessary legal action against such person and in that event the Licensee will give all cooperation to the Licensor in prosecuting such action and all the costs thereof will be borne and paid by the parties hereto in equal shares. If the Licensee himself infringes the said trade mark by passing off or otherwise, then notwithstanding anything provided in clause 16 hereof it will be open to the Licensor to take legal action against him and in such case the Licensee will not be entitled to challenge the ownership of the Licensor in respect of the said trade mark. In the event of any dispute arising out of this agreement, the same will be referred to arbitration of a common Arbitrator if agreed upon or in the absence of such agreement, to two Arbitrators one to be appointed by each party hereto and the Arbitration will be governed by the Arbitration Act for the time being in force. S 1. 6. 7. 8. 9. M 10. 11. 12. 13. N 62 14. 15. 16. IN WITNESS WHEREOF the parties have put their respective hands the day and year first hereinabove written. THE SCHEDULE ABOVE REFERRED TO Signed and delivered for and on behalf of Within named Licensor ____________Company By its Managing Director In the presence of _____________ Signed and delivered by the Within named Licensee Mr.______________ In the presence of ____________ Offer Acceptance Ownership of Property Consideration Duration Termination Negative CovenantsCovenants that restrict parties from affecting or causing losses Dispute Resolution and Jurisdiction are the clauses which govern the law and court which will apply in case of disputes Execution of the Agreement is important for a contract to be concludedConsensus-adidem Witness Source: https://lawrato.com/legal-documents/trademark-copyright-ipr-legal-forms/agreement-of-license-between-trademark-owner-and-a-manufacturer-35 Figure 1.5: Agreement for Underwriting Shares of a Company self assessment Questions 33. The common intention to create legal relationship is also known as __________. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education THE INDIAN CONTRACT ACT, 1872 63 Activity Prepare a template of the agreement for providing consultancy services. S 1.18 Summary A contract is a legally binding agreement made between two or more persons by which rights are acquired by one or more acts or forbearances (abstaining from doing something) on the part of others. ‘agreement’ means a promise or a set of promises that forms a consideration for each other. In other words, an agreement is an exchange of promises between two or more parties. S An Contracts are mainly categorised based on their initiation, formation, enforceability and performance. agreement that is not enforceable by law is said to be a void agreement. IM An A voidable contract arises if the consent of either of the parties has been obtained by coercion, undue influence, fraud, misrepresentation or mistake of the contract. offer is said to have been accepted when the person to whom the proposal is made gives his assent to that proposal or offer. An M An offer is different from an invitation to offer. standard form contract is a non-negotiated contract, which is also referred to as a contract of adhesion or boilerplate contract. N A Consideration is one of the essential requisites of a valid contract. Privity of contract refers to a type of relationship between the par- ties to a contract according to which the parties can sue each other. However, no third party can sue any of the parties to contract. An agreement made without consideration is void. Consent is said to be free when it is not caused by— Coercion Undue Fraud (Section 15); Influence (Section 16); (Section 17); Misrepresentation Mistake (Section (18); or (Sections 20, 21 and 22) Discharge of a contract means discontinuation or completion of contractual relations between parties. The contractual capacity of individuals is determined in accordance with their age, soundness of mind and legal qualifications. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law A quasi-contract is said to have formed when the law assumes the presence of a contract when, in realty, no such agreement exists between the parties. The person who promises to make good the loss is called the ‘indemnifier’ (promisor), and the person whose loss is to be made good is called the ‘indemnified’ or ‘indemnitee’. Bailment is the delivery of goods by one person to another for some purpose upon a contract that they shall, when the purpose is accomplished, be returned or otherwise disposed of according to the directions of the person delivering them. is a right of a person to retain the possession of goods until some debt or claim outstanding, in respect of them, is paid. If lien is dependent on possession, it is called ‘possessory lien’. Lien may arise by statute, contract or general course of dealings in the particular trade. S Lien is the bailment of goods as security for the payment of a debt or performance of a promise. The person who delivers goods as security is called the pledger or pawner and the person to whom the goods are delivered is called the pledgee or pawnee. IM Pledge Contracts are extremely important for the success of any business. M key words Agreement: Every promise or a set of promises that forms a consideration for each other Coercion: N 64 An act of committing or threatening to commit an act that is forbidden under the Indian Penal Code, 1860 or any other law General lien: The right to retain goods not only for demands arising out of the goods retained, but for other unpaid debts account in the favour of such debtor Illegal agreements: Agreements that are forbidden by the law Particular lien: The right to retain particular goods in respect of which the claim/debt is due Unlawful agreements: Agreements that have unlawful object or unlawful consideration are void ? 1.19 Descriptive Questions 1. Explain the following phrase: ‘All contracts are agreement but all agreements are not contracts.’ 2. Describe the classification of contracts on the basis of initiation, formation, enforceability and performance. 3. Explain the essential conditions for the formation of contracts. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education THE INDIAN CONTRACT ACT, 1872 65 4. Explain the meaning of offer and acceptance. 5. How are offer and acceptance communicated? 6. Explain the meaning of a boilerplate contract? 7. What do you understand by the term ‘privity of contract’? 8. What is free consent? 9. Describe various disqualifications that affect the capacity to contract. 10. What are void, valid and voidable agreements? 11. Describe the meaning of ‘quasi-contracts’. 12. What are various modes for discharge of contracts? S 13. Explain various remedies for the breach of contract. 14. Describe the difference between contracts of indemnity and guarantee. IM 15. Explain the contract of bailment and contract of pledge. 1.20 Answers and Hints ANSWERS FOR SELF ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS Agreements and Contracts When an Agreement becomes a Contract: Essential Conditions Offer/Proposal and Acceptance Standard Form of Contract/ Boilerplate Contract/ Adhesion Contract Consideration and Privity of Contract Answer 1. offer 2. All of these 3. Express Contract 4. True 5. b. 6. Consideration 7. offeree/promisee 8. False 9. True 10. course of transmission 11. standard form contracts 12. True 13. Privity of contract N Classification of Contracts Q. No. M Topic voidable NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law Topic Free Consent Capacity to Contract Void, Valid and Voidable Agreements Q. No. Answer 14. d. Written and registered promise by the debtor to pay a statute-barred debt 15. True 16. Dominant 17. c. 18. sound mind 19. c. Agreements whose meaning is certain 20. True 21. quasi-contract S Quasi-Contracts IM Discharge of Contracts Remedies for Breach of Contract M Contracts of Indemnity and Guarantee Contract of Bailment and Contract of Pledge N 66 Contracts dealing with Agency Explaining Agreements using a Template Presence of all limbs 22. True 23. Actual 24. c. 25. Ordinary damages, special damages, exemplary damages and nominal damages 26. True 27. Insurance 28. True 29. bailment 30. Lien 31. agent 32. False 33. consensus-ad-idem Difficulty of performance HINTS FOR DESCRIPTIVE QUESTIONS 1. According to Section 2(h) of the Contract Act, 1872, a ‘contract’ is ‘an agreement enforceable by law’. Refer to Section 1.2 Agreements and Contracts 2. Contracts are categorised on the basis of their enforceability, creation, performance and initiation. Refer to Section 1.3 Classification of Contracts 3. Section 10 of the Contract Act, 1872 states that an agreement becomes a contract if it is made by the free consent of the parties who are competent to contract, in exchange for a lawful consideration and a lawful object and is not expressly declared void. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education THE INDIAN CONTRACT ACT, 1872 67 Refer to Section 1.4 When an Agreement becomes a Contract: Essential Conditions 4. If an individual expresses his willingness to enter into a legally binding contract based on certain terms with some other party, it constitutes an offer to contract or a proposal. Refer to Section 1.5 Offer/Proposal and Acceptance 5. According to Section 4 of the Contract Act, 1872, communication of offer is complete when it comes to the knowledge of the person to whom the offer is made. The communication of acceptance is complete as against the offer or when the acceptance is put in a course of transmission so that it is out of power of the acceptor/ offeree. Refer to Section 1.5 Offer/Proposal and Acceptance IM S 6. The boilerplate contract is a type of highly standardised contract, which contains various terms and conditions that can restrict or even exclude the liability of one party. Refer to Section 1.6 Standard Form of Contract/Boilerplate Contract/Adhesion Contract 7. Privity of contract refers to a type of relationship between the parties to a contract according to which the parties can sue each other. Refer to Section 1.7 Consideration and Privity of Contract M 8. Consent is said to be free when it is not caused by coercion, undue influence, fraud, misrepresentation or mistake. Refer to Section 1.8 Free Consent N 9. Minors, persons of unsound mind and persons disqualified by law, to which they are subject, are incompetent to make a contract. Refer to Section 1.9 Capacity to Contract 10. On the basis of enforceability or validity, agreements can be classified as being valid, void or voidable. Refer to Section 1.10 Void, Valid and Voidable Agreements 11. When the law assumes the presence of a contract when, in realty, no agreement exists between the parties, such a contract is called a quasi-contract. Refer to Section 1.11 Quasi-Contracts 12. A contract can be discharged in various ways, such as by performance, mutual agreement, lapse of time, etc. Refer to Section 1.12 Discharge of Contracts 13. Remedies for breach of contract include rescission of the contract, suit for damages, suit for specific performance and suit for injunction. Refer to Section 1.13 Remedies for Breach of Contract 14. Indemnity means making the loss good, in order to compensate the party who has suffered any loss. In such contracts, two parties, namely indemnifier and indemnified, are involved. A contract of guarantee is a contract to perform the promise or discharge NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law the liability of a third person in case of his default. Refer to Section 1.14 Contracts of Indemnity and Guarantee 15. Section 148 of the Contract Act, 1872 defines bailment. When the goods are bailed as a security for the payment of a debt or for the performance of a promise, it is called pledge. Refer to Section 1.15 Contract of Bailment and Contract of Pledge 1.21 Suggested Readings & References Suggested Readings Chandiramani, N. (1997). The law of contract. Mumbai: Saptarang Publ. P. (2019). Business Law (3rd ed.). New Delhi: McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited. T. (2017). Business Law (3rd ed.). Pearson Education. IM Sheth, S Tulsian, E-REFERENCES (2020). Retrieved 18 September 2020, from https://cablogindia. com/the-indian-contract-act-1872-notes/ B., Law, C., & guarantee, I. (2020). Indemnity and Guarantee. Retrieved 31 March 2020, from https://www.lawctopus.com/ academike/indemnity-and-guarantee/ M Laws, History N 68 of the Indian Contract Act 1872. (2020). Retrieved 31 March 2020, from https://www.lawteacher.net/free-law-essays/contract-law/history-of-the-indian-contract-act-1872-contract-law-essay.php NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education C h 2 a pt e r Sale of Goods Act, 1930 N M 2.3 Introduction Concept of Goods Self Assessment Questions Activity Sale of Goods Act, 1930 Sale and Agreement to Sell 2.3.1 2.3.2 Difference between the Contract of Sale of Goods and the Contract for Work and Labour Conditions and Warranties 2.3.3 2.3.4 Title (Ownership) 2.3.5 Doctrine of Caveat Emptor and Exceptions Performance of the Contract of Sale 2.3.6 2.3.7 Unpaid Seller 2.3.8 Hire Purchase and Hypothecation Agreements Self Assessment Questions Activity Summary Descriptive Questions Answers and Hints Suggested Readings & References IM 2.1 2.2 S Contents 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law Introductory Caselet Breach of Contract of Sale Case Objective This caselet discusses the repercussions of the breach of contract of sale. ‘A’ goes to a chemist’s shop to buy a hot water bottle. The chemist shows him a bottle and says that the bottle will not stand boiling water, but is fit to store hot water. On this representation by the chemist, ‘A’ buys the bottle. After a few days, while ‘A’ was using the bottle, it burst and caused injuries to ‘A’. Thereupon, it is found on examination that the bottle is not fit to be used as a hot water bottle. It is to be examined what the specific requirement of ‘A’ was while buying the bottle. S In this case, ‘A’ specifically mentioned his purpose while buying the bottle, i.e., a bottle that can store hot water. Therefore, there was an implied condition by ‘A’ that the bottle must be capable of storing hot water and the same has been breached by the seller. IM The seller is liable to pay damages to ‘A’ for the breach of this condition. M *Source: Priest v. Last (1903) 2 KB 148. N 70 NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Sale of Goods Act, 1930 71 Learning objectives After studying this chapter, you will be able to: Explain the concept and types of goods Describe the Sale of Goods Act, 1930 Explain the differences between sale and agreement to sell Differentiate between the contract of sale of goods and the contract for work and labour Explain the meaning and types of conditions and warranties Discuss the concept when a condition becomes a warranty, but a warranty cannot become a condition Explain the meaning of ‘title’ or ‘ownership’ Describe the rules related to the transfer of title Outline the meaning of the doctrine of Caveat Emptor and the exceptions Describe how a contract of sale is performed Discuss the meaning, rights and responsibilities of an unpaid seller Explain the meaning of hire purchase and hypothecation agreements >> >> >> >> >> >> >> >> >> M 2.1 Introduction IM S >> >> >> N In the previous chapter, you studied about the Contract Act, 1872. The chapter discussed the agreements, contracts, types of contracts and various related provisions. Till now, you have studied about the contracts in general. However, the contracts for sale of goods are governed by the Sale of Goods Act, 1930. Before 1930, the law relating to sale of goods was contained in the Indian Contract Act, 1872. In the year 1930, the Sale of Goods Act was enacted which came into force from 1st July 1930. This chapter starts with an explanation of the meaning of goods and its types, namely the existing goods, future goods and contingent goods. Agreements for sale and agreement to sell are quite different. Similarly, contracts for sale of goods and contract for work and labour are different. In case of any contract, there are certain stipulations that are divided into conditions and warranties. Condition is a stipulation that is an essential part of a contract, whereas warranty is a stipulation that is only collateral to a contract. Conditions and warranties are of two types, namely express and implied. A condition can be treated as a warranty, but the reverse is not true. The ownership of the goods is called the title of goods. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Quick Revision 72 Business Law The contracts for sale are guided by the doctrine of Caveat Emptor which means that examining the goods before buying is the primary responsibility of the buyer. There are certain exceptions to this rule. A seller who has not received the full amount of price is known as an unpaid seller and he has certain rights and duties. There are certain agreements, such as hire purchase agreement and the hypothecation agreement where the buyer takes the possession of the assets first and then makes payments in certain periodic amounts. In this chapter, you will study about Sale of Goods Act, 1930 at length. 2.2 Concept of Goods S According to Section 2(7) of the Sale of Goods Act, 1930, a good means every kind of movable property other than actionable claims and money; and includes stock and shares, growing crops, grass, and things attached to or forming part of the land which are agreed to be severed before sale or under the contract of sale. As per the definition of goods given in Section 2(7) of the Sale of Goods Act, 1930, ‘goods’ include and excludes certain items. The items that are included under the definition of goods are as follows: IM Know More Goods in general refer to merchandise or possessions or articles that can be bought and sold. According to economics, goods are used by human beings to satisfy their wants and provide utility. Goods can be made or grown. All types of movable property, such as computer, jewellery, vehicles, etc. Stocks and shares M Growing crops N Things attached to earth or forming part of the land which can be severed before sale or under a contract of sale. For example, apples hanging with branches of the tree will become goods only when they are separated from branches. The goods that are excluded under the definition of goods are as follows: Actionable Money claims such as book debts which is a legal tender Generally, there are three types of goods as shown in Figure 2.1: Existing Goods Future Goods Contingent Goods Figure 2.1: Three Types of Goods The three types of goods are explained as follows: Existing goods: These are goods that are owned and possessed by a seller at the time of making the contract of sale. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Sale of Goods Act, 1930 73 Example: If A, who is a shopkeeper, sells a television set to B, and the television is lying in A’s warehouse, it is a case of the sale of existing goods. Existing goods are further divided into two types, namely specific goods and uncertain goods. Specific goods are the goods that are identified and agreed upon at the time of making the contract of sale. On the contrary, uncertain goods are the goods that are not identified at the time of making the contract of sale. Future goods: These are the goods that are to be manufactured or produced or acquired by a seller after the contract of sale is made. Example: A is a farmer and he agrees to sell all the mangoes that would grow from April to July in the current year to B who is a wholesaler. S Contingent goods: These are the goods which may be acquired by the seller depending upon some contingency, i.e., the happening or non-happening of an event. IM Example: Nisha, a seller, agrees to sell some cosmetics to Madhu. If those specific goods arrive by a particular date by a particular ship, such goods are called contingent goods. self assessment Questions a. Stocks M 1. Which of the following is not considered to be a good as per the definition of goods as per the Sale of Goods Act, 1930? b. Money c. Growing crops d. Moveable property N 2. __________ are the goods that are owned and possessed by a seller at the time of making the contract of sale. 3. Contingent goods depend upon the happening or non-happening of an event. (a) True (b) False Activity Find out a few examples of contingent goods. 2.3 Sale of Goods Act, 1930 The Sale of Goods Act, 1930 is the governing law for the contracts of sale of goods. A contract of sale of goods is a contract according to which a seller transfers or agrees to transfer certain good(s) to a buyer for a given sum of money known as the price of the good. The contract of sale is a common term and is used to refer to the following two things: Sale An agreement to sell NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Know More Section 5 of the Sale of Goods Act, 1930 explains how the contract of sale is made: (1) A contract of sale is made by an offer to buy or sell goods for a price and the acceptance of such offer. The contract may provide for the immediate delivery of the goods or immediate payment of the price or both, or for the delivery or payment by instalments, or that the delivery or payment or both shall be postponed. (2) Subject to the provisions of any law for the time being in force, a contract of sale may be made in writing or by word of mouth, or partly in writing and partly by word of mouth or may be implied from the conduct of the parties. Business Law There are differences between sale (agreement for sale) and agreement to sell. These differences are discussed in the upcoming section. 2.3.1 Sale and Agreement to Sell The differences between an agreement for sale and an agreement to sell are shown in Table 2.1: Table 2.1: Sale and an Agreement to Sell S. No. Agreement for Sale Agreement to Sell Sale is when the goods are imme- Agreement to sell is when the diately transferred from the seller seller is to transfer the goods to to the buyer. the buyer at a future date. 2. Property in goods is transferred from the seller to the buyer immediately. Property in goods is not transferred from the seller to the buyer immediately but at a future date. 3. It is an executed contract. It is an executory contract. 4. It is absolute in nature. It is a conditional agreement. 5. The consequences of subsequent loss or damage have to be borne by the buyer. The consequences of subsequent loss or damage have to be borne by the seller. 6. An unpaid seller has a right to sue for the price. An unpaid seller has a right to sue for damages. M IM S 1. 7. The seller has a right to sue the The seller has a right to sue the buyer for the breach of a contract. buyer only for damages. 8. The seller cannot resale the goods. The seller can resell the goods. 9. If after the sale, the goods are lying in the possession of the seller and the goods are destroyed, the loss is the responsibility of the buyer. If the goods are in the possession of the buyer and the loss occurs due to any damage, the loss is the responsibility of the seller. 10. Example: Anjali buys 10 kg of wheat from Shyam by paying a price of ` 1,000. Example: Anjali agrees to sell 10 kg of wheat to Shyam if she gets the stock of the same for a price of ` 1,000. N 74 2.3.2 Difference between the Contract of Sale of Goods and the Contract for Work and Labour Till now, you studied the importance of contract of sale. However, apart from the contract of sale of goods, there are contracts for work and labour. The difference lies in the nature of these contracts because the contract of sale of goods deals in tangible goods that are sold and purchased by two parties, whereas contracts for work and labour deal in intangible services in the form of work and labour. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Sale of Goods Act, 1930 75 A contract of sale involves the selling of a good and the transfer of ownership of the good from a seller to the buyer for a given amount or price. In such a contract, the delivery of goods is of primary importance. Example: If A purchases a beautiful painting of an artist for a given price, then it is a contract of sale of goods. In a contract for work or labour, rendering of service and the exercise of skill is of primary importance. Work and labour means that there must be a provision of work or service which might require using some materials. Examples: S 1. If A is a sand artist and enters into a contract with B to perform a sand art for creating awareness regarding air pollution, then this contract is basically a contract where the skill of the artist is of essence. IM 2. If X enters into an agreement with Y, who is a graffiti artist to paint the walls of her backyard and provides all the required paints, brushes, etc., it is a contract for work and labour. If both the material and services are provided by one party, it may be a ‘sale’, though theoretically called ‘contract for work and labour’. Conditions and Warranties M 2.3.3 According to Section 12(1) of the Sale of Goods Act, 1930, a stipulation in a contract of sale with reference to goods which are the subject thereof, maybe a condition or a warranty. N When you buy some goods like electronic gadgets, you are concerned about their warranty period. You always ask the seller about the warranty in order to ensure that the product gets easily replaced or repaired even if it is found to be faulty after purchase. Thus, the sale or purchase of goods forms contractual relations between a buyer and the seller. These contractual relations lead to certain rights and liabilities. Whenever there is a breach of these rights and liabilities, the breach of contract arises. To avoid or curb the instances of the breach of contract, the terms ‘Condition’ and ‘Warranty’ are mentioned in the contract of sale in order to determine remedies the parties can claim in case of the breach by either of the parties. Know More What is a Condition? A condition is a stipulation which is essential for the very purpose of the contract and gives the aggrieved party an option to terminate the contract. Example: A asks B, a two-wheeler dealer, that he wants to purchase a bike that can run at a speed of 200 miles/hour. B suggests a bike to A, and A purchases the suggested bike. However, A finds that the bike purchased by him is not running at the required speed which was one of the conditions of the contract. On the breach of this condition, A is entitled to reject the bike and seek a refund of the price paid. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Know More According to Section 12(2) of the Sale of Goods Act 1930, a condition is a stipulation essential to the main purpose of the contract the breach of which gives rise to a right to treat the contract as repudiated. 76 Business Law It must be noted that the non-fulfilment of a condition is considered to be a breach of contract. In other words, non-fulfilment of a condition is considered akin to failure to perform the contract. When a condition is not fulfilled, the buyer has the right to terminate the contract and recover damages. CASE LAW Baldry vs. Marshall (1925) Facts: X consulted a car dealer Y and told him that he wanted to purchase a car for touring purposes. Y suggested that a Buggati car would be fit for the purpose. Relying upon the statement, he bought the Buggati car. Later on, the car turned to be unfit for the purpose of touring. IM S The Court observed that the suitability of the car for touring purpose was a condition because it was so important that the non-fulfilment defeated the very purpose of purchasing the car. It was held that A was entitled to return the car and get back the price paid. What is a Warranty? NOTE According to Section 12(3) of the Sales of Goods Act, 1930, a warranty is a stipulation collateral to the main purpose of the contract the breach of which gives rise to a claim for damages, but not to a right to reject the goods and treat the contract as repudiated. N Both conditions and warranties are stipulations and there is no fixed and certain rule to decide which stipulation is a condition and which one is a warranty. According to Section 12(4), whether a stipulation in a contract of sale is a condition or a warranty, depends in each case on the construction of the contract. A stipulation may be a condition, though called a warranty in the contract. M A warranty is a stipulation that is only collateral to the main purpose of the contract and the aggrieved party has the right to claim damages, but it cannot terminate the contract. Example: X asks a dealer Y to suggest a manual food processor that operates noiselessly and requires minimum effort to chop vegetables and knead dough. Y suggests a certain product to X. X buys the product. However, after a few days of use, he discovers that the food processor makes a lot of noise and it is not at all convenient to use. In this case, the statement about the noiseless use and minimum effort is only a warranty. The breach of such a warranty entitles X to claim damages, but he can neither reject the food processor nor terminate the sale contract. Types of Conditions There are two types of conditions, which are explained as follows: Express condition: It is a condition inserted in a contract with the mutual consent of both the parties. Example: If Sarita wants to buy an air conditioner that has a fivestar rating, then the five-star rating is an express condition. Implied condition: It is a condition that the law automatically presumes the existence of some terms in a contract, even though NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Sale of Goods Act, 1930 77 parties to a contract may not have made any express contract related to those. The law incorporates different implied conditions in a contract of sale as shown in Figure 2.2: Condition in a Sale by Description Condition as to Fitness or Quality Condition in a Sale by Sample Condition as to Merchantability S Conditions as to Title Figure 2.2: Implied Conditions in a Contract Let us now discuss these implied conditions. as to title: In every contract, there is an implied condition on the part of the seller that he is the owner of the goods. In the case of a sale, the seller has a right to sell goods and in case of an agreement to sell, the seller will have the right to sell at the time when the title of the property is to pass. IM Conditions in a sale by description: In a contract for the sale of goods by description, there is an implied condition that the goods shall correspond with the description given. The description may be in terms of grade, brand, symbol, packaging, quality or characteristics of the goods, such as basmati rice, champagne, MP wheat, etc. N Condition M Example: Ram purchases a second-hand car from Suresh, a car dealer. After a few months, the car was taken by the police for its being a stolen one. Held, Ram can recover the full price from Suresh since he has committed a breach of the condition of title. Example: X bought a machine from Y who claimed it to be only six months old. However, after using it, X found that the machine was extremely old. X has the right to reject the machine as the description of the machine does not match the one provided by the seller. Condition in a sale by sample: When, under a contract of sale, goods are supplied according to a sample, the implied conditions are that: The bulk shall correspond with the sample shown. The buyer shall have a reasonable opportunity of comparing the bulk with the sample. The goods must be free from any defect that renders goods un-merchantable and which is not apparent on reasonable examination (latent). NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 78 Business Law Example: In E&S Ruben Ltd. vs. Fair Bros. (1949), some rubber rolls were sold corresponding to the specific length and width. However, the actually supplied rolls did not match the sample, giving a right to the buyer to repudiate the contract. Condition as to fitness or quality: Under a contract of sale, there is no implied condition as to the quality or fitness of goods supplied. In fact, in most agreements, this assurance or condition of fitness or quality is specifically disclaimed by the seller. This is expressed by the principle of Caveat Emptor (i.e., let the buyer beware). However, the buyer has the right to satisfy himself/herself about the quality of goods. In the following cases, an implied condition is deemed to exist on part of the seller that the goods supplied shall be reasonably fit for the purpose for which the buyer wants them: buyer discloses the purpose for which the goods are needed except where the purpose is self-evident from the nature of goods; The buyer relies on the seller’s skill or judgement; The business of the seller must be to sell goods of that kind. Example: A customer purchased a packet of milk from H’s dairy. However, the milk was infected with typhoid bacteria, resulting in the customer’s wife falling ill on consumption of milk. He will be liable to pay damages as it is a case of breach of condition of fitness. M The principle of Caveat Emptor is contained in Section 16 of the Sale of Goods Act, 1930. IM NOTE S The N Condition as to merchantability: There is an implied condition that the goods shall be of merchantable quality, unless specifically disclaimed by the seller, or the goods are specifically stated to be sold on an ‘as is’ condition (i.e., with all their defects). The expression ‘merchantable quality’ means that goods are free from any latent defects. The quality and condition of the goods must be such that an individual would accept them as the goods of that description. Example: A customer bought some worst-quality coatings after seeing the sample. Later, it was discovered that the clothing was unfit for stitching into coats. The same defect was also there in the sample but it was discoverable by ordinary examination. The goods were held to be un-merchantable. Types of Warranty Similar to conditions, there are two types of warranties, which are: 1. Express warranty: It is a warranty which is added in a contract by expressed words (oral or written) between the two contracting parties. 2. Implied warranty: It is a warranty that can be inferred from the conduct of parties regarding the existence of some terms in NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Sale of Goods Act, 1930 79 a contract even though the parties to a contract may not have made any express contract related to those. Example: If Sarita purchases an air conditioner, there is an implied warranty that it must not be dented or otherwise damaged. Exhibit Types of Implied Warranty The law provides for the following types of implied warranties (unless otherwise agreed upon) in a contract of sale: Warranty of quiet possession: As per this implied warranty, the S buyers shall have and enjoy quiet possession of the goods. The buyer will not face any disturbance of any kind including the seller himself. This is an extension of the implied condition as to the title. If the buyer’s quiet possession is disturbed due to a defective title, the buyer can claim damages from the seller. as to freedom from encumbrances: As per this implied warranty, the goods that are sold must be free from any charge of a third party. In other words, the goods must be free from any encumbrance in favour of any third person. M Warranty IM Example: Anita purchases a laptop from Sarita and had spent some money on its repair. However, the laptop sold by Sarita was a stolen one. Therefore, in this case, Anita can file a suit for claim against Sarita for the recovery of damages, including the cost of repair. N Example: Mitali borrows ` 3, 00,000 from Rahul and hypothecates her car with Rahul as security. After a month, Mitali sells the car to Jagdish who buys the car in good faith. In this case, Jagdish can claim damages from Mitali because his possession is disturbed by Rahul having a charge. However, if the buyer is aware of such a charge or encumbrance, this warranty shall not hold. Warranty of disclosing the dangerous nature of goods to the ignorant buyer: As per this implied warranty, the seller has the duty to disclose the dangerous nature or dangers associated with the use of the goods that he is selling. In such a case, the buyer can claim compensation for damages. Example: Ashok purchases a strong chemical disinfectant from Zoya. Zoya knows that the packaging of the product is defective and must be handled with care, else it may prove to be dangerous. However, Zoya does not disclose this to Ashok who opens the packet and the disinfectant rushes out suddenly causing a severe damage to his eyes. In this case, Zoya is liable to pay for damages caused to Ashok. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law Difference between a Condition and a Warranty As mentioned earlier, both conditions and warranties are types of stipulations. The decision to categorise a certain stipulation as being a condition or a warranty depends on the very nature of the stipulation. If the stipulation forms the basis of a contract, it is considered as a condition and if the stipulation is only a collateral promise, then it is considered as a warranty. S When a buyer would not have purchased the goods in the absence of a stipulation, it is called a condition. However, if a buyer would still have purchased the goods in the absence of the stipulation, it is called a warranty. When the stipulations are only designed to provide an assurance with respect to quality and suitability of the goods, it is called a warranty. IM The difference between the two stipulations (condition and warranty) can be judged from the fact whether the breach of the stipulation would make the rights of the aggrieved party nugatory or not. If it does, the stipulation is a condition. If the stipulation is only auxiliary, it is a warranty. M In each case, the decision regarding whether a stipulation is a condition or warranty depends on the construction of the contract. In case of court disputes, the court takes guidance from the terms of the contract and circumstances. This view is also supported by Section 12(4) according to which a stipulation may be a condition, though called a warranty in the contract. Some of the important differences between a condition and a warranty are shown in Table 2.2: N 80 Table 2.2: Difference between Condition and Warranty S. No. Condition 1. A condition is a stipulation that is essential for the very purpose of the contract. A warranty is a stipulation that is collateral to the main purpose of the contract. 2. In case of a breach of condition, the aggrieved party can claim damages as well as terminate the contract. In case of breach of warranty, the aggrieved party has the right to only claim damages, but they cannot terminate the contract. 3. In case of a breach of condition, A breach of warranty cannot the aggrieved party has the option be treated as the breach of to treat the breach of condition as condition. a breach of warranty. In that particular case, the aggrieved party claims only damages. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Warranty Sale of Goods Act, 1930 81 A Condition can become a Warranty but a Warranty Cannot Become a Condition – Concept and Examples According to Section 13 of the Act, a condition is to be treated as a warranty under three cases as mentioned in Sections 13(1), 13(2) and 13(3). In all these three cases, the aggrieved party has the right to claim damages, but it cannot rescind the contract. Section 13(1) states that where a contract of sale is subject to any condition to be fulfilled by the seller, the buyer may waive the condition or elect to treat the breach of the condition as a breach of warranty and not as a ground for treating the contract as repudiated. S This means that the buyer may voluntarily waive off the condition. Here, the buyer’s waiving off of the condition and treating the breach of condition as a breach of warranty is completely voluntary and it depends upon the will of the buyer. IM When a buyer finds out that the seller has committed a breach of condition, the buyer has the right to repudiate the contract. However, if the buyer does not repudiate the contract, it is assumed that he has waived off the condition. And after a condition has been voluntarily waived off by the buyer, he cannot ask the seller to fulfil it. M Example: Lipikant, a wholesaler, agrees to supply 100 kg of A1 quality wax powder to Hemant, a retailer, at the rate of ` 130/kg. However, Lipikant supplies 100 kg of A3 quality wax powder at the rate of ` 90/ kg. Here, if Hemant does not repudiate the contract and considers voluntarily waiving off the condition, he can claim a compensation of ` 40/ kg from Lipikant. N Section 13(2) states that where a contract of sale is not severable and the buyer has accepted the goods or part thereof, the breach of any condition to be fulfilled by the seller can only be treated as a breach of warranty and not as a ground for rejecting the goods and treating the contract as repudiated, unless there is a term of the contract, express or implied, to that effect. This means that when a buyer has accepted goods and comes to know about the breach of condition later, he cannot reject the goods, but can claim for damages. There can be certain cases where the buyer has accepted a part of the entire consignment and the contract is indivisible. In this case, the buyer has to accept the entire consignment but has the right to claim damages. For example upon the purchase of a television, the buyer finds that the remote of the TV is defective and in that case the buyer cannot repudiate the contract but claim damages as both are not severable. In case of a divisible contract, the buyer has to retain goods that have been accepted and claim damages for the part of goods received. However, for the remaining unaccepted part of the goods, the buyer can repudiate the contract. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 82 Business Law In this regard, Section 42 of the Sales of Contract Act, 1930 describes acceptance as: the buyer is deemed to have accepted the goods when he intimates the seller that he has accepted them or when the goods have been delivered to him and he does any act in relation to them which is inconsistent with the ownership of the seller, or when, after the lapse of a reasonable time, he retains the goods without intimating the seller that he has rejected them. Section 13(2) states that nothing in this Section shall affect the case of any condition or warranty, fulfilment of which is excused by law by reason of impossibility or otherwise. 2.3.4 S It means that when the fulfilment of a condition or warranty is excused by the law, the condition may be treated as warranty. Title (Ownership) Know More A document of title is a document showing that the person named in the document or the person holding the document is the owner of the goods. This document of title can be transferred to any other person after that such person becomes entitled to receive goods either by endorsement or delivery. The documents that serve as document of title include bill of lading, railway receipt, multimodal transport document, dock-warrant, wharfinger’s certificate, etc. N M According to Section 2(4) of the Sale of Goods Act, 1930, ‘document of title to goods’ includes a bill of lading, dockwarrant, warehouse-keeper’s certificate, wharfingers’ certificate, railway receipt, [multimodal transport document], warrant or order for the delivery of goods and any other document used in the ordinary course of business as proof of the possession or control of goods, or authorising or purporting to authorise, either by endorsement or by delivery, the possessor of the document to transfer or receive goods thereby represented. IM In simple words, ‘title’ means ‘ownership’. A person that holds the title to the goods is the owner of the goods. The title or ownership of goods can be proved by using documents. There are also documents called document showing title. A document showing title is a document that shows the person, who is named in the document, as the owner of the shares. It must be remembered that such shares cannot be transferred by endorsement or delivery. The difference between document of title and document showing title is that a person named in the document or the one holding the document is the owner of goods. Whereas, in a document showing title, only the named person is the owner. The owner can transfer the document by endorsement or delivery, whereas the document showing title cannot be transferred. Transfer of Title and Related Rules The transfer of ownership in goods means passing of property in goods from one person to another. In a contract of sale of goods or property, the ownership is also passed on from the seller to the buyer. In the process of sale, it is relevant to determine the exact point of time when the property or goods are passed on from the seller to NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Sale of Goods Act, 1930 83 the buyer because the risk involving the property depends on the time of transfer. In a sale of goods contract, following have to be determined: Exact point in time when the property in goods is transferred from the buyer to the seller Point of time when the risk is transferred from the seller to the buyer Point of time when ownership and possession are passed on from the seller to the buyer The performance of a contract of sale of goods is done in three stages which are: S 1. Transfer of property in goods 2. Transfer of possession of goods IM 3. Transfer of title As a general rule, the property in goods is transferred to the buyer at the time as the parties intend it to be transferred. It means that the general rule of transfer of ownership depends on the intention of the parties to a contract. M The time for the transfer of ownership from the seller to the buyer can be decided by the parties freely. However, in cases where the intention of the parties is not clarified from the contract, some rules have to be followed. N For deciding the time of passing of property in goods from the seller to the buyer, goods are divided into three types, namely specific or ascertained goods, generic or unascertained goods and goods sent on approval. Let us now discuss the three cases as follows: 1. Specific/Ascertained goods: For specific goods, there can be three cases, which are as follows: a. Where there is an unconditional contract for the sale of specific goods in a deliverable condition, the ownership passes at the time when the contract is made. b. Where there is a contract for the sale of specific goods not in a deliverable condition, the ownership passes when the goods are made into a deliverable state and the buyer has information regarding it. c. Where there is a contract for the sale of specific goods in a deliverable state, but the seller has to weigh or measure goods to ascertain the price, the ownership passes when the seller has ascertained the price and the buyer has information regarding the same. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education NOTE The transfer of title (ownership) plays a crucial role in the contract of sale of goods. The legal rights and duties of the buyer and the seller are decided by the ownership of goods. Business Law 2. Generic/Unascertained goods: At the outset, it is a general rule that property in such goods does not pass until the goods are unascertained. In the case of generic goods, the ownership passes when goods are ascertained and are appropriated by the seller or the buyer, with due assent of the other party. It must be noted that the consent may be gained before or after the appropriation. The appropriation may be done by the seller and assented to by the buyer or vice versa. Example: Ramesh, a wholesaler of sugar, contracts to sell 100 kg of sugar to Mohan. He selects 100 bags of 1 kg each of sugar and Mohan approves these 100 bags. This is appropriation. S 3. Goods sent on approval: For goods sent on approval, there can be three cases as follows: IM a. When the buyer signifies his approval or acceptance (express or implied), the ownership passes after the buyer’s approval or acceptance is communicated to the seller. b. When the buyer adopts a transaction by doing some act that shows the acceptance of the goods, such as pledging of goods, then ownership passes after the act of adoption is done. M c. When the buyer fails to return the goods and some time has been fixed for return of goods, ownership passes on the expiry of fixed time. d. When the buyer fails to return the goods and no time has been fixed for return of goods, ownership passes on the expiry of a reasonable time. N 84 Apart from these, in case of standing trees, the ownership passes when the trees are felled and ascertained. The title is usually transferred by the owner himself. The general rule to be followed is “nemo dat quod non-habet” that means that no one can give a better title than himself. In any case, if a person purchases and acquires the possession of a stolen good, then he must return that to the actual owner. In case a seller sells the goods when he does not have a title, the buyer acquires no title in the goods. Title and Risk of Loss Risk of loss is passed with ownership or passing of property in goods. The person, who is the owner of the goods (which have suffered a loss) at the time when loss occurred, has to bear the loss irrespective of whether or not the delivery of the goods was made. Example: Sita selects 10 kg rice, pays for the same and let the rice remain in the shop with an arrangement of picking it up later. Meanwhile, there is a flood and the rice gets destroyed. Sita will be liable to bear the loss. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Sale of Goods Act, 1930 85 2.3.5 Doctrine of Caveat Emptor and Exceptions The term ‘Caveat Emptor’ means ‘let the buyer beware’. It is a fundamental principle followed in contracts of sale of goods. It means that it is the responsibility of the buyer to check the suitability and defects in a good, he is purchasing. Stated another way, it is not the duty of the seller to point out any defect. The buyer must make use of his skill and judgement while making the purchase. In this regard, Section 16 of the states that there is no implied warranty or condition for the quality of the goods or for the fitness, as to the purpose of the buyer under the contract of sale. However, there are certain exceptions to the doctrine of Caveat Emptor as follows: a seller misrepresents any detail related to good and the buyer purchases the good on the basis of the representation, the doctrine of Caveat Emptor does not hold and such a contract is voidable at the will of the buyer. IM S If If a seller conceals any defect in the goods he is selling, in such a way the buyer has apprised the seller of his requirement and depends on the skill and judgement of the seller, the doctrine of Caveat Emptor does not hold. When N When M that such defects do not reveal upon reasonable examination or if the seller engages in false representation and the buyer purchases the goods based on such false representation and enters into a contract of sale, then such a contract becomes voidable. Then the buyer has the right to terminate the contract and claim damages. a seller makes a sale based on the description, it is implied that the goods must correspond with the description. When a buyer buys certain goods in bulk and he has based his decision after examining a sample and the goods received do not match with the quality as shown in the sample, the doctrine does not hold. 2.3.6 Performance of the Contract of Sale Performance of a contract is discussed in Sections 31 to 44 of the Sale of Goods Act, 1930. For a seller, performance of a contract means delivery of the goods to the buyer. For a buyer, the performance of a contract means accepting the delivery of goods and making the payment as per the contract terms. Delivery means the voluntary transfer of goods from the seller to the buyer. The seller must be willing to give the possession of the goods to the buyer for a price and the buyer must be willing to accept and pay the price. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law The first part of the performance of a contract is delivery. Delivery can be of three types which are as follows: 1. Actual delivery: In the case of actual delivery, goods are transferred by the seller to the buyer or to his agent. 2. Symbolic delivery: At times, it is not possible to make the actual delivery of goods such as in case of bulk goods or bulky goods. In this case, delivery is given symbolically such as by handing over the keys. 3. Constructive delivery: In case of constructive delivery, it is not made by physical or symbolic modes. In such cases, an individual possesses the products for the benefit of the purchaser. Constructive delivery can be made in three ways: S When a seller, after selling goods, agrees to hold the goods for the buyer. a third party holds the goods for the seller and agrees and acknowledges to hold them for the buyer. IM When The second part of the performance of contract is a buyer’s acceptance of goods. When the buyer gives his assent, the goods are accepted. But, before a buyer gives his assent, he can follow the steps mentioned below: M 1. Examine the products upon delivery. It means that on receiving the delivery of the goods, the buyer has the right to examine the goods to confirm whether or not they conform to the order and are in a good condition. 2. A buyer is deemed to have accepted goods in the following cases: N 86 He informs the seller that he has received goods and they are appropriate. He does an act to the goods which is inconsistent with the rights of the seller, such as resale or pledge of the goods received by him. He retains the goods after the expiry of reasonable time without informing the seller. The third and last part of the performance of a contract relates to making the payment for goods received. The buyer, after receiving the goods, must make the absolute payment in line with the terms of the contract. In case the price is to be paid in instalments, it must be paid as per the payment schedule. 2.3.7 Unpaid Seller An unpaid seller refers to a seller who has not received the full price for the goods sold by him. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Sale of Goods Act, 1930 87 The term ‘unpaid seller’ has been defined in Section 45 of the Sale of Goods Act, 1930 as follows: (1) The seller of goods is deemed to be an ‘unpaid seller’ within the meaning of this Act— (a) When the whole of the price has not been paid or tendered. (b) When a bill of exchange or other negotiable instrument has been received as conditional payment and the condition on which it was received has not been fulfilled by reason of the dishonour of the instrument or otherwise. S As per the given definition, the seller of goods is considered as an unpaid seller in two cases – first, when the full price has not been paid; and, second when a cheque, bill of exchange or any other negotiable instrument has been received as a conditional payment, but is dishonoured. Goods Full are sold by the seller, but the price is due. price is not received. the price is not paid immediately, a negotiable instrument, such as bill of exchange, cheque, etc., are received as payment. The M If IM The conditions that must be satisfied for an unpaid seller are as follows: negotiable instrument received had been dishonoured. N Example: If Sameeksha sold a T-shirt for ` 1,500 to Aditya, but Aditya paid her ` 1,300 only, then Sameeksha is an unpaid seller. If Sameeksha sold a T-shirt for ` 1,500 to Aditya, but Aditya paid the whole amount through a cheque that was dishonoured, then Sameeksha is an unpaid seller. If Sameeksha sold a T-shirt for ` 1,500 to Aditya, but allows a time of one month to make the payment, but does not receive the payment after one month, then Sameeksha is an unpaid seller. There are certain cases where the seller cannot be called an unpaid seller, which are as follows: If the payment has been received in full, but some other expenses have not been paid, the seller will not be called an unpaid seller. If the seller has sold the products on credit, the seller cannot be called an unpaid seller till the expiry of the credit period. If a buyer has paid the full price of goods, but the seller refuses to accept the payment, he cannot be called an unpaid seller. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 88 Business Law Rights of an Unpaid Seller Against Goods Where the Property in Goods has Passed to the Buyer but not the possession of Goods Lien Stoppage in Transit Resale S Where the Property and possession in Goods has Passed to the Buyer Against the Buyer IM Rights of an Unpaid Seller The rights of an unpaid seller are shown in Figure 2.3: Suit for Price Suit for Damages Suit for Interest Figure 2.3: Rights of an Unpaid Seller Let us now discuss these rights in detail as follows: M RIGHTS AGAINST GOODS the property in goods has passed to the buyer: The rights of an unpaid seller when the property in goods has passed to the buyer are as follows: N Where 99 Right of lien: Right to lien means that the seller can retain the possession of the goods until he receives the full price of the goods. The right to lien can be exercised under the following three circumstances: zz When the goods have been sold without any stipulation as to credit. zz When NOTE Lien is of two types- namely particular lien and general lien. Particular lien is exercisable only against goods for which payment is outstanding. General lien can be exercised for all previous outstanding amounts. the goods were sold on credit, but the credit period has expired. zz When the buyer becomes insolvent. According to Section 47(2), the seller may exercise his right of lien even if he possesses goods as an agent or a bailee for the buyer. After a lien has been exercised, it is relevant to determine when a lien will be terminated. A lien is terminated when the seller loses possession of goods. This happens when delivery of goods is made by the seller to the carrier or when the buyer lawfully obtains the possession from the seller by paying the due amount. A lien may also be terminated when the seller voluntarily waives off the lien. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Sale of Goods Act, 1930 89 99 Right of stoppage in transit: Right of stoppage of goods in transit means that the goods that have been dispatched by the seller and are in the possession of middlemen in transit, the delivery of goods can be stopped and retained by the seller till the full amount of goods is received. The right of stoppage in transit can be exercised only if the following conditions are met: zz The buyer has become insolvent. zz Goods are in transit, i.e., goods are not in the possession of the seller and have not reached the buyer. zz Unpaid seller can stop goods in transit only in order to receive the full amount of payment. IM S The duration of transit is the time when goods are handed over from the seller to the middlemen till the time the buyer receives the goods. If the buyer refuses to take delivery, the transit continues. The transit of goods is terminated in the following cases: zz Delivery buyer of goods at the intended destination of the zz Interception by the buyer by the carrier to the buyer that he holds goods on his behalf M zz Acknowledgement zz Part delivery has been made with the intention to deliv- ering the whole N There are two modes of stoppage in transit i.e. by taking actual possession of goods and by giving notice to the carrier not to deliver the goods. When the seller stops goods in transit, the goods are returned to the seller and all the related expenses are borne by the seller. 99 Right of resale: An unpaid seller has the right to resell the goods in the following cases: zz Goods are of perishable nature. zz When the unpaid seller expressly reserves a right of resale in the case a buyer makes a default in payment. zz When the unpaid seller has exercised his right of lien or stoppage in transit and gives a notice to the buyer about his intention to resell if the buyer does not repay the amount in a reasonable amount of time. Where the property in goods has not passed to the buyer: In addition to the above-mentioned three rights, in case when the property in goods has not passed to the buyer, the unpaid seller also has an additional right to withhold delivery if the goods have not been passed to the buyer. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law B. RIGHTS AGAINST THE BUYER The rights of an unpaid seller against the buyer are as follows: Suit for price: If, in a contract of sale, the property in goods has passed from the seller to the buyer, but the buyer refuses to pay the price, the seller has the right to sue the buyer for price. In certain cases, the property in goods may not have passed from the seller to the buyer, but the contract makes it necessary to pay the price at a certain date, then the seller may sue the buyer for price. Suit for damages: An unpaid seller may sue the buyer for claiming damages in the following cases: 99 When price the buyer refuses to accept the goods and pay the the buyer repudiates the contract before the date of delivery for interest: A seller may recover such interest from the buyer if there is an agreement between the seller and the buyer which specifically states about the interest that would be charged on the price of the goods after the payment becomes due. However, if there is no specific agreement regarding the interest payment, the seller may charge interest after notifying the buyer of the interest that has become due. M IM Suit S 99 When Responsibilities of an Unpaid Seller Some important responsibilities of an unpaid seller are as follows: Delivering N 90 the goods back to the buyer after he has made the payment while exercising his right to stoppage in transit. Giving notice to the middleman (carrier or bailee) who possesses the goods for stopping goods in transit. Maintaining Giving notice to the buyer that he intends to resell the goods. Bearing transit. the goods in a deliverable state. the expenses of redelivery if he has stopped goods in 2.3.8 Hire Purchase and Hypothecation Agreements Hire purchase agreements and hypothecation agreements are specific types of agreements that are used by buyers to purchase assets by making payments in periodical instalments. Hire Purchase Agreement Hire purchase is an agreement in which the possession of an asset is transferred from one person to another but the ownership remains NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Sale of Goods Act, 1930 91 with the vendor. The payment may be made in instalments and the ownership will be transferred in favour of the buyer only on the completion of payment of all agreed number of instalments. However, the buyer can use assets. The main features of a hire purchase agreement are as follows: There are two parties, namely the hirer and the hiree (the vendor or the owner). The hirer is the person who makes use of the assets while making payment of the asset on an instalment basis. In a hire purchase transaction, there is no transfer of ownership till the whole amount or until the payment of final instalment. transaction is a bailment coupled with the hirer’s option to purchase by paying all the agreed number of instalments. S The hire purchase agreement includes two elements, namely an element of bailment and an element of sale. IM A There is no obligation on part of the buyer to purchase the asset. Options are available with him to either buy or decline the hire purchase agreement. Sale M The main differences between a hire purchase agreement and sale are as follows: is governed by the Sale of Goods Act, 1930, while the hire purchase agreement is merely a combination of bailment and sale. the case of sale, the ownership is transferred immediately upon payment while in the case of the hire purchase agreement; only the possession with the right to use the asset is given to the hirer. Payment N In for a sale may be in cash, credit or instalment, while, in a hire purchase agreement, the payment is made in instalments. On the failure of the buyer to make payment, the seller cannot take back assets but sue the buyer for the unpaid portion of the price. However, in a hire purchase agreement, the owner can take back the asset on default by the hirer to pay even a single instalment. Sale involves price, whereas hire purchase includes some amount of interest in the total amount of payment. The buyer, in the case of sale, has the right of resale and the subsequent buyer shall get a good title. In the hire purchase, the hirer has no right to sell the asset without the completion of payment. Hypothecation Agreement Hypothecation is a legal transaction that involves movable assets and creates an equitable charge on the assets. In such a transaction, secuNMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law rity interest is created without having to transfer the possession of assets as the security remains in the possession of the borrower. The security is charged in favour of the lender through documents that are executed by the borrower. In hypothecation, there are three parties, the seller, the financier and the borrower. Difference between Hire Purchase Agreement and Hypothecation Some of the important differences between hire purchase agreement and hypothecation are shown in Table 2.3: Table 2.3: Differences between Hire Purchase Agreement and Hypothecation Hire Purchase Agreement Hypothecation 1. In a hire purchase transaction, the possession of the assets is transferred to the hirer, but the ownership remains with the hiree. Hypothecation transaction involves the transfer of possession along with the transfer of documents of the ownership to the seller. 2. There are two parties, namely the hirer and the hiree. There are three parties in hypothecation namely the seller, the financier and the borrower. 3. In a hire purchase agreement, there are two elements, namely bailment and sale. Hypothecation includes an element of pledge. M IM S S. No. self assessment Questions N 92 4. Which of the following is not true in the context of a condition? a. A type of stipulation b. Essential for the very purpose of the contract c. Aggrieved party can terminate the contract d. Collateral to the main purpose of the contract 5. Contract of sale is a common term and involves sale and agreement to sell. (a) True (b) False 6. Rule as to no liability of seller for the quality or fitness of goods supplied is usually expressed by the principle of __________. 7. Which of the following rights is available exclusively in case the property in goods has not passed to the buyer? a. Right of resale b. Right of stoppage in transit c. Right to withhold delivery d. Right of lien NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Sale of Goods Act, 1930 93 8. The __________ in goods means passing of property in goods from one person to another. Activity Study any case law related to the suit for interest filed by an unpaid seller. Prepare a synopsis for the case law. 2.4 Summary S Goods in general refer to merchandise or possessions or articles that can be bought and sold. are of three types, namely existing goods, future goods and contingent goods. S Goods Sale of Goods Act, 1930 is the governing law for the contracts of sale of goods. IM The Sale is when the goods are immediately transferred from the seller to the buyer, whereas agreement to sell is when the seller is to transfer the goods to the buyer at a future date. condition is a stipulation which is essential for the very purpose of the contract and it gives the aggrieved party an option to terminate the contract. M A A warranty is a stipulation that is only collateral to the main purpose of the contract and the aggrieved party has the right to claim damages but it cannot terminate the contract. of implied conditions include: N Types Conditions as to title Condition in a sale by description Condition in a sale by sample Condition as to fitness or quality Condition as to merchantability Types of implied warranties include: Warranty of quiet possession Warranty as to no encumbrances Warranty of disclosing the dangerous nature of goods to the ignorant buyer Title means ownership. A person who holds the title to the goods is the owner of the goods. The transfer of ownership in goods means passing of property in goods from one person to another. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law The time for the transfer of ownership from the seller to the buyer can be decided by the parties freely. For deciding the time of passing of property in goods from the seller to the buyer, the goods are divided into three types, namely specific or ascertained goods, generic or unascertained goods and goods sent on approval. It is not the duty of the seller to point out any defect. The buyer must make use of his skill and judgement while making the purchase. The first part of the performance of a contract is delivery. The second part of the performance of a contract is the buyer’s acceptance of goods. The third and last part of performance of contract relates to making S the payment for goods received. An unpaid seller refers to a seller who has not received the full price for the goods sold by him. rights of an unpaid seller include: IM Various Right of lien Right of stoppage in transit Right of resale Right to withhold goods M N 94 Suit for price Suit for damages Suit for interest Hire purchase agreements and hypothecation agreements are specific types of agreements which are used by buyers to purchase assets by making payments in periodical instalments. key words Condition: A stipulation that is central for the very purpose of the contract. Implied condition: A condition that the law automatically presumes the existence of some terms in a contract even though the parties to a contract may not have made any express contract related to those. Merchantability: The state of being fit for market, i.e., the goods can be bought and sold. Security interest: An enforceable legal claim or lien on collateral. Specific goods: Goods that are identified and agreed upon at the time of making the contract of sale. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Sale of Goods Act, 1930 95 2.5 Descriptive Questions 1. Explain the concept of goods as per the Sale of Goods Act, 1930. 2. Explain the Sale of Goods Act, 1930. 3. Describe the meaning of conditions and warranties and their types. 4. With reference to conditions and warranties, it is said that a condition can become a warranty, but a warranty cannot become a condition. Explain this concept with the help of examples. 5. What is the meaning of Caveat Emptor? Discuss its exceptions. 6. Who is an unpaid seller and what are his rights? S 7. Explain the meaning of a hire purchase agreement. 2.6 Answers and Hints Q. No. Concept of Goods 1. b. 2. Existing goods 3. a. 4. d. Collateral to the main purpose of the contract 5. a. 6. Caveat Emptor 7. c. 8. transfer of ownership N Sale of Goods Act, 1930 Answer Money True M Topic IM ANSWERS FOR SELF ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS True Right to withhold delivery HINTS FOR DESCRIPTIVE QUESTIONS 1. According to Section 2(7) of the Sale of Goods Act, 1930, a good means every kind of movable property other than actionable claims and money; and includes stock and shares, growing crops, grass, and things attached to or forming part of the land which are agreed to be severed before sale or under the contract of sale. Refer to Section 2.2 Concept of Goods 2. The Sale of Goods Act, 1930 is the governing law for the contracts of sale of goods. A contract of sale of goods is a contract which a seller transfers or agrees to transfer certain good(s) to a buyer for a given sum of money known as price of the good. Refer to Section 2.3 Sale of Goods Act, 1930 3. There are two types of stipulations in a contract of sale, namely conditions and warranties. A condition is a stipulation which is NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education ? Business Law essential for the very purpose of the contract and it gives the aggrieved party an option to terminate the contract. Refer to Section 2.3 Sale of Goods Act, 1930 4. Section 13 of the Sale of Goods Act, 1930 states that a condition is to be treated as a warranty under three cases as mentioned in Sections 13(1), 13(2) and 13(3). Refer to Section 2.3 Sale of Goods Act, 1930 5. The doctrine of Caveat Emptor is a fundamental principle which means that it is the responsibility of the buyer to check the suitability and defects in a good he is purchasing. Refer to Section 2.3 Sale of Goods Act, 1930 S 6. An unpaid seller refers to a seller who has not received the full price for the goods sold by him. The term ‘unpaid seller’ has been defined in Section 45 of the Sale of Goods Act, 1930. An unpaid seller has rights against the goods as well as against the buyer. Refer to Section 2.3 Sale of Goods Act, 1930 IM 7. Hire purchase is an agreement in which the possession of an asset is transferred from one person to another person, but the ownership remains with the vendor. The payment may be made in instalments. Refer to Section 2.3 Sale of Goods Act, 1930 M 2.7 Suggested Readings & References Suggested Readings Kumar, A. (2001). Mercantile Law. Atlantic Publishers & Dist. Pillai, N 96 R. Legal Aspect of Business (Mercantile Law). New Delhi: S. Chand. e-References Implied Conditions in the Sale of Goods. (2020). Retrieved 7 April 2020, from https://www.lawyersclubindia.com/articles/IMPLIEDCONDITIONS-IN-THE-SALE-OF-GOODS–379.asp Duties of an Unpaid Seller under Sale of Goods Act - iPleaders. (2020). Retrieved 7 April 2020, from https://blog.ipleaders.in/dutiesof-an-unpaid-seller/ NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education C h 3 a pt e r Laws Related to the Formation of Businesses IM Introduction Unincorporated and Incorporated Forms of Business 3.2.1 Sole Proprietorship—Meaning, Features, Advantages, and Disadvantages 3.2.2 Partnership and the Partnership Act, 1932 Limited Liability Partnership (LLP) Act, 2008 3.2.3 3.2.4Distinction between Partnership Firm Incorporated under the Partnership Act and Partnership Firm Incorporated under the LLP Act 3.2.5 Hindu Undivided Family (HUF) and its Characteristics 3.2.6Distinction between a Partnership Firm Incorporated under Partnership Act, 1932 and an HUF Self Assessment Questions Activity 3.3 Companies Act, 2013 3.3.1 Concept and Evolution of a Company 3.3.2 Characteristics of a Company 3.3.3 Kinds of Companies 3.3.4 Difference between a Private Company and a Public Company 3.3.5 Lifting the Corporate Veil 3.3.6Formation and Incorporation of a Company—Conditions and the Process of Incorporation 3.3.7 Constitutional Documents of a Joint Stock Company 3.3.8 Memorandum of Association (MoA) Articles of Association (AoA) 3.3.9 3.3.10 Binding Force of MoA and AoA Difference between MoA and AoA 3.3.11 3.3.12 Public Limited Company—Prospectus 3.3.13 Raising Capital using Shares and Debentures Membership (Ownership) and Management 3.3.14 N M 3.1 3.2 S Contents NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law CONTENTS 3.3.15 M IM S 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 Corporate Governance and Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) Self Assessment Questions Activity Summary Descriptive Questions Answers and Hints Suggested Readings and References N 98 NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Laws Related to the Formation of Businesses 99 Introductory Caselet Formation of Partnership N M IM S Mr X, Mr Y, and Mr Z are three persons interested in starting a business. They all meet and decide to form a partnership and conduct business operations together. They prepare a partnership deed which includes the name of the firm and the objective of the business. They also decide a profit-sharing ratio among themselves in order to distribute the profit earned in the business. The rights and duties of the partners are also decided. These are expressly defined in the partnership deed. The partnership deed also contains provisions about the new partners and also for the minor partners. In this way, a partnership firm has been formed by three persons to conduct the operations of a business. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Case Objective This caselet mentions the formation of a partnership business. Business Law Learning objectives After studying this chapter, you will be able to: Explain the meaning of sole proprietorship and partnership Understand the nature of a partnership deed and its duration Discuss the legal position of a minor admitted to a partnership firm and his/her rights and liabilities Explain express and implied authority and the scope of implied authority of partners Discuss the rights, relations, and liabilities of a partner against a third party and other partners Describe the rights and liabilities of the newly admitted partners Explain the changes in a firm, such as retirement, expulsion, insolvency, and death of a partner Explain the Limited Liability Partnership (LLP) Act, 2008 Discuss Hindu Undivided Family (HUF) and its characteristics Explain the roles and responsibilities of Karta Explain the concept of a company and its legal characteristics Describe the legal provisions regarding the formation and incorporation of a company Elaborate on the purpose and regulations concerning Memorandum of Association (MoA) and Articles of Association (AoA) Describe the concept of a prospectus and its purpose Explain various aspects of a membership Explain the concept of shares and debentures Discuss corporate governance and Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) >> >> >> >> >> >> IM >> >> S >> M >> >> >> >> N 100 >> >> >> >> 3.1 Introduction Quick Revision In the previous chapter, you had studied about the Sale of Goods Act, 1930 which is one of the most important laws of contract for conducting business in India. This chapter discusses the principal forms of business organisations. The oldest of these forms is the sole proprietorship. Most small shops in villages, towns, and cities selling all kinds of daily-use items are of this kind. In comparison, if two or more persons decide to set up a business for sharing the profits earned, it is called a partnership. A partnership between persons can be established through an agreement, which can be either written or oral. An oral agreement is, however, not recognised under the statutory laws governing partnerships in India. Further, oral agreements may lead to ambiguity and disputes in future. Hence, it is better to have a writNMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Laws Related to the Formation of Businesses 101 ten agreement between partners. Rights and duties created under the Partnership Act, 1932, however, can be enforced in a court of law only if the partnership is registered and a written partnership agreement is filed with the Registrar. That said, an unregistered partnership firm can be sued by a third party. The law relating to partnerships in India is governed by the Partnership Act, 1932 and the Limited Liability Partnership (LLP) Act, 2008. In this chapter, we will study the various forms of partnership and the types of partners. The relationship between partners and their rights and duties are also discussed. The chapter also discusses different Acts for various other forms of business establishments such as Hindu Undivided Family (HUF) and joint stock companies. Unincorporated and Incorporated Forms of Business S 3.2 Sole N M IM A business can be established in the form of sole proprietorship, HUF, partnership, or a joint stock company. It depends upon the choice of owners to decide the structure of their business. They can choose either an unincorporated or an incorporated form of business. Incorporation of business is a process of creating a separate legal entity for a business as per the statutory laws. It can reduce the magnitude of risk and provide tax benefits and legal protection as well. In an unincorporated form of business, the owner is responsible for all the liability and responsibility except in the case of a limited liability partnership. The business does not become a separate legal entity. There are different ways of establishing a business. Let us study the major forms of incorporated business, which are as follows: proprietorship Partnership HUF Joint firm (unlimited or limited liability) stock company 3.2.1 Sole Proprietorship—Meaning, Features, Advantages, and Disadvantages Sole proprietorship refers to the type of business that is operated by a single person, though he/she may take the help of his/her family members for the purpose of running the business. The profits and risks are solely of the owner. The owner of the business is responsible for all the important decisions and day-to-day activities. Essential Features of Sole Proprietorship Some of the essential features of sole proprietorship are as follows: The business is owned and controlled by a single individual. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education NOTE The sole proprietorship is the simplest business form under which one can operate a business. It is not a legal entity. Business Law The concerned individual assumes all risks to which the business is exposed. The individual’s liability is unlimited, i.e., his/her personal assets can also be used for the payment of business liabilities. The business has no separate existence apart from the sole proprietor. No complex legal formalities are necessary to set up the sole proprietary business except for some statutory restrictions under local regulations. The sole proprietor enjoys unlimited freedom of action as regards the nature of business, decision-making, the place of business, whether to make cash or credit transactions, etc. proprietor’s family generally joins him/her in performing various tasks. of the proprietor is unlimited, thereby exposing his/her personal financial fortunes to great uncertainty. IM Liability S The M Sole proprietorship is the best option for a business in which the investment and associated risks are few; the nature of business and decision-making is simple; and customers are in direct contact with the business. Retail shops, eateries, and businesses based on personal skills such as beauty salons, consultancy and advisory business, travel services, transportation, etc., are feasible to be carried out under sole proprietorship form of business. Advantages of Sole Proprietorship N 102 Operating a sole proprietorship is relatively easy and provides relaxation to the owner. There are several advantages of conducting businesses in the form of sole proprietorship, some of which are as follows: No registration required: A sole proprietorship does not need any registration except for some local licensing requirements in case of medicine stores, restaurants, or those requiring professional training under local regulations. No maintenance of formal accounts required: All incorporated firms and companies have to maintain their accounts in prescribed formats, which must also be audited by a qualified auditor. There is no such compulsion in case of sole proprietorship firms. Control and ownership: Sole proprietors have complete control and ownership rights on their businesses. A sole proprietor is the single owner of his/her business entity and has every right to take all the decisions by himself/herself. Tax: The business will be taxed at the rates applicable to personal income and not as per the corporate tax rates. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Laws Related to the Formation of Businesses 103 Disadvantages of Sole Proprietorship Sole proprietorship also has a few disadvantages, which are as follows: No perpetuity: As the business is handled only by one person, the business may have to close down in the event of his/her death and there is no other person to run the business. Unlimited liability: As the business is not a separate legal entity, the loss in business may be recovered from the personal property of the owner/proprietor. Difficulties in raising funds: It is quite challenging to generate capital because the preliminary funds are provided by the owner or proprietor himself/herself. There are no provisions to issue shares or other forms of fund-raising actions. size: Sole proprietorship carries a limit for expansion, beyond which it becomes difficult for the owner to expand. The growth becomes stagnant as it continues to remain with the sole owner. IM 3.2.2 S Limited Partnership and the Partnership Act, 1932 N M A partnership is a legal relationship between persons who have agreed to work together to perform certain business activities. As per Section 4 of the Indian Partnership Act, 1932 (hereinafter referred to as the ‘Partnership Act’), partnership is defined as ‘the relation between persons who have agreed to share the profits of a business carried on by all or any one of them acting for all’. It is a contractual relationship between two or more people who have agreed to share profits in an agreed ratio in order to conduct a business. Features of A Partnership The following are the salient features of a partnership: The partnership is an association of two or more persons: A minimum of two people are required to constitute a partnership firm. The maximum number of partners in a partnership firm cannot exceed 100; otherwise, it will become an illegal association. It is important to note that a partnership firm cannot be a partner in another partnership firm. The association between partners must be based on an agreement between two or more persons: A partnership is based on a mutual agreement (whether oral or written) between two parties or partners involved. It cannot arise from status or birth as in the case of the persons constituting an HUF business. Moreover, a partnership also cannot arise by operation of law such as in the case of co-ownership. The partnership agreement must be to carry on some business: The term ‘business’ encompasses every trade, occupation, or NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education NOTE The partnership firm is registered when the registrar of firms is satisfied with the compliance of Section 58 of the Partnership Act. Business Law profession. Though the term ‘business’ connotes the doing of numerous transactions, a partnership may arise even for doing a single transaction. Without business, no partnership can arise. agreement must be to share the profits of the business: The agreement must be to carry on a business to share profits arising from the business. Though there is no mention of ‘sharing of losses’, it is implied from the agreement; however, it is not necessary that all partners agree to share the losses. Where the partnership agreement is silent on sharing of losses, it is assumed that all partners will share losses as they have agreed to share profits. Though the sharing of profits is an essential element of a partnership, exception exists in the form of ‘partner by estoppel’ and ‘partner by holding out’. Also, there may exist a profitsharing relationship between two persons but that alone does not necessarily make them partners, e.g., receipt of share or payment by a widow of a deceased partner. S The The business must be carried on by all or any one of them acting M IM for all: A partnership is based upon the idea of mutual agency. Every partner of a firm has a dual role—the one of a principal and the other of an agent. In other words, the law of partnership is an extension of the law of agency. Thus, a partner can bind other partners by his/her acts done in the ordinary course of business like an agent. Similarly, he/she is bound by the acts of other partners as he/she is in the position of a principal herein. Unlimited N 104 liability: The liability of each partner of a firm is unlimited besides being joint and several. It implies that any single partner may be called upon to pay the entire liability of the firm. This is called ‘several liability’. Except for such a situation, the liability of the partners is joint so that all of them are jointly liable to pay the debts of the firm. No separate legal entity: The partnership firm is merely an ‘association of individuals’, where the firm name is only a collective name of those individuals; the firm does not have the status of legal entity. Consequently, a firm has no independent legal existence of its own apart from the persons who constitute it. Utmost good faith: A partnership agreement is based on mutual confidence and trust between partners. The partners must, therefore, be just and honest towards other partners. They must disclose all the facts and render true accounts relating to the business of the firm and not make any secret profits. The failure to observe good faith may lead to the dissolution of partnership. Restriction on a partner’s transfer of interest to outsider(s) without the consent of other partners: No partner can transfer his/her share to an outsider without the consent of all the other partners. Unanimity of consent: No change can be made in the nature of the business without the unanimous consent of all the partners. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Laws Related to the Formation of Businesses 105 Types of PartnershipS The various types of partnerships are discussed as follows: According to business objective: On the basis of business objectives, the types of partnerships are as follows: Partnership at will: It is a form of business partnership that exists on the will of the partners and there is no fixed period for the existence of partnership. Particular partnership: It is a form of business establishment that exists for the object of conducting a particular business venture. The partnership gets terminated automatically with the completion of venture. to tenure: On the basis of tenure of business, the types of partnerships are as follows: S According for fixed term: It is a form of business partnership that is established for a fixed period of time say 2 years, 5 years, or more years. At the expiry of that period, the partnership comes to an end automatically. IM Partnership Flexible partnership: It is a form of business partnership that is formed not for a particular venture or period. According to nature of liability: On the basis of nature of liability, M the types of partnerships are as follows: General partnership: It is a form of basic business partnership that is formed under common law wherein every partner has unlimited liability and equal management authority. partnership: When one or all partners have a limited liability to the extent of capital contribution in a business partnership, it is known as a limited partnership. In this type of partnership, not all partners have unlimited liability. N Limited According to legality: On the basis of the nature of business, the types of partnerships are as follows: Legal partnership: A business partnership that is formed in accordance with the Partnership Act of 1932 and the Indian Contract Act is known as a legal partnership. Illegal partnership: When in a business partnership, the provisions of any law get violated or when the requisite number of partners goes below or above the minimum and maximum limits, it is referred to as an illegal partnership. According to registration: On the basis of registration, the types of partnerships are as follows: Partnership at will: When there is no duration specified for a particular partnership, the partnership is made at will. Such a type of partnership can be dissolved at any time by any partner NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law after submitting a prior notice to the firm. Any partner on his/ her will can give notice and retire from the partnership. The partnership is not bound or limited by the period of time. Partnership for a particular period: A partnership made for a particular period is known as a partnership for a period. The period may be decided by the partners by mutual understanding. The term of this kind of partnership may be one year, two years, or any other fixed period. The period of the partnership is mentioned in the partnership deed. Partnership for a certain venture or purpose: This refers to a S partnership made for a particular purpose and gets dissolved on the completion of that purpose. For example, if one person gets into a partnership with another person for the manufacturing and sale of paper cups, it is said to be a particular partnership. In this case, the partnership gets dissolved on the completion of the purpose. IM Partnership Deed and its Contents M A partnership deed is a written agreement made between partners. This deed delineates the rights and duties of partners, the name and objective of the partnership business, the address of the firm, and other details. This partnership deed is the basis of the functioning of the partnership business. Main Contents of a Partnership Deed The following are the main contents of a partnership deed: Name and address of the firm Name and address of the partners N 106 Nature of partnership business Commencement Partner’s Interest from the firm’s capital and loss-sharing ratio Salaries, Rules capital on partner’s capital Drawings Profit- and duration of a partnership commissions, etc., if any, payable to partners for admission and retirement of partners Accounts and audit Dissolution Conduct of partnership firm and management of business Arrangement in case a partner becomes insolvent NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Laws Related to the Formation of Businesses 107 Dispute resolution in matters of dispute in the partnership affairs Methods of valuation and revaluation of assets and liabilities on admission and retirement or death of partners Changes in the Constitution of the Firm There are certain changes that may occur in the constitution of the firm due to the following events: Retirement of a partner: Every partner of the firm has the full right to retire at any time during the course of the partnership. However, in the case of a partnership at will, a prior notice has to be given to all the remaining partners, of such retirement. of a partner: In case any partner is found guilty of any misconduct, the other partners may, by mutual consent, expel the guilty partner from the partnership. The most common reason of the expulsion of a partner is his/her involvement in unlawful acts against the firm or the partners. IM S Expulsion Insolvency of a partner: When a partner is unable to pay off his/her liabilities, he/she is said to be insolvent. Upon insolvency, he/she ceases to be a partner from the date of his/her being adjudicated as an insolvent. of a partner: If one of the two partners dies, then the partnership is said to be dissolved. However, if there are more than two partners, the death of one of them will not lead to dissolution of the firm, but will lead to re-constitution of the partnership firm. N Types of PartnerS M Death The various types of partners in a partnership are described as follows: Active partner/managing partner: An active partner participates in the functioning of the firm. He/she can act as an agent for the other partners and bind them by such actions. Sleeping partner: A sleeping partner does not actively participate in the functioning of the firm. He/she is, however, liable for the acts of others to outside parties which are aware of his/her existence in the firm. Nominal partner: A person who provides his/her name to the firm but does not have any interest in the firm is known as the nominal partner of the firm. The nominal partner is not entitled to the profit-sharing of the business. In addition, he/she does not invest his/her capital in the functioning of the business. Partner for profit only: A partner who is not liable for the losses and is entitled to a share in the profit only is known as a partner for profit only. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law Partner by estoppel and partner by holding out (Section 28): When a partner knowingly permits any other person to act as a partner in the firm, the other person is known as a partner by holding out. If a person himself/herself or by his/her conduct makes others believe that he/she is a partner, then such a partner is known as a partner by holding out or a partner by estoppel. Minor partner: A minor cannot be a partner in a partnership firm as he/she is incompetent to the contract. But he/she can be admitted as a partner for the benefits of partnership (only for sharing of profits and not losses). partner: The status of a secret partner lies somewhere between active and sleeping partner. His/her role in the partnership is not disclosed to the outsiders. He/she has unlimited liability as they also bear losses in the business. He/she might take part in the working of the business. partner: A partner who leaves the partnership firm because of retirement, expulsion, insolvency, or death is known as an outgoing partner. IM Outgoing S Secret Limited partner: A partner with no personal liability attached to the business beyond his/her original investment is a limited partner. The limited partner gets protected from third-party creditors because of their limited share in the partnership. A partner may assign or associate someone for his/ her share in the partnership. A part of share can be assigned to a stranger and that person would be treated as a sub-partner. The firm would not have any relationship with the sub-partner. It is between the assigning partner who is allocating his/her share and the sub-partner. M Sub-partner: N 108 Rights and Duties of Partners vis-à-vis Partners As per the Partnership Act, 1932, there are certain rules that need to be followed by all the partners. These rules are as follows: 1. Every partner has a right to take part in the conduct of the business. 2. Every partner is bound to attend diligently to his/her duties in the conduct of the business. 3. Any difference arising as to ordinary matters connected with the business may be decided by a majority of partners, and every partner shall have the right to express his/her opinion, before the matter is decided, but no change may be made in the nature of the business without the consent of all the partners. 4. Every partner has a right to have access to and to inspect and copy any of the books of the firm. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Laws Related to the Formation of Businesses 109 The following are some mutual rights of partners: The partners are entitled to share the profits earned equally, and shall contribute equally to the losses sustained by the firm. Where a partner is entitled to interest on the capital subscribed by him/her, such interest shall be payable only out of profits. A partner making, for the purposes of the business, any payment or advance beyond the amount of capital he/she has agreed to subscribe, is entitled to interest. The firm shall indemnify [Section 13(e)] a partner in respect: of payments made and liabilities incurred by him/her in the ordinary and proper conduct of the business doing such an act, in an emergency, for the purpose of protecting the firm from loss, as would be done by a person of ordinary prudence, in his/her own case, under similar circumstances IM S in The following are some individual rights of partners: to take part in the conduct of the business [Section 12(a)]: Every partner has a right to enter into the firm to inspect and see the day-to-day functioning of the firm in the ordinary course of the business. He/she can take part in the administration of the firm and also in the decision-making of the firm. to be informed: Every partner of the partnership firm is authorised to be informed by the other partners about the working of the firm. When there is a conflict in the decision-making of the firm, all the partners have a right to be informed. Right N Right M Right to remuneration: No partner has a right to get the remuneration except for his/her share of profit in the firm besides interest on capital. However, such remuneration can be provided if there is an express contract between the partners. It is a common practice for the partners to agree that a managing partner will receive over and above his/her share, salary or commission for the efforts he/she may make while conducting the business of the firm. Right to share profit [Section 13(b)]: The partner has a right to take a share of profit from the firm as decided in the partnership deed. Right to retire: Every partner of the firm has a right to retire at any time during the course of a partnership. A prior period notice has to be given to all the partners expressing the intention to retire from the partnership firm. Express and Implied Authorities of the Partners and the Scope of Implied Authority of a Partner A partner in the partnership firm is an agent of the firm as well as of other partners. The general rule is that a partnership firm is bound NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 110 Business Law by the acts of partners which are done in the ordinary course of business. The authority and responsibility of a partner can be classified as follows: Express authority: Express authority of a partner is defined in the partnership deed itself. Every partner’s liabilities and rights, which are expressed, are mentioned in the partnership deed. The firm is bound by all acts of a partner done within the scope of his/ her express authority. Implied authority: This authority allows a partner to perform the necessary or reasonable duties on behalf of another partner or the partnership firm entity even though the same may not be expressly mentioned in the partnership deed; such implied authority can be inferred from the circumstances of the case. S Scope of Implied Authority of a Partner IM The implied authority of the partners in a partnership firm may include within its scope: Making sale and purchase of moveable assets on behalf of the firm Raising loans on the assets of the firm Receiving and making payments to third parties cheques, bills of exchange, and other promissory notes on behalf of the firm M Accepting Taking on rent or lease the land or building for the firm Appointing servants and other people for the firm NOTE N Exceptions to Implied Authority of a Partner To facilitate the concept of limited liability in partnerships as well, a new form of partnership entity has been introduced under which the liability of the partners in a partnership firm is also limited and such form of organisation is called Limited Liability Partnership. However, a partner has no implied authority to do the following: Opening a bank account on behalf of the firm in his/her personal name or in the name of the firm Selling or transferring the immovable properties of the firm Entering into a partnership with other firms on behalf of the partnership firm Acquiring Entering 3.2.3 property on behalf of the firm into partnership in competition to partnership firm Limited Liability Partnership (LLP) Act, 2008 A Limited Liability Partnership (LLP) is a hybrid type of corporate structure that has the advantage and flexibility of a traditional partnership firm and features of a joint stock company. LLPs are governed by the LLP Act, 2008 (hereinafter referred to as the LLP Act). NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Laws Related to the Formation of Businesses 111 Features Of LLP Act, 2008 The salient features of an LLP can be summarised in the following manner: An LLP is a corporate body formed by any two or more persons by subscribing their names to an incorporation document. On incorporation, an LLP becomes an entity with a separate personality and existence with perpetual succession. The mutual rights and liabilities of the partners in an LLP are governed by the LLP agreement entered between the partners, which are subject to the provisions of the LLP Act, 2008. LLP is a separate legal entity enjoying limited liability so that its members are liable to the extent of the amount of contribution made by them. S An LLP must have at least two designated partners, out of which one must be a resident of India. IM An LLP is required to maintain the annual accounts reflecting the true and fair position of the statements of accounts, and to file annual statement of solvency of the LLP with the Registrar. Its annual accounts must be annually audited and filed with the Registrar. The M An winding up of an LLP will be either voluntary or by the National Company Tribunal. N LLP Agreement LLP has more formalities than a partnership firm registered under the Partnership Act. An LLP agreement is one such formality, which is defined as a written formal document that states the agreement among the partners of an LLP. It delineates the duties and rights of all partners towards the firm and towards each other. Submission of the LLP agreement to the Registrar of Companies is mandatory within 30 days of incorporation of LLP. In the absence of an LLP agreement, the rights and liabilities will not apply to the firm and partners. A well-formulated LLP agreement fosters a strong foundation of the business. It helps in clarifying the roles and responsibilities of the partners which reduces the chances of conflicts. As per the LLP Act, the name of the LLP firm should always end with the term LLP. An LLP agreement states the ratio of capital invested by all the partners and their respective profit-sharing ratios. All the provisions related to capital contribution, such as maintenance of books of accounts or admission of a new partner into the LLP, are defined in the LLP agreement. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education NOTE LLP is a good hybrid of partnership and company which enables professional expertise and entrepreneurial initiative to operate in a flexible and efficient manner. Business Law 3.2.4 DISTINCTION BETWEEN PARTNERSHIP FIRM INCORPORATED UNDER the PARTNERSHIP ACT AND PARTNERSHIP FIRM INCORPORATED UNDER THE LLP ACT Table 3.1 distinguishes between partnership firm incorporated under the partnership act and partnership firm incorporated under the LLP Act: Table 3.1: DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PARTNERSHIP FIRM INCORPORATED UNDER THE PARTNERSHIP ACT AND PARTNERSHIP FIRM INCORPORATED UNDER THE LLP ACT Partnership Firm Incorporated under the LLP Act (LLP) Partnership is governed under the Partnership Act, 1932. LLP is governed under the LLP Act, 2008. IM S Partnership Firm Incorporated under the Partnership Act The liability of partners is limited. A partnership firm has no individual existence apart from its members. LLP is a legal entity separate from its partners. The registration of a partnership firm is optional. It depends on the mutual consent of the partners to register the firm. The registration of an LLP firm is mandatory. The maximum number of partners in a partnership firm is 100. There is no limit on the maximum number of partners. M The liability of partners is unlimited. Therefore, each partner is personally liable. N 112 There is no perpetual succession for these partnership firms and they can cease to exist on the death or retirement of partners. In an LLP, perpetual succession continues irrespective of the death or retirement of partners. A partnership deed is the governing document of a partnership firm. An LLP agreement is the governing document in an LLP. In a partnership, two or more individuals agree to share profit and loss mutually to carry business. It offers the benefit of, both, partnership and limited liability company. Each partner can bind the firm as well as all its partners by his/her own acts. Each partner can bind the LLP ONLY by his/her acts and NOT the other partners. 3.2.5 Hindu Undivided Family (HUF) and its Characteristics A Hindu Undivided Family (HUF) is a unique form of business. All the members of a joint Hindu family may get into business and such forms of business are recognised under the law. The membership of an HUF NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Laws Related to the Formation of Businesses 113 occurs on birth in the family by default. It is governed and dictated by the Hindu Law. The members of an HUF are headed by a ‘Karta’, and the rest of the family members are called ‘coparceners’. Characteristics of an HUF The following are the characteristics of an HUF: Formation: There is no complexity in the formation of an HUF as the minimum number of people required to open an HUF is only two and there is no maximum limit. Every member who is born in the family becomes a part of the HUF, irrespective of his/her willingness. The liability of the coparceners is limited to the amount of their share in the family property. However, the liability of Karta is unlimited. S Liability: The entire business of an HUF is controlled by the Karta and he/she is the sole person to take all its decisions. He/she may choose to consult with coparceners, but he/she can also take decisions independently. IM Control: Concept of HUF under the Hindu Marriage Act N M Joint Hindu Family (JHF) is a concept under the Hindu law where husband and wife form a JHF. They are further joined by their progeny. A JHF can enter into a business together, comprising members of the family. Such business is taxed under the Income Tax Act as an HUF. Before 2005, only male members of the family could be coparceners. But after 2005 Amendment to the Hindu Succession Act, 1956, even women can be coparceners in their father’s family. Recently in 2020, the Supreme Court further clarified that any woman, whether married or unmarried, will be a coparcener in her father’s family. Questions have also been raised whether a woman can be a Karta. It has been held numerous times that a woman can be a Karta in her father’s family’s coparcenary. There have also been several instances where a woman—the mother or eldest son’s wife or an older daughter—has played the role of Karta. Just like a male coparcener, now a female coparcener can also seek a partition in her father’s coparcenary. A male coparcener’s wife enjoys a different position. She gets a share in the HUF property only upon her husband’s death or when a partition takes place; she can ask for a partition of the HUF property in her husband’s family. As a coparcener, sons and daughters of a family automatically become members of the HUF business. Roles, Responsibilities, and Liabilities of a Karta Karta is the head as well as the representative of the family. He/she acts for or on behalf of the other family members. Karta in an HUF is the manager of the HUF business. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law Eligibility to Become a Karta The senior most member of the family is generally appointed as the Karta, but no one can take his/her position until he/she decides to retire from the HUF and relinquishes all his/her rights in favour of some other person. A Karta should be of sound mind. Minor as a Karta S Normally, any member of whatever age can become a coparcener; but when it comes to becoming a Karta, it is always the eldest member of the family who can get to this position. However, in case HUF is left with no other option, then the youngest or the only member left can also be declared as the Karta. A minor can always be the Karta, but it is compulsory that he/she should have some guardian with him/ her who is an adult and who can represent and guide him/her to take specific decisions. With the recent amendment of including female as Karta, scenarios of minors being Karta would not arise. IM The following are the liabilities of a Karta: Maintenance: The biggest responsibility of the maintenance falls on M the Karta. Though everyone works together in the family business, but the Karta is individually responsible for the maintenance. He/ she needs to look into every matter and make sure that all the members receive maintenance through the income received from the property. If a member feels that his/her maintenance rights are being hampered, then the Karta can be sued in the court of law. Accounts: N 114 A Karta should maintain the accounts and file tax returns at the end of every financial year. If the Karta disobeys the rules of maintaining the accounts, then he/she can be sued in the court of law. Representative: A Karta represents the HUF on all social, legal, religious, and revenue-associated litigations and situations that involve HUF’s immovable property. Suit: Any suit against a Karta also binds all the members of the HUF. The following are considered to be the powers of a Karta: Power to manage the family affairs: A Karta is the head of an HUF. Though his/her powers with the affairs related to the alienation of property are limited, his/her powers with respect to decisionmaking are somewhat infinite when it comes to managing the family and its related affairs. His/her rights in this regard allow him/her to take any decision he/she wants to. Power to receive and spend the family income: A power that comes along with the authorship of the Karta is the right to manage the income which comes in an HUF. A Karta can divide the money amongst the members and save the rest for future use of the HUF. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Laws Related to the Formation of Businesses 115 Power to alienate property: A Karta’s power to sell the property of HUF is rather limited. He/she should take the permission of all the members. He/she can be sued in case such consent has not been taken or a person was incapable of giving his/her consent in some case, for instance, minors. Thus, in case alienation is done without proper authorisation, such alienation can be challenged and the property can be recovered. Power to acknowledge and contract debts: A Karta is responsible to repay all the debts of the HUF. The liability of a Karta is unlimited, whereas the coparceners are liable to the extent of their share in the family property. Power to settle family disputes: As the Karta is the eldest member S of the family, so if any dispute arises in the family, the same can be resolved by the Karta. IM Coparceners M A coparcener is defined as a person who acquires the rights in the HUF by birth. The coparcener has the right to enforce partition. According to the Hindu Succession Act, 1956, every male member born in a family is treated as a coparcener. A coparcener has a legal right in the ancestral property as a successor. A coparcener has the right to demand partition in the HUF. Thereafter, as per the Hindu Succession (Amendment) Act, 2005, daughters too were considered as the coparceners of an HUF. N Succession of an HUF in Case of the Death of a Karta When a Karta dies leaving behind his/her property and wealth, the next senior member of the family has the right to become the Karta of the HUF. As per Section 6 of the Hindu Succession Act, 1955, Karta’s death does not result in partition. A coparcener has the right to become the Karta of the HUF. Now, even daughters can become the Karta of the family. Since daughters have an interest in the coparcenary property similar to that of sons, they can also continue their father’s HUF. But a wife does not have the right to become the Karta. Hence, the oldest member of the family becomes the Karta after the death of the Karta. Women Rights in aN HUF Before 2005, only male members of an HUF used to become the Karta and the females were not given equal status in the HUF. After 2005, through an amendment to the Hindu Succession Act, 1956, even females are entitled to be Karta by virtue of they having share in the property. Earlier, only male members could be Karta, but now female members can also act as Karta and can demand HUF partition. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education ? DID YOU KNOW When the Karta of an HUF enters into a partnership with a stranger, the members of the family do not ipso facto become partners in that firm and they have no right to take part in its management or to sue for its dissolution. Business Law 3.2.6 DISTINCTION BETWEEN A PARTNERSHIP FIRM INCORPORATED UNDER PARTNERSHIP ACT, 1932 AND AN HUF Table 3.2 shows the difference between a partnership firm (under Partnership Act) and an HUF: Table 3.2: Difference between a Partnership Firm (under Partnership Act) and AN HUF Partnership firm (under Partner- HUF ship Act) The members of an HUF acquire rights in the HUF by virtue of being born in the family. Hence, an HUF arises by operation of law. S A partnership is created by an agreement. IM The death of a partner may lead to The death of any member does not the dissolution of the partnership lead to the dissolution of the HUF. But the death of all the members deed. may lead to the dissolution. All the partners equally participate The Kartas take charge and control in the functioning of the partnerof the HUF. ship firm. In the case of an HUF, the Karta can act for the other members of the family. In the case of a partnership firm, the liabilities of the partners are unlimited. In the case of an HUF, the liabilities of the Karta are unlimited, but the liabilities of coparceners are limited. M In the case of a partnership firm, every partner can act on his/her own in the firm but will have to consult with other partners from time to time. N 116 self assessment Questions 1. __________ refers to the type of business entity wherein an individual starts a business with his/her own capital and manages all the operations on his/her own. 2. A partnership is a __________ between persons who have agreed to share profits of a business. 3. A partnership between persons can be established through an agreement which can be either written or oral. a. True b. False 4. Which of the following is not a type of partnership? a. Partnership at will b. Partnership for fixed term c. Particular partnership d. Partnership between minors NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Laws Related to the Formation of Businesses 117 5. A minor has the right to take his/her share of profit from the business as agreed upon in the __________. 6. A partnership arises from an agreement, whether implied or expressed. a. True b. False 7. Limited Liability Partnerships (LLPs) are governed by the __________. 8. LLPs will have at least two designated partners, out of which one should be a resident in India. a. True b. False a. Karta b. Coparcener c. Adult d. None of these S 9. Who is the head of the family? IM 10. What is the minimum number of people required to start an HUF? b. Two c. Three d. Seven Activity M a. One N Using the Internet, identify the legal journey that led to the amendment of Hindu Succession Act, 1956 that led to allowing women a share in the HUF property. 3.3 Companies Act, 2013 The Companies Act, 2013 has consolidated and amended the law relating to joint stock companies. It has replaced the Companies Act, 1956 with a rule-based legislation containing 470 sections across 29 chapters and 7 schedules as against 658 sections in the Companies Act, 1956. It delineates the concept of company formation and the legal procedures that are required to start a joint stock company. In this chapter, the ‘company’ would mean joint stock company. Since every company is a legal entity with its own rights, it is important to know the founding and governing principles of companies. The Companies Act, 2013 provides for the registration of various kinds of companies in India. It is designed to ensure enhanced disclosure norms as well as accountability of management, stricter enforcement, protection of minority shareholders and other investors, better framework for investigation, and punishment for indulgence in corporate crimes. Transparency and good governance, check on insider trading, class action suits, periodic rotation of auditors, and induction of independent directors are some of the other significant provisions. The overall NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education ? DID YOU KNOW In a company, a shareholder has limited liability (limited to the extent of the share capital). Business Law object of the Companies Act, 2013 is to build a smooth and easy corporate environment marked by simplification and ease of doing business, which is critical for India to become more competitive. 3.3.1 Concept and Evolution of a Company M IM S As per Section 2(20) of the Companies Act, 2013, a company means a company incorporated under this Act or under any previous company law. A company is considered as a separate entity or an association with a common seal, perpetual succession, and limited liability. A company can be described as a contractual entity distinct from its members. It has legal rights and obligations. A company is run and governed under the Companies Act, 2013. Before independence, the company law in India was governed by the Companies Act, 1913. After independence, the Act underwent several amendments; and in 1956, the Act was fully revised and re-enacted as Companies Act, 1956 with several major amendments based on changing business requirements, and was recently replaced with the new Companies Act, 2013 which received the President’s assent on 29th August, 2013 and a few provisions of the Act were brought into force on 12th September, 2013; thereafter, from time to time, provisions of the law were brought into force, and became applicable from the financial year 2014-15. The Companies Act, 2013 has several major changes including higher power for shareholders, provisions for corporate social responsibility and the establishment of National Company Law Tribunal among others. 3.3.2 Characteristics of a Company N 118 The following are the characteristics of a company: Incorporated association: A company is required to be registered under the Companies Act, 2013 in order to function as a legal entity. The minimum number of people required to formulate a public company is seven and a private company is two. Every promoter member of a company should subscribe their names in the Memorandum of Association and also fulfil various other legal compliances. Artificial legal person: A company is artificial in nature as it is invisible, intangible, immortal, and exists only in the realm of law. Due to its artificial nature, it needs to be operated and managed by the board of directors consisting of individuals. Separate legal entity: A company is a legal entity separate from its promoters or shareholders. It is an autonomous body, selfcontrolling and self-governing. The ownership of assets of the company belongs to the company as a legal entity and not to the shareholders. In the eyes of law, a company is a different entity from its shareholders. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Laws Related to the Formation of Businesses 119 Perpetual succession: A company is a stable form of organisation unaffected by the insolvency, death, mental or physical incapacity of its promoters or members. It can only be dissolved by the law. A company once incorporated by registration is said to exist forever until it is explicitly dissolved for certain reasons. The lifespan of a company goes beyond the lifespan of any of its promoters, managers, or shareholders. These entities keep changing, but the company retains its identity and is said to have perpetual existence. Limited liability: The liability of the members of a company is limited to the extent of amount of their shareholdings. A shareholder may be required to pay more than the nominal value of shares held by him/her or the amount of guarantee, in case a person is a member of a guarantee company. S Transferability of shares: The shares or debentures of a company IM are considered as movable properties which can be transferred without the permission of the company, but in a manner provided in the Articles of Association. The right to transfer shares is a statutory right and cannot be taken away by making any provision to the contrary in the Articles of Association. However, a private company imposes restrictions on transfer as per Section 2(68). property: All the property of the company vests exclusively in itself. The company can control, manage, and hold the same in its own name. The members neither have ownership rights in the company’s property (either individually or collectively) nor do they have any insurable right in the company’s property. The creditors of the company have a claim only against the assets of the company, but not those of the members of the company. to sue: Being a legal person, a company is authorised to enforce its rights by filing cases in its own name and without the requirement of any shareholder joining hands with it. It can also sue any other company in court against the breach of contract. Similarly, outside parties can sue the company in its own name for breach of contractual or statutory duties. N Capacity M Separate 3.3.3 Kinds of Companies Companies are divided into various categories based on different factors, many of which are discussed hereunder. COMPANIES WITH LIMITED LIABILITY There are primarily two types of companies with limited liability, which are as follows: 1. Statutory company: A company incorporated by a particular Act of Parliament or legislature is known as a statutory company. All the powers, rights, responsibilities, and objects are defined by the Act. The statutory companies are government companies NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law formed by special acts of the Parliament, such as the RBI, SBI, municipal corporations, etc. 2. Registered companies: Most other types of companies are called ‘registered companies’ since they are incorporated and registered under the Companies Act, 2013. Such companies may fall into the following broad categories: Companies limited by shares in which a shareholder’s liability is limited to the extent of the amount of his/her shareholding. limited by guarantee in which the liability of the members is limited to the amount of guarantee which they have undertaken to contribute in the event of the winding up of the company. S Companies COMPANIES WITH UNLIMITED LIABILITY IM Under Section 29(2) of the Companies Act, 2013 talks about companies with unlimited liability in which the company does not have any limit on the liability of its members; every member is liable for the debts of the company to an unlimited extent. Classification based on number of members: private company, which is set up with private ownership. Its shares do not trade on public exchanges or through Initial Public Offer (IPO). They are also known as privately-held companies. M A A N 120 public company, which issues shares through an IPO and is publicly traded on at least one stock exchange. Its ownership is dispersed among the general public. A one-person company, which is set up by a single individual who is an Indian citizen or a citizen who is a resident of India for a minimum period of 182 days in the preceding year. He/she must submit the name of a person who will act as his/her nominee in the event of his/her death or contractual incapacity. A not for profit company set up under Section 8 for carrying on socially beneficial activities and which cannot use its profits for other than its objects and nor can it distribute its profits as dividend. The company: has in its objects the promotion of commerce, art, science, sports, education, research, social welfare, religion, charity, protection of environment, or any such other object intends to apply its profits, if any, or other income in promoting its objects intends to prohibit the payment of any dividend to its members NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Laws Related to the Formation of Businesses 121 3.3.4 Difference between a Private Company and a Public Company The major differences between a private company and a public company are given in Table 3.3: Table 3.3: Difference between a Private Company and a Public Company S. No. Feature Private Company Members There is no limit on the number of its shareholders with a minimum of seven members. 2. Raising capital It cannot invite public to subscribe to its securities. It can invite public to subscribe to its share capital. 3. Transferability The right to transfer of shares shares by the members is restricted by the Articles. Its shares are freely transferable. 4. Privileges All the relevant provisions of the Companies Act need to be complied for a greater level of transparency and compliance. S 1. IM The maximum number of its shareholders is limited to 200 and the minimum to 2. Public Company M As there is no involvement of public funds, private companies are exempted from several provisions of the Companies Act and several others less stringent compliances. Two N Some important exemptions and privileges of a private limited company are: persons are sufficient to start a private company. Exempted from complying with the provisions of the Act regarding the issuing of a prospectus. Exempted from restrictions placed on public limited companies with regard to kinds of share capital, voting rights, and issuing of shares with disproportionate voting rights. Several exemptions are given with respect to the appointment of directors. For example, there is no need for the appointment of mandatory independent directors. Exemptions regarding provisions pertaining to managerial remuneration. No need to constitute an audit committee of the board. 3.3.5 Lifting the Corporate Veil Since a company is a legal entity separate from the persons owning its share capital or running its management, a veil is said to be created NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law IM S between promoters, managers and shareholders, and the external world once incorporation is done as a company under the Companies Act. A corporate veil provides a protection shield to the members of the company from liability connected to the company’s actions. This corporate veil hides the persons behind the company; and as far as the external world is concerned, it is with the company they are transacting rather than the person behind it. The liabilities of the company are different from the liabilities of its shareholders. Hence, in every business dispute, the courts would treat the company as an artificial legal person that transacts with the external world and would not look into the actual persons behind the corporate veil. Generally, the law respects the corporate veil. But, in certain situations, the law as well as the courts may ‘lift the corporate veil and probe the persons behind the company and their activities’. The disregard of corporate personality is known as ‘the phenomenon of lifting of corporate veil’. The expression ‘piercing the corporate veil’ is applied to a range of situations in which the law attributes the acts or property of a corporation to those who control it. The corporate veil can be lifted: 1. By means of judicial interpretation 2. Under statutory provisions M Table 3.4 lists the conditions under which a corporate veil can be lifted: Table 3.4: Lifting the Corporate Veil Conditions Under Judicial Interpretation N 122 Courts can lift the corporate veil under the following instances: 1. When the character of the company is to be investigated 2. When the company acts as an agent of shareholders 3. When the company is formed: Conditions Under Statutory Provisions Statutory provisions of the Companies Act, 2013 pertaining to the following instances allow lifting of the corporate veil and investigating the persons behind the company: 1. When wind-up proceedings throw up fraudulent activities 2. When there is a misrepresentaTo evade taxes or against revtion in the prospectus enue interests of the govern3. Ultra vires act (beyond one’s ment legal power or authority) zz To evade personal and statuto4. A holding company is required to ry obligations disclose the accounts of subsidizz To avoid welfare legislation ary to its members. This amounts to lifting of the corporate veil as zz To divert business opportunity holding and subsidiary compato another company nies are separate legal entities. 4. When the company is used as a facade to cover fraudulent and illegal activities zz NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Laws Related to the Formation of Businesses 123 3.3.6 Formation and Incorporation of a Company—Conditions and the Process of Incorporation The process of formation and incorporation of a company involves three stages, which are as follows: 1. Promotion 2. Incorporation 3. Commencement of business Let us understand the stages in detail. S Promotion Who is a ‘Promoter’? M IM It is the stage prior to the incorporation and commencement of the business by a company. Before setting up a company, an individual called ‘promoter’ has to conceive the idea of the business and work on its implementation. The promoter may also take the help from external entities such as functional experts in the field, managerial experts, legal experts, technical experts, etc., towards starting the business. The relationship between the promoter and the company is a fiduciary relationship from the day on which he/she starts floating the company and it continues till he/she hands over the same to the directors. N Before a company can be formed, somebody conceives the idea of the business and works on that idea. The person who initiates the formation of the company with the intention of starting the business based on his/her idea is termed as the ‘Promoter’. A promoter is a person who forms a company and takes all the essential steps for the registration of the company. According to Section 2(69) of the Companies Act, 2013, the term ‘Promoter’ can be defined as the following: A person who has been named as such in a prospectus or is identified by the company in the annual return in Section 92; or A person who has control over the affairs of the company, directly or indirectly whether as a shareholder, director or otherwise; or A person who is in agreement with whose advice, directions, or instructions the Board of Directors of the company is accustomed to act. The functions of a promoter include conceiving the business idea; undertaking the detailed technical, economic, and commercial feasibility of the project idea; conducting negotiation with suppliers for NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law business contracts; deciding on the name, location, scope of business, etc., of the company; acquiring the business or property which the company is to manage; getting the Memorandum and Articles of association drafted and printed; arranging for the preparation of the prospectus; raising funds for the company; and paying the preliminary expenses. Legal Position of a Promoter In terms of the provisions of the Companies Act, 2013, the promoter holds a fiduciary relationship with the company. As a person having a fiduciary relationship, he/she has the following obligations or duties to the company: Not to make secret personal profit or to engage in aggrandisement To S (increase one’s personal wealth) during promotion of the company disclose material facts regarding the property which he/she wants to sell to the company to make unfair use of his/her position and to avoid doing anything which has the appearance of fraud or undue influence IM Not To give the benefit of negotiations to the company M A promoter is liable for preliminary contracts made by him/her before the company is incorporated and the same are adopted by the company. He/she is also liable for any frauds in the promotion of the company, omission or misrepresentation in the prospectus, and non-disclosure of secret profit made. Incorporation N 124 Incorporation refers to the process of bringing the company into existence as a separate corporate legal entity. Various steps involved in incorporating a company are as follows: The promoter should apply to the Registrar of Companies (ROC) to ascertain the availability of the company name. Engagement of experts, such as chartered accountants, lawyers, company secretaries, etc., to prepare and complete various legal formalities. Drafting of the Memorandum of Association (‘MoA’) and Articles of Association (‘AoA’) and getting the same subscribed by the minimum stipulated number of subscribers. Within 60 days of the approval of name, the promoter can apply for registration of the company by submitting all the relevant documents along with the prescribed fees. After submission of all the relevant documents and information required under the Act, the ROC shall scrutinise the documents and if these are found to be in order, he/she shall register the NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Laws Related to the Formation of Businesses 125 details in the register and issue a ‘Certificate of Incorporation’ (with an allotment of corporate identity number) to the effect that the proposed company has been incorporated under the Act. Online registration of companies is also possible through similar steps. The registration of the company should be done with the ROC situated in the state in which the registered office is located with the following documents and information: MoA and AoA duly signed by all the subscribers (promoters). A declaration by a qualified person (such as an advocate, chartered S accountant, etc., involved in the formation of the company) and a person named in the Articles as director, manager, or secretary that all the requirements as per the law for incorporation of the company have been complied with. declaration by members subscribing to the MoA and AoA and first directors named in the Articles that they are not convicted in any offense or any fraud or any breach of duty under the Act and that all the information given in the documents is true to their knowledge. Address IM A for correspondence till registered office is established. of personal details of subscribing members who have signed the MoA and AoA and the personal details and interests of first directors named in the Articles. M Particulars Certificate of Incorporation N The ‘Certificate of Incorporation’ is a legal document that brings the company into existence from the date mentioned therein. From the date of issuance of certificate of incorporation, the company becomes a legal entity with separate legal personality, perpetual existence, and limited liability. The MoA and AoA become binding upon the members and the company as if they have been signed by the company and the members. The company can now raise the share capital to commence its business. Commencement of Business The concept of Certificate of ‘Commencement of Business’ was there in the erstwhile Companies Act, 1956 and it was also retained by the Companies Act, 2013 under the Section 11 of the 2013 Act. However, Section 11 was omitted (deleted) by the companies (Amendment) Act, 2015 w.e.f. 29th May, 2015. Recently, the Companies Act, 2013 has further amended by way of passing of ordinance by the President of India, on 2nd day of November, 2018. Declaration for commencement of business is re-introduced by way of inserting a new Section 10A after Section 10 of the Companies Act, 2013. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law Under Section 10A of the Companies Act, 2013, a declaration is to be issued by the directors within 180 days of incorporation of company stating that the subscribers to the MoA and AoA of the company have paid the value of shares so agreed by them, along with a verification of the registered office address of the company. Floating/Raising of Capital Newly formed companies raise capital from the capital brought by the promoters and their friends and families, the venture capital firms, private equity funds, and other such special avenues available for entrepreneurs. S A public limited company, which meets the eligibility conditions of SEBI, can raise capital through any of the following methods: (1) Public offer; (2) Offer for sale; (3) Rights issue; and (4) Private placement. A private limited company can raise equity capital through rights issue or private placement. IM A public offer may be an IPO made when the company raises capital for the first time from the capital markets or by offering the general public to subscribe to the shares of the company in the primary market through the issue of a ‘Prospectus’. M Companies that have already raised equity capital from the public before and intend to raise further equity capital with Follow on Public Offer should first mandatorily offer their existing shareholders an opportunity to subscribe to the newly issued shares. This is the right granted by the Companies Act, 2013 to the existing shareholders in order to ensure that their existing proportion of the share capital with the company is not diluted. Such issue of new shares made to the existing shareholders is called the ‘rights issue’. It is mandatory for the companies to make ‘rights issue offer’ to the existing shareholders before they can raise further capital from the general public. N 126 The method of private placement involves raising equity capital from friends and relatives of promoters or from qualified institutional investors in compliance with the regulations of SEBI. No public offer is made in the case of private placement of equity shares. 3.3.7 Constitutional Documents of a Joint Stock Company Every company needs to maintain certain documents for its existence and business operations. The following are the essential documents required by a company for its existence: MoA (Memorandum of Association) AoA (Articles of Association) Prospectus NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Laws Related to the Formation of Businesses 127 3.3.8 Memorandum of Association (MoA) MoA is the Charter or Constitution of a company that defines and confines the scope of business objects of the company. It is also called the life-giving document. Since it contains the fundamental conditions on which a company has been registered, it is also described as the constitution or charter of the company. By laying down the objects and powers of the company, it regulates the external relationships of the company. After registration, the memorandum becomes a public document so that any outsider dealing with the company is bound by the terms contained in it. It, both, describes and circumscribes the scope of a company’s business activities. Clauses of MoA S The important clauses of a memorandum are briefly explained as follows: Clause: The name of a public company registered with the ROC should mandatorily end with the term ‘Limited’, and that of a private company must end with ‘Private Limited’. IM Name Domicile Clause: This clause states the location of the registered office of the company. It specifies the union territory or state of the registered office. It is the second clause of the MoA. M Object Clause: The Object clause states the objects of the company Liability N beyond which the company cannot do any activity. Any business done outside the objects of the MoA will be considered illegal and void. Objects also include anything incidental to the attainment of the object of the company. Clause: The Liability clause states the liability of every member of the company. For a company limited by shares, the liability of every member will not be more than each share’s face value. For a company limited by guarantee, the clause defines the liability of every individual stakeholder. For an unlimited company, the clause wouldn’t be included as stakeholders are entirely liable of the business. Subscription or Association Clause: The Subscription clause is the final and last clause of the MoA. It describes the reason of subscribers to incorporate the company. It contains the address and name of the first subscribers. Every subscriber of the company has to purchase at least one share. There should be a minimum of two members in case of a private company and seven in case of a public company. Alteration of MoA Since MoA is one of the most important documents that functions as the charter or constitution for the company, the alterations to the doc- NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law ument are strictly regulated by the provisions of the Act. Though any of the clauses of the memorandum can be altered, several restrictions have been put in place. Some of the alterations require a general resolution (more than 50% majority); some alterations require a special resolution (more than 75% majority); and others require Central Government approval in addition to a resolution. 3.3.9 ARTICLES OF ASSOCIATION (AoA) S AoA specifies the rules, regulations, and bye-laws for the internal administration and management of the company. It governs the relationship between the company and its constituent members by prescribing their rights and obligations. An act of a company in contravention with the AoA is not null and void. It is merely irregular and can be ratified by means of a special resolution. Contents of the AoA pertain to the following subject matters: capital and rights attached to different classes IM Share Procedures regarding making calls and forfeiture of shares Appointment of managerial personnel, their power, rotation, duties, etc. Rules regarding matters such as transfer of shares, issuing of shares, M general meetings, common seal, dividends and reserves, accounts and audits, remuneration of managers, issuing of redeemable preference shares, a lien on shares, paying commissions and fixing rate thereof, and winding up of the company. Importance of AoA N 128 MoA and AoA, once registered, binds the company and its members to its clauses and puts them under observation. The AoA helps in overcoming the day-to-day problems and issues in the functioning of the company. Simply put, Articles are the rules, regulations, and bye-laws for the internal management of the affairs of the company. AoA establishes a formal and ethical relationship between a company and its shareholders in order to bind the members to the company and the company to its members. It constitutes a contract between a company and its members in respect of rights and liabilities as members. Articles usually contain provisions relating to share capital and variation of rights, transfer of shares alteration of capital, general meetings, voting rights, proceedings of the Board, dividends and reserves, winding up, and the like. Alteration of Articles—Manner and Effect As per the Companies Act, 2013, a company can alter its Articles even with a retrospective effect. AoA can be changed by passing a special NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Laws Related to the Formation of Businesses 129 resolution. The following are the provisions with regard to the alteration of Articles: AoA can be altered only through a special resolution. AoA cannot go beyond any provisions of the MoA or of the Companies Act, 2013. AoA cannot be illegal, contrary to any statute or public policy. Alteration in the AoA must be done in good faith and for the benefit of the company as a whole. Alteration cannot increase the liability of the existing members to contribute to the share capital, nor can the board of directors expel a member by altering the Articles. listed company can alter its AoA only with the approval of concerned stock exchange. S A of AoA with the effect of converting a public company into a private company can happen only after an approval from the central government. IM Alteration Binding Force of MoA and aoa 3.3.10 N M According to Section 10 of the Act, the MoA and AoA shall, when registered, bind the company and the members thereof to the same extent as if they, respectively, had been signed by the company and each of the members. Accordingly, both the parties are bound to observe all the provisions of the memorandum and the Articles. The Articles bind the company to its members, the members to the company, and the members inter se to each other. 3.3.11 Difference between MoA AND AoA The difference between MoA and AoA is given in Table 3.5: Table 3.5: Difference between MoA AND AoA S. No. Feature MoA AoA 1. Purpose It contains the main conditions based on which the company is allowed to be incorporated. These are the rules and regulations to manage internal affairs of the company. 2. Status It is subordinate to the Act and specifies the limits within which the company can operate. Articles are subordinate, both, to the Act and also to the MoA and lays down rules, etc., for working within the boundaries of memorandum. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law S. No. Feature MoA AoA 3. Nature It specifies the conditions for making of contracts by outsiders with the company. They constitute contracts between the company and its members. 4. Changes Alterations involve stricter conditions. They can be frequently altered by passing a special resolution. 5. Ratification Acts beyond the scope of the MoA are ultra vires void and cannot be ratified by any means. Acts beyond the Articles are considered as irregular and can be ratified later by shareholders. Public Limited Company—Prospectus S 3.3.12 IM It is a public document that invites the general public for subscription of the share capital in a public company. The prospectus is a disclosure document inviting public to subscribe for the securities of the company to enable the investors to take rational investment decisions, and to protect their rights by giving various material facts and prospects about the company. Contents of A Prospectus M The prospectus generally consists of the information like: Names Date and addresses of the registered offices of the company of opening and closing of the issue Details N 130 about underwriting of the issue Authority Capital Main structure of the company objects of the public offer Terms Main for the issue and the details of the resolution passed of the present issue and such other particulars objects and present business of the company Schedule of the implementation of the project Particulars relating to the management’s perception of risk factors specific to the project Gestation Extent period of the project of progress made in the project Deadlines for the completion of the project and any litigation or legal action pending Disclosures about the source of a promoter’s contribution Reports by the auditor of the company with respect to its profits and losses, assets and liabilities, etc. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Laws Related to the Formation of Businesses 131 Declaration Consent about compliance with provisions of this Act of directors, auditors, experts’ opinion, if any Mis-statements in Prospectus and Liability If the prospectus contains misleading information, false statements, or omits material facts, then the directors, promoters, and others responsible for such misleading information are liable for their mistakes under civil laws, criminal laws, and general contract law. The shareholders also have the right of rescission of the contract and the right of action for damages for fraud against the company. Directors, promoters, experts, and others who authorised the issue of prospectus are also liable to compensate shareholders for damages. S Private Placement M IM A company making private placement shall issue private placement offer and application in the form and manner prescribed to identified persons, a select group of people only. The offer or invitation to subscribe shall be made through private placement offer-cum-application that satisfies all the conditions of Section 42 of the Companies Act, 2013. A company issuing securities under this section shall not release any public advertisements or use media. 3.3.13 Raising Capital Using Shares and Debentures N A company can raise capital by issuing shares and through borrowings. A huge amount of capital is required to run a business. Debt and equity are the two ways through which a company can fund its operation. The mix of debt and equity is a cost-effective way of corporate financing. Shares are used to raise the capital that is owned by the company’s shareholders. On the other hand, debentures as a debt instrument are a secured way of raising capital with a fixed rate of interest. Share Capital—Authorised Share Capital, Issued Capital, and Subscribed Capital Share is the interest of a shareholder in a company. Though measured in monetary terms, it consists of a bundle of rights and liabilities which entitle a holder not only to participate in profits and assets, but also to enjoy various rights conferred by the Companies Act, 2013. A share is a fractional part of the share capital of the company. The share of a member is a movable property transferable in a manner mentioned in the Articles. It is incorporeal in nature, which is enforceable only by a legal action. Let us understand the types of share capital: Authorised capital: It is the maximum amount of share capital that a company can issue. It is known as the registered or nominal NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law capital that is mentioned in the MoA as it is the amount of capital that a company is authorised to raise from the public by issuing shares. Issued capital: It is the part of the authorised capital that is issued to the public for subscription. Subscribed capital: It is the portion of the issued capital that is subscribed or paid by the public. Types of Shares There are two major types of shares: equity shares and preference shares. The description of these types is as follows: IM S 1. Equity shares (or ordinary shares), apart from the rights mentioned above, give its owner the right to vote during resolutions passed in company’s general meetings, thereby giving him/her the right to participate in the decision-making of the management. Other characteristics of ordinary equity shares are as follows: Owners of equity shares are entitled to dividends out of profits as declared in an annual general meeting. the purposes of dividend and repayment of capital, they rank after preference shares. Dividends can be declared only after dividends are paid for preference shareholders. M For Companies Act, 2013 also allows for the issuing of equity shares with differential rights with regard to dividend and voting rights. N 132 Upon winding-up, equity shareholders have a claim over capital, next in line to preference shareholders. 2. Preference shares are those shares which carry a preferential right as regards the payment of dividend and repayment of capital (if and when the company is wound up). In general, preference shares are entitled to a fixed amount of dividend (unlike ordinary equity shares where the dividend may be higher, lower, or nil depending on profits made). Exhibit Types of Preference Shares The following are the different types of preference shares depending on how the dividend is paid over the years: Cumulative and non-cumulative preference shares: Cumulative shares are the kind of shares that provide the shareholder fixed dividend amount each year from the company’s net profit; and if the dividend is not paid in any year, it will be paid in subsequent years as the unpaid dividends are cumulated over NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Laws Related to the Formation of Businesses 133 years. However, in case of non-cumulative preference shares, if it fails to pay the dividend on such preference share in any year, then such dividend cannot be claimed by the shareholder in future. Participating and non-participating preference shares: These shares have a right to participate in the surplus profit after dividend has been paid to the equity shareholders. This means these shareholders get their fixed rate of dividend and shall also have the right to share in surplus, along with equity shareholders. Non-participating preference shareholders do not get a share of the surplus profits. and irredeemable preference shares: As per Section 55 of the Companies Act, 2013, a company can issue redeemable preference shares if its AoA authorises it. A company cannot issue any irredeemable preference shares. S Redeemable IM Debentures N Features of Debentures M Debentures are the instruments of a company evidencing a debt, whether constituting a charge on the assets of the company or not. ‘Debenture includes debenture stock, bond, or any other instrument of a company evidencing a debt, whether constituting a charge on the assets of the company or not. Debentures can be secured or unsecured. Also, it can be convertible or non-convertible. Debentures do not offer voting rights. The following are some features of debentures: Fixed rate of interest: Debenture holders are prioritised over shareholders for the payment of interest. They receive a fixed rate of interest. Debentures enforce a legal obligation on the company to pay first the interest on the due dates irrespective of the level of earning. Maturity: Debentures offer long-term funds to the company. The maturity of debentures comes after a specific period. This form of borrowings has to be paid at a definite stipulated time. On the date of maturity, the company has to pay back the principal amount; otherwise, the debenture-holders have the right to ask to enforce winding up of the company. Claims on assets: Debenture-holders have a right to claim on the assets of the company. They are given preference to be paid first before paying back to preference or equity shareholders at the time of liquidation of the company. Call feature: A call feature offers at the time of the issuance of debentures that entitles the company to redeem its debentures NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law before the maturity date at a certain price. The call price is usually more than the issue price. Control: Debenture-holders are considered as company’s creditors. They do not have any control over the managerial operations and voting rights. At the time of liquidation, the company has prior claims over shareholders. Difference between Shares and Debentures Table 3.6 shows the difference between shares and debentures: Table 3.6: Difference between Shares and Debentures Shares Debentures Debenture-holders are considered as the creditors of the company. Dividend is paid only if the company earns sufficient profit. It is mandatory to pay interest to debenture-holders irrespective of profit or loss. Shareholders bear high risk as shares are unsecured in nature. Debenture-holders bear less risk as debentures are secured in nature. They have voting rights and attend the general meetings of the companies. They do not have voting rights and are not authorised to attend the general meetings of the companies. Any interest that has to be paid to the shareholders will be paid only after all the other claims have been settled. Interest has been paid first and foremost to debenture-holders. Shareholders can convert their shares into debentures. Debenture-holders can never convert their debentures into shares. Repayment of shares is done after the payment of all the liabilities. Repayment of debentures is given priority over shares. M IM S Shareholders are considered as the owners of the company. N 134 3.3.14 MEMBERSHIP (OWNERSHIP) AND MANAGEMENT A person can become a member of a company by entering his/her name in the register of members, or by subscribing to the MoA, or by transfer of shares, or by application and allotment of shares, or by succession and by estoppel; or acquiescence. Every registered shareholder is a member. However, every member may not be a shareholder. An individual can be considered as a member without holding shares. The following are the rights of a member in a company: Right to obtain the share certificate from the company and his/her name registered in the register of members Right to receive the notice of general meetings and voting rights Right to receive the dividend that is declared by the company Right to obtain the copy of MoA or AoA NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Laws Related to the Formation of Businesses 135 Right to obtain a copy of minutes of general meeting Right to vote at meetings Right to appoint directors Right to inspect the statutory books of company Membership and Rights of Members The following are the members and their rights: Shareholders: The most important entities of a company are shareholders. Shareholders are considered as the owners of the company. They have voting rights and play a pivotal role in the working of the company. S Separation of ownership and management: Though a company is M IM owned by shareholders, they are not involved in the management of its business. Shareholders, as principals, set the objectives and goals for the company through their agents in terms of their representatives. The representatives are the directors of the company who, in turn, appoint managers to run the company. In every company, there is the separation of ownership and management. The management of the company is handled by the board of directors, whereas ownership lies in the hands of shareholders. The shareholders do not have the right to take part in the management activities as the decisions related to the management of the company are taken by the board of directors. of directors: The board of directors mainly handles the managerial role of the company. It has powers, on behalf of the company, to borrow, lend, or invest money in accordance with the provisions of the Act in this regard, which they can delegate to other managerial personnel. In accordance with this power, the company can make an arrangement with bankers to borrow money by way of overdraft, cash credit, and other types of loans. N Board The Companies Act, 2013 attempts to codify the duties of directors, including (but not limited to) the following: They are required to (a) act in good faith and in the best interest of the company, (b) not to have direct or indirect conflict with the interests of the company, and (c) exercise duties with diligence and reasonable care. The Companies Act, 2013 declares that it would be a punishable offence to commit a breach of those duties. The liability of the director in default for contravention shall not be less than ` 1,00,000, which may extend to ` 5,00,000. Key managerial persons: Key managerial personnel, in relation to a company, means: the Chief Executive Officer (CEO) or the managing director or the manager the company secretary NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law the whole-time director the Chief Financial Officer such other officers as may be prescribed by the Companies Act, 2013 from time to time 3.3.15 Corporate Governance and Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) M IM S Corporate Governance refers to the processes, mechanism, principles, and structure by which the business and affairs of the company are directed and managed and governed effectively. Its goal is to enhance long-term shareholder value through improving corporate performance and accountability while taking into account the interest of other shareholders. The structure of corporate governance defines the relations and the respective rights and responsibilities of the board of directors, managers, and shareholders. This structure further aids in formulating the rules and procedures to make decisions on corporate affairs as it offers the structure through which the company objectives are set, as well as the means of attaining and monitoring the performance of those objectives. The fundamental concern of corporate governance is to ensure the conditions whereby an organisation’s directors and managers act in the larger interests of the organisation and its shareholders in particular and stakeholders in general, and to ensure the means by which managers are held accountable to capital providers for the use of assets. In the framework of corporate governance, the issues of fiduciary duty and accountability are often discussed. It allows a more constructive and flexible response to raise standards in running and managing a company as opposed to strict statutory requirements. The Companies Act, 2013 is the foundation upon which corporate governance is built. It provides the rules for the boards of directors and their shareholders, the meaning of accountability for the exercise of corporate economic power, and the remedies and punishments for negligent, irresponsible, and fraudulent abuses of that power. N 136 Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) is the commitment of businesses to behave ethically and to contribute to sustainable economic development by working with all relevant stakeholders to improve their lives in ways that are good for business, the sustainable development agenda, and society at large. In the emerging markets, businesses have started realising the benefits attained out of CSR initiatives as it indirectly improves the quantified revenue and market access, productivity, and risk management. Kotak Committee Report and its Implications on Corporate Governance The SEBI Committee was formed on corporate governance on 2nd June, 2017 under the chairmanship of Mr. Uday Kotak who was NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Laws Related to the Formation of Businesses 137 the executive vice chairman and managing director of Kotak Mahindra Bank. The aim of formulating such a committee with different stakeholders from industry, government, stock exchange, etc., was to improve the standards of corporate governance in India. The following issues were recommended to this committee for reference: Ensuring independence in spirit of Independent Directors and their active participation in functioning of the company; Improving safeguards and disclosures pertaining to Related Party Transactions; Issues in accounting and auditing practices by listed companies; Improving effectiveness of Board Evaluation practices; issues faced by investors on voting and participation in general meetings; Any and transparency-related issues, if any; IM Disclosure S Addressing other matter, as the Committee deems fit, pertaining to corporate governance in India. Role N M This committee received the comments from Ministry of Finance and Ministry of Corporate Affairs. The report of Kotak Committee on corporate governance enforced some salient amendments in SEBI Regulations. SEBI followed this by amendments to the SEBI (Listing Obligation and Disclosure Requirements) Regulations, 2015 (‘SEBI LODR Regulations’) on May 09, 2018 and through issuance of a circular SEBI/ HO/CFD/CMD/CIR/P/2018/79 on May 10, 2018 (‘May 10 Circular’). The amendments to the SEBI LODR Regulations, unless specified otherwise, were to come into force with effect from April 1, 2019. Some of the amendments were as follows: and composition of the board of directors: There has to be a proper representation of the board by appointing six directors and maximum number of directorships an individual can take is reduced to seven. Compulsory woman director: In order to ensure gender diversity, one woman director needs to be present as director. In April, 2019, this amendment was applicable on top 500 listed companies. From April, 2020 onwards, it became applicable on top 1000 listed companies. Disclosure and transparency: The information related to the holder of depository receipts, institutional/investors meet, all credit ratings obtained by the entity, key changes in financial parameters, long-term and medium-term strategies, utilisation of proceeds Private Investment or Qualified Institutional Placement (QIP) and disqualification of directors need to be disclosed. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law IMPLICATIONS OF NOT FOLLOWING CORPORATE GOVERNANCE—EXAMPLES One of the scams that strengthened the need for corporate governance is listed as follows: UCO Bank Security Scam carried out by Harshad Mehta in the (Year 1992) UCO Bank Security Scam Carried out by Harshad Mehta in the Year 1992 IM S Mumbai, December 4: Five top bank officials, including former UCO Bank chairman and managing director K Margabandhu and an employee of the stock broker late Harshad Mehta were convicted in a 1992 securities scam case. A special court sentenced them to rigorous imprisonment ranging from six months to three years against the systematic fraud committed by Harshad Mehta in the Indian stock market. The entire security system of the Indian stock market collapsed as a result of a fraud of over ` 1000 crore from the banking system of India to buy stocks on the Bombay Stock Exchange. The officials of UCO Bank in this case illegally borrowed ` 40 crore in money market and placed the funds in the hands of late Mr. Mehta for his own use. M Justice DK Deshmukh sentenced Mr. Margabandhu and R Venkatkrishnan, former general manager of UCO Bank, to six months’ rigorous imprisonment and fined them ` 1 lakh each for conniving with other officials to place public funds amounting to ` 40 crore in the hands of late Mr. Mehta. C Ravi Kumar, assistant general manager, National Housing Bank, was sentenced to three years RI while Suresh Babu, assistant manager of the same bank, was given one year RI. N 138 SV Ramanathan, AGM, UCO Bank, was sentenced to one-month jail term while Atul Parekh, employee of late Mr. Mehta, was sent to prison for 15 days. Mr. Mehta died during the trial and hence the case against him was abated. All the public servants accused were asked to pay a fine of ` 1 lakh each. They were convicted of offences under 120-B IPC (conspiracy), 409 IPC (criminal breach of trust), and Section 13(2) read with Section 13(1) (D) of PCA. CBI registered the case in June 1992 against the accused. The failure of corporate governance is evident in this case as diversion of funds was acknowledged to unrelated purposes—lack of security and management, bribing officials, and bringing forth unaccounted money to gain special business advantages and manipulating the balance sheet to show a false financial picture of the organisation. Source: http://www.financialexpress.com/news/5-bankers-harshad-staff-convicted-in-92-scamcase/76281 [Retrieved on DD-MM-YYYY] NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Laws Related to the Formation of Businesses 139 CSR Provisions in the Companies Act, 2013 CSR refers to the self-regulatory measures taken by companies to perform philanthropic practices for societal and environmental welfare. The term CSR has been defined under the CSR Rules vide notification dated 27th February, 2014 which includes but is not limited to: The projects or programs relating to activities specified in the Schedule; or projects or programs relating to activities undertaken by the Board in pursuance of recommendations of the CSR Committee as per the declared CSR policy subject to the condition that such policy covers subjects enumerated in the Schedule. S The Ministry of Corporate Affairs has notified Section 135 and Schedule VII of the Companies Act as well as the provisions of the Companies (Corporate Social Responsibility Policy) Rules, 2014 (CRS Rules) which has come into effect from 1st April, 2014. IM Section 135 of the Companies Act provides the threshold limit for applicability of the CSR to a Company, i.e., (a) net worth of the company to be ` 500 crore or more (b) turnover of the company to be ` 1000 crore or more (c) net profit of the company to be ` 5 crore or more M Further, as per the CSR Rules, the provisions of CSR are not only applicable to Indian companies, but also applicable to branch and project offices of a foreign company in India. N Every qualifying company requires spending of at least 2% of its average net profit for the immediately preceding 3 financial years on CSR activities. Further, the qualifying company will be required to constitute a committee (CSR Committee) of the Board of Directors (Board) consisting of 3 or more directors. The CSR Committee shall formulate and recommend to the Board a policy which shall indicate the activities to be undertaken (CSR Policy), recommend the amount of expenditure to be incurred on the activities referred, and monitor the CSR Policy of the company. The Board shall take into account the recommendations made by the CSR Committee and approve the CSR Policy of the company. Assessing Impact of CSR on Society—Examples Firms like Johnson & Johnson, a global giant focuses on reducing the impact on the planet for last three decades. They have taken various initiatives to provide safe water to communities and offer economical alternate to electricity. Also, companies such as Google, Ford, and Microsoft take environment-friendly initiatives. Governments are also realising the importance of CSR as it is a cost-effective and sustainable development strategy. Government as a component of its national competitiveness strategies attracts foreign direct investment NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law and positions its exports in global markets, also motivating the firms to perform CSR. There is a significant opportunity for the public sector to harness business enthusiasm for CSR to help achieve its goal of reducing poverty. For example, Oil and Natural Gas Corporation (ONGC) Ltd. as a responsible corporate citizen is focused on the promotion of vocational education, health care, and entrepreneurship in the community coupled with initiatives in water management and disaster relief in the country. self assessment Questions IM S 11. A technology company that raised huge capital with the promise of changing people’s lives with innovative technical solutions went bankrupt due to faulty technology, which was unearthed much later. Customers suffered huge personal losses and damages due to faulty products produced by the company. Customers sued the company for getting compensation for damages suffered. In this case, a. the shareholders who were instrumental in setting up the company were also liable to pay for damages, if any, awarded by courts M b. promoter shareholders are liable to compensate monetarily the affected consumers c. compensation cannot go beyond the proceeds of the sale of assets of the company after paying creditors, and shareholders are not liable in any way N 140 d. All of these 12. The term ‘corporate veil’ means a. separation of the company as a separate legal entity from that of persons behind it b. the protection offered to consumers dealing with the company c. perpetual existence of the company d. None of these 13. The partnership form of business can lead to unlimited liability for partners. a. True b. False 14. The legal provisions regarding private limited companies are less strict than public limited companies. Choose the best reason from the given choices: a. Private limited companies have a limited number of shareholders. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Laws Related to the Formation of Businesses 141 b. Private limited companies cannot raise capital from the general public. c. Private limited companies tend to be family businesses. d. None of these 15. Courts can look into the persons behind a company, such as promoters, directors, or managers in the following cases: a. Courts can always probe into persons behind a company as a company is an invisible artificial person in the eyes of law. b. Courts can probe into the persons behind the company under some specific statutory provisions. S c. Courts have to treat a company as an artificial legal person and can probe into the persons behind the company only in case of fraudulent or illegal activities, and misdeeds. IM d. Both b. and c. 16. Choose the wrong statement with regard to the term ‘promoter’ of a company. a. A promoter is a person who is identified so in the prospectus. M b. A promoter is a person who has a control over the affairs of the company. N c. A promoter is a person who instructs and advises the Board of Directors. d. A promoter of the company cannot reimburse or remunerate himself/herself once the company is incorporated. 17. Which of the following documents should be registered with the Registrar of Companies during the incorporation of a company? a. Prospectus b. Memorandum of Association c. Articles of Association d. Both b. and c. 18. Which of the following statements is true with regard to the Memorandum of Association? a. A company is not restricted to the scope of activities mentioned in the memorandum. b. The law does not require anyone dealing with the company to know the contents of the memorandum beforehand. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law c. Liability clause of the memorandum states the nature of liability of members. d. The doctrine of indoor management requires external people to be aware of internal management of the company before entering into any contract. 19. Which of the following clauses of a memorandum can be altered with an ordinary resolution? a. Name clause b. Objects clause c. Increase in the authorised share capital d. Change in the scope of business activities S 20. The main purpose of the Articles of Association is: a. To define the scope of business activities of the company IM b. To define the organisational structure of the company c. To stipulate the rules, regulations, and bye-laws regarding internal management d. None of these M 21. It is more difficult to alter the clauses of the Articles of association than the clauses of the Memorandum of Association. a. True b. False 22. The Memorandum of Association and Articles of Association bind a company and its members as if the company and the members have signed a contract to observe the clauses of these documents. N 142 a. True b. False 23. The doctrine of constructive notice is not strictly followed by the courts in India. a. True b. False 24. Which of the following statements is true with regard to a prospectus? a. It is a document meant to invite the general public to subscribe to the new issue of shares. b. It should be filed with the Registrar through a lead merchant banker. c. The contents of a prospectus should follow the relevant provisions of the Companies Act and SEBI regulations. d. All of these NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Laws Related to the Formation of Businesses 143 25. What does the golden rule of a prospectus state? a.The pricing of shares should always be at a discount to fair value. b. It should contain only minimal information as required by law. c. It should make statements with scrupulous accuracy and avoid statements which are not strictly correct and, thereby, reflect the true nature of the company’s venture. d. None of these 26. Choose the right statement(s) with regard to the members of a public limited company. S a. All the shareholders of a public limited company are its members. IM b. Those who are listed as members in the memorandum can only be termed as its members and not all shareholders. d. Both a. and c. Activity M c. Those who are registered as members (or beneficial owners in depositories) with the registrar of companies are its members. N Using secondary sources of information, find the amendments done in the Companies Act, 2013. 3.4 Summary Sole proprietorship refers to the type of business that is operated by a single person, though he/she may take the help of his/her family members for the purpose of running it. A sole proprietorship is the best option for a business in which investment and risks associated with it are few, the nature of business is simple, decision-making is simple, and customers are in direct contact with the business. Partnership is ‘the relationship between persons who have agreed to share the profits of a business carried on by all or any one of them acting for all’. A partnership is based upon the idea of mutual agency. Every partner of a firm has a dual role—the one of a principal and the other of an agent. In other words, the law of partnership is an extension of the law of agency. A partnership deed is a written agreement made between the partners, which delineates the rights and duties of the partners, NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education S Business Law the name and objective of the partnership business, the address of the firm, and other details. A Limited Liability Partnership (LLP) is a hybrid type of corporate structure which has the advantage and flexibility of a traditional partnership firm and features of a company. Karta is the head as well as the representative of a Hindu Undivided Family (HUF). He/she is the manager of the HUF business and can act for or on behalf of the other family members. A company is considered as a separate entity or an association with a common seal, perpetual succession, and limited liability. company is required to be registered under the Companies Act, 2013 in order to function as a legal entity. The minimum number of people required to formulate a public company and a private company are seven and two, respectively. company is artificial in nature as it is invisible, intangible, immortal, and exists only in the contemplation of law. Due to its artificial nature, it needs to be operated by the Board of Directors consisting of individuals. IM A S A The two major kinds of companies are statutory companies and registered companies. Before setting up a company, an individual called ‘promoter’ has to M conceive the idea of the business and work on its implementation. The N 144 ‘Certificate of Incorporation’ is a legal document that brings the company into existence from the date mentioned therein. From the issue date of the certificate of incorporation, the company becomes a legal entity with separate legal personality, perpetual existence, and limited liability. A new public company or a company with no track record of profits and not meeting the other similar eligibility conditions as prescribed by regulations of the Securities and Exchange Board of India (SEBI) cannot raise equity capital from the public by floatation of equity shares in the capital market. The Memorandum of Association (MoA) is the charter of the company that defines and confines the scope of business objects of the company. It is also called the life-giving document. The doctrine of indoor management provides that ‘though a person is presumed to have the knowledge of memorandum and Articles, it is not required of him/her to enquire into the regularity of the indoor proceedings’. Share is the interest of a shareholder in a company. Though measured in monetary terms, it consists of a bundle of rights and liabilities which entitle a holder not only to participate in profits and assets, but also to enjoy various contractual rights conferred by the Act. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Laws Related to the Formation of Businesses 145 Debentures are the instruments of a company evidencing a debt, whether constituting a charge on the assets of the company or not. The provision of debentures is specified in Section 2(30) of the Company Law. Corporate Governance refers to the processes, mechanisms, principles, and structures by which the business and affairs of the company are directed and managed and governed effectively. Its goal is to enhance long-term shareholder value through improving corporate performance and accountability while taking into account the interest of other shareholders. Social Responsibility (CSR) is the commitment of businesses to behave ethically and to contribute to sustainable economic development by working with all the relevant stakeholders to improve their lives in ways that are good for business, the sustainable development agenda, and society at large. S Corporate Board IM key words of Directors (BOD): A collective body of directors of a company Insolvent: on him A person who is unable to pay off the liabilities due M Joint stock company: A separate legal entity in which a member has a separate status as that of the company Paid-up share capital: The aggregate amount of money credited Voting N as paid-up is equivalent to the amount received as paid-up in respect of shares issued and also includes any amount credited as paid-up in respect of shares of the company, but does not include any other amount received in respect of such shares by whatever name called right: The right of a member of a company to vote in any meeting of the company or by means of postal ballot with respect to the affairs of the company 3.5 Descriptive Questions 1. Describe the legal position of a minor in a partnership firm. What are his/her rights and liabilities? 2. Define the concept of LLP under the Limited Liability Partnership Act, 2008. What is the legal nature of an LLP? 3. Define the concept of an HUF. Explain the characteristics of an HUF in detail. 4. What are the important legal characteristics of companies as per the Companies Act? Explain the concept of limited liability and perpetual existence of companies. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education ? Business Law 5. What are the different kinds of companies that can be incorporated under the Companies Act, 2013? 6. What are the steps involved in incorporating a company? 7. Explain the purpose and contents of the Memorandum of Association and Articles of Association of a company. 8. Explain the concept of shares, different types of shares, and rights of shareholders. 9. Write a short note on corporate governance and corporate social responsibility. 3.6 Answers and Hints Topic Q. No. M Companies Act, 2013 Answer 1. Sole proprietorship 2. legal relation 3. a. True 4. d. Partnership between minors 5. partnership deed 6. a. 7. Limited Liability Partnership Act, 2008 8. a. True 9. a. Karta 10. b. Two 11. c. Compensation cannot go beyond the proceeds of the sale of assets of the company after paying creditors and shareholders are not liable in any way. 12. a. Separation of the company as a separate legal entity from that of persons behind it 13. a. True 14. b. Private limited companies cannot raise capital from the general public. 15. d. IM Unincorporated and Incorporated Forms of Business S ANSWERS FOR SELF ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS N 146 True Both b and c NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Laws Related to the Formation of Businesses 147 Q. No. Answer 16. d. A promoter of the company cannot reimburse or remunerate himself/ herself once the company is incorporated. 17. d. 18. c. Liability clause of the memorandum states the nature of liability of members 19. c. 20. c. To stipulate the rules, regulations, and bye-laws regarding internal management 21. b. False 22. a. True 23. b. False 24. d. All of these 25. c. It should make statements with scrupulous accuracy and avoid statements which are not strictly correct and, thereby, reflect the true nature of the company’s venture. 26. d. Both a and c Both b and c IM S Increase in authorised share capital M Topic HINTS FOR DESCRIPTIVE QUESTIONS N 1. The roles, duties, and rights of a minor are not similar to those of other partners. These are also different before and after the date of maturity of the contract. Refer to Section 3.2 Unincorporated and Incorporated Forms of Business 2. The Limited Liability Partnership (LLP) is an innovative type of corporate structure which has the advantage and flexibility of a partnership. The cost of developing an LLP and the compliance costs of the LLP are relatively lower. Refer to Section 3.2 Unincorporated and Incorporated Forms of Business 3. A Hindu Undivided Family (HUF) is a unique form of business entity restricted to India. It is formed between all the members of an HUF including females. Refer to Section 3.2 Unincorporated and Incorporated Forms of Business 4. Limited liability, definition, incorporation, etc., are some major characteristics of a company. Refer to Section 3.3 Companies Act, 2013 5. The two major kinds of companies are statutory companies and registered companies. The statutory companies are government companies formed by special acts of the Parliament. Refer to Section 3.3 Companies Act, 2013 NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law 6. Incorporation refers to the process of bringing the company into existence as a separate corporate legal entity. Refer to Section 3.3 Companies Act, 2013 7. The Memorandum of Association is the charter of a company that defines and confines the scope of business objects of the company. Refer to Section 3.3 Companies Act, 2013 8. A share refers to the share of equity capital contributed by a member to the share capital of a company represented by the certificate of shares. Refer to Section 3.3 Companies Act, 2013 S 9. The Corporate Governance structure specifies the relations, and the distribution of rights and responsibilities, among primarily three groups of participants, viz., the Board of directors, managers, and shareholders. Refer to Section 3.3 Companies Act, 2013 3.7 Suggested Readings & References IM Suggested Readings Pathak, A. (2021). Legal Aspects of Business. Tata McGraw-Hill. Ramaiya (Revised by Arvind P Datar, Balasubramanian S). (2014). A Ramaiya Guide to the Companies Act, 18th Edition. Lexis Nexis. M E-References Indian N 148 Partnership Act, 1932 | Bare Acts | Law Library | Advocate Khoj (2018). Retrieved on DD-MM-YYYY from http:// www.advocatekhoj.com/library/bareacts/partnership/index. php?Title=Indian%20Partnership% 20Act,%201932 Satapathy, S. (2018). Meaning of HUF—Hindu Undivided Family. Retrieved on DD-MM-YYYY from http://incometaxmanagement. com/Pages/HUF/1-Meaning_of_HUFHindu_Undivided_Family. html (2020). Retrieved 26 October 2020, from http://www.caaa.in/ resource/Image/11_cos_act_2013.pdf Companies Act 2013—Salient Features of the Indian Companies Act, 2013 [UPSC GS-II]. (2020). Retrieved on 26th October, 2020 from https://byjus.com/free-ias-prep/indian-companies-act/ NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education C h 4 a pt e r LAWS THAT COMMONLY AFFECT BUSINESSES IM Introduction Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 4.2.1 Scope, Features and Importance of Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 4.2.2 Types of Negotiable Instruments 4.2.3Recent Amendments in the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 and their Impact 4.2.4 Payment and Settlement Systems Act, 2007 and its Features 4.2.5Penalties and Punishment under Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 and Payment and Settlement Systems Act, 2007 Leading Case Studies 4.2.6 Self Assessment Questions Activity 4.3 Intellectual Property Law 4.3.1 What are Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)? 4.3.2 Impact of IPR 4.3.3 Leading Case Laws in IPR Self Assessment Questions Activity Prevention of Sexual Harassment 4.4 4.4.1 What is Sexual Harassment? 4.4.2Judgment – Vishakha vs. State of Rajasthan 4.4.3The Sexual Harassment of Women at Workplace (Prevention, Prohibition and Redressal) Act, 2013 4.4.4Committee on Prevention of Sexual Harassment – Appointment, Members, Procedures and Actions to be Taken 4.4.5 Impact of Sexual Harassment Cases on Indian and Foreign Organisations Self Assessment Questions Activity N M 4.1 4.2 S Contents NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law CONTENTS S M 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 Information Technology Law Information Technology Act, 2000 and its Objectives 4.5.1 4.5.2 Features of the Information and Technology Act, 2000 4.5.3Scope and Major Provisions under the Information and Technology Act, 2000 E-Commerce 4.5.4 4.5.5 E-Governance – Meaning and Status in India 4.5.6 The Information Technology Amendment Act, 2008 Cybercrime 4.5.7 Self Assessment Questions Activity Summary Descriptive Questions Answers and Hints Suggested Readings & References IM 4.5 N 150 NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education LAWS THAT COMMONLY AFFECT BUSINESSES Introductory Caselet TOYOTA AND ITS PRIUS TRADEMARK, NO PASSING OFF ACTION WITHOUT PRIOR GOODWILL, REPUTATION AND MARKET POPULARITY IM S Toyota launched the world’s first commercial hybrid car called ‘Prius’ in Japan in 1997, which was subsequently introduced in other countries like UK, USA, Australia, etc., in 2001. The trade name ‘Prius’ was initially registered in Japan in 1990 followed by registration in 28 other countries. The car was, however, not introduced in India till 2009. Considering the trade name to have become well established, it thought itself as the natural owner of the trade name all across the globe. To its dismay, the company discovered that the same trade name has been registered in 2001 in India by a small auto-parts manufacturer. The auto-supplier was making supplies to several major automobile manufacturers, like Hyundai, GM and even Toyota. The Indian company claimed to have got the Latin word ‘Prius’ from English Dictionary as a substitute for the Sanskrit phrase ‘pehla prayas’ meaning ‘to come first’. It further claimed its intention to use this trade name for their new product ‘Add-On Chrome-Plated Accessories’ and that it has nothing to do with Toyota’s Prius. M Toyota approached the Indian trademark authorities for cancellation of the registered trademark given to the Indian auto-supplier on the basis of prior use of trademark since 1990 and legitimate ownership of the trademark in 28 countries. N ISSUE: Does the Indian auto-supplier have a valid claim on his registered trade name? PASSING-OFF Another concept with regard to unregistered trademarks is ‘Passing-Off’. Suppose one manufacturer has successfully built a reputation over a period of time with a well-known trademark, but has not got it registered. If another manufacturer tries to sell his own goods using the reputation of the first manufacturer built on that unregistered trademark, the second manufacturer is said to be passing off his goods using a trademark which does not belong to him. The concept of ‘infringement’ is applicable only in the case of registered trademarks, and the statutory right for an action against infringement is not applicable in the case of ‘Passing-Off’. In a passing-off action, the registration of the trade name has no meaning (as neither manufacturer has registered it) and the priority in adoption and usage of the trademark is superior to the priority in registration. A prior user of the trademark has rights even over a later registered user, provided he adduces proof of goodwill, NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Case Objective This caselet discusses whether Toyota has a valid claim on its registered trade name? 151 Business Law Introductory Caselet reputation, and popularity in the market where the suit for passing off is brought. However, the passing-off action will fail if such proof does not relate to the relevant jurisdiction in which it has been filed. TERRITORIAL RIGHTS: GLOBAL TRADEMARKS TOYOTA JIDOSHA KABUSHIKI KAISHA VS. M/S PRIUS AUTO INDUSTRIES LIMITED (2017) IM S It needs to be noted that trademarks are territorial in nature and there is no concept of ‘global trademark’. Companies need to register their trademarks in every country in which they propose to sell their goods. It is unlike the facility of international registration of patents provided by WIPO, whereby a single application is sufficient for protection of patent all over the world. However, the protection afforded to unregistered trademarks is also available for foreign trademarks which have built a reputation in a particular country through extensive advertisements and publicity. The trans-border reputation can enable a global manufacturer to seek injunction in the courts of the country in which he is not trading. Indian courts have ‘recognised the existence of trans-border reputation and have granted an injunction in several cases in the past. M THE VERDICT Based on the logic of territorial rights, the Delhi High Court issued an injunction order against the Indian auto spare parts maker (defendant) using the registered trademarks of Toyota. Toyota (the Plaintiff) filed an appeal before the Division Bench of the High Court against the relief to defendant which permitted the defendant to use the registered as well as unregistered trademarks of Toyota subject to the condition that they use the trademarks only for the purpose of identifying that the defendants’ product can be used in Toyota’s cars. Consequently, the issue went in appeal before the Supreme Court. The Supreme Court took a position that the case depends mainly on whether there had been a spillover of the reputation and goodwill of the trademark of Toyota in India. It was held that the Prius car was launched in India in 2009 and, at that time, the brand name had not acquired the degree of goodwill, reputation and market popularity in the Indian market. It meant that the degree of goodwill was not enough so as to vest in the plaintiff the necessary attributes of the right of a prior use so as to successfully maintain an action of passing off even against the registered owner. N 152 All this upheld the Delhi High Court order and granted the rights for the usage of the trademark ‘Prius’ to the defendant as there were not sufficient enough proofs of reputation of ‘Prius’ in the Indian market. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education LAWS THAT COMMONLY AFFECT BUSINESSES Learning objectives After studying this chapter, you will be able to: Explain various aspects of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881, Payment and Settlement Systems Act, 2007 Describe the miscellaneous intellectual property rights and their governing legislations Outline the meaning of sexual harassment and the legislation related to the prevention of sexual harassment at workplace Explain the laws that govern the Information Technology, Internet and e-commerce >> >> >> >> S 4.1 INTRODUCTION IM In the previous chapter, you studied the incorporated and unincorporated forms of business and the Companies Act, 2013. In this chapter, you will study various laws that commonly affect businesses. M A negotiable instrument is essentially a document that promises a sum of payment to a specific person or the bearer of the instrument at a specified date. The Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 is the governing act for negotiable instruments which include cheques, bills of exchange and promissory notes. N In the modern era, the grant of protection to intellectual property is essential for the development and prosperity of any society. Without such protection, creative people will not invest time, effort and money in doing innovative tasks because of the possibility of theft by others. Considering the significance of Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs), a multilateral agreement pertaining to Trade Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Rights (TRIPS) has been entered into under the auspices of World Trade Organization (WTO). Moreover, a specialised agency of the United Nations, known as the World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO), has been set up in 1967 for the protection of IPRs and to incentivise innovation and creativity. Owing to the globalisation and emergence of multinational corporations in recent decades, the concept of IPRs has acquired greater significance and importance from the perspective of both domestic and international businesses. To deal with the multiple issues, such as cyber-crime, e-commerce, etc., the Indian government has enacted the Information Technology Act, 2000 and Information Technology (Amendment) Act, 2008. Due to increasing levels of education and elimination of gender biasness, women now work in various industries. There has been instances when women are subject to sexual harrasment. To ensure that sexual harassment cases at workplaces can be dealt with effectively, the Indian Government has enacted a legislation to that effect. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Quick Revision 153 154 Business Law 4.2 NEGOTIABLE INSTRUMENTS ACT, 1881 A negotiable instrument is a document that promises the payment of a certain sum of money to the assignee or to some specific person on the instruction of assignee. Negotiable instruments are the means used for transferring money from one person to another. The Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 is the law that governs negotiable instruments in India. Negotiable instruments must be in a written form. As per the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881, negotiable instruments include promissory notes, bills of exchange and cheques. These instruments are used to transfer money to the bearer of the document. Apart from these instruments, other negotiable instruments such as ‘hundis’ and ‘railway receipts’ are governed by local usage. IM Some important features of negotiable instruments are as follows: Written instrument: A negotiable instrument is a written document with a signature of the drawer on it, which indicates that the drawer of the instrument intends to pay a specified amount to the ‘drawee’. Easy transaction and negotiability: A negotiable instrument must N The insertion of new provisions in Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 is a welcome step aimed at addressing the issue of undue delay, efficacy and efficiency in cases related to the dishonor of cheques. The scope of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 is limited to the three negotiable instruments that are defined in the Act, namely promissory notes, bills of exchange and cheques. It must also be understood that no provision of Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 can be applied to the usage of any other type of instrument. M Know More S 4.2.1 SCOPE, FEATURES AND IMPORTANCE OF NEGOTIABLE INSTRUMENTS ACT, 1881 be easily and freely transferable. The property being a negotiable instrument can be transferred with minimal formality. Where the instrument is payable by delivery, the property passes by mere delivery of instrument to the bearer, and where the instrument is payable to order, then the transfer of property is by endorsement and delivery. Also, there is no restriction on the number of times a negotiable instrument can be reassigned till it attains maturity. Good title of transferee: The transferee of a negotiable instrument is known as holder in due course. A bona fide transferee for value is not affected by any defect of title on the part of the transferor or of any of the previous holders of the instrument. This is the main distinction between a negotiable instrument and other subjects of the ordinary transfer. Unconditional order/promise: The promise or order must be unconditional. In the case of a conditional promissory note or bill of exchange, it will cease to be negotiable. Payment: The instrument involves the payment of a certain amount of money. It cannot be based on assets, securities or other things. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education LAWS THAT COMMONLY AFFECT BUSINESSES 155 Time of payment: The instrument must be payable at a certain time. Suppose the instrument mentions ‘payment can be made when convenient’, it is not a negotiable instrument. Certain payee: The name of the person on whom the instrument is drawn must be mentioned clearly. Here, the term ‘person’ may be used for individual, body corporate, trade unions, etc. Signature: A negotiable instrument is valid only if it bears the signature of its maker or drawer. Delivery: A negotiable instrument must be delivered to the intended payee. As per the Indian Stamp Act, 1899, bills of exchange and promissory notes are mandatory. The value of the stamp applicable depends on the value and time of the negotiable instrument. S Stamping: to file a suit: In case the instrument is dishonoured, the transferee or the payee has the right to file a legal suit. There are certain presumptions that apply to a negotiable instrument like (i) the instrument was for a valid consideration; (ii) every transfer of the instrument is presumed to have been made before it attained maturity; (iii) every holder of instrument is a holder in due course; (iv) in a suit for the dishonour of instrument, it is presumed that it was dishonoured till such time that the other party can prove it was not 4.2.2 M Presumptions: IM Right TYPES OF NEGOTIABLE INSTRUMENTS N According to Section 13 of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881, a ‘Negotiable Instrument’ means a promissory note, bill of exchange or cheque payable either to order or to bearer. Let us study these three negotiable instruments in the next sections. A bearer is a person who possess the promissory note. PROMISSORY NOTE – ELEMENTS AND PARTIES A promissory note is a written note ordering/promising to pay a certain amount of money in future only to, or to the order of, a certain person, or to the bearer. A bearer is a person who possess the promissory note. Promissory notes are instruments wherein a debtor makes a promise to his creditor to pay the whole amount at a promised date. After stamping is done on a promissory note, it becomes legal and valid. The revenue stamps that are to be affixed on the promissory note depend on the value of the promissory note. With respect to promissory notes, there are two parties, namely the maker/payer/drawer and the drawee/payee. Maker is the one who makes the promissory note and payee is the one to whom the promisNMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education MARK IT! Section 4 of the Act defines a promissory note as an instrument in writing (not being a bank note or a currency note) containing an unconditional undertaking, signed by the maker, to pay a certain sum of money only to, or to the order of, a certain person, or to the bearer of the instrument. 156 Business Law sory note is given or in whose favour the promissory note is written. The essential elements of a promissory note include: A promissory note exists in a written form. It contains an express promise to pay money. It contains an unconditional promise to pay. It is signed by the drawer. It mentions that ‘drawer’ and ‘drawee’ are certain persons. It is made for a certain amount that is paid in monetary terms only. BILL OF EXCHANGE – ELEMENTS AND PARTIES S Some important elements of a bill of exchange is as follows: Written form Express order to make payment Definite and unconditional and free from any condition M Section 5 of the Act defines the bill of exchange as an instrument, in writing, containing an unconditional order, signed by the maker, directing a certain person to pay a certain sum of money only to, or to the order of, a certain person or to the bearer of the instrument. IM MARK IT! A bill of exchange is a written unconditional order that is signed by the maker which directs a person to pay a certain amount of money only to a certain person or to the bearer. In a bill of exchange, there are three parties, namely drawer, drawee and payee. The drawer is the person who draws the bill of exchange. The third party to whom the order to pay money is given is called the drawee and the person to whom the payment is to be made is called the payee. Presence NOTE N Order Section 6, Explanation I, Clause (a) as amended by Act 26 of 2015 defines `a cheque in electronic form’ as a cheque drawn in electronic form by using any computer resource and signed in a secured system with a digital signature (with or without biometric signature) and asymmetric crypto system or with an electronic signature, as the case may be. of three parties to pay money only Names of parties Signed by the drawer Amount of money must be fixed Stamping of bill is essential under the provisions of the Indian Stamp Act, 1899. CHEQUE – TYPES AND LEGAL VALIDITY A cheque is a special kind of bill of exchange that is drawn on a specified banker and is payable only on demand. A cheque also includes the electronic image of a truncated cheque and a cheque in the electronic form. A cheque must be signed and must contain an unconditional order on a specified banker to pay a sum of money. A cheque does not require acceptance. There are three parties to a cheque, namely drawer, drawee and payee. The drawer is the maker of a cheque. The banker on whom the cheque is drawn is called the drawee and the person in whose favour the cheque is made is called the payee. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education LAWS THAT COMMONLY AFFECT BUSINESSES 157 Some important elements of a cheque is as follows: Written Drawn form Unconditional Bears MARK IT! on a specified bank order the signature of the maker Under Section 35A of the Banking Regulation Act, 1949, the validity of a cheque in India is 3 months Payable Does on demand not require stamping Types of Cheques S Exhibit cheque: It is a cheque that can be used to pay cash to the bearer of the cheque or to any person who presents the cheque to the bank. The bearer cheque does not mention the word ‘bearer’ on the cheque. Such a cheque can be presented by a bearer at the counter of the drawee bank and it is paid in cash. An important characteristic of the bearer cheques is that it can be transferred to another person. A person who is in lawful possession of a cheque payable to a bearer as a holder of the cheque is entitled to lawfully enforce the payment due. However, in certain specific cases, the bank may ask for identification proof if the amount of cheque is substantial. Order N M Bearer IM There are different types of cheques. Some of them are explained as follows: cheque: When the cheque is paid to a particular person with the word ‘order’ written on it, it is called ‘order cheque’. In such cases, the payment is done to the named person only. The payee can transfer the cheque, but he has to write his name at the back of the cheque. The cheque would bear words like, ‘Pay to X or order’. Crossed cheque: Crossed cheques are exactly opposite to the open cheques. The payment of crossed cheques can only be credited in the account of the payee. Such cheques cannot be encashed. A cheque becomes a crossed cheque by drawing two parallel lines across the cheque. A crossed cheque is also called an account payee cheque. Crossed cheques are the safest form of a cheque. The cheque bears two parallel lines in the top left corner, with or without the words ‘not negotiable’. Open cheque: A cheque that is not crossed or a bearer cheque is called an open cheque. An open cheque is risky because it may be encashed by any person holding it (bearer cheque). If the cheque is stolen, the rightful drawer will be put to loss. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Section 6 Explanation I, Clause (b) defines ‘a truncated cheque’ as a cheque which is truncated during the course of a clearing cycle, either by the clearing house or by the bank whether paying or receiving payment, immediately on generation of an electronic image for transmission, substituting the further physical movement of the cheque in writing. Business Law Ante-dated (pre-dated) cheque: If the drawer mentions a past date on the cheque, this type of cheque is called an ante-dated cheque. Example: A cheque issued on 1st May, 2020 bearing a date 25th, April, 2020 is an ante-dated cheque. Stale cheque: Any cheque has validity for three months from the date mentioned on it. The cheque becomes a stale cheque after a period of three months from the date mentioned on it. It is pertinent to know that a stale cheque cannot be accepted by the bank. Post-dated cheque: If the drawer mentions a future date on the cheque, this type of cheque is called a post-dated cheque. IM S Example: A cheque issued on 1 May 2020 bearing a date of 25 June 2020 is a post-dated cheque and will be valid for three months from the date mentioned on the cheque. There are certain types of cheques that are mentioned in the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 as follows: crossed generally: Section 123 of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 states that when a cheque bears two parallel transverse lines or some words or company name or any abbreviation with or without the words ‘not negotiable’ between two parallel transverse lines, such a cheque is considered to be crossed generally. M Cheques Cheque N 158 crossed specially: Section 124 of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 states that when a crossed cheque bears the name of a banker with or without the words ‘not negotiable’, such a cheque is called a specially crossed cheque. Such a cheque can be presented to and cleared by a paying bank whose name appears on the cheque. Cheque bearing ‘not negotiable’ crossing: Section 130 of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 states that a person taking a cheque crossed generally or specially, bearing in either case the words ‘not negotiable’, shall not have, and shall not be capable of giving, a better title to the cheque than that which the person from whom he took it had. 4.2.3 RECENT AMENDMENTS IN THE NEGOTIABLE INSTRUMENTS ACT, 1881 AND THEIR IMPACT Some of the important amendments made in the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 as per the Negotiable Instruments (Amendment) Act, 1881 are as follows: Insertion of a new Section 143A (Power to direct interim compensation): Section 143A of the Negotiable Instruments Act, NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education LAWS THAT COMMONLY AFFECT BUSINESSES 1881 gives power to the court to order the drawer of a cheque to pay interim compensation to the complainant in a summary trial/ summons case where he pleads not guilty to the accusations in the complaint. This Section also states that the interim compensation shall not exceed 20% of the amount of the cheque which is to be paid within 60 days from the date of the order. In case the drawer of the cheque is acquitted, the court may direct the complainant to repay the amount of interim payment to the drawer at interest rates as prescribed by RBI. This amendment empowers to deposit 20% of the disputed amount in the initial period for a security purpose. Though the percentage mentioned is only 20%, it depends from one judge to the other as he can ask for more or less depending upon the case. of a new Section 148 (Power of the appellate court to order payment pending appeal against conviction): If a person is found guilty by the trial court, that person has a right to file an appeal in the Appellate Court. However, such an appeal can only be submitted in the appellate court if the petitioner/appellant deposits a minimum of 20% of the fine/compensation awarded as interim compensation paid under Section 143A. If the appellant is acquitted of the charges, the amount is refunded back along with applicable interest to him. Such amount has to be paid within 60 days from the date of order. IM S Insertion M 4.2.4 PAYMENT AND SETTLEMENT SYSTEMS ACT, 2007 AND ITS FEATURES N It is a known fact that all countries need money for carrying out their economic activities, such as trade and commerce, which is essential for taking care of the demand and supply of goods and services. Trade and commerce transactions require payments of money and settlement of dues. The efficiency of an economy depends on the reliability of the payment and settlement system of the country. In any economy or financial market of a country, the payment and settlement system is a network of miscellaneous arrangements that help in systematically and efficiently transferring money, cheques, demand drafts, etc., through various electronic channels in a secured manner. The Central Bank of a country is the regulatory authority that is responsible for the development and maintenance of the payment and settlement systems. In India, the Reserve Bank of India is the regulatory authority for the financial system. It is also the in-charge of the development of the National Payment and Settlement System. All the payments and settlements are regulated and governed by the Payment and Settlement Systems (PSS) Act 2007 (hereinafter referred to as ‘PSS Act’). There are two regulations that have been made by the RBI in the PSS Act, 2007. The first regulation is related to the Board for Regulation NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 159 Business Law and Supervision of Payment and Settlement Systems (BPSS), 2008. It is a sub-committee of the RBI and it is the highest policy-making body related to payment systems. This committee comprises the central board of directors of the RBI. The second regulations are the Payment and Settlement Systems Regulations, 2008. These regulations lay down the basic procedures that are required for carrying out or starting a payment system. It includes matters related to the following: Application form to apply for the authorisation for commencing or carrying a payment system Granting authorisation Payment instructions returns S Furnishing Documentation accounts and balance sheets IM Furnishing Determination of standards of payment systems Some of the payment and settlement systems in India are as follows: Paper-based payment systems, such as cheques and drafts Time Gross Settlement (RTGS) M Real National Electronic Fund Transfer (NEFT) National Electronic Clearing Service (Credit and Debit) Card payments Immediate N 160 Payment Service (IMPS) Mobile banking systems Online transactions 4.2.5 P ENALTIES AND PUNISHMENT UNDER NEGOTIABLE INSTRUMENTS ACT, 1881 AND PAYMENT AND SETTLEMENT SYSTEMS ACT, 2007 Section 138 of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 deals with penalties that can be imposed if a cheque is dishonoured due to insufficient funds. According to this Section, if a cheque is drawn by a person on an account that is operated under his name with a particular banker for the payment of a sum of money to another person for the discharge of any debt or liability, and it is returned by the bank due to insufficient funds, the bank will not release the required sum of money and such a cheque will be dishonoured. If a cheque issued by a drawer is dishonoured, the drawer is said to have committed an offence. If this offence is proved, the drawer may be punished with imprisonment for a term that may extend up to 2 years or a fine twice the amount of the cheque. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education LAWS THAT COMMONLY AFFECT BUSINESSES An offence under Section 138 of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 is registered if the drawee serves a notice to the drawer within 1 month of the dishonour and the drawer has to make payment within 15 days of the service of the notice. If the drawer makes the payment within 15 days, no offence is committed. However, if the drawer fails to make the payment, an offence is perpetrated. The case can be filed by the drawee within 1 month from the expiry of the 15th day of notice to the drawer. 4.2.6 LEADING CASE STUDIES M IM S In Dayawati vs. Yogesh Kumar Gosain case, the Court held that it is legal to refer a criminal compoundable case as one under Section 138 of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1888 to mediation. In this case, the fundamental issue is related to the settlement of disputes in criminal law through alternative dispute mechanisms. The Court, in order to arrive at its decision, studied the distinction between different kinds of criminal offences, i.e., compoundable and non-compoundable offences. The Court stated that there is no express statutory provision in the legislation that enables the criminal courts to refer the complainant and accused persons to Alternate Dispute Redressal (ADR) mechanism; but the Code of Criminal Procedure does permit and recognise settlement without stipulating or restricting the process by which it may be reached. There is, thus, no bar in utilising the alternate dispute mechanism including arbitration, mediation, conciliation (recognised under Section 89 of Code of Civil Procedure) to settle disputes that are the subject matter of offences covered under Section 320 of the Code of Criminal Procedure. N Self Assessment Questions 1. Which of the following is a synonym of a pre-dated cheque? a. Crossed cheque b. Ante-dated cheque c. Open cheque d. Stale cheque 2. If a cheque dishonour offence is proved, the drawer may be punished with an imprisonment for a term that may extend up to ______ years or a fine twice the amount of the cheque. 3. Payment and Settlement Systems Regulations, 2008 lay down the basic procedures that are required for carrying out or starting a payment system. a. True b. False Activity Find out the areas or activities or business transactions that are done with the help of promissory notes. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 161 Business Law 4.3 INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY LAW The current era is characterised by knowledge and information technology. With these trends, the term ‘intellectual capital’ has been popularised. Intellectual capital means the sum total of all intangible assets of a business, such as human capital, structural capital and relational capital. In recent decades, there has been a remarkable increase in cross-border and global transactions which have led to an increase in intellectual property and related rights. S Now, organisations are going global and are selling their goods and services in various countries across the globe. It must be remembered that Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs) are country-specific. Therefore, specific IPRs and laws of the country where an organisation wants to do business must be ascertained. IM In India, there is a well-established, statutory, administrative and judicial framework for safeguarding IPRs. India is a member of the WTO and is a signatory to the TRIPS agreement. The TRIPS agreement is an international and legal agreement signed between all member countries of the WTO. It means that India complies with the obligations under the TRIPS agreement by introducing and amending different laws relating to IPRs. M Various intellectual properties, such as patents, trademarks and copyrights, have been protected in India. For example, various international trademarks have been protected in India by the Indian courts in the past although these trademarks were not registered in India. Also, various computer databases and software programs have been protected under the copyright law of India. Copyright law has also helped in restricting the piracy of creative work through judicial intervention. N 162 In India, trade secrets and know-how are not protected under any particular IPR law. However, these are protected by the common law of India. Trade secrets are protected using the law for breach of confidentiality. 4.3.1 WHAT ARE INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS (IPR)? According to the World Trade Organisation, intellectual property rights are the rights given to persons over the creations of their minds. They usually give the creator an exclusive right over the use of his/her creation for a certain period of time. IPRs are similar to any other rights that enable their creators or owners to benefit from their own work or investments. These recognition of a persons right to ownership and protection of IPRs are mentioned in Article 27 of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights. There were two major treaties, namely Paris Convention for the Protection of Industrial Property (1883) for Patents and the Berne Convention NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education LAWS THAT COMMONLY AFFECT BUSINESSES for Protection of Literary and Artistic Works (1886) and copyrights that are administered by the WIPO (World Intellectual Property Rights) for IPRs. IPRs help in rewarding creativity and human effort which help in increasing the progress of humankind. Example: Recordings, publishing and research works, software products, inventions, etc., are protected by IPRs, such as copyrights and patents based on the nature of work. IM S Researchers and inventors produce better and more efficient products if they receive rewards as patents. IPRs such as patents and copyrights give confidence to consumers and they can buy international products or services. Effective IPR rights help in curbing ill practices, such as counterfeiting and piracy. Intellectual properties for understanding are divided into two categories as shown in Figure 4.1: Copyrights (Literary and Artistic Works) Intellectual Property Patents (Inventions) Industrial Property Trademarks Designs N M Soft Intellectual Property (Trade Secrets, Know how and Confidentiality) Geographic Indications Figure 4.1: Categories of Intellectual Properties COMMERCIAL SIGNIFICANCE OF IPRs In today’s business environment, IPRs come in various forms, such as trademarks, copyrights and patents etc. It is important for businesses to understand the relevance and implication of various IPRs to develop an effective business strategy that helps in achieving success in the market. In other words, organisations need to understand IPRs and related laws and regulations so that they can effectively protect their IPRs, manufacturing secrets or any other trade secrets to remain ahead of competitors. An organisation that fully understands intellectual property can use its intellectual property assets in a constructive way for maintaining quality and marketing products and services which helps in developing long-term loyalty. An organisation can also remain ahead of its competitors by introducing new and effective products and services and modifying current products and services to incorporate customer needs. This is because NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 163 Business Law organisations keep changing products and services in terms of design, quality, looks and functions. Knowledge is essential for the successful running of a business. An intellectual property system is used to manage knowledge assets. The major types of intellectual property rights include the following: Patent Trademarks Copyrights Designs Biodiversity-Geographical Indications Trade Secrets S Registration of designs of Semiconductors and Integrated Circuits IM Some of the benefits of IPRs for businesses are as follows: The presence of intellectual property assets helps in enhancing the profitability of an organisation by licensing, franchising, sale of protected products or services. IPRs reward entrepreneurs and encourage innovation. M Trademarks Patents Trade can be used to protect brands. can be used to protect new inventions. secrets can be used to protect confidential information. IP protection (patent) is specifically important for pharmaceutical, N 164 biotechnological companies because it helps them in developing new medicines and treatments for diseases. IP assets that have been protected can be exported for higher revenues. IPRs give creators exclusive rights over their creation. IPRs helps in valuation and raising finance. TRADE RELATED ASPECTS OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS (TRIPS) TRIPS is an international agreement on IPRs that has been signed by the member countries of the WTO. This agreement came into force on 1st January, 1995. The TRIPS agreement provides the minimum set of standards or rules for protecting intellectual property all over the world. All the member countries are required to prepare national laws to implement the provisions of TRIPS. The TRIPS agreement lays down norms and NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education LAWS THAT COMMONLY AFFECT BUSINESSES standards for patents, trademarks, copyrights, geographical indications and industrial designs. S India has implemented its obligations and made laws relating to IPRs as per the TRIPS Agreement. A few of the major legislations coming out of TRIPS are: the Patents Act, 1970, amended by the Patents (Amendment) Acts of 1999, 2002 and 2005. Rules implemented under the Patents Act are: the Patents Rules, 2003; the Patents (Amendment) Rules, 2005; and the Patents (Amendment) Rules, 2006. In India trademarks are regulated under the Trade Marks Act, 1999 and copyrights are registered and regulated under the Copyrights Act, 1957. Similarly, we have the Geographical Indications of Goods (Registration and Protection) Act, 1999 that defines and prescribes rules for geographical indications in India. There are three main features of the TRIPS agreement which are: IM 1. Standards: These are the minimum standards of protection that must be provided by each member country in respect of each type of IPR. 2. Enforcement: The TRIPS agreement contains provisions that describe the domestic procedures and remedies for enforcing IPRs. M 3. Dispute prevention and settlement: Disputes among the member countries related to IPRs are subject to the dispute settlement procedures as laid down in the agreement. N PATENTS – ELEMENTS, NATURE OF PROTECTION, PERIOD OF PROTECTION AND AUTHORITY In India, patents are regulated by the Patents Act, 1970 whose major provisions came into force on 20th April, 1972. This Act was amended from time to time and was given the name the Patents (Amendment) Acts of 1999, 2002 and 2005 along with Patents Rules. The Patents Rules were last amended in 2017. Patents now extend to all fields of technology, such as food, drugs, chemicals and microorganisms. A patent is a document that represents certain rights that give the creator or developer the sole right over their creations. Patents are issued by an issuing authority of a country after receiving the application by the owner of an invention. The rights given by patents ensure that the patent holder has the rights to make, use, manufacture and market the invention if the invention satisfies certain stipulated conditions. The purpose of patenting inventions is to ensure that the researchers are able to take full economic advantage of their inventions which NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 165 Business Law motivates them to undertake more and more innovations that help the society. A patent gives an inventor the right to own, use or sell the invention, method or process for a specified period. Patented products help in increasing the level of industrial innovations which leads to the growth of the nation. ELEMENTS OF THE PATENTS ACT, 1970 Some important elements of patent regulation are as follows: Section 2(m) defines a patent as a patent granted under the Act. 2(o) defines a patent as either in relation to an article or a process called ‘patented article’ and ‘patented process’. A S Section patented article includes an article made by a patented process. person to whom the patent is granted and whose name is entered in the Register of Patents is called a patentee. IM The Patenting is mandatory for recognition and protection. Patenting helps in preventing its breach, warding off pre-emptive patenting and successful prosecution of infringers. are 3 criteria for fulfilling a patent: (i) Novelty, (ii) NonObviousness and (iii) Industrial Application M There Patents are granted only for inventions and not for discovery. The N 166 invention may consist a new product, process, method, apparatus or a new combination of the pre-existing knowledge which satisfies some human need. There must be some industrial use or application of the invention. Product patents are granted for end products. Process patents are granted for the process only. NATURE OF PROTECTION Under the Patents Act, 1970, the country gives a patent-holder (or patentee/inventor/signee) the exclusive rights for a fixed period of time (period of protection) for his/her invention. PERIOD OF PROTECTION According to Section 53 of the Patents Act, 1970, after the Patents (Amendment) Act, 2002, the term of every patent is 20 years from the date of filing the patent application. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education LAWS THAT COMMONLY AFFECT BUSINESSES 167 AUTHORITY The offices and authorities that regulate the patent, trademarks and geographical indications in India are shown in Figure 4.2: Organisation chart Ministry of Commerce & Industry Department of Industrial Policy & Promotion Office of the Controller General of Patents, Designs and Trade Marks Mumbai Head Registry Br. Registry at New Delhi Kokata Chennai Ahmedabad The Designs Act, 2000 Patent Information System and NIIPM (IPTI) Chennai Kolkata Nagpur M Kolkata Head Office New Delhi Branch Office Chennai Branch Office Mumbai Branch Office Geographical Indications Registry The Graphical Indication of Goods (Registration & Protection Act, 1999) S Trade Marks Registry Trade Mark Act, 1999 IM The Patent Office The Patents Act, 1970 (Amended in 1999, 2002 & 2005) Figure 4.2: Offices and Authorities that Regulate Intellectual Properties in India Source: https://shodhganga.inflibnet.ac.in/bitstream/10603/54118/10/10_chapter%203.pdf N From Figure 4.2, it is clear that there are four patent offices located at Kolkata, New Delhi, Chennai and Mumbai. The application for the patents can be filed in any of these patent offices. COPYRIGHTS – ELEMENTS, NATURE OF PROTECTION, PERIOD OF PROTECTION AND AUTHORITY In India, copyrights, related rights and neighbouring rights are governed as per the Copyright Act, 1957 (as amended in 2017), the related rules and the International Copyright Order, 1999. Section 78 of the Copyright Act, 1957 empowers the central government to make rules governing the Copyright Act, 1957. In simple terms, copyright is a form of intellectual property that protects the interests of authors who have produced original works that are expressed in some medium of expression. Copyrights are granted for published as well as unpublished works. The purpose of Copyright Act, 1957 is to protect the author or creator of original work by preventing any other persons from reproducing the work in any other form. Copyright laws protect literary works, NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education MARK IT! The Copyright Act defines a copyright as a collection of rights that automatically vest to someone who creates original works of authorship, like a literary work, song, movie or software. These rights include the right to reproduce the work, to prepare derivative works, to distribute copies, and to perform and display the work publicly. Business Law dramatic works, musical works, artistic works, cinematographic films and sound recordings. Elements of Copyright Act, 1957 and Nature of Protection Copyright Act, 1957 provides protection to original work from an unauthorised use. The following explain the elements of the Copyright Act, 1957 and nature of protection: Copyrights protect expressions and not the ideas, which means that ideas cannot be protected. Copyrights are associated with the right of reproduction, communication to the public, adaptation and translation of work. protection offered by the Copyright Act, 1957 is valid within the Indian Territory only. works are also secured in foreign countries because India is a member of international conventions on copyrights and neighbouring rights, such as the Berne Convention of 1866 and the Universal Copyright Convention, 1971. India is also a signatory to the WIPO Copyright Treaty, 1986 and the WIPO Performance and Phonogram Treaty (WPPT), 1996. IM Indian S Copyright Period of Protection M As per Section 22 of the Copyright Act, 1957, copyright is protected for lifetime of the author and 60 years from the year following the death of the author. In the case of original literary, dramatic, musical and artistic works, the period of copyright protection lasts 60 years from the year following the death of an author. If there is more than one author, the copyright protection lasts for 60 years following the death of the author who dies last. N 168 Broadcasting reproduction rights are available for 25 years from the beginning of the calendar year next following the year in which the broadcast is made. A performer’s right is valid for a period of 50 years. In case of cinematograph films, sound recordings, photographs, works of government, public undertakings and international organisations, posthumous publications, anonymous and pseudonymous publications, the copyright protection is for 60 years and is counted from the date of publication. Authority The Intellectual Property Appellate Board was established under Section 83 of the Trade Marks Act, 1999. The Board exercises the jurisdiction, powers and authority conferred on it by or under the Copyright Act, 1957. In view of the same, all the cases pending before the Copyright Board were transferred to Intellectual Property Appellate Board. This board is chaired by a Chairman who is a sitting or retired judge of the High Court or a person qualified to be appointed as judge of the High Court. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education LAWS THAT COMMONLY AFFECT BUSINESSES 169 This board oversees the adjudication of disputes pertaining to copyright registration, assignment of copyright, grant of licenses in respect of works withheld from the public, unpublished Indian works, production and publication of translations. TRADEMARKS – ELEMENTS, NATURE OF PROTECTION, PERIOD OF PROTECTION AND AUTHORITY A trademark is any symbol or word which helps in uniquely identifying a product or service and helps distinguish the product or service from other products or services that are available in the market. It makes your customers recognise your product or service. S In India, trademarks are governed by the Trademarks Act, 1999. According to Section 2 (1)(zb) of this Act, a trademark may refer to: mark capable of being represented graphically and which is capable of distinguishing the goods or services of one person from those of others and may include shape of goods, their packaging and combination of colours. IM A A registered trade mark or a mark used in relation to any goods in the course of trade which shows that the user of the mark has the right as proprietor to use the mark. A mark used or proposed to be used in relation to goods or services for N M the purpose of indicating or so to indicate a connection in the course of trade between the goods or services as the case may be, and some person having the right, either as proprietor or by way of permitted user, to use the mark whether with or without any indication of the identity of that person, and includes a certification trade mark or collective mark. Some images of the trademarks, service marks and registered marks are shown in Figure 4.3: R C TM P SM Know More Figure 4.3: Trade Marks, Service Marks and Registered Marks Source: https://www.dreamstime.com/registered-trademark-copyright-patent-service-markicon-set-image146450985 Elements Trademarks can be divided into the following categories: yyWord mark (word or letters, slogans or taglines) yyDevice mark (logo, combination of words, pictures or drawings) Some of the important elements of the Trade Marks Act, 1999 are as follows: yyShapes of goods It yySound mark gives exclusive rights of using trade marks to a registered proprietor. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education yyColour mark yyThree dimension mark Business Law It provides for the registration of trade marks for goods and services. Provision for penalties in case of infringement of trade marks. Provision for criminal remedies in case of falsification of trade marks. Expedited examination of a trade mark application if the applicant makes a payment five times more than the actual application fee. Period of Protection Authority S The trade mark registration is valid for 10 years from the date of application. A trade mark can be renewed from time to time after the applicant has made the application for renewal. It is renewed for 10 years from the date of expiry of the original registration or the last renewal of registration. IM Section 83 of the Trade Marks Act, 1999 empowers the central government to constitute an appellate board known as Intellectual Property Appellate Board (IPAB). The IPAB hears appeals against the decisions made by the Registrar under this Act. M TRADE SECRETS – ELEMENTS, NATURE OF PROTECTION, PERIOD OF PROTECTION AND AUTHORITY According to the WIPO, any confidential business information which provides an enterprise a competitive edge may be considered a trade secret. In simple words, a trade secret refers to any piece of valuable business-related information that is usually known only by one or a few members of an organisation or industry. Trade secrets give the owners a competitive advantage over their rival competitors. Trade secrets provide an advantage because they are related to information that is used by its owner to make profits. N 170 Example: Formulas, patterns, methods, programmes, techniques, processes, etc. are some examples of trade secrets. Elements The essential features of a trade secret are as follows: A trade secret is any information that is generally not known to a majority of the public. The trade secret has an economic benefit for the owners of the secret. The owners of trade secret make reasonable efforts to maintain its secrecy. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education LAWS THAT COMMONLY AFFECT BUSINESSES Nature of Protection In India, trade secrets are not covered by any law. Article 39 of the TRIPS agreement protects trade secrets as undisclosed information. Each member country of the TRIPS agreement protects trade secrets and provides a uniform mechanism for protecting trade secrets. Period of Protection There is no specified period for the protection of a trade secret if it is well protected. The protection to trade secrets can be extended indefinitely. This is an advantage over patents which only have a fixed term of protection. Some secrets may not be patented at all. S Example: The formula for preparing Coca-Cola cold drink, KFC’s secret blend of 11 herbs and spices, Google’s search algorithm, WD-40 are examples of trade secret. IM Authority There is no specified authority that looks after disputes relating to trade secrets. Only the judicial system of each member of TRIPS determines the requirements for obtaining the protection of a trade secret. M GEOGRAPHICAL INDICATIONS – ELEMENTS, NATURE OF PROTECTION, PERIOD OF PROTECTION AND AUTHORITY N According to the WIPO, a Geographical Indication (GI) is a sign used on products that have a specific geographical origin and possess qualities or a reputation that are due to that origin. In order to function as a GI, a sign must identify a product as originating in a given place. In addition, the qualities, characteristics or reputation of the product should be essentially due to the place of origin. Since the qualities depend on the geographical place of production, there is a clear link between the product and its original place of production. Example: Kolhapuri Chappal, Darjeeling tea, Banglar Rosogolla, etc. are examples of GIs. In other words, geographical indications are indications related to goods that identify the goods as originating or manufactured in a particular territory of a country or region or a locality where a given quality, reputation or characteristic of such goods can be attributed to the geographical origin of the good. The goods may be agricultural goods or manufactured goods. In case of manufactured goods, one of the activities of production or processing are related to a particular territory, region or locality. In India, GIs are protected by Geographical Indications of Goods (Registration & Protection) Act, 1999. According to Section 2(1)(e), in relation to goods, means an indication which identifies such goods as NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 171 Business Law agricultural goods, natural goods or manufactured goods as originating, or manufactured in the territory of a country, or a region or locality in that territory, where a given quality, reputation or other characteristic of such goods is essentially attributable to its geographical origin and in case where such goods are manufactured goods one of the activities of either the production or of processing or preparation of the goods concerned takes place in such territory, region or locality, as the case may be. Explanation: For the purposes of this clause, any name which is not the name of a country, region or locality of that country shall also be considered as the geographical indication if it relates to a specific geographical area and is used upon or in relation to particular goods originating from that country, region or locality, as the case may be. S Elements Some important elements of GIs are as follows: GI’s register is maintained in two parts, Part A and Part B. Part A contains all registered GIs and Part B contains the details of registered authorised users. IM The GIs are registered in different classes. Certain GIs are prohibited from being registered. M The law empowers the central government to make laws and rules related to the filing of application, its contents and the examination of GI applications. All N 172 the registered GIs must be advertised compulsorily to invite any possible objections. This law also provides provisions that can be used in case a GI is infringed by an unauthorised user. This law prohibits the registration of a GI as a trademark. Nature of Protection and Authority This Geographical Indications of Goods (Registration & Protection) Act, 1999 is administered through the Geographical Indications Registry established in Chennai. The Registrar of GIs is the Controller-General of Patents, Designs and Trademarks. The parties have the right to appeal against the decision of the Registrar with the Intellectual Property Appellate Board (IPAB) that has been established under the Trade Marks Act, 1999. Period of Protection GIs are registered for 10 years and can be renewed from time to time. Similarly, authorised users are registered for a period of 10 years or till the date on which the registration of the GI in respect of which the authorised user is registered expires. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education LAWS THAT COMMONLY AFFECT BUSINESSES DESIGNS – ELEMENTS, NATURE OF PROTECTION, PERIOD OF PROTECTION AND AUTHORITY According to WIPO’s Patents and Industrial Designs Act, 2000, an industrial design means any composition of lines or colours or any three-dimensional form, or any material, whether or not associated with lines or colours, provided that such composition, form or material gives a special appearance to a product of industry or handicraft and can serve as a pattern for a product of industry or handicraft and appeals to and is judged by the eye. S In simple terms, industrial designs are related to the aesthetics of a good. The designs serve as a pattern for the manufacture of products or handicrafts. An industrial design is only an ornamental or aesthetic part of a good. The design of a good must be made in such a way that it appeals to the eyes of the buyers. The aesthetics of a good include the shape, pattern, colour of good, etc. Industrial designs are protectable if they are new and original. IM Elements In India, industrial designs are governed by the Designs Act, 2000; the Designs Rules, 2001; the Designs (Amendment) Rules 2008; and the Designs (Amendment) Rules 2014. M Some of the important elements of the Designs Act, 2000 are as follows: per the Designs Act, 2000, India has adopted the Locarno classification for the registration of industrial designs and this classification is based only on the subject matter of design. Introduced N As the criteria of absolute novelty and originality. A design must be unique and there must not be any prior publication. The design must be such that it does not hurt the sentiments of the people. Period of Protection Industrial designs are protected for a period of 15 years. The protection is available against unauthorised copying or imitation. Initially, a design is registered for a period of 10 years from the date of registration, but the initial period of 10 years can be extended by 5 years if the registered proprietor applies for the same. BIODIVERSITY LAW – ELEMENTS, NATURE OF PROTECTION, PERIOD OF PROTECTION AND AUTHORITY The diversity that exists in various life forms on the earth is known as biodiversity. Biodiversity is an essential feature of the earth and is important for the functioning of the ecosystem. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 173 174 Business Law If the biodiversity changes rapidly, it affects the well-being of humans and all living beings. There are three major categories of biodiversity as follows: Ecosystem diversity: This is represented by principal biogeographic regions and habitats. Species diversity: This is represented by variability found in families, genera and species. Genetic diversity: This is represented by variability that occurs within a species. S The objective of the Biological Diversity Act, 2002 is to conserve biological resources and associated knowledge along with facilitating the access to these resources in a sustainable manner. The Convention on Biological Diversity (CBD) 1992 is an international treaty for the conservation of biodiversity, sustainable use of biodiversity elements and equitable sharing of the benefits derived from the use of genetic resources. There is a relation between biodiversity and intellectual property which is depicted at international level using several treaties. India also has ratified the CBD treaty and has enacted the Biological Diversity Act, 2002. IM NOTE Elements Some important elements of the Biological Diversity Act, 2002 are as follows: the access to biological resources of the country to ensure equitable share in benefits M Regulating Conserving and sustainably using resources related to biological diversity N Setting up of National Biodiversity Authority (NBA), State Biodiversity Board (SBB) and Biodiversity Management Committees (BMCs) Creating biodiversity funds at national, state and local levels and using them for conserving biodiversity Respecting Protecting and protecting the knowledge of local communities biodiversity-related traditional knowledge Conserving biological diversity sites 4.3.2 IMPACT OF IPR Prior to the development of the IPR laws in India, the risk of infringement of IPRs was extremely high. In the absence of strong IPR laws, individuals and organisations did not show much interest in R&D works in India which resulted in a low rate of innovations and inventions, high risk of infringement and monetary loss. To mitigate and handle this situation, India strengthened its IPR regime by enacting various laws related to IPRs that you have read about in the preceding sections. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education LAWS THAT COMMONLY AFFECT BUSINESSES 175 Today’s era is also known as the era of technology, knowledge and intellect. India has also shown remarkable growth in the field of R&D. India has a number of well-established labs that have been developed indigenously and some of them belong to MNCs. The increasing levels of the Indian economy in the past decade are clearly an indicator of the impact which the Indian IP has on the world. ENFORCEMENT AGAINST VIOLATORS OF IPR S Organisations, creators and owners of the IP are able to make profits from their knowledge and innovations. In order to encourage innovation and growth, it is necessary that countries provide remedies that can be accessed by IPR holders. Countries that do not have adequate provisions and remedies provide minimum incentives to the rights holder. The absence of or inadequacy in the IP enforcement and protection provisions can affect businesses which would further impact job creation and consumerism. IM Most of the developing nations including India have made various reforms in respect of IP enforcement methods because the methods underlined in the TRIPS agreement are quite stringent. The enforcement in these countries is often restricted. Example: A lack of enforcement may include the following: issue sanctions that are insufficient Various M Courts officials that deal in IPRs often lack IPR-related knowledge and training of political will Insufficient means to enforce IPRs N Absence Reactive Enforcement (Infringement Action) In case the IPRs of an owner are contravened, the owner has the right to seek either reactive or proactive enforcement. Some of the infringement remedies that are available to the owner of IP are: Stop unauthorised use of IP Prevent Obtain Seek any further infringements recovery compensation for the damages Pro-Active Enforcement (IP Registration, Protection and Raids) In India, parties to a dispute first try to resolve the dispute amicably before taking any legal action. In case of IPR violations, the owners of the IPs usually send a cease-and-desist letter to the person or the organisation that is presumably contravening the IP rights of the owner. If such dispute settlement approach does not work, the IP NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Study Hint India has set up new technology and incubation centres in various parts of the country and provides financial aid to technologists and researchers. All this has strengthened the status of R&D in the country. 176 Business Law owner has the option to seek a legal remedy which may be a civil or criminal remedy. Various IP laws that protect IP rights in India are as follows: Trade Marks Act, 1999 Copyright Patent Act, 1957 Act, 1970 Designs Act, 2000 Geographical Indications (Registration and Protection) Act, 1999 Civil and criminal remedies are mentioned under these laws for IPR’s enforcement. In case of IP infringement, civil remedies may be enforced by filing infringement suit in a designated and competent court. The court may grant reliefs of civil nature as follows: Injunction: S Some of the proactive enforcement remedies available in case of IP violations include civil remedies and criminal remedies. Civil remedies include infringement and passing off, whereas criminal remedies include administrative actions. An injunction suit prohibits an action by a party to a IM NOTE lawsuit. pillar order/ex-parte orders: Such an order permits the lawyer of the party who files the suit (plaintiff) to enter into the premises of the infringers so that he/she may seize the evidence of infringement. M Anton to deliver up/surrender or seize and destroy: Such an order is passed so that the infringing goods are delivered to the plaintiff or the infringing goods may be destroyed as the case may be. N Orders An award of costs and damages: Damages are awarded to the plaintiff to compensate for the losses incurred by the plaintiff. In other cases, the court may grant costs or actual profits of the IP to the plaintiff. Tracing orders: When such an order is granted, the infringer is asked to provide details regarding the infringing goods such as from where he got the supplies of infringing goods. The criminal remedies available are as follows: Falsification of trademarks and infringement of copyright are cognisable offences Filing FIR a complaint with a magistrate can be registered with the police An imprisonment of 6 months to 3 years and a fine of ` 50,000 to ` 2 lakhs Penalty can be increased in case of repeat offences Infringing goods can be seized, forfeited or destroyed NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education LAWS THAT COMMONLY AFFECT BUSINESSES In case of criminal action, following sections can be invoked: Section 103/104 of Trade Marks Act, 1999 Sections 63 and 64 of Copyright Act, 1957 Section 39 of Geographical Indication of Goods Act, 1999 Section 420 of India Penal Code (IPC) Section 91/93 of Criminal Procedure Code (CrPC) 4.3.3 LEADING CASE LAWS IN IPR DOMAIN Bayer Corporation and Ors. Vs. Union of India and Ors. 162(2009) DLT 371 (Decided on 18th August, 2009) IM S The Court held that there is no Drug Patent Linkage mechanism in India and only the Controller of Patents has the authority to determine patent standards. It was also held that mere market approval of a drug does not lead to patent infringement and the jurisdiction of which does not lie with the drug authorities. Indian Performing Rights Society Vs. Eastern Indian Motion Pictures Ltd. AIR1977 SC1443 N M The Hon’ble Supreme Court observed that the cinematograph film producer becomes the first owner of the copyright in case he commissions a composer of music, a lyricist, for reward or for a consideration to compose music to be incorporated in the cinematography film as the composer is employed under contract of service. Section 17(c) of Copyright Act, 1957 lays down that the proprietor becomes the absolute owner in cases of contract of service for a valuable consideration unless there is an agreement contrary to it. Copyright Societies like IPRS cannot claim royalty as the production house has the right over the composition the moment it comes into existence. In this case, the producer of the cinematograph film becomes the absolute owner and the authority cannot be questioned. Toyota Jidosha Kabushiki Kaisha Vs. Prius Auto Industries Ltd. and Ors., 2017 SC (Decided on 14th December, 2017) The test of possibility/likelihood of confusion would be valid at the stage of quiatimet (injunction to restrain wrongful acts) actions and not at the stage of final adjudication of the suit, particularly when the defendants had used the impugned mark for a long period. Source: https://www.icsi.edu/student/study-material-os/ self assessment Questions 4. Creations and inventions that are created by the human mind, such as literary works, artistic works, symbols, names, images, designs, etc., are called __________. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 177 Business Law 5. Which of the following intellectual properties is not categorised under industrial property? a. Patents b. Trademarks c. Copyrights d. Industrial designs Activity Describe the strengths and weaknesses of IPR laws in India. 4.4 PREVENTION OF SEXUAL HARASSMENT IM S These days all of us keep listening to the cases highlighting that one or another person has faced sexual harassment at workplace. Of late, it has become a menace. Anyone could be a victim of sexual harassment at workplace irrespective of their gender, race, caste, nationality, etc. Till recently, there were no laws under which cases of sexual harassment at the workplace could be tried. However, India has enacted the Sexual Harassment of Women at Workplace (Prevention, Prohibition and Redressal) Act, 2013, specifically for cases of sexual harassment at the workplace. M 4.4.1 WHAT IS SEXUAL HARASSMENT? According to Section 2(n) of the Sexual Harassment of Women at Workplace (Prevention, Prohibition and Redressal) Act, 2013, sexual harassment includes any one or more of the following unwelcome acts or behaviour (whether directly or by implication), namely: N 178 (i) physical contact and advances; or (ii) a demand or request for sexual favours; or (iii) making sexually coloured remarks; or (iv) showing pornography; or (v) any other unwelcome physical, verbal or non-verbal conduct of sexual nature In simple words, sexual harassment involves unwelcome act(s) or behaviour(s), such as sexual advances, requests for sexual favours and any other verbal or physical conduct of sexual nature. These types of acts or behaviours may also hint towards a preferential or detrimental treatment in one’s employment. At times, an individual may also feel a threat to present or future employment. Such acts and behaviours usually involve creating an offensive or hostile or humiliating work environment. The person who is the victim of sexual harassment is made to feel humiliated, offended and insulted. The acts of sexual harassment are extremely disturbing for the victim physically as well as at mentally. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education LAWS THAT COMMONLY AFFECT BUSINESSES Example: Acts that amount to sexual harassment include: Passing indicative or offensive comments or jokes Uninvited Asking touching for sexual favours Showing or sending sexually explicit pictures, text messages, emails, etc. Discrediting a woman’s work only because of her gender S Sexual harassment is a crime and it violates the fundamental rights of women. Article 14 of the Indian Constitution grants a right to equality to every citizen of India. In addition, it also violates Article 21 of the Constitution of India, which guarantees the protection of life and personal liberty. IM Sexual harassment is considered one of the forms of violence and crimes against women. It is a direct outcome of male chauvinism which is a belief that men are better and superior to women. It is a mind-set owing to which women are seen as objects rather than equal human beings. Sexual harassment is a phenomenon that is found in all countries of the world. N M In the last few decades, the education levels among women has increased and they have started to go out and earn their livelihoods. They are now employed in almost all fields of work. The cases of sexual harassment have assumed alarming proportions after women started being employed in all types of jobs and started to stand shoulder to shoulder with their male counterparts. Recently, the #MeToo movement was started and the world witnessed various cases where women were sexually harassed or attempted to be harassed at work by male counterparts. It is also a fact that most of the victims who face sexual harassment at workplace feel helpless and do not report such incidents. At times, they are silenced and forced not to disclose these incidents or they will face dire consequences. Certain organisations may also try to suppress such cases for fear of their reputation. 4.4.2 JUDGEMENT – VISHAKHA VS. STATE OF RAJASTHAN Vishakha vs. State of Rajasthan (1992) is a landmark case in which the Supreme Court dealt with the issue of women safety from any kind of sexual harassment at the workplace. Following this judgement, detailed guidelines with respect to sexual harassment at workplace were formed. Bhanwari Devi worked as a Saathin or a social activist worker under Rajasthan Government’s women development project. In 1992, she was working for stopping child marriages in villages. As a part of her work, she made her efforts to stop the marriage of the infant daugh- NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 179 180 Business Law NOTE After this crime, Bhanwari Devi had to face a lot of hardships during her legal battle to get justice. Initially, the trial court acquitted the accused. Despite this, she did not lose hope. She along with all female social workers who were supporting her filed a writ petition in the Supreme Court of India under the name ‘Vishakha’. Following this case, the Supreme Court framed the guidelines for preventing sexual harassment at workplace. These guidelines are called the Vishakha Guidelines. S Vishakha guidelines formed the basis of The Sexual Harassment of Women at Workplace (Prevention, Prohibition and Redressal) Act, 2013. ter of Ramkaran Gujjar who was less than a year old. Despite all her efforts, she could not stop the marriage. However, Ramkaran Gujjar became an enemy of Bhanwari Devi. She was exposed to social punishment and boycott. To seek vengeance, Ramkaran Gujjar and his five friends gang raped Bhanwari Devi in front of her husband. N M IM In this case, the judgement was pronounced on 13th August, 1997 by a bench comprising the then CJI, J.S. Verma, Justice Sujata Manohar and Justice B.N. Kripal against the writ petition filed by ‘Vishakha’. The court had observed that the fundamental rights under Articles 14, 19(1)(g) and 21 of the Constitution of India must be maintained and every profession, trade and occupation should provide safe working environment to employees. The judgement also put forward various guidelines for employees to avoid sexual harassment. The main objective of the Supreme Court was to ensure that women do not face discrimination at the workplace. This judgement compelled the government to bring a law related to the issue of sexual harassment at workplace. Exhibit Provisions of Vishakha Guidelines The Vishakha guidelines lay down certain preventive steps that an employer or responsible persons within the organisation should keep in mind in order to prevent women from sexual harassment at workplace. They can be summarised as follows: Express prohibition of sexual harassment as defined (in this decision) at the workplace should be notified, published and circulated in appropriate ways. The rules/regulations of the Government and public sector bodies relating to conduct and discipline should include rules/ regulations prohibiting sexual harassment and provide for appropriate penalties in such rules against the offender. Appropriate work conditions should be provided in respect of work, leisure, health and hygiene to further ensure that there is no hostile environment towards women at workplaces and NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education LAWS THAT COMMONLY AFFECT BUSINESSES no woman employee should have reasonable grounds to believe that she is disadvantaged in connection with her employment. An appropriate complaints mechanism should be created in the employer’s organisation for redress of the complaint made by the victim. Such complaint mechanism should ensure timebound treatment of complaints. Complaints Committee: The complaints mechanism, referred to above, should be adequate to provide, where necessary, a complaints committee, a special counsellor or other support service, including the maintenance of confidentiality. S Source: https://ccs.in/internship_papers/2008/Vishakha-Guidelines-kerala-study-200.pdf IM 4.4.3 THE SEXUAL HARASSMENT OF WOMEN AT WORKPLACE (PREVENTION, PROHIBITION AND REDRESSAL) ACT, 2013 M In 2013, the Indian Government enacted the Sexual Harassment of Women at Workplace (Prevention, Prohibition and Redressal) Act, 2013 (“POSH Act”). This law was enacted to provide protection to women against sexual harassment at workplace and to prevent and redress the complaints of sexual harassment at workplace and related matters. Vishakha Guidelines were superseded by this POSH Act. N This POSH Act recognises that women have a right to be in a safe and secure work environment. This law is equally valid for all types of women employees whether they are regular full-time employees, temporary employees or daily wage workers or whether they are employed directly or indirectly through a contractor. Women may be working for remuneration or on a voluntary basis. The terms of employment may be express or implied. Contractual employees, probationers, trainees and apprentices are also covered under this POSH Act. Workers working in dwelling places and houses are also covered under this POSH Act. The main objectives of the POSH Act, 2013 are as follows: i. To ensure safe working places for women and to build an enabling environment that respects women’s right to equality of status and opportunity ii. To ensure right to gender equality, life, liberty, and equality of working conditions iii. To improve women participation in work which may lead to economic empowerment and their inclusive growth NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 181 Business Law The main features of this POSH Act are as follows: This POSH Act defines sexual harassment at workplace and provides for a mechanism for redressing the complaints. The POSH Act defines ‘aggrieved woman’ as a woman who has faced sexual harassment at workplace and it includes all women irrespective of their age and employment status. It is applicable for women working in organised as well as unorganised sector, public as well as private sector, and it covers clients, customers and domestic workers. POSH Act includes workplaces, hospitals, nursing homes, educational institutions, sports institutes, sports complex, any place visited by employee during course of employment including transportation as workplace. S This this POSH Act, the employer needs to set up an Internal Complaints Committee in each office or branch which has 10 or more employees. IM Under District officers need to create a committee at the district level. Complaints committees are empowered with the powers similar to civil courts for collection of evidence. the complainant requests for conciliation before formal inquiry begins, the committee must arrange for the same. M If Employers that do not comply with the provisions of the POSH Act can be fined up to ` 50,000. Repeat cases involve higher penalties and may even lead to cancellation of license and registration of business. N 182 4.4.4 COMMITTEE ON PREVENTION OF SEXUAL HARASSMENT – APPOINTMENT, MEMBERS, PROCEDURES AND ACTIONS TO BE TAKEN Under the redressal mechanism laid down in the Sexual Harassment of Women at Workplace (Prevention, Prohibition and Redressal) Act, 2013, employers are required to establish an Internal Complaints Committee (ICC). Appointment The employer must establish an Internal Complaints Committee (ICC) in order to look into the complaints of sexual harassment at workplace if it employs 10 or more employees. While appointing the members of the committee, the employer needs to remember these rules: ICC shall be established by a written order. Women must have a representation of at least 50% in the committee. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education LAWS THAT COMMONLY AFFECT BUSINESSES Members The members and their eligibility for being appointed as a member in the ICC are shown in Table 4.1: Table 4.1: Members of the ICC Eligibility 1. Chairperson (Presiding Officer) Women working at the senior level as an employee. If a senior woman employee is not available, then a woman is nominated from the other office or unit or department of the same employer. 2. Two Members (minimum) Atleast one woman who possesses legal knowledge and/or experience in social work. 3. Member A person from an NGO or any association that is working for women-centric issues and sexual harassment. S Member IM S. No. All the members of the ICC can hold office for a period not more than three years from the date of their nomination. In case the members are appointed from NGOs or associations, they must be paid fees or allowances as may be prescribed by the employer. M Procedure The Sexual Harassment Complaint procedure is shown in Figure 4.4: N Sexual Harassment Complaint Process Receiving Complaint Interviewing Complainants Witnesses and Respondents Providing Findings and Recommendations in a Report Analysing the Information to Understand the Sequence of Events related to Complaints Preparing the File Figure 4.4: Sexual Harassment Complaint Procedure After the ICC has created its report, it is forwarded to the District Officer by the employer. Actions to be Taken An employer may be subjected to a penalty of up to ` 50,000 in the following cases: If it fails to constitute the ICC NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 183 Business Law If it fails to implement the recommendations of the ICC Contravening or attempting to contravene the rules or provisions of the POSH Act If an employer repeats any breach, he shall be subjected to twice the punishment, higher punishment, cancellation/withdrawal/nonrenewal of registration/license required for carrying on business or activities. 4.4.5 IMPACT OF SEXUAL HARASSMENT CASES ON INDIAN AND FOREIGN ORGANISATIONS IM S The notoriety attached to sexual harassment has a negative economic impact on organisations. Sexual harassment brings bad reputation and may prevent good and efficient personnel from joining such firms impacting its competitive market efficiency. A congenial work environment is bound to positively affect productivity, human relations and work satisfaction. The cases of sexual harassment can create various challenges for organisations, such as: Higher employee turnover employee productivity M Lower Increased absenteeism Increased sick leaves Hurts N 184 the value and bottom line of the companies self assessment Questions 6. After the ICC has created its report, it is forwarded to the ________ by the employer. 7. Which of the following acts or behaviours cannot be considered as sexual harassment? a. Sexual advances b. Requests for sexual favours c. Touching inappropriately d. Offering a handshake Activity Find some cases of sexual harassment at a workplace that you have heard about in the recent past. Make a list of all these cases and discuss the facts of each case. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education LAWS THAT COMMONLY AFFECT BUSINESSES 4.5 INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY LAW The Information Technology Act, 2000 (“IT Act”) was notified on 17th October, 2000. This IT Act is also the law that governs cybercrime and e-commerce activities. The Indian Government enacted the IT Act in June 2000 based on the Model Law on E-Commerce of the United Nations Commission on International Trade Law (UNCITRAL). This IT Act provides a legal framework to e-governance which recognises electronic records, digital signature and electronic transactions. This IT Act was amended in the years 2002, 2008 (effective 27th October, 2009) and 2017. S 4.5.1 INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY ACT, 2000 AND ITS OBJECTIVES M IM The IT Act consists of 94 sections and four schedules. The sections are divided into 13 chapters. Apart from paper-based methods of communication and storage of information, there are electronic methods of communication and information storage and exchange. This IT Act provides legal recognition to all such transactions. Following this IT Act, data storage was given recognition for being used by legal purposes. After the enactment of this IT Act, some other Acts, such as the Indian Evidence Act, 1872 and the Indian Penal Code, 1860 were also amended to provide legal recognition to the documents that were specified in IT Act. N The purpose of developing the IT Act was to promote the use of e-commerce, e-transactions and e-governance practices. This law had intent to increase the use of e-transactions. IT Act grants legal recognition and validation to all the online transactions and data exchange only if they are done using authorised websites. The objectives of IT Act are as follows: Granting legal recognition to transactions that are carried out by means of Electronic Data Interchange (EDI) or other means of electronic communication which are usually called electronic commerce transactions Enabling electronic filing of documents with government agencies Amending the Indian Penal Code, 1860, the Indian Evidence Act, 1872, the Banker’s Book Evidence Act, 1891 and the Reserve Bank of India Act, 1934 Granting legal recognition to digital signatures for authentication of any information as required by the law Enabling electronic filing of documents and its acceptance by the government Facilitating electronic storage of data NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 185 Business Law Protecting the interests of the Internet users against computerrelated offenses and cyber threats Creating civil and criminal liabilities for contravention of provisions of the Act Providing a legal framework for mitigating and checking cyber- crimes Facilitating the electronic transfer of funds between banks and financial institutions 4.5.2 FEATURES OF THE INFORMATION AND TECHNOLOGY ACT, 2000 S Some most important features of the IT Act are listed as follows: All electronic contracts made using secure electronic channels are legal and valid as per this IT Act digital signatures have a legal recognition IM All Digital signatures and electronic records are secured by relevant measures Controllers of Certifying Authorities (CCAs) are appointed for licensing and regulating the Certifying Authorities M Certifying Authorities act as repositories of all digital signatures This Act empowers the senior police officers (not below the rank of a Deputy Superintendent of Police) to enter any public place and they can even search and arrest without having a warrant Cyber N 186 Regulations Advisory Committee has been established to advise the Central Government and Controller This Act has various provisions relating to various offenses, breaches of law and penalties 4.5.3 SCOPE AND MAJOR PROVISIONS UNDER THE INFORMATION AND TECHNOLOGY ACT, 2000 The Information Technology Act, 2000 is applicable to the whole of India. This Act applies to India as well as outside of India for offences and contraventions of the provisions contained under this Act. If any offence or contravention of any provision of the IT Act is committed with the help of a computer, computer system or computer network that is located in India, then the person who commits such offence can be punished. As per Section 1(4) of the Information Technology Act, 2000, this law is not applicable to documents and transactions that are specified in the first schedule of this Act. Therefore, the scope of the Information Technology Act, 2000 is restricted to documents that have been men- NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education LAWS THAT COMMONLY AFFECT BUSINESSES tioned in the First Schedule. There are five types of documents that are included in the First Schedule as follows: A Negotiable Instrument (other than a cheque) as defined in Section 13 of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 (26 of 1881) A Power of Attorney as defined in Section 1A of the Power of Attorney Act (7 of 1882) A trust as defined in Section 3 of the Indian Trusts Act, 1882 (2 of 1882) A will as defined in Clause (h) of Section 2 of the Indian Succession Act, 1925 (39 of 1925), any testamentary deposition Any contact for the sale or conveyance of immovable property or any interest in such property S All electronic transactions fall under the scope of the Information Technology Act, 2000 except the following electronic transactions: Information Technology Act, 2000 is not applicable for attestation for creating trust using electronic means. It means that physical attestation is a must for creating a trust. The IM The Information Technology Act, 2000 is not applicable for attestation using non electronic means. The Information Technology Act, 2000 is not applicable to contracts M of sale of immovable properties. Electronic records and electronic attestation cannot be used for giving power of attorney of property. Legal N The major provisions under the Information Technology Act, 2000 are as follows: recognition to electronic documents: As per the law, information or any matter shall be in writing (typewritten or printed form) Such requirement shall be deemed to have been satisfied if such information or matter is: rendered or made available in the electronic form accessible to be used as a subsequent reference Legal recognition to digital signatures: If any information/matter is required by the law to be authenticated by affixing the signature, such requirement shall be deemed to have been satisfied. If such information/matter is authenticated by the means of digital signature, it should be affixed in the prescribed manner. Offences: The Act lists various offences and punishments related to information technology. 4.5.4 E-COMMERCE During the 1990s, most countries started using electronic communication and email for conducting international trade. This phenomenon NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 187 Business Law necessitated the need for the development of e-commerce in India. Development of e-commerce also required the following: Granting legal recognition to e-commerce transactions, digital signatures, electronic fund transfers, electronic storage of data, etc., to support e-commerce Facilitating Licensing Defining electronic filing and acceptance of documents and recognising foreign certifying authorities the offences and contraventions related to e-commerce Implementing a system for ensuring justice in case of cybercrimes IM S E-commerce or electronic commerce or the Internet commerce refers to buying and selling of goods or services or transmitting funds or data using online means. Transfer of money and data is necessary for buying and selling using the Internet. In simple terms, any kind of business transaction that is conducted electronically is called e-commerce. Customers, business organisations, suppliers, banks, financial institutions, financial service enablers, government agencies, etc., are all involved in e-commerce transactions. M The Indian markets too have gained a lot of importance and growth in e-commerce. Such high levels of growth in the Indian e-commerce markets pose numerous legal and regulatory challenges. Some important challenges that are related to the Indian e-commerce include: Legal validity of electronic transactions Security of electronic transactions Content regulation N 188 Intermediary liability and jurisdiction ADVANTAGES AND DISADVANTAGES OF E-COMMERCE Some of the advantages of e-commerce are as follows: Reduces Saves the time required in buying and selling the time of customers E-commerce companies can customise the online stores based on the product choice and past purchase history Easy retargeting of customers Encourages impulse purchases Buyers can decide whether or not to buy based on the reviews and comments of people who have already purchased Provides videos Low detailed product descriptions along with images and cost of operations NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education LAWS THAT COMMONLY AFFECT BUSINESSES Cost of marketing is low E-commerce transactions can be conducted round the clock all seven days of the week and 365 days of the year Avoids the cost of setting up stores Increased return on investment Low cost of hiring and training Low rate of human errors Top and most frequently bought products can be showcased Easy access to customer data Some disadvantages of e-commerce are as follows: S Large number of orders can be processed in a small period of time Security: With the ease of online transactions, cyber malpractices, mail and spamming: This issue is not discussed in detail in IT Act, but this is one of the upcoming issues where a person receives a large number of unwanted promotional mails from organisations advertising their products and services. There is no personal or business relationship with the recipient and because of such mails, sometimes fraudulent activities take place. M Junk IM such as authenticity, privacy and data protection, have also increased to a large extent. Nowadays, many cyber complaints are registered regarding security issues. Issue of obscenity: Obscene and objectionable content is prohibited Cyber N on the Internet and the host is asked to block such content. This issue is highlighted in the Indian Penal Code, but is not highlighted in the Information and Technology Act, 2000. defamation: Cyber defamation is a broad term which includes any act, deed, word, gesture or thing on the Internet or the cyberspace which is designed to harm a person’s reputation or goodwill with a malaise intention so that others in the community – whether online or offline – will view the person with contempt, ridicule, hatred, indifference or with a negative attribute. It can be committed through World Wide Web, discussion groups, the Internet, mailing lists, bulletin boards and e-mails. IMPACT OF DE-REGULATION IN E-COMMERCE Deregulation refers to the removal of any regulations and restrictions that are imposed on any industry. RECENT EXAMPLES OF INTRODUCING REGULATIONS IN E-COMMERCE In India, the Information and Technology Act, 2000 and IT (Amendment) Act, 2008 are the acts that govern and regulate the use of the NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 189 Business Law Internet and e-commerce. Online transactions and other important aspects of the e-commerce, such as online buying and selling, electronic contracts, cybercrimes, internet surveillance, etc., are all covered under the Information and Technology Act, 2000. There are various rules and regulations related to e-commerce in India. India issued the first set of e-commerce rules and regulations in December 2018. The main provisions of these rules were: Barring e-tailers from selling products from companies in which they had an equity stake Barring e-tailers from entering into exclusive agreements with sellers Protecting the Indian retailers from the unfair advantage to foreign S sellers due to their e-commerce platform IM Thereafter, the second set of e-commerce rules was drafted in February 2019. The main provisions of these rules were: Ensuring that the data is stored locally More and more data centres and server farms should be located within India M On 26th June, 2019, the Press Information Bureau of the Indian Government notified that the draft national e-commerce policy has been prepared and placed in public domain. This policy addresses six areas related to e-commerce, such as: 1. Data 2. Infrastructure development N 190 3. E-commerce marketplaces 4. Regulatory issues 5. Stimulating domestic digital economy 6. Export promotion This policy has been drafted keeping in mind the interests of all e-commerce stakeholders who include investors, manufacturers, MSMEs, traders, retailers, start-ups and consumers. Some important provisions of the draft national e-commerce policy are as follows: Discouraging the free inflow of foreign capital in e-commerce Data localisation in India in accordance with Srikrishna Committee’s draft data protection bill. Since data storage infrastructure is not very well developed in India, India would provide waivers on import duties required for setting up the data storage centres NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education LAWS THAT COMMONLY AFFECT BUSINESSES E-commerce entities need to move personal data to India Government can access personal data for national security and public policy objectives and this is subject to privacy laws Provision for a national encryption policy for the personal and institutional data held by corporates All the Indian e-commerce platforms selling the Indian products will have to be managed by the Indian leadership and should not have foreign equity exceeding 49% Central Consumer Protection Authority or the CCPA will be created as a nationwide regulator for e-commerce platforms Preferential to be made necessary for all e-commerce websites S RuPay treatment will be given to the Indian products All foreign e-commerce sites need to follow the Indian 2-factor authentication while processing payments by Indian cards Creating for domestic standards for the Internet of Things (IOT) IM Provision conducive environment for angel investors. No e-commerce companies should buy phones and other expensive electronics in bulk quantity as these distort the market price of such products. e-commerce organisations will be required to disclose their data collection practices. Auditing M All foreign companies’ source code N 4.5.5 E-GOVERNANCE – MEANING AND STATUS IN INDIA Electronic Governance (e-governance) refers to the application of Information and Communication Technology (ICT) for providing government services, exchange of information, transactions, integration of previously existing services and information portals. Using e-governance, the government is able to address the needs of citizens. Using e-governance, the government aims to encourage good governance. ICT can be used for various governance services, such as the following: Dissemination Efficient of information and speedy communication Through e-governance, the government plans to raise the coverage and quality of information and services provided to the general public in an effective and efficient manner. Following are the major benefits of e-governance: Helps in reducing corruption NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 191 Business Law Brings transparency Increases Helps convenience in reducing overall cost Increases the reach of government Provides a chance to the constituents to directly participate with the help of e-governance Following are various types of e-governance: G2G (Government to Government): When the exchange of information takes place between government bodies, it is termed as G2G e-governance. It can be at the horizontal level as well as vertical level. IM S Example: Within government entities at the national level, the state level or local bodies, the exchange is at the horizontal level, while between one state government and another, the exchange is at the vertical level. G2C (Government to Citizen): The interaction among the government and general public is said to be G2C. It helps citizens access a wide variety of services. The general public can share views and grievances on government policies anytime and anywhere. (Government to Business): The interaction between government and business class is said to be G2B. It helps in saving cost, time, red tapism and establishing transparency in the business environment. M G2B G2E N 192 (Government to Employees): The G2E model aims at providing information and services by the government organisation to their employees to facilitate communication and learning. The G2E model offers career advice and information on performance management, training and development of employees, etc. Thus, e-governance plays an important role in improving and supporting the tasks performed by the government departments and agencies. 4.5.6 THE INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY AMENDMENT ACT, 2008 In 2008, the Indian Government amended the Information Technology Act, 2000 to enact the Information Technology (Amendment) Act, 2008. Owing to this Act, a strong data protection regime was established in India. This law addressed various concerns of the industries, such as data protection, cyber-crime measures, predictive legal environment, etc. This Amendment requires that organisations that hold sensitive and personal information of consumers in digital environment must be protected and secured reasonably. According to this Amendment, all NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education LAWS THAT COMMONLY AFFECT BUSINESSES lawful contracts must be secured by provisions for penalty for breach of confidentiality and privacy. The Amendment also provides for protecting the privacy of consumers. This will have the impact of promoting trust in trans-border data flows to India. This Amendment further strengthens data protection laws by creating provisions for cybercrimes, such as identity theft, phishing, data leakage, cyber-terrorism, data security and data privacy, etc. This Amendment Act has strengthened the security practices within India by including many cybercrimes in the Amendment Act, which were not present in the IT Act, 2000. Cybercrimes, such as sending of offensive or false messages (s 66A), receiving stolen computer resource (s 66B), identity theft (s 66C), cheating by personation (s 66D), violation of privacy (s 66E) are included in the IT Act. IM S The Act has redefined the terms like ‘communication device’ in context of current usage and validating electronic signature, etc., in order to deal with electronic commerce and cybercrime. This Act has introduced various provisions to foster an effective enforcement of cyber law in India. In 2015, Section 66A of the IT (Amendment) Act, 2008 was struck down by the Supreme Court vide the case of Shreya Singhal vs. Union of India decided on 24th March, 2015. M KEY PROVISIONS OF THE AMENDMENT Some of the important provisions of the IT (Amendment) Act, 2008 are as follows: offensive message is a crime Authority Child N Sending has power to monitor any information for any source porn is crime Cyber terrorism Voyeurism is a crime Certificate to identify the authenticity of the device to introduce as a proof Tampering Hacking with computer document is crime computer is considered to be a crime Purchasing or selling any electronic device IMPACT OF THE INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY AMENDMENT ACT ON E-COMMERCE, IT INFRASTRUCTURE AND CYBERCRIMES The Information Technology Act, 2000 had Sections 65 to 78 which provided provisions for offences and penalties for activities, such as tampering with computer source code documents, hacking systems, NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 193 MARK IT! As per Pavan Duggal, who is a cyber-law consultant and advocate at the Supreme Court of India, the IT (Amendment) Act, 2008 has provided the Indian government with the power of surveillance, monitoring and blocking data traffic. The new powers under the Amendment Act tend to give the Indian government a texture and colour of being a surveillance state. 194 Business Law Study Hint The IT (Amendment) Act, 2008 brought cyber cafes under its ambit along with various cyber terrorism provisions. publishing and disseminating obscene information in electronic form or for fraudulent purposes. The scope and extent of dealing with cybercrimes was quite limited. With the enactment of the IT (Amendment) Act, 2008 amendments were introduced for eight different types of offences that affect individuals or other persons including the following: Using any computer resource code or communication device to compose and disseminate false or offensive information Making fraudulent or dishonest use of electronic signatures or passwords Using any computer source or communication device for capturing, 4.5.7 CYBERCRIME A cybercrime refers to any and all types of crimes that are used with the help of computers and computer networks. According to the Interpol, ‘Pure cybercrime’ refers to crimes against computers and information systems, where the aim is to gain an unauthorised access to a device or deny access to a legitimate user. IM ? DID YOU KNOW Cybercrime is also called the bane of the Internet. S publishing or transmitting any form of obscene images and visuals N M With an increase in the use of internet for trade and communication, criminals now use new technologies to commit various types of cybercrimes, such as cyber-attacks against governments, businesses and individuals. Cybercrimes are extremely critical for economies because these crimes know no borders and can potentially cause serious harm to an individual, nation, business, etc. Some of the cybercrimes include online fraud, illegal gambling, selling fake medicines, etc. It can be said that cybercrime is now growing at a tremendous speed, and the police and various other regulating authorities need to acquaint themselves with the technologies, tools and methods that cyber criminals use to carry out their crimes. TYPES OF CYBERCRIMES The types of cybercrimes according to the entity that is affected by the crime are as follows: Cybercrime against individuals: Such cybercrimes are those which directly affect a person or his/her property. Example: Phishing, cyber stalking and publishing illegal adult materials are cybercrimes against individuals. Cybercrime against companies/organisations: Such crimes are those that directly target any company, its online presence or its products and services. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education LAWS THAT COMMONLY AFFECT BUSINESSES Example: Data breaches, data theft, etc. are cybercrimes against companies. Cybercrime against society: Such crimes are those which affect the society as a whole. Example: Forgery, financial crime against a public organisation, selling illegal products, etc. are cybercrimes against society. Cybercrime against government: Such crimes are those which are targeted at law enforcement agencies and various government entities. Example: Hacking government systems, networks and websites is a cybercrime against government. S The different types of cybercrimes that affect various individuals, organisations, government and society are as follows: Phishing: Malicious websites are created to look like real websites IM which trick users to provide their login IDs, passwords and other details. E-mail bombing: It takes place when a large number of e-mails are sent to one particular e-mail address. media hacking: This malpractice takes place when the hackers hack the social media accounts, such as the Twitter, Facebook, etc., of a person, company or government entity. This malpractice is all about sharing malicious links in order to harm, mislead or damage the device. Software software. Salami N Spamming: M Social piracy: It is the unauthorised distribution and use of slicing attacks: This is a type of cybercrime that takes when cyber criminals steal money in small and tiny amounts which are not noticeable to account holders. Hacking: It is illegal intrusion into the computer system or computer network. Cyber stalking: This malpractice involves following and stalking any person on his/her social media account. Cyber bullying: This malpractice involves sending harmful, offensive and abusive messages over the Internet to a person or an organisation. Identity theft: This happens when cyber criminals steal the identity of any other person and pretend to be a particular person over the Internet. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 195 Business Law PENALTIES UNDER THE INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY ACT, 2000 AND THE AMENDMENT TO INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY ACT, 2008 The offences, penalties and punishments under the Information Technology Act, 2000 are listed in Table 4.2: TABLE 4.2: OFFENCES, PENALTIES AND PUNISHMENTS UNDER THE ITA, 2000 Offence Punishment/Imprisonment Term Penalty/ Fine (`) Up to 3 years 2,00,000 Dishonestly or fraudulently accessing a computer, computer system or computer network without the permission of the owner for downloading, copying and extracting any data Up to 3 years 5,00,000 Dishonestly or fraudulently receiving or retaining any stolen computer resource or communication device Up to 3 years 1,00,000 Dishonestly or fraudulently making use of electronic signature, password or any other Unique Identification Feature of any other person Up to 3 years 1,00,000 Dishonestly or fraudulently cheating any person by means of any communication device or computer resource by personating Up to 3 years 1,00,000 Intentionally capturing, publishing or transmitting any image of private area of any person without his/her consent Up to 3 years 2,00,000 Any act done electronically or by using computer which threatens the unity, integrity, security or sovereignty of India Lifetime imprisonment Publishing or transmitting in electronic form any material which appeals to prurient interest, or if its effect is such as to tend to deprave and corrupt persons who are likely to read, see or hear matter contained in it Up to 3 years (1st event) 5,00,000 (1st event) Up to 3 years (2nd event) 10,00,000 (2nd event) Publishing or transmitting any sexually explicit material in electronic form Up to 5 years (1st event) 10,00,000 (1st event) Up to 7 years (2nd event) 10,00,000 (2nd event) Up to 2 years 1,00,000 M IM S Tampering, concealing, destroying, or altering any computer source document intentionally N 196 If any person intentionally or knowingly fails to comply with the order of a Certifying Authority NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education N.A. LAWS THAT COMMONLY AFFECT BUSINESSES TABLE 4.2: OFFENCES, PENALTIES AND PUNISHMENTS UNDER THE ITA, 2000 Punishment/Imprisonment Term Penalty/ Fine (`) Securing access to any electronic record, book, register, correspondence, information, document or other material without the consent of the person concerned and disclosing such electronic record, book, register, correspondence, information, document or other material to any other person Up to 2 years 1,00,000 Securing access to any material containing personal information about another person, with the intent to cause wrongful loss or wrongful gain discloses, without the consent of the person Up to 3 years 5,00,000 Publishing an electronic signature certificate and making it available to any other person with the knowledge that the Certifying Authority has not issued it, or the Subscriber has not accepted it, or the Certificate has been revoked or suspended Up to 2 years S Offence M IM 1,00,000 Knowingly creating, publishing, or making available Electronic Signature Certificate for any fraudulent or unlawful purpose Up to 2 years 1,00,000 N Source: https://taxguru.in/corporate-law/offences-penalties-information-technology-act-2000. html The offences, penalties and punishments under the IT (Amendment) Act, 2008 are listed in Table 4.3: TABLE 4.3: OFFENCES, PENALTIES AND PUNISHMENTS UNDER THE IT (AMENDMENT) ACT, 2008 Offence Punishment/ Imprisonment Term Penalty/ Fine (`) Section 65 (Tampering with computer source documents) Up to 3 years 2,00,000 Section 66 (Computer-related offences) Up to 3 years 5,00,000 Section 66B (Receiving stolen computer or communication device) Up to 3 years 1,00,000 Section 66C (Fraudulently or dishonestly making use of the electronic signature, password or any other unique identification feature) Up to 3 years 1,00,000 NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 197 Business Law TABLE 4.3: OFFENCES, PENALTIES AND PUNISHMENTS UNDER THE IT (AMENDMENT) ACT, 2008 Offence Punishment/ Imprisonment Term Penalty/ Fine (`) Up to 3 years 1,00,000 Up to 3 years 2,00,000 Section 67 (Publishing or transmitting obscene material in electronic form) Up to 3 years (1st event) 5,00,000 (1st event) Up to 3 years (2nd event) Up to 5 years (1st event) 10,00,000 (2nd event) 10,00,000 (1st event) Up to 7 years (2nd event) Up to 5 years (1st event) 10,00,000 (2nd event) 10,00,000 (1st event) Up to 7 years (2nd event) Up to 3 years 10,00,000 (2nd event) Not Specified IM S Section 66D (Cheating by personating using communication device or computer resource) Section 66E (Violating the privacy of a person without his or her consent) Section 66F (Committing or conspiring to commit cyber terrorism) Section 67A (Publishing or transmitting of material containing a sexually explicit act in an electronic form) M Section 67B (Publishing or transmitting material depicting children in a sexually explicit act in an electronic form) Imprisonment extendable to imprisonment for life Section 67C (Intermediaries who intentionally or knowingly fail to preserve and retain such information as may be specified for such duration, manner and format as the Central Government may prescribe) Section 68 (Any Certifying Authority or any Up to 2 years employee of such Authority who intentionally or knowingly fails to comply with any order of the Controller which is necessary to ensure compliance) Section 69 (Subscriber or intermediary or Up to 7 years any person who fails to assist the agency of the Central Government or the State Government to intercept, monitor or decrypt or cause to be intercepted or monitored or decrypted any information generated, transmitted, received or stored in any computer resource) Section 69A (Intermediary who fails to Up to 7 years comply with the direction issued by the Central Government to block for access by the public any information generated, transmitted, received, stored or hosted in any computer resource) N 198 NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education N.A. 1,00,000 Not Specified Not Specified LAWS THAT COMMONLY AFFECT BUSINESSES TABLE 4.3: OFFENCES, PENALTIES AND PUNISHMENTS UNDER THE IT (AMENDMENT) ACT, 2008 Offence Punishment/ Imprisonment Term Not Specified S Section 69B (Any intermediary who inten- Up to 3 years tionally or knowingly contravenes the provisions of sub-section 2 which states that the intermediary shall when called upon by the agency of the Central Government to provide technical assistance and provide online access to the computer resource generating, transmitting, receiving or storing such traffic data or information for cyber security) Penalty/ Fine (`) Up to 10 years Section 70B (Punishment for not complying with the directions of the Indian Computer Emergency Response Team Up to 1 year Not Specified IM Section 70 (Punishment of any person who secures access or attempts to secure access to a protected system which has been declared to be a protected system by the appropriate government) 1,00,000 1,00,000 Section 72 (Securing access to any electronic record, book, register, correspondence, information, document or other material without the consent of the person concerned and discloses the same to any other person) Up to 2 years 1,00,000 Section 72A (Any person including an Up to 3 years intermediary who while providing services under a lawful contract has secured access to any material containing personal information about another person with the intent to cause or knowing that he is likely to cause wrongful loss or wrongful gain disclosed without the consent of the person concerned or in breach of the lawful contract such material to any other person) 5,00,000 Section 73 (Publishing an Electronic Signature Certificate or otherwise makes it available to any other person with the knowledge that the certifying Authority listed in the certificate has not issued it or the subscriber listed in the certificate has not accepted it or the certificate has been revoked or suspended) 1,00,000 N M Section 71 (Obtaining any license or Digital Up to 2 years Signature Certificate if any person makes any misrepresentation or suppresses any material fact) Up to 2 years NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 199 Business Law TABLE 4.3: OFFENCES, PENALTIES AND PUNISHMENTS UNDER THE IT (AMENDMENT) ACT, 2008 Offence Punishment/ Imprisonment Term Section 74 (Any person knowingly creates, publishes or otherwise makes available an Electronic Signature Certificate for any fraudulent or unlawful purpose) Up to 2 years Penalty/ Fine (`) 1,00,000 Source: https://taxguru.in/corporate-law/offences-penalties-information-technology-act2000.html Self Assessment Questions S 8. One of the objectives of the Information Technology Act, 2000 is providing a legal framework for mitigating and checking ___________. IM 9. The purpose of developing the Information Technology Act, 2000 was to promote the use of e-commerce, e-transactions and e-governance practices. a. True b. False M Activity Prepare a case study related to any cybercrime that had recently been directed at the Indian Government websites. S N 200 4.6 Summary A negotiable instrument is a document which promises the payment of a certain sum of money to the assignee or some specific person. A negotiable instrument means a promissory note, bill of exchange or cheque payable either to order or to bearer. All the payments and settlements are regulated and governed by the Payment and Settlement Systems (PSS) Act, 2007. Section 138 of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 deals with the penalties that are applicable in case of dishonour of certain cheques due to insufficient funds. Creations and inventions that are created by the human mind, such as literary works, artistic works, symbols, names, images, designs, etc., are called Intellectual Property (IP). India is a member of the WTO and is a signatory to the TRIPS agreement. The Trade Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Rights is an international and legal agreement signed between all member countries of the WTO. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education LAWS THAT COMMONLY AFFECT BUSINESSES Various intellectual properties, such as trademarks and copyrights, have been protected in India. IPRs are similar to any other rights which enable their creators or owners to benefit from their own work or investments. According to the doctrine of sweat of brow, an author gains rights during the creation of a work. According to this doctrine, the skill and labour of the author forms the basis for judging the ownership of the IPR. The TRIPS agreement provides the minimum set of standards or rules for protecting the intellectual property all over the world. The major types of intellectual property rights include the following: S Patent Trademarks Designs Biodiversity-Geographical of designs of Semiconductors and Integrated Circuits Trade Secrets Sexual Indications M Registration IM Copyrights harassment involves unwelcome act(s) or behaviour(s), such as sexual advances, requests for sexual favours and any other verbal or physical conduct of a sexual nature. case judgement of Bhanwari Devi Rape case led to framing of Vishakha Guidelines which formed the basis of the Sexual Harassment of Women at Workplace (Prevention, Prohibition and Redressal) Act, 2013. N The The Information Technology Act, 2000 is the law that governs the cybercrime and e-commerce activities. key words Digital signature: A mathematical technique for presenting the authenticity of a digital document Drawee: A person in whose favour the note is drawn Drawer: A person who makes the promise to another to pay the debt Electronic document: A document intended to be in an electronic form or in a printed copy Infringement: The practice of making, using or selling a patented product or process without permission NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 201 Business Law Novelty: An invention that is new, original, unusual and does not form part of any existing development, and not published or available in the public domain Payee: A person to whom the payment of a negotiable instrument is to be made ? 4.7 Descriptive Questions 1. Describe the three important types of negotiable instruments. 2. Explain the significance of TRIPS. 3. List various types of intellectual properties and the laws that govern them. S 4. Explain the main provisions of the Sexual Harassment of Women at Workplace (Prevention, Prohibition and Redressal) Act, 2013. IM 5. Outline various provisions of the Information Technology Act, 2000. 4.8 Answers and Hints ANSWERS FOR SELF ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS Q. No. Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 1. b. 2. 2 3. a. True 4. intellectual property 5. c. 6. district officer 7. d. 8. cyber-crimes 9. a. M Topic N 202 Intellectual Property Law Prevention of Sexual Harassment Information Technology Law Answer Ante-dated cheque Copyrights Offering a handshake True HINTS FOR DESCRIPTIVE QUESTIONS 1. According to Section 13 of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881, promissory notes, bills of exchange and cheques are negotiable instruments. Refer to Section 4.2 Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 2. TRIPS is an international agreement on IPRs that has been signed by the member countries of the WTO. This agreement includes patents, copyrights, trademarks, geographical indications, industrial designs and trade secrets. Refer to Section 4.3 Intellectual Property Law NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education LAWS THAT COMMONLY AFFECT BUSINESSES 3. Various types of intellectual properties include patents (for inventions), trademarks, industrial designs, trade secrets and copyrights. Refer to Section 4.3 Intellectual Property Law 4. In 2013, the Indian Government enacted the Sexual Harassment of Women at Workplace (Prevention, Prohibition and Redressal) Act, 2013. This law was enacted to provide protection to women against sexual harassment at workplace and prevent and redress the complaints of sexual harassment at workplace. Refer to Section 4.4 Prevention of Sexual Harassment S 5. The major provisions under the Information Technology Act, 2000 include legal recognition to electronic documents, legal recognition to digital signatures, etc. Refer to Section 4.5 Information Technology Law Suggested Readings Sushma IM 4.9 Suggested Readings & References Arora. (2018) Business Laws. Taxmann Tulsian, P. (2014). Business Law. New Delhi: McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited. policy framework to be ready in 6 months. (2020). Retrieved 18 April 2020, from https://economictimes.indiatimes. com/small-biz/policy-trends/e-commerce-policy-framework-tobe-ready-in-6- months/articleshow/63902314.cms Home N E-commerce M E-REFERENCES page. (2020). Retrieved 18 April 2020, from https:// magnetoitsolutions.com/blog/advantages-and-disadvantages-ofecommerce Imminent need for uniform laws for ecommerce in India. (2020). Retrieved 18 April 2020, from https://economictimes.indiatimes. com/industry/services/retail/imminent-need-for-uniform-laws-forecommerce-in-india/articleshow/73692139.cms?from=mdr India proposes new e-commerce regulations with focus on data rules. (2020). Retrieved 18 April 2020, from https://www.reuters.com/ article/us-india-ecommerce/india-proposes-new-e-commerceregulations-with-focus-on-data-rules-idUSKCN1QC0LO India’s New E-Commerce Rules Challenge E-Retailers | American Express. (2020). Retrieved 18 April 2020, from https://www. americanexpress.com/us/foreign-exchange/articles/e-commerceregulations-in-india-challenge-for-retailers/ National, Science, Sports, World, Variety, & Education et al. (2020). Govt unveils draft e-commerce norms. Retrieved 18 April NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 203 Business Law 2020, from https://www.thehindubusinessline.com/info-tech/govtunveils-draft-e-commerce-norms/article28826848.ece# Sen, K. (2020). IT Act 2008 gets tougher with cyber crime. Retrieved 18 April 2020, from https://www.business-standard. com/article/economy-policy/it-act-2008-gets-tougher-with-cybercrime-109070600096_1.html D. (2020). Salient features of the Information Technology (Amendment) Act, 2008 - Indian Cyber Security - We Provide services in Cyber crimeInvestigation,EthicalHacking,Hacking Coarse, Consultation, Online Security, IT laws, case studies, cyber safety tips, and articles, hacking tips and tricks, Hacking Tutorials ,submit your complaint, complaint, cyber crime complaint. Retrieved 18 April 2020, from http://www.indiancybersecurity.com/ cyber_law/10_salient_features_of_the_information_technology_ amendment_act_2008.html M IM S Sharma, N 204 NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education C h 5 a pt e LAWS RELATED TO ENFORCEMENT AND REDRESSAL MECHANISM IN BUSINESS IM N 5.3 Introduction Alternative Dispute Resolution (ADR) 5.2.1 Meaning and History of ADR 5.2.2 Features of ADR Advantages of ADR 5.2.3 Self Assessment Questions Activity Types of ADR 5.3.1 Negotiation 5.3.2 Mediation 5.3.3 Conciliation 5.3.4 Lok Adalats 5.3.5 Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 5.3.6 Leading Case Studies Self Assessment Questions Activity Anti-Corruption Laws 5.4.1 Anti-Corruption Laws in India 5.4.2Difference between US Anti-Corruption Laws and Indian Anti-Corruption Laws Leading Cases 5.4.3 Self Assessment Questions Activity Summary Descriptive Questions Answers and Hints Suggested Readings & References M 5.1 5.2 S Contents 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education r 206 Business Law Introductory Caselet CONVENIENCE IN ARBITRATION Case Objective S This caselet discusses the important role arbitration plays in the service industry. By opting for arbitration, parties save various types of expenses, which enables substantial financial saving. The use of the arbitration is significant in the service industry and especially in the field of brokerage because if there is any dispute between a client and a stockbroker about the trades executed at the Bombay Stock Exchange or the National Stock Exchange, those disputed transactions can be referred to the arbitral tribunal of that particular exchange. After the receipt of the complaint, an arbitrator is appointed by the choice of both parties. Thereafter, relevant evidence is submitted with the sole arbitrator who, on the basis of the submissions, makes a decision that is binding on the parties. However, the parties have a right to challenge the legality and impropriety of the order given by the arbitrator, in the appropriate civil court. N M IM The parties who refer their disputes to an arbitral tribunal are not required to pay the court fee. Moreover, the parties may not have to engage a lawyer to put forward their arguments to the arbitral tribunal, since the procedural law is not applicable to arbitral proceedings. There is no bar on the disputing parties arguing their own case before the tribunal. The commercial parties benefit by keeping their dispute away from the prying eyes of the press. It helps in maintaining the confidentiality of their business matters. In a nutshell, by opting arbitration, the parties save various types of expenses such as court fee, suit valuation fee, stamp duties and other procedural fees (like application fee, notice fee, which enables substantial financial saving), therefore being convenient to parties. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education LAWS RELATED TO ENFORCEMENT AND REDRESSAL MECHANISM IN BUSINESS 207 Learning objectives After studying this chapter, you will be able to: Discuss the Alternative Dispute Resolution (ADR) Describe various types of ADRs Explain the concept of negotiation Describe the meaning of mediation Analyse the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 Discuss the concept of conciliation Interpret the Anti-Corruption Laws >> >> >> >> >> >> >> S 5.1 Introduction Quick Revision IM In the previous chapter, you have studied various laws that affect businesses such as Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881, Intellectual Property Law and Information Technology Law. All these laws play an active role in offering a legal framework to businesses to operate ethically. N M Whenever there are disputes between two or more parties, an option is to take the case to a court of law for the settlement of disputes. Such a course of action is time consuming, expensive and burdensome. It may even take years or decades to get the court decision. Later, the hierarchy of courts also delays the final decision as the affected parties appeal to the higher courts. Due to these reasons, multinational companies (MNCs) doing business in India are not always happy to get their disputes settled through law court proceedings. They want quick, less expensive and simple modes of settlement of disputes. Hence, the Alternative Disputes Resolution (ADR) system is quintessential in order to keep up with the rapid pace. To overcome the problems encountered in pursuing cases before the courts, the jurists have developed several alternative dispute settlement methods such as arbitration, mediation and conciliation. Thus, for example, under the arbitration process, parties have the option to refer their dispute to a mutually determined adjudicator known as ‘arbitrator’ who decides the issue by means of a quasi-judicial process. The award given by such a private adjudicator has the same validity as the judgement of a judicial court. This chapter describes the various alternative methods of dispute resolution. Additionally, this chapter will also look into anti-corruption laws of India. 5.2 ALTERNATIVE DISPUTE RESOLUTION (ADR) Alternative Dispute Resolution, also called ADR, a generic term that involves various processes used for dispute resolution without NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education ? DID YOU KNOW The statute such as Code of Civil Procedure, 1908, was amended in 1999 to provide for the settlement of disputes outside the court. Business Law formal and conventional resolution of disputes. In other words, ADR provides an alternative to the adversarial justice system that is based on public litigation. The basic thrust of ADR mechanism is to assist disputing parties in resolving their dispute amicably, creatively and effectively. Moreover, the resolution of dispute is achieved expeditiously and cost-effectively. The ADR process is purely voluntary and both the parties need to agree to resolve dispute through ADR. It has the same legal sanctity as is applicable to judgements by the courts. The ADR mechanism is suitable for all types of disputes by means of a harmonious procedure. This mechanism does not supplant traditional court-based methods of dispute settlement but supplements them to ensure expeditious resolution leading to a reduction in the burden on formal courts. IM S ADR methods provide ‘participatory justice’ in which disputants have an opportunity of active participation in the resolution process. They can decide the place of sitting of tribunal, dispense with formal legal procedure, settle the fees payable to the private adjudicator, and prescribe a time schedule for giving the award. ADR methods may include early neutral evaluation, negotiation, mutual give and take and alike. 5.2.1 MEANING AND HISTORY OF ADR M During ancient times, there were no courts to resolve disputes. There were panchayats and other informal ways of redressal mechanisms in place for dispute resolution. The Indian judiciary was initially set up to make the legal framework more formal and authorised. However, there were a large number of pending cases in courts. Due to time and cost crunch, even trial courts were struggling to fulfil the need of the system. This necessitated the formation of an alternative formal dispute resolution mechanism. As a result, the ADR mechanism came into existence. An ADR is an alternative to existing formal legal system which lessens the burden of cases in law courts. N 208 Section 89 of the Civil Procedure Code, 1908, was the first legislation that empowered the court to persuade parties to choose ADR for resolving their disputes. At that time, there was no other law that provided for any alternative to formal litigation. Subsequently, the first Arbitration Act, 1940, provided for arbitration, but there was considerable judicial interference in arbitration during that period. Much later, the Arbitration and Conciliation Act of 1996 came into force which reduced the judicial interference to almost a negligible extent. The Legal Services Authority Act, 1985, provided for the establishment of Lok Adalat in every judicial court, from district court to the Supreme Court. Similarly, Sections 5, 6 and 9 of the Family Courts Act, 1984 provide for the appointment of agencies and counsellors besides obliging the court to make efforts for settlement before taking evidence. Thus, the central focus of the legal system is to encourage ADR. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education LAWS RELATED TO ENFORCEMENT AND REDRESSAL MECHANISM IN BUSINESS 209 ADR can be used along with existing legal systems within common law jurisdictions. ADR traditions differ by country and culture. These methods are used for resolving disputes outside of official formal judicial mechanisms such as informal tribunals, informal mediation processes formal tribunals and formal mediation processes. These methods have become global necessity as it offers cheaper, informal and speedier redressal. ADR has also found favour with parties engaged in international commercial disputes as it is neutral to the law, language and institutional culture of the parties. This helps in maintaining equality among parties and prevents some parties getting the home-court advantage when compared to the court-based litigation in respective countries. S 5.2.2 FEATURES OF ADR The process of ADRs is relatively less formal than the judicial processes. The proceedings are flexible without any formal extensive written documentation or formal pleading or technicalities which make it quite easy and appealing to seek redressal for settlement. The rules of procedure and evidence, as practiced in courts, do not strictly apply to alternative dispute settlement proceedings. of equity: Every case addressed in alternate dispute resolution is settled using the third party or by disputing parties themselves. ADR programmes are the application of equity rather than rule of law. Transparent N Application M Informality: IM ADR provides a better, time-saving and cost-effective way to resolve disputes among private parties as compared to court litigation. There are certain common features among several alternate dispute resolution mechanisms, which are as follows: and confidentiality in communication between disputants: The participation of disputing parties in the dispute resolution is direct with a higher level of confidentiality and transparency. The proceedings of ADR are private, thus facilitate confidentiality. Substitute of conventional method of dispute resolution: ADR is out-of-court settlements to maintain social order and cooperation. It has several methods such as arbitration, negotiation and mediation that are the substitute of the conventional method of dispute redressal. Resolution of all types of matters: Be it commercial, or civil, family or industrial cases, ADR addresses all types of litigation matters. Parties can reach or negotiate to reach the settlement in a more easy and time-saving way. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education NOTE There are two categories of ADR, which are court-annexed options (mediation and conciliation) and communitybased dispute resolution mechanism (Lok-Adalat). Business Law 5.2.3 ADVANTAGES OF ADR ADR techniques are considered as one of the most acceptable dispute resolution techniques used worldwide, either alongside or combined with respective legal systems of various countries. The main advantages of ADR are as follows: It can competently resolve multi-party disputes. It has a flexible procedure. The parties can decide when and how they want the dispute to be resolved. Therefore, the process is controlled by the conflicting parties. It is less expensive than traditional court litigation. is less complex as the hard and fast rules of litigation and court procedure do not strictly apply. third party involved in ADR happens to be neutral to provide unbiased decisions. Also, the said third party is chosen by both the disputing parties by a mutual agreement. IM The S It It settles the dispute without too much delay. It provides practical solutions to parties that protect their interests. It maintains the privacy of the disputing parties. maintains relationships and reputations of the conflicting parties. This is best suited for businesses that would prefer to continue doing business with each other in future. M It N 210 self assessment Questions 1. ADR includes: a. Informal tribunals b. Informal mediation processes c. Formal tribunals d. All of these 2. Section 89 of the Civil Procedure Code, 1908, was the first legislation that empowered the court to persuade parties to choose ADR for resolving their disputes. a. True b. False Activity Search on the Internet and find out various modes of ADR. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education LAWS RELATED TO ENFORCEMENT AND REDRESSAL MECHANISM IN BUSINESS 211 5.3 TYPES OF ADR There are various types of ADRs available other than court proceedings. These types are evolving and the list is quite exhaustive. Classifications are based on the procedures followed in alternate dispute mechanisms: Agreement: There are procedures such as mediation, negotiation, mini trial and facilitation that help disputing parties to derive outof-court settlement on the basis of agreement. The settlement involves the agreement of the parties involved in it. Decision: There are various procedures through which settlement IM S of a dispute can be done one of which is on the basis of decision or adjudication by an outsider. The dominant procedure of decision is arbitration. In the case of arbitration, an outsider decides how to resolve a dispute between the conflicting parties. Hence, he/she is the ultimate decision maker. The arbitrator arrives at a decision based on the facts and arguments presented by the disputing parties. Advice: There are procedures that involve a neutral or non-binding party to inform or advice the conflicting parties on the basis of case evaluation or expert opinion. It involves non-binding arbitration, facts finding, neutral evaluation, etc. N 5.3.1 NEGOTIATION M In the sub-section, you will study some of the major ADR mechanisms in detail. Negotiation is an informal technique of resolving a dispute, where parties in dispute directly try to communicate with each other and reach a conclusion. In a negotiation, the process is akin to bargaining between two or more parties having opposing interests to arrive at a consensus to manage and ultimately resolve the dispute through a non-binding process. This is a preferred technique of dispute resolution when the parties want to maintain an on-going relationship with each other. The characteristics of negotiation are as follows: Voluntary: There is no formal obligation to resort to negotiations. The parties have full freedom to initiate, continue, adapt or terminate negotiations. Bilateral/multilateral: There is no limit to the number of parties involved in a negotiation. Informal: There are no formally prescribed rules to carry out negotiations. Flexible: The process of negotiation is flexible as its scope depends on the choice of the involved parties. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education ? DID YOU KNOW Negotiation is the simplest mode of ADR. 212 Business Law The process of negotiation offers the following advantages: Confidentiality: The negotiation process maintains the privacy of involved parties. Economical: The fee paid for negotiation is minimal. Congenial relationship: The negotiation process helps in establishing and maintaining harmonious relationships among parties in the future. 5.3.2 Mediation is a voluntary, non-binding, confidential and structured process wherein a neutral third-party possessing special communication, negotiation, social and interactive skills help the disputing parties arrive at a mutual settlement. Since the settlement is done on mutually agreed terms, there emerges a win-win situation for the parties involved in the dispute. Each of the parties tries to focus on their particular interests and priorities. Mediation is centered on active and direct participation of the parties. Also, mediation implies the involvement of a third party called a mediator, who facilitates the resolution of disputes between the parties. The function of the mediator is that of a facilitator. The mediator cannot be called to the court or be asked to testify to any of the proceedings or reveal any discussion that may have taken place during the mediation process. The entire mediation process is carried out confidentially and without prejudice. On account of the reconciliatory nature of proceedings, parties have greater trust in the mediator. The statements made during the mediation process cannot be disclosed. N M IM S ? DID YOU KNOW For the first time, the concept of ‘conciliation’ is given statutory recognition by the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996. MEDIATION In India, the mediation is still primarily court-annexed. Section 89 of the Civil Procedure Code, 1908, vests the authority in the court, which is seized of the dispute, to suggest the parties to opt for any of the ADR methods. It is for the parties to decide whether to accept the court proposal. In case, the parties reach a settlement, the ‘settlement agreement’ will be duly signed by the parties and the mediator and then sent to the Court for passing of an appropriate order in terms thereof. Mediation can take place when: Direct negotiations have failed, leading to an increase in dispute Direct negotiations are complex and difficult Multiple parties are involved, leading to confusion The following are some fundamental principles of mediation: Presence of a neutral mediator: A presence of a neutral mediator is essential for a successful mediation. He must not have any personal or monetary interest in the dispute or in either party. Self-determination by the parties: Mediation is based on the self- determination by the disputant parties. They make free choices of NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education LAWS RELATED TO ENFORCEMENT AND REDRESSAL MECHANISM IN BUSINESS 213 various available alternatives which minimises mental differences and caters to the interests of the concerned parties. The role of a mediator is to facilitate dialogue rather than direct the parties to any particular end. The outcome of the settlement is reached by the parties on their own. Confidentiality of proceedings is the critical element of successful mediation. The participants need an assurance that all their discussions, statements, concessions and/ or admissions are protected by confidentiality. The confidentiality shall extend to the settlement agreement, unless there is a necessity for the disclosure in order to implement and enforce it. It is imperative that the mediator is also bound by the confidentiality clause so that he may not required to disclose in any forum all that may have transpired during the process. The mediator must have the ‘confidentiality’ so that he may not require disclosing in any forum whatever may have transpired during the process. S Confidentiality: of process: The mediation process of dispute resolution should be performed in a fair manner, i.e., all parties are treated fairly and not arbitrarily. Also, their concerns should be addressed properly. IM Fairness process: The element of voluntariness is the magic of mediation which encourages autonomy and party selfdetermination. Any compulsion to participate is counterproductive and makes mediation similar to litigation. M Voluntary The main advantages of mediation are as follows: expensive: Mediation is a less expensive process, requiring less money for the service rendered N Less Less time consuming: Mediation is a process that is comparatively less time consuming than the litigation process, hence mediations allow the speedy disposal of a matter Confidentiality of the proceedings: In the mediation process, total confidentiality is maintained, as the whole process is not public Amicable resolution: Mediation allows parties to arrive at a mutually agreeable decision, with as little hostility as possible 5.3.3 CONCILIATION Conciliation refers to a process of settling disputes through the good offices of a third party, which attempts to minimise the points of conflict between parties to enable them to reconcile. Conciliation depends on the discretion of the involved parties. The whole purpose is to bridge the gap that may arise and to reach a point of equilibrium so that a mutual agreement is obtained. Under the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996, the party initiating conciliation proceedings shall send a written invitation to the other party to conciliate. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education NOTE In the case of conciliation, the conciliator provides assistance to the parties to resolve a dispute by reaching a mutually agreed settlement. A conciliator is a third impartial party. 214 Business Law Conciliation involves interaction between conflicting parties through a third party, who tries to balance the demands of both parties. A third party that acts as a conciliator and solves the dispute. The representatives of the parties brought for consultation with the conciliator try to reduce the differences or concerns of both parties. The conciliator can be an individual or a group with whom both the parties agree to share their concerns. Under the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, there shall be one conciliator, unless parties decide to have two, or three, in which case they must all act jointly (Section 63). MEANING OF CONCILIATION IM S Conciliation is a method of resolving a conflict with the help of a thirdparty (conciliator), who intervenes in the dispute situation upon a request by either or both the parties. The conciliator simply assists them in their negotiations and decision making, resolves the impasse and removes bottlenecks. M In a manual for workers’ education on collective bargaining published by the International Labour Organization (ILO), conciliation has been defined as practice by which the services of a neutral party are used in a dispute as a means of helping the disputing parties to reduce the extent of their differences and to arrive at an amicable settlement or agreed solution. ROLE OF CONCILIATOR N NOTE According to the United Nations Commission on International Trade Law (UNCITRAL) Conciliation Rules, 1980, the role conciliator can be stated as follows: United Nations Commission on International Trade Law (UNCITRAL) is a subsidiary body of the UN General Assembly responsible for facilitating international trade and investment. (i) To assist the parties in reaching an amicable settlement of their dispute (ii) To keep in mind principles of objectivity, fairness, and justice, giving consideration to the rights and obligations of the parties, the usage of trade and the circumstances surrounding the dispute including any previous business practices between the parties (iii) To conduct the proceedings in an appropriate manner taking into account the circumstances of the case, the wishes of the parties, oral statements and the need for a speedy settlement (iv) To make proposal for settlement of dispute at any stage without putting things in writing and without any statement of reasons therefore. Therefore, conciliation can be defined as a voluntary proceeding where the disputing parties are free to agree to and resolve their dispute with the aid of a conciliator. It is a flexible process that allows the NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education LAWS RELATED TO ENFORCEMENT AND REDRESSAL MECHANISM IN BUSINESS 215 concerned parties to define the time, structure and content of proceedings. In conciliation, the conciliator usually has no right to seek evidence or call witnesses. Section 66 of the Arbitration and Conciliation Act states that a conciliator is not bound by the Civil Procedure Code, 1908, or the Indian Evidence Act. The goal is to conciliate, mostly by seeking concessions. In conciliation, the parties rarely face each other during the entire process. 5.3.4 LOK ADALATS S In case of providing timely justice, Lok Adalats are set up to promote justice by providing timely and cost-effective legal aid on the basis of principles of equity, justice and fair play. Lok Adalat is a promising, participative ADR method. It is considered to be the people’s court, which provides an easy access to justice with mutual consent. M IM As per Section 19(5) of the Legal Services Authorities Act, 1987, Lok Adalat shall have jurisdiction to determine and arrive at a compromise or settlement between the parties to a dispute in respect of any case pending before, or any matter which is falling within the jurisdiction of and is not brought before, any court for which the Lok Adalat is organised. N Lok Adalat means people’s court. When disputes are referred to Lok Adalat for settlement, it is done in accordance with the provisions of the Legal Services Authority Act, 1987. 5.3.5 ARBITRATION AND CONCILIATION ACT, 1996 The Arbitration and Conciliation Act is based on the United Nations Commission on International Trade Law (UNCITRAL’s) Model Law on International Commercial Arbitration, 1985. This Act extends to the whole of India. The essence of arbitration is that some dispute is referred to by the parties for settlement to a tribunal/person of their own choosing instead of a court. In popular parlance, arbitration may be defined as a private process set up by the parties as a substitute for court litigation to obtain a decision on their disputes. The Arbitration and Conciliation Act was enacted in 1996 for achieving the following objectives: To consolidate and modify the law relating to domestic arbitration and international commercial arbitration To enforce foreign arbitral awards To define the law relating to conciliation and for matters connected therewith or incidental thereto NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education ? DID YOU KNOW Justice S. M. Dharamadhikari has described Lok Adalat as indianisation, humanisation and spiritualisation of justice dispensation on following accounts: yyIndianisation of justice dispensation: Based on customs and traditions found in villages and societies of India yyHumanisation of justice dispensation: More and more participation of human beings involved with large consideration to human aspects in the course yySpiritualisation of justice dispensation: Process of uplifting society by educating its members to do justice to each other Know More As per Justice Ramaswamy, “Resolving disputes through Lok Adalat not only minimizes litigation expenditure, it saves valuable time of the parties and their witnesses and also facilitates inexpensive and prompt remedy appropriately to the satisfaction of both the parties”. ? DID YOU KNOW The process of arbitration is governed by the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 (the Act). The Act has been brought into force with effect from 25 January, 1996. The model law on arbitration adopted by the United Nations Commission on International Trade Law (UNCITRAL) is the foundation of this Act. 216 Business Law S The settlement of disputes through arbitration is an alternative system of dispute resolution through the intervention of a neutral third party. The role of the court is limited to the extent of regulating the process. The first legislation on arbitration was enacted in 1940. But the legislation authorised the courts to interfere in the arbitration process at various stages such as modification of the Award, remitting the Award for reconsideration by the arbitrator, and setting it aside the on specific grounds. It led the Supreme Court to point out in Guru Nanak Foundation vs. M/s. Rattan Singh & Sons [1981] that Interminable, time consuming, complex and expensive court procedures impelled jurists to search for an alternative forum, less formal, more effective and speedy for resolution of disputes avoiding procedural claptrap and this led them to the Act of 1940. Finally, based on the UNCITRAL Model law on Arbitration, the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996, was passed which is at par with such legislation existing anywhere in the world. IM The first part of the law deals with domestic arbitration and international arbitration held in India. The second part is designed to deal with international commercial arbitration. There is an exclusion of judicial intervention though the arbitral tribunal may take judicial assistance for technical matters such as the recording of evidence. DEFINITION OF ‘ARBITRATION’ Arbitration is the reference of a dispute or difference between parties for deciding a dispute after hearing both sides in a judicial manner by arbitrator(s). It is a method of binding private adjudication or settlement of disputes-whether present or future, relating to civil matters (money, property, breach of contract) between two disputing parties in a quasi-judicial proceeding after both parties have been given a hearing by an independent and impartial private adjudicator called an arbitrator selected by the disputing parties who decides in an expeditious manner by avoiding procedural technicalities peculiar to courts besides maintaining privacy of parties. M Know More N In Jivaji Raja vs. Khimiji Poonja & Company (1933), the Bombay High Court observed that arbitration is the reference of dispute or difference between two or more parties to a person chosen by the parties or appointed under statutory authority for determination of the same. OBJECTIVES OF ARBITRATION AND UNCITRAL COMMITMENT When a dispute is resolved through a tribunal rather than a court under the arbitration agreement, it is said to be an out of court settlement method. An impartial or neutral partner known as arbitrator is appointed who listens to both the disputing parties and makes a decision. The main objectives of arbitration is the settlement of differences through determination and investigation with minimum cost and length of time for dispute resolution. Arbitration is a private process and is governed by the UNCITRAL Arbitration Rules. The UNCITRAL offers a comprehensive set of procedural rules for arbitral proceedings arising from commercial relationships. It facilitates transparency in the process of arbitration by laying down the norms to be facilitated by the arbitrator and the disputing parties. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education LAWS RELATED TO ENFORCEMENT AND REDRESSAL MECHANISM IN BUSINESS 217 ARBITRATION AGREEMENT The formulation of the arbitration agreement is the first stage in the arbitration process whereby the disputing parties agree to submit their present or future differences to arbitration. In fact, an arbitration agreement is the sine qua non of arbitration. Without an arbitration agreement, arbitration cannot commence. Section 7 of the Arbitration and Conciliation Act has defined the arbitration agreement as: “An agreement by the parties to submit to arbitration all or certain disputes which have arisen or which may arise between them in respect of a defined legal relationship, whether contractual or not”. IM S Thus, the provision of arbitration can be made at the time of entering into the contract itself so that if any dispute arises in the future, the dispute can be referred to the arbitrator as per the agreement. It is also possible to refer to a dispute to arbitration after the dispute has arisen. The important aspects of an arbitration agreement are as follows: Must be in writing: Section 7(3) requires the arbitration agreement to be in writing and an oral agreement is not valid. Must relate to the reference of dispute to arbitration: Arbitration right of reference: Either of the parties may make the reference of dispute to arbitration in the prescribed manner. In case, the arbitration agreement gives a unilateral right of referring to only one of the parties, it shall not be valid. It is not mandatory to mention the arbitrator’s name. N Bilateral M agreement must relate to the reference of a present or future dispute between the parties to arbitration. The dispute forming the subject matter of arbitration must belong to the category of arbitrable matters. Effect of Arbitration Agreement Sometimes, a valid arbitration is in existence, the parties are not allowed to proceed with a law suit in a court. If a party still approaches the court, the other party shall submit a certified copy of the arbitration agreement to the court. Section 8 requires that any matter before a judicial authority containing an arbitration agreement shall be referred to arbitration. The court shall then direct the parties to arbitration in terms of Section 8 upon the objection of non-applicant not later than submitting its statement of defence on merits. COMPOSITION OF THE ARBITRATION TRIBUNAL The ‘Arbitral Tribunal’ means a ‘sole arbitrator’ or a ‘panel of arbitrators’. Section 10 deals with the composition of an arbitral tribunal. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education NOTE An arbitration agreement is said to be valid if it meets the following requirements: yyContractual capacity yyFree consent yyLawful object yyLawful consideration Business Law The disputing parties involved in the arbitration process have a right to determine the number of arbitrators, but the total number of arbitrators should not be an even number. Among the arbitrators, there should be a presiding arbitrator. If parties are unable to decide on the number of arbitrators, they shall appoint only a sole arbitrator. Exhibit Appointment of Arbitrators While appointing arbitrators, the following points should be considered: The arbitrator can be of any nationality unless otherwise agreed by the parties. parties are free to finalise the procedure of selecting an arbitrator. case, both the parties have appointed their nominees, these arbitrators shall in their turn nominate a third arbitrator who shall act as the presiding arbitrator. If the party in dispute cannot appoint the arbitrator within 30 days or the first two arbitrators fail to appoint the sole arbitrator, the arbitrator shall be appointed by the Chief Justice of a High Court or any other person or institution designated by him in the case of domestic arbitration. M IM In S The If there is any doubt as to whether the appointed arbitrator shall be able to act impartially or independently, then in that case his appointment can be challenged under Section 12 of the Act. N 218 INTERIM MEASURES BY THE ARBITRAL TRIBUNAL AND COURT The Arbitrator or Arbitral Tribunal may, at the request of the parties, take any interim measure for the protection of any of the parties as it may deem fit in the best interest of the parties in dispute. The interim measure may be of the following nature: To withhold the sale/or assets of any of the products related to the subject matter of the dispute and secure the interests of the parties by protecting the subject matter Any other relief the respective parties feel is necessary for the settlement of the dispute The arbitral tribunal may also provide adequate security to the party for any of the interim measures provided in the above points. PROCESS OF ARBITRATION The process of arbitration starts when one disputing party provides notice to another party for their intent to arbitrate a dispute. The NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education LAWS RELATED TO ENFORCEMENT AND REDRESSAL MECHANISM IN BUSINESS 219 S party filing the claim is called the Claimant, and the party against whom the claim is filed is called the Respondent. The Respondent is provided with ample time to respond in writing whether they agree to resolve the dispute through arbitration. The acceptance from both parties to start the proceedings through arbitration starts the actual process of arbitration where the role of arbitrator comes into the picture. An arbitrator is selected by the parties or a panel of arbitrators is approved by the parties to continue the proceedings. Then, there will be prehearing conferences and formalities. Then, after several arbitration hearings, testimony from both the parties and their respective witnesses are heard, and all the evidence is submitted. In the end, closing arguments are made by the attorneys. The final decision is made after considering all the evidences that have been notified to the parties, usually in 30-90 days. ARBITRAL AWARD: MAKING, FINALITY AND ENFORCEMENT IM Meaning of Award M The decision of the Arbitral Tribunal is termed as ‘Arbitral Award’. It is analogous to a court judgment although it is made by a mutually private adjudicator. An award is a determination on merits about all the matters in dispute which have been referred to the tribunal. It includes any final, interim or partial award and any award on costs or interest. Authority of the tribunal ceases after the submission of the award. N Awards coming from the tribunals situated in convention countries are recognised as foreign awards and they are enforceable the same as a decree of court in India. Form & Content of Award [Section 31] There is no particular form for the validity of an award except for the following rules contained in Section 31 of the Arbitration and Conciliation Act: (i) An arbitral award shall be made in writing and signed by the sole arbitrator or majority of the members of the arbitral tribunal. In case a particular member of tribunal has omitted to sign, reasons for the same must be given. Once the award has been signed, the tribunal becomes functus officio. (no further official authority). (ii) The arbitral award shall state the reasons for the award unless the parties have dispensed with the need to give reasons, or the award is an arbitral award on agreed terms as per Section 30. (iii) The arbitral award shall state its date and the place of arbitration as determined under Section 20. (iv) A signed copy of the arbitral award shall be delivered to each party to the arbitration agreement in accordance with the NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education NOTE A judgement or final decision of an arbitrator on matters referred to him is called the ‘arbitral award’ or ‘award’. The arbitrator’s authority ceases as soon as the award is made. Business Law requirement of Section 31(5) [Union of India vs Tecco TrichyEngineers and Contractors (2005)]. (v) The arbitral tribunal may, at any time during the arbitral proceedings, make an interim arbitral award on any matter subject to the making of a final arbitral award. (vi) Unless otherwise agreed by the parties, an arbitral award may provide for paying interest on the amount payable under the arbitral reference. S (vii) Unless otherwise agreed by the parties, the tribunal shall fix the costs of arbitration which means fees and expenses of arbitrators and witnesses, administration fees of the supervising institution and other expenses connected with arbitral proceedings. It shall specify the party entitled to costs, the party who shall pay the costs, the amount of costs or method of determining that amount and the manner in which the costs shall be paid. M IM Additional Award: The tribunal may make an additional award either on the basis of the agreement between the parties or on the request of a party within 30 days of the receipt of the copy of the award provided a copy of the notice has been given to the other party. The additional award shall be made within 60 days of the receipt of request, provided that the members of the arbitral tribunal consider it necessary and in the interest of the parties. The purpose of additional award is to include an award that was made in the arbitral proceedings but omitted from the arbitral award. Correction of the Award N 220 The parties may request the tribunal to correct clerical or computation errors in the award within 30 days of the receipt of the award by them. Finality and Enforcement of the Award Under Section 35 of the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, an arbitral award shall be final and binding upon the parties. The arbitral award shall be endorsed under the Civil Procedure Code, 1908, in the same manner as if it is a decree of a court of law. GROUNDS FOR SETTING ASIDE AN ARBITRAL AWARD (SECTION 34) Section 34 provides for the basis on which an arbitral award may be set aside by a court. For setting aside an award, the aggrieved who is a party to the arbitration agreement or its legal representative shall make an application under Section 34 stating the grounds of challenge. Section 34 in Part I of the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education LAWS RELATED TO ENFORCEMENT AND REDRESSAL MECHANISM IN BUSINESS 221 has specified the following grounds on which the court may set aside an arbitral award rendered in India: 1.Incapacity of Parties [Section 34(2) (a) (i)]: An arbitral award is not binding and may be set aside if it has been made against a party that is incapable looking after its interests such as a minor or a person of unsound mind or it does not have a guardian or another person to represent its interests. Therefore, it is essential to get a guardian appointed in terms of Section 9 of the Arbitration and Conciliation Act in respect of minors and persons of unsound mind for the purpose of arbitral proceedings. On failure to do so, the award given against the incompetent party shall be liable to be set aside. IM S 2.Invalidity of Arbitration Agreement [Section 34(2) (a) (ii)]: The validity of an arbitral agreement may be challenged on the same grounds on which the validity of a contract may be challenged [State of U.P. v. Allied Constructions]. The validity of the arbitral agreement shall be examined by reference to the law to which the parties are subjected it and is in force. 3. Failure to Give Notice to Other Party [Section 34(2) (a) (iii)]: An arbitral award is liable to be set aside if the other party has not been given proper notice of the following: of appointment of an arbitrator M the arbitral proceedings the other party was for some reasons unable to present his case N If a party is prevented from appearing and presenting its case before the tribunal, the award will be liable to be set aside as the deprivation of a party from an opportunity of being heard negates the principles of natural justice [Vijay Kumar vs. Bathinda Central Co-operative Bankand Ors [2013] ]. 4. Award Beyond Scope of Reference [Section 34(2) (a) (iv)]: An arbitral award relating to matters which were beyond the scope of reference made to Arbitrator or were not contemplated by the reference, or did not fall within the terms of the reference shall be liable to be set aside. An arbitrator cannot go contrary to the terms of the contract. Where the terms of the contract are not clear or unambiguous, the arbitrator gets the power to interpret them. In State of Rajasthan v. Nav Bharat Construction Co.[ix], a majority of claims allowed were against the terms of the contract. 5.Illegality in Arbitral Procedure-Composition of Tribunal not in Accordance with Arbitration Agreement [Section 34(2) (a) (v)]: An arbitral award may be set aside on the following grounds: Procedural misconduct: Not following the agreed procedure for the conduct of arbitral proceedings, or in the absence of NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law such agreement as to procedure, the procedure prescribed by the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 was not followed. Examples of misconduct of arbitral proceedings include overlooking material evidence, conducting examination of witnesses in the absence of parties, closing the case hastily without giving the parties a fair and reasonable opportunity of placing their respective cases, etc. Misconduct of arbitrator: Where the arbitral tribunal takes up a matter which is clearly beyond the scope of its authority, or the arbitrator deliberately deviates from the terms of reference and arbitration agreement. S Example: Arbitrator’s misconduct involves accepting hospitality from either party, refusal to record evidence, erroneous breach of duty leading to miscarriage of justice, failure to perform essential duties, etc. IM CASE LAW State Trading Corp. vs. Molasses Co., the Bengal Chamber of Commerce [1981], M Facts: A permanent arbitral institution did not allow a company to be represented by its Law Officer, who was a full-time employee of the company. The court stated that it was not only the arbitrator’s misconduct of but also the misconduct of the arbitration proceedings. 6. Subject Matter of Dispute Not Being Arbitrable [34(2)(b)(i)]: The existence of a dispute is a condition precedent to arbitrators proceeding with arbitration. Only matters on which parties have differences and which affect their private rights can be referred to arbitration. Therefore, criminal matters, taxation issues, insolvency proceedings, corporate law matters, etc., cannot be decided by arbitration. N 222 7. Award Against Public Policy: Section 34(2)(b)(ii) provides that an application for setting aside an arbitral award can be made if the arbitral award is in conflict with the public policy of India. Appeals (Section 37) Section 37 of the Arbitration and Conciliation Act deals with appeals. Appeals shall lie from the following orders to the court authorised by law to hear appeals from the original decrees of the court which are as follows: Granting or refusing to set aside the award as mentioned above in Section 34 (2) and/or Section 34 (3) Granting or refusing to grant a measure in Section 9, wherein interim measures are to be provided by the court NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education LAWS RELATED TO ENFORCEMENT AND REDRESSAL MECHANISM IN BUSINESS 223 Appeals shall also lie with the court if the arbitral tribunal refuses to provide interim measures to the parties and where the arbitral tribunal is exceeding its jurisdiction or deciding the matters that are not in its scope. AMENDMENTS IN THE ARBITRATION AND CONCILIATION ACT The Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 was amended in 2015 and 2019. The Arbitration and Conciliation (Amendment) Act, 2015 (hereinafter referred to as the ‘Amendment Act, 2015’) was enacted to make the arbitration process cost-effective and speedy with minimum court intervention. Some of the key highlights of the Amendment Act, 2015, are as follows: S The Amendment Act, 2015, distinguishes between an international 2(2) of the Arbitration and Conciliation Act has been amended insofar as Section 9 (interim measures), Section 27 (taking of evidence), Section 37(1) (a), and 37(3) shall apply to international commercial arbitrations even if the seat of arbitration is outside India, unless there is an agreement to the contrary. In matters where the seat of arbitration is India, Part-I of the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 shall apply. Section N M Section IM commercial arbitration and domestic arbitration insofar as the definition of court is concerned. For domestic arbitration, the definition of Court is the same as defined in the 1996 Act. For international commercial arbitration, Court means the High Court of competent jurisdiction. 8, which deals with referring the parties of dispute to arbitration, was amended and it now mandates that any judicial authority may refer the parties to arbitration if a matter is brought before it. The exercise of power under Section 9 after constitution of the tribunal has been made more onerous and the same can be exercised only in circumstances where remedy under Section 17 (interim measures by arbitration tribunal) appears to be non-efficacious to the Court concerned. Section 11 relates to appointment of arbitrators. As per this Section, the Supreme Court or the High Court or a person designated by them can appoint arbitrators within 60 days from the date of service of notice on the opposite party. Section 12 has also been amended and it requires that the arbitrator make a declaration about his independence and impartiality. In this Amendment Act 2015, a fifth schedule has been inserted and it lists the grounds that may give rise to doubt to independence and impartiality of the arbitrator. The seventh schedule was added NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law and if the relationship between the arbitrator and any party falls in any of the categories mentioned in the seventh schedule, then the arbitrator will be ineligible. Section 14 was amended and it provides for the termination of the mandate of the arbitrator. Section 17 relates to interim measures by arbitral tribunal and as per the amended section, an arbitral tribunal shall have the same powers as are available to a court under Section 9. Also, interim orders passed by an arbitral tribunal will be enforceable in same manner as if it is an order of a court. 23 of the amended Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 empowers the respondent to submit a counter claim or plead a set-off. 24 of the amended Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 states that the arbitral tribunal should hold hearing for the presentation of evidence or oral arguments on day-to-day basis. Also, the tribunal should not grant any adjournments if there is no sufficient cause. In case of adjournments, the tribunal may also impose exemplary cost. IM Section S Section sections, namely Section 29A and 29B were inserted. Section 29A deals with the time limit for arbitral award and Section 29B deals with fast track procedure. These sections provide for time bound arbitrations. The arbitral tribunal must address the case within 12 months extendable by a maximum 6 months by the consent of the parties. M New N 224 Section 25 of the amended Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 empowers the tribunal to treat the respondent’s failure to communicate his statement of defence as the forfeiture of his right to file such statement of defence. However, the respondent’s failure to communicate cannot be treated as admission of the allegations made by the opposite party. Section 28 of the amended Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 requires that the tribunal should take into account the terms of contract and trade usages applicable to the transaction. Section 31 of the amended Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 provides that if the arbitrator does not give any award, then, the tribunal should levy future interest on the awarded amount at a rate which is 2% higher than the current rate of interest prevalent on the date of award. Section 34 of the amended Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 deals with limiting the gamut of public policy of India. The Amendment Act, 2015, states that an award that is passed in an NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education LAWS RELATED TO ENFORCEMENT AND REDRESSAL MECHANISM IN BUSINESS 225 international arbitration can only be set aside on the ground that it is against the public policy of India if, and only if, The award was affected by fraud or corruption. It is in contravention with the fundamental policy of Indian law. It is in conflict with most notions of morality and justice. Section 36 of the amended Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 states that an award will not be stayed automatically by only filing an application under Section 34. In fact, there must be a specific order from the Court for staying the execution of award. 1(ca) defined ‘arbitral institution’ as an institution designated by the Supreme Court or High Court. IM Section S In August, 2019, amendments to the Arbitration and Conciliation (Amendment) Act, 2019, (hereinafter referred to as the ‘Amendment Act, 2019’) received the assent of the President of India. Some of the key highlights of the Amendment Act, 2019, are as follows: Amendment of Section 11 relates to the appointment of arbitrators. of the concept of Arbitration Council of India which will be established by the Central Government and will be headquartered at Delhi. The N Introduction M This section empowers the Supreme Court and the High Courts to designate arbitral institutions for appointing arbitrators. These arbitration institutions are graded by the Arbitration Council of India. Arbitration Council of India will make grading of arbitral councils on the basis of infrastructure, quality, calibre of arbitrators, etc. Introduction of Section 23 (4) which provides that the statement of claim and defence must be completed within six months from the date of appointment of the arbitrator. The timeline for making award has been dealt with more comprehensively. Section 87 clarifies that Amendment Act, 2015, shall have a prospective effect, i.e., it shall apply to proceedings instituted after 23rd October, 2015. Section 34 states clearly that at the stage of challenging of award, the court will only look at the record of arbitration tribunal, no fresh recording of evidence at this stage. Addition of Schedule 8 that provides qualifications of an arbitrator. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law 5.3.6 Leading Case Studies WHEN CAN A NON-SIGNATORY TO ARBITRATION AGREEMENT MAY BE A PARTY TO ARBITRATION AGREEMENT M IM S This issue arose in Chloro Controls (India) Pvt Ltd. vs Severn Trent Water Purification Inc&Ors (2013) 1 SCC 641 where disputes arose between an Indian company and its foreign collaborator due to latter’s parent company operating through entities other than those covered by the agreement. The Indian party sought injunction to prevent breach by the respondents and for referring the parties to arbitration under Sections 45 of the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996. Respondents alleged that Shareholders Agreement (SHA) was the main document incorporating the arbitration clause to which the other two respondents were not signatories. Other agreements between parties did not have the arbitration clause. Appellant contended that the expression ‘person claiming through or under’ in Section 45 covers within its ambit persons who are in legal relationships via multiple and multi-party agreements, though they may not all be signatories to any one agreement or arbitration clause. Hence, even non-signatory parties can pray for and be referred to arbitration. The Section did not refer only to parties to agreement but ‘persons in general’ and that the Shareholders’ Agreement is a composite document. The following factors must be kept in mind while referring third parties to arbitration: (a) The parties must have a direct relationship with the party signatory to the arbitration agreement N 226 (b) Subject matter of the agreement must be common (c) Agreement between parties must form a composite transaction (d) The transaction must be of a composite nature (e) A transaction is considered to be composite if the performance of the principal agreement is not possible without the execution and performance of the supplementary or ancillary agreements A party to arbitration may not necessarily mean only the “signatory” to the arbitration agreement. Inappropriate contexts, it may mean a person (s) “claiming through or under” such signatory, for instance, successors-of-interest of such parties, alter-egos of such parties, composite contracts, inter-related contracts, joint ventures, etc. Section 2(1)(h) has defined the term “party” to mean “a party to an arbitration agreement.” This cannot be read restrictively to imply a mere “signatory” to an arbitration agreement. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education LAWS RELATED TO ENFORCEMENT AND REDRESSAL MECHANISM IN BUSINESS 227 ARBITRATION AGREEMENT MADE DURING PENDENCY OF APPEAL IN SUPREME COURT HELD TO BE VALID IM APPLICATION OF PRINCIPLE OF RES JUDICATA TO ARBITRATION S In P. Anand Gajapathi Raju vs. PVG Raju (2000) 4 SCC 539, during the pendency of the appeal before the Supreme Court, all the parties made a jointly signed application that included an arbitration agreement to refer their dispute to a retired SC Judge as the sole arbitrator. This agreement was challenged. It was held that the agreement need not already be in existence at the time when the dispute arose. The phrase ‘which is the subject of an arbitration agreement’ does not necessarily require the agreement to be already in existence before the filing of suit in the court. The phrase also includes an arbitration agreement brought into existence while the action is pending provided it meets the requirements of Section 7 of the Arbitration and Conciliation Act. Under Section 8, it is obligatory for the court to refer the parties to arbitration in terms of their agreement. N M In K.V. George vs. Secretary Water & Power, Trivandrum AIR1990SC53, a contractor filed successive arbitration proceedings to make different types of claims arising from the termination of contract. Held all contentions should have been raised in the first proceedings and subsequent petition will be res judicata (issues that were supposed to be raised in first petition but were not raised/omitted are considered to be adjudicated once and for all; can’t be raised in fresh petition); the award in second proceedings will be infructuous. self assessment Questions 3. In __________, since the settlement is done on mutually agreed terms, there emerges a win-win situation for the parties involved in the dispute. a. Negotiation b. Conflict c. Mediation d. Arbitration 4. Mediation can take place when: a. Direct negotiations have failed, leading to an increase in dispute b. Direct negotiations are complex and difficult c. Multiple parties are involved, leading to confusion d. All of the above NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 228 Business Law 5. Spiritualisation of justice dispensation is the process of uplifting society by educating its members to do justice to each other. a. True b. False 6. The settlement of disputes through arbitration is an alternative system of dispute resolution through the intervention of a _____________. 7. Write the full form of UNCITRAL. 8. Which is the first stage in an arbitration process? S 9. While appointing the arbitrators, the following points should be considered: a. The arbitrator can be of any nationality unless otherwise agreed by the parties IM b. The parties are free to finalise the procedure of selecting an arbitrator c. Both a. and b. d. None of these M 10. In conciliation, the third party who solves the dispute is called a __________. Activity N Meet the HR manager of an organisation in your vicinity and discuss with him/her the advantages of ADR techniques for resolving disputes. 5.4 ANTI-CORRUPTION LAWS ? DID YOU KNOW The Indian government has established Lokpal, an independent ombudsman to investigate and prosecute corruption cases of bribery, money laundering, benami transaction, etc. Corruption is delineated as the abuse of public office or entrusted power for personal gain. It involves bribery, extortions, fraud, theft, favouritism, conflicts of interests and taking undue advantages. There are various types of corruption, naming a few, administrative corruption, political corruption or public corruption. These are the social disease that cripples equal competition in the market which decreases the economic deficiency. Therefore, it is quintessential for the governments and the World Bank to update the anti-corruption legislations time-to-time. The anti-corruption laws are legal tools or compliances that help to curb corruption practices from society. The violation of anti-corruption laws can apply criminal penalties, civil penalties, disciplinary recourse and reputational repercussions. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education LAWS RELATED TO ENFORCEMENT AND REDRESSAL MECHANISM IN BUSINESS 229 5.4.1 ANTI-CORRUPTION LAWS IN INDIA IM S After independence of India, the Indian government has been making consistent efforts to fight against the problem of corruption. The administration system of India is not free from corruption which is impeding the growth and development of the nation because of the misallocation of resources. Therefore, it became quintessential for the Indian government to establish legislations against corruption and it came up with a few acts such as Prevention of Corruption Act, 1988, The Benami Transactions (Prohibition) Act, 1988, and The Prevention of Money Laundering Act, 2002, to deal with corruption. Initially, the original regulation concerned with bribery, extortion, theft, fraud, etc., was the Indian Penal Code, 1860, where public servants are penalised for corruption. It was felt that a separate legislation was required to deal specifically with offences of bribery and corruption, with their own procedures and authorities. In 1988 came the ‘Prevention of Corruption Act, 1988’ (further referred to as the ‘PC Act’) which is considered as the primary law to fight against corruption. However, regular amendments have been made in this Act. The last amendment was made in 2018. Prevention M As per the Corruption Perceptions Index, 2018, India has attained 78th position out of 180 countries. The Indian government has started taking strong steps on corruption issues by introducing and amending several anti-corruption laws. The following are the three crucial acts that play a pivotal role in dealing with corruption: of Corruption Act, 1988 Benami Transactions (Prohibition) Act, 1988 The Prevention of Money Laundering Act, 2002 N The PC ACT, 1988 AS AMENDED BY THE (AMENDMENT) ACT, 2018 The PC Act, 1988 came into existence to deal with the corruption specifically in government departments. It offers the provision of prosecution and punishment for public servants who are involved in corrupt practices such as bribery. The PC Act was first set up in 1988. The amendment in the Act is done to review anti-bribery and anti-corruption and the provisions provided in the Act ensure more transparency and accountability in the government or public servants working. Under the Prevention of Corruption (Amendment) Act, 2018, (hereinafter referred to as the ‘Amendment Act 2018’), the ‘public servant’ comprised employees of universities, office bearers of cooperative societies attaining financial help from the government and public service commission and banks and they all are liable to their respective legal remunerations. In case, they take the gratification apart from their authorised remuneration in respect of official act, they become NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law liable to receive a minimum punishment of six months and maximum of five years and fine. These public servants are also charged or penalised if in case they influence the public through illegal means or for exercising their influence. In case, a public servant accepts a valuable thing or undue advantage without paying for it or paying the partial amount from a person with whom he is involved in a business transaction in his official capacity, he will be liable for a minimum punishment of six months to a maximum of five years or fine. In order to put a public servant on trial, prior sanction from Central or State government is necessary. As per Section 2(c) of the PC Act, a public servant is defined as: S (i) Any person in the service or pay of’ the Government or remunerated by the Government by fees or commission for the performance of any public duty. (ii) Any person in the service or pay of a local authority. IM (iii) Any person in the service or pay of a corporation established by or under a Central, Provincial or State Act, or an authority or a body owned or controlled or aided by the Government or a Government company as defined in section 2(45) of the Companies Act, 2013. M (iv) Any Judge, including any person empowered by law to discharge, whether by himself or as a member of any body of persons, any adjudicatory functions. (v) Any person authorised by a court of justice to perform any duty, in connection with, including a liquidator, receiver or commissioner appointed by such court. N 230 (vi) Any arbitrator or other person to whom any cause or matter has been referred for decision or report by a court of justice or by a competent public authority. (vii) Any person who holds an office by virtue of which he is empowered to prepare, publish, maintain or revise an electoral roll or to conduct an election of part of an election. (viii) Any person who holds an officer by virtue of which be is authorised or required to perform any public duty. (ix) Any person who is the president, secretary or other office-bearer of a registered co-operative society engaged in agriculture, industry, trade or banking, receiving or having received any financial aid front the Central Government or State Government or from any corporation established by or under a Central, Provincial or State Act, or any authority or body owned or controlled or aided by the Government or a Government company as defined in Section 2(45) of the Companies Act, 2013; (x) Any person who is a chairman, member or employee of any Service Commission or Board, by whatever name called, or a member of NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education LAWS RELATED TO ENFORCEMENT AND REDRESSAL MECHANISM IN BUSINESS 231 any selection committee appointed by such Commission or Board for the conduct of any examination or making any selection on behalf of such Commission or Board. (xi) Any person who is a Vice-Chancellor or member of any governing body, professor, reader, lecturer or any other teacher or employee, by whatever (resignation called, of any university and any person whose services have been availed of by a University or any other public authority in connection with holding or conducting examinations; S (xii) Any person who is an office-bearer or an employee of an educational, scientific, social, cultural or other institution, in whatever manner established, receiving or having received any financial assistance from the Central Government or any State Government or local or other public authority IM A public servant is also penalised if he gets involved in criminal misconduct. As per section 13 of this PC Act, 1988, the criminal misconduct by a public servant is stated as follows: A public servant is said to commit the offence of criminal misconduct in following cases: M (a) If he habitually accepts or obtains or agrees to accept or attempts to obtain from any person for himself or for any other person any gratification other than legal remuneration as a motive or reward such as is mentioned in Section 7 N (b) If he habitually accepts or obtains or agrees to accept or attempts to obtain for himself or for any other person, any valuable thing without consideration or for a consideration which he knows to be inadequate from any person whom he knows to have been, or to be, or to be likely to the concerned in any proceeding or business transacted or about to be transacted by him or having any connection with the official functions of himself or of any public servant to whom he is subordinate, or from any, person whom he knows to be interests in or related to the person so concerned (c) If he dishonestly or fraudulently misappropriates or otherwise converts for his own use any property entrusted to him or under his control as a public servant or allows any other person so to do; or (d) If he, (i) By corrupt or illegal means, obtains for himself or for any other person any valuable thing or pecuniary advantage (ii) By abusing his position as a public servant, obtains for himself or for any other person any valuable thing or pecuniary advantage (iii) While holding office as a public servant, obtains for any person any valuable thing or pecuniary advantage without any public interest NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law (e) If he or any person on his behalf, is in possession or has, at any time during the period of his office, been in possession for which the public servant cannot satisfactorily account, of pecuniary resources or property disproportionate to his known sources of income. THE BENAMI TRANSACTIONS (PROHIBITION) ACT, 1988 IM S To understand this law, one needs to know the actual meaning of ‘benami transactions’. It involves the financial transactions made for the purchase of property in the false name of another individual who does not pay for the property. An exception in this case is the property purchased in the name of wife or unmarried daughter’s name. Under ‘The Benami Transaction Act, 1988’(hereinafter referred to the ‘Benami Act’), benami transactions are prohibited and whosoever enters into such transactions becomes liable to gain a punishment of imprisonment of upto three years or a fine and the property that is considered as benami is acquired by a prescribed authority in return of no money. It helps in tracing black money, illegal financial transaction and safeguarding the adjudicating authority. The Act states that: (1) No person shall enter into any benami transaction. M (2) It shall apply to the purchase of property by any person in the name of his wife or unmarried daughter and it shall be presumed, unless the contrary is proved, that the said property had been purchased for the benefit of the wife or the unmarried daughter. (3) Whoever enters into any benami transaction shall be punishable with imprisonment for a term which may extend to three years or with fine or with both. N 232 (4) Notwithstanding anything contained in the Code of Criminal Procedure, 1973, an offence under this section shall be non-cognizable and bailable THE PREVENTION OF MONEY LAUNDERING ACT, 2002 Money laundering is an offence or an illegal process of disguising the origins of money obtained by means of complex sequence of bank transfers, it may also include money transfers through foreign banks. It is conducted to convert money obtained through illegal sources into legitimate money. It imposes a threat on the Indian financial system since money laundering fosters high profile embezzlement and financial crimes. Financial institutions are making consistent efforts to detect and prevent money laundering. The Prevention of Money Laundering Act, 2002, NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education LAWS RELATED TO ENFORCEMENT AND REDRESSAL MECHANISM IN BUSINESS 233 IM S (hereinafter referred to as the ‘Money Laundering Act’) is the comprehensive legislation that was enacted to prevent money laundering. It provides a provision for the confiscation of property acquired from money laundering. It came into force from 1st July, 2005 and was further amended by the Prevention of Money Laundering (Amendment) Act, 2012 w.e.f. 15-02-2013. An Act is considered as an offence of money laundering when a person is a party to a process concerned with the proceeds of crime and projects such as proceeds of untainted property. As per the Section 2(1) (u) of the Prevention of Money Laundering Act, 2002 Act, ‘Proceeds of crime’ means any property derived or obtained, directly or indirectly, by any person as a result of criminal activity relating to a scheduled offence or the value of any such property. The ‘Proceeds of crime’ is the property attained by a person or party as a result of criminal activity related to certain offences that are mentioned in the schedule of the Prevention of Money Laundering Act, 2002. The penalty and punishment under this Act mentioned for the offence of money laundering is a fine of up to ` 5 lakh or imprisonment of three to seven years. The Central government appoints the adjudicating authority that decides whether any of the property attached or seized involved in money laundering. M 5.4.2 DIFFERENCE BETWEEN the US ANTI-CORRUPTION LAWS AND INDIAN ANTI-CORRUPTION LAWS N The internationally accepted definition of corruption is the abuse of entrusted power or public offices for private gain. The US and India both ascribe to the same definition, in form. The US has anti-corruption legislation known as the Foreign Corruption Practices Act (FCPA) which involves two provisions, the first one prohibits bribery of foreign public officials and the second one says that publically traded companies need to maintain their book of accounts to ensure financial controls. The FCPA covers both criminal and civil proceedings and imposes fines, disgorgements, forfeitures and other sanctions on corrupt practices that are collected by the US government. The FCPA does not involve coverage of private-level bribery. However, some other US legislations cover such practices. The FCPA says the person involved in offering the bribe with a ‘corrupt’ intent is the real culprit and it only covers active bribery, which means it penalises the person who offers bribe. Under the FCPA, the culprit is penalised up to $250,000 per violation or he may be given five years of imprisonment. Also, under the FCPA, a company is held liable to pay a fine up to USD $2,000,000 per violation. However, under the PC Act, a public servant is punished for accepting bribes or any other undue advantages and criminal misconduct. For instance, X gives Y, a public servant, ` 1,00,000 in return for Y to give fast approval for the X’s construction project. Here, Y is held liable for this corruption practice. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education ? DID YOU KNOW In 2014, the Parliament of India passed The Whistleblower Protection Act. However, it has still not come into effect. This law tried to establish a mechanism to gather complaints relating to corruption or wilful misuse of power by public servants and to inquire into those complaints. Business Law 5.4.3 Leading Cases CHANDA KOCHHAR AND ICICI CASE (2019) IM S Chanda Kochhar, the former ICICI Bank MD was alleged for “dishonestly sanctioning loans to the Videocon Group” under CBI FIR as she received illegal gratification from her husband, Deepak Kocchar who was the Videocon MD. Since, by sanctioning a term loan of ` 300 crore to Videocon International Electronics Ltd., she misused her official position, various charges were leveled up on her for criminal conspiracy and cheating. The FIR against her says On August 26, 2009, a rupee term loan of Rs 300 crore was sanctioned to Videocon International Electronics Ltd (VIEL) in contravention of rules and policy by the sanctioning committee… Kochhar was one of the members of the sanctioning committee, who in criminal conspiracy… dishonestly by abusing her official position sanctioned this loan in favour of VIEL, She violated the bank’s code of conduct. ICICI bank also released a statement for this case stating “Ms Chanda Kochhar was in violation of the ICICI Bank Code of Conduct, its framework for dealing with conflict of interest and fiduciary duties, and in terms of applicable Indian laws, rules and regulations” SIEMENS CASE (2008) M Siemens is a German engineering group that dealt with a long-running corruption and bribery scandal. The company was penalised worth �395m (£354m) to settle a case for securing huge public works contracts such as a nationwide cell phone network in Bangladesh, a national identity card project in Argentina around the world from bribes and slush funds. The company was held guilty in the Federal court in Washington because of violating the 1977 law that bans the corrupt practices in foreign business dealings. According to Joseph Persichini Jr., the head of the Washington office of the Federal Bureau of Investigation, They were standard operating procedures for corporate executives who viewed bribery as a business strategy. N 234 self assessment Questions 11. _____________ is an offence or an illegal process of disguising the origins of money obtained by means of complex sequence of bank transfers or money transfers through foreign banks. 12. A public servant is also penalised if he gets involved in criminal misconduct. a. True b. False 13. As per the ‘Corruption Perceptions Index, 2018, India has attained __________ position out of 180 countries. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education LAWS RELATED TO ENFORCEMENT AND REDRESSAL MECHANISM IN BUSINESS 235 Activity Search the Internet and find out the ‘anti-corruption laws’ of other nations and mark the distinction among them. 5.5 Summary S Alternative dispute resolution, also called ‘ADR’, is a generic term that refers to a wide range of methods of dispute resolution, which provide an alternative to the adversarial court-based public litigation. is neutral to the law, language and institutional culture of the parties that helps in maintaining equality among parties which prevents some parties from getting the home-court advantage when compared to the court-based litigation in respective countries. S ADR are various types of alternate dispute resolution available other than the court proceedings such as negotiations, arbitration, and mediations. IM There Negotiation is an informal technique of resolving a dispute, where the parties in dispute directly try to communicate with each other and reach a conclusion. is a voluntary, non-binding, confidential and structured process wherein a neutral third party possessing special communication, negotiation, social and interactive skills helps the parties arrive at a mutual settlement. Adalat is a promising, participative ADR method. Lok Adalat is considered as people’s court, which provides easy access to justice with mutual consent. The N Lok M Mediation Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 is divided into 86 sections and 4 chapters and extends to the whole of India. It is based on the Model Law on arbitration suggested by UNCITRAL. The first stage in the arbitration is the formulation of the arbitration agreement whereby the parties agree to submit their present or future differences to arbitration. The decision of the Arbitral Tribunal is termed as ‘Arbitral Award’. It is analogous to a court judgment although it is made by a mutually agreed private adjudicator. Conciliation refers to a process of settling disputes through the good offices of a third party which attempts to minimise the points of conflict between the parties to enable them to reconcile. Anti-corruption laws are legal tools or compliances that help to curb the corruption practices from society. The violation of anti- NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law corruption laws can apply criminal penalties, civil penalties, disciplinary recourse and reputational repercussions. Indian legislations involve Prevention of Corruption (Amendment) Act, 2018, The Benami Transactions (Prohibition) Act, 1988, and The Prevention of Money Laundering Act, 2002, to deal with corruption. key words Arbitration: A method of dispute resolution between two parties by an impartial third party outside courts Dispute: A state of argument or conflict between two or more parties The amount paid as compensation to the party initiating the process of arbitration Litigation: The process of settling disputes through legal IM procedures S Redressal: Confidentiality: A set of rules to ensure the privacy of the disputing parties Seized: The legal possession or having an ownership of property M or an estate ? 5.6 Descriptive Questions 1. Discuss the advantages of the alternative dispute resolution method. N 236 2. Define negotiation. List its characteristics. 3. Describe the fundamental principles of mediation. 4. Write a short note on Lok Adalats in India. 5. List some important aspects of an arbitration agreement. 6. Explain various anti-corruption laws of India 5.7 Answers and Hints ANSWERS FOR SELF ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS Topic Alternative Dispute Resolution Types of Alternate Dispute Resolution Q. No. Answer 1. d. 2. a. True 3. c. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education All of these Mediation LAWS RELATED TO ENFORCEMENT AND REDRESSAL MECHANISM IN BUSINESS 237 Answer 4. d. All of the above 5. b. False 6. Neutral third party 7. United Nation Commission on International Trade Law 8. Formulation of the arbitration Agreement 9. c. 10. Conciliator 11. Money laundering 12. a. 13. 78th Both a. and b. True IM Anti-Corruption Laws Q. No. S Topic HINTS FOR DESCRIPTIVE QUESTIONS M 1. Today, ADR techniques are considered as one of the most acceptable dispute resolution techniques used worldwide, either alongside or combined with the legal systems. Refer to Section 5.2.3 Advantages of Alternative Dispute Resolution N 2. Negotiation is an informal technique of resolving a dispute, where the parties in dispute directly try to communicate with each other and reach a conclusion. Refer to Section 5.3.1 Negotiation 3. Mediation is a voluntary, non-binding, confidential, and structured process wherein a neutral third party possessing special communication, negotiation, social and interactive skills help the parties arrive at a mutual settlement. Refer to Section 5.3.2 Mediation 4. In order to provide timely justice, Lok Adalats are set up to promote justice by providing timely and cost-effective legal aid on the basis of principles of equity, justice and fair play. Refer to Section 5.3.4 Lok Adalats 5. The Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 is divided into 86 sections and 4 chapters, and extends to the whole of India. Refer to Section 5.3.5 Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 6. Indian government enforced ‘The Prevention of Corruption Act’ in 1988 which is considered as the primary law to fight against corruption. However, time to time amendments have been made in this Act. The last amendment was made in 2018. Refer to Section 5.4 Anti-Corruption Laws NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law 5.8 Suggested Readings & References Suggested Readings Clarkson, K., Miller, R., Jentz, G., & Cross, F. (2014). Business law: Text and cases (11th ed.). Cengage Learning. Keenan, D., & Riches, S. (2007). Business law. Harlow: Pearson Longman. E-REFERENCES Retrieved 27 April 2020, from http://www.nishithdesai.com/ fileadmin/user_upload/pdfs/Research_Papers/Overview-of-AntiCorruption-Laws-in-India-Web1.pdf ADR S (2020). Types & Benefits - alternative_dispute_resolution. (2020). Retrieved 27 April 2020, from https://www.courts.ca.gov/3074.htm of Alternative Dispute Resolution (ADR). (2020). Retrieved 27 April 2020, from https://www.legalmatch.com/law-library/ article/types-of-alternative-dispute-resolution-adr.html M IM Types N 238 NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education C h 6 a pt e r CONSUMER PROTECTION ACT, 2019 IM Introduction Consumer Protection Act, 2019 6.2.1 Objective of the Act 6.2.2 Scope of the Act Important Definitions 6.2.3 6.2.4 Important Provisions and Features of the Consumer Protection Act, 2019 6.2.5 Difference between Consumer Protection Act, 1986 and Consumer Protection Act, 2019 Self Assessment Questions Activity 6.3 Rights of a Consumer Self Assessment Questions Activity 6.4 Consumer Protection Councils (CPCs) 6.4.1 Functions of CPCs 6.4.2 Central Consumer Protection Council (CCPC) 6.4.3 State Consumer Protection Councils (SCPCs) District Consumer Protection Councils (DCPCs) 6.4.4 Self Assessment Questions Activity Consumer Disputes Redressal 6.5 6.5.1 Consumer Disputes Redressal Machinery Procedure of Dispute Resolution 6.5.2 Procedure for Filing a Complaint before the Consumer Protection Body 6.5.3 6.5.4 Nature and Scope of Remedies 6.5.5 Appeals and Limitations Self Assessment Questions Activity N M 6.1 6.2 S Contents NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law CONTENTS 6.6 M IM S 6.7 6.8 6.9 6.10 Comparison of Consumer Law in Other Countries Self Assessment Questions Activity Summary Descriptive Questions Answers and Hints Suggested Readings & References N 240 NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education CONSUMER PROTECTION ACT, 2019 241 Introductory Caselet CONSUMER RIGHTS VIOLATION S In 2015, Nestle’s Maggi Noodles had to face a ban on its production and distribution. It was due to high levels of Mono Sodium Glutamate (MSG) found in different samples of Maggi all across the country. From this case, an interesting fact could be observed. The alleged violation of the consumer’s right to safety under the Consumer Protection Act, 1986, (hereinafter referred to as ‘Consumer Protection Act, 1986’) was pointed out by a food inspector of the Indian Food Regulator FSSAI and not by any consumer. The food regulator stated that such high amounts of MSG can be dangerous to consumers’ health and safety. This case also demonstrated that consumers are highly dependent upon the regulator for ensuring and protecting consumers’ rights. IM In India, consumers are mostly unaware of their rights and they think of bad products and services as unavoidable. It has been noted that even if some consumers file consumer complaints and pursue legal battles, they often lose interest in the case because litigation takes a lot of time. Sometimes, consumers also refrain from filing complaints because of a lack of evidence. N M The infamous case of Maggi and various other cases were followed by the enactment of the new Consumer Protection Act, 2019. Under this Act, the central government will establish a Central Consumer Protection Authority (CCPA) to specifically intervene in matters related to unfair trade practices and misleading advertisements. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Case Objective This caselet aims to highlight the consumer rights violation by Nestle Maggi. Business Law Learning objectives After studying this chapter, you will be able to: Explain the objectives and scope of the Consumer Protection Act, 2019 Define certain important terms under the Consumer Protection Act, 2019 Outline the important provisions and features of the Consumer Protection Act, 2019 Discuss the significance of intermediaries under the Consumer Protection Act, 2019 Describe how e-commerce has been covered under the Consumer Protection Act, 2019 Explain various product liability provisions under the Consumer Protection Act, 2019 Outline the revised amounts of pecuniary jurisdiction Explain how mediation and alternate dispute redressal is used to dispose of consumer complaints under the Consumer Protection Act, 2019 Discuss new provisions such as e-filing of complaints Explain the newly created regulator Central Consumer Protection Authority Discuss the various provisions related to false or misleading advertisements, deletion of healthcare from the definition of services, mediation and penalties Explain various rights of a consumer as per the Consumer Protection Act, 2019 Describe the role and functions of the Consumer Protection Councils (CPCs) Discuss how the consumer disputes redressal machinery works under the Consumer Protection Act, 2019 Compare consumer laws of various countries >> >> >> >> >> IM >> >> S >> M >> >> >> N 242 >> >> >> >> 6.1 Introduction Quick Revision In the previous chapter, you studied various laws related to enforcement and redressal mechanism in the business including dispute resolution, alternate dispute resolution and anti-corruption laws as applicable in India. In any country, it is the duty of the government to protect all consumers from unfair and restrictive trade practices of organisations, sellers and service providers. The parliament of India enacted the Consumer Protection Act in 1986 for protecting the consumer’s interest in India. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education CONSUMER PROTECTION ACT, 2019 243 The Consumer Protection Act, 1986 is replaced by the Consumer Protection Act, 2019. This is considered as the ‘Magna Carta’ (royal charter of rights) in the context of consumer protection. The ‘Magna Carta’ keeps a check on the following: unfair trade practices defects in goods deficiencies in services as far as India is concerned S The Consumer Protection Act, 2019 has been enacted for protecting the interests of consumers by establishing various provisions, consumer councils, commissions and a central authority for settling disputes of consumers. The Consumer Protection Act, 2019 formed the Central Consumer Protection Authority (CCPA) which is responsible for promoting, protecting and enforcing the rights of consumers. M IM In this chapter, you will study the Consumer Protection Act, 2019, its objective, scope and provisions. The chapter explains various provisions and definitions such as unfair trade practices, product liability, e-filing facility, etc. All the rights of consumers as per this Act have also been discussed. The role of consumer protection councils as advisory bodies and the consumer disputes redressal mechanism under the law is also described. Towards the end, the state of consumer laws across the globe has been discussed briefly. 6.2 CONSUMER PROTECTION ACT, 2019 N We are living in an increasingly digital age that is characterised by increased trade activities, e-commerce, digital branding and increased customer expectations. The use of digital means has offered various benefits such as ease of access, a large variety of choices, convenient payment mechanisms, increased choice of payment options, improved service experience, etc. Along with all these conveniences, there has been a more than a proportionate increase in the challenges related to consumer protection. To meet these challenges faced by consumers, the Indian Government enacted the Consumer Protection Act, 2019. The objective of this Act is to provide timely and effective administration and settlement of consumer disputes. The Consumer Protection Act, 2019 is the latest and updated law that has replaced its predecessor Consumer Protection Act, 1986 which was a law that was over three decades old. The Consumer Protection Act, 2019 received the assent of the President of India in August 2019 and was published in the official gazette on 9th August 2019. The Consumer Protection Act, 2019 came into force on 20th July, 2020. It was a long-awaited Act because it intends to resolve a large number of consumer complaints that are pending in NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education NOTE The Consumer Protection Act, provided for three-tier consumer dispute redressal machinery at the national, state and district levels. Business Law various consumer courts of the country. It contains several provisions that can help in providing a speedy solution to consumer grievances. CASE LAW Karnataka Power Transmission Corporation (KPTC) vs. Ashok Iron Works Private Limited IM S Facts: Ashok Iron Works, a private company, used to obtain electricity from the Karnataka Power Transmission Corporation (KTPC) for iron production. Ashok Iron Works paid charges and got confirmation from KTPC for the supply of 1500 KVA energy in February 1991. KTPC did the actual supply after 10 months in November 1991. As a result, Ashok Iron Works had to incur losses. A complaint was filed at the Consumer Dispute Forum, Belgaum and later at the Karnataka High Court by the respondent Ashok Iron Works, under the Consumer Protection Act, 1986. KPTC raised legal argument: Complaint was not maintainable since the Consumer Protection Act, 1986, excludes commercial supply of goods. is not maintainable because the complainant is not a ‘person’ under Section 2(1)(m) of the Act, 1986. M Complaint The ruling of the Supreme Court in this case: Supreme N 244 Court cleared that the word “Includes is an inclusive definition”. Therefore, Ashok Iron Works Private Company was held to be a person. Supply is not sale or supply is not equivalent to a sale. Therefore, the electricity supply by the KPTC would be covered under Section 2(1)(o) being ‘service’ and in case the supply of electrical energy to a consumer is not provided in time as is agreed upon, then under Section (2)(1)(g), there may be a case for deficiency in service. Thus, the clause stating “supply” of goods for commercial purposes would not apply. Thus, the court allowed the complaint on the two grounds that the applicant – Ashok Iron Works Private Limited, can sue as a person, and that supply of electricity if found deficient can be a fit ground for claiming compensation. The Court sent the case back to District Forum for retrial on these grounds. Source: https://vakilsearch.com/advice/the-top-ten-consumer-court-cases-and-trials-in-india/ NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education CONSUMER PROTECTION ACT, 2019 245 6.2.1 OBJECTIVE OF THE ACT The main objective of the Consumer Protection Act, 2019 is to protect the rights of consumers and establish various authorities for timely and effective administration and settlement of all consumer disputes. Some of the other objectives of the Consumer Protection Act, 2019 are as follows: To provide a simple and effective consumer grievance redressal process To dispose of all the consumer grievance complaints in the least amount of time ensure effective disposing of all the cases pending in the consumer courts To S To conduct investigations into violations of consumer rights and institute complaints order the recall of unsafe goods and services IM To To order the discontinuance of unfair trade practices and misleading advertisements impose penalties on manufacturers/endorsers/publishers of misleading advertisements M To 6.2.2 SCOPE OF THE ACT N The Consumer Protection Act, 2019, extends to the whole of India. This Act contains 107 sections divided into 8 chapters. The Consumer Protection act, 2019 has included various new definitions for various terms such as advertisement, central authority, consumer rights, design, direct selling, director general, e-commerce, electronic service provider, misleading advertisement, product liability, product liability action, etc. In addition, the scope of this Consumer Protection Act, 2019 has also been widened by providing a wider definition to terms such as the complainant, consumer, deficiency, etc. 6.2.3 IMPORTANT DEFINITIONS As per Chapter I Preliminary of the Consumer Protection Act, 2019, under section 1 Short title, extent, commencement and application: This is known as the Consumer Protection Act, 2019. As otherwise expressly provided by the Central Government, by notification, this Act shall apply to all goods and services. Source: http://egazette.nic.in/ NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education ? DID YOU KNOW On 20th July 2020, the Consumer Protection Act, 2019, came into force. 246 Business Law Some of the important definitions that have been included under the Act are as follows: Advertisement: Any audio or visual publicity, representation, endorsement or pronouncement made by means of light, sound, smoke, gas, print, electronic media, internet or website and includes any notice, circular, label, wrapper, invoice or such other documents is an advertisement. Central authority: Under Section 10 of the Consumer Protection Act, 2019, the Central Authority refers to the Central Consumer Protection Authority (CCPA). Complainant: A Complainant may mean any of the following: consumer voluntary consumer association registered under any law for the time being in force S Any Central Government or any State Government The Central Consumer Protection Authority IM The One or more consumers, where there are numerous consumers having the same interest In the case of the death of a consumer, his legal heir or legal representative the case of a consumer being a minor, his parent or legal guardian M In N Consumer: NOTE The consumer purchases goods and services only for self-use. When a person purchases any goods or avails any service for a resale or commercial purpose, he/she is not considered a consumer. A consumer may be any of the following: Any person who buys any goods for a consideration whether paid or promised Any person who buys goods for a consideration that is partly paid and partly promised Any person who hires or avails of any service for a paid consideration or for a consideration that is partly paid and partly promised Any person who makes online purchases Consumer dispute: It is a dispute where the person against whom a complaint has been made, denies or disputes the allegations contained in the complaint. Defect: Any fault, imperfection or shortcoming in the quality, quantity, potency, purity or standard must be present in the good. Deficiency: Any fault, imperfection, shortcoming or inadequacy in the quality, nature and manner of performance of a good required by the law. In addition, any act of negligence or omission or commission by a person due to which a consumer experiences loss or injury or any act of deliberately withholding relevant information from a consumer by a seller is a deficiency. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education CONSUMER PROTECTION ACT, 2019 247 E-commerce: Buying and/or selling of goods or services including digital products over digital or electronic network. Electronic service provider: A person who provides technologies or processes to enable a product seller to engage in advertising or selling goods or services to a consumer and includes any online market place or online auction sites. Endorsement: Endorsement is described in relation to advertisements and refers to any message, verbal statement, demonstration or depiction of the name, signature, likeness or other identifiable personal characteristics of an individual or depiction of the name or seal of any institution or organisation, which makes the consumer to believe that it reflects the opinion, finding or experience of the person making such endorsement. Any kind of moveable property and food are considered to be goods. S Goods: Any harm that is caused illegally to a person’s body, mind or property is considered to be an injury. National IM Injury: Commission: The National Consumer Disputes Redressal Commission (NCDRC) can also be simply called the National Commission. Product: Any goods or substance or raw material present in either liability: In case of goods purchases, the sellers and product manufacturers have a responsibility to compensate the consumer for any harm caused to a consumer due to a defective product. Product N Product M gaseous, liquid, or solid state and that possesses an intrinsic value and may be delivered as a component or as a whole and is usually meant for trade or commerce. A product does not include human tissues, blood, blood products and organs. service provider: This is a person who provides any service in respect of any product. 6.2.4 IMPORTANT PROVISIONS AND FEATURES OF THE CONSUMER PROTECTION ACT, 2019 The present Consumer Protection Act, 2019 is an advancement over the previous Consumer Protection Act, 1986 and includes several new provisions and features. Some important features and provisions of this Act are as follows: Broadening the term consumer: According to the new definition of the term consumer, consumers are those persons who buy goods or avail services using offline as well as online mode or using means such as teleshopping or direct selling or Multi-Level Marketing (MLM). It means that consumers of multi-level marketing will now have a legal recourse in the case of fraud. It should be noted that NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law all sellers at each level of MLM can be exposed to liability and not just product manufacturers. Inclusion of e-commerce: As per the new Act, buying or selling of goods and services including digital services using digital or electronic means are also considered valid. This Act also states that consumers are also eligible for buying and selling using direct selling, e-commerce and electronic service providers. After the government officially notifies the Act, the central government may also prescribe certain rules relevant for e-commerce and direct selling. grounds for filing complaints: This Act contains seven grounds using which a consumer can file a complaint against a seller or manufacturer, where earlier there were six. The introduction of unfair contracts and the expansion of the definition of unfair trade practices are the chief additions. Now, the seven grounds are [Section 2(6)]: When any trader or service provider adopts any unfair contract or a unfair or restrictive trade practice IM i. S New ii. When the goods purchased by a consumer suffers from one or more defects M iii. When the services hired or availed or agreed to be hired or availed of by a consumer suffer from any deficiency N 248 iv. When a trader or a service provider has charged from the consumer a price that is more than the price that has been fixed as per law or the price that is printed over the goods or the price that is displayed by the trader in a price list or the price that is mutually agreed by both the parties. v. When a seller offers goods to the public that are hazardous to life and safety in contravention of standards relating to the safety of such goods or where a trader offers for sale such hazardous goods despite knowing that they are unsafe for consumption vi. When the services that are hazardous or potentially hazardous to life and public safety are offered by a person who provides any service despite knowing that it could be injurious to life and safety. vii. The consumer can make a claim for product liability action against the product manufacturer, product seller or product service provider. Introduction of product liability: A separate chapter has been inserted for product liability and it is now a new ground for filing a complaint under this Consumer Protection Act, 2019. Advertising claims: This Consumer Protection Act, 2019 has brought advertising claims under its ambit. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education CONSUMER PROTECTION ACT, 2019 249 Introduction of the CCPA: In accordance with Section 10(1) of the Consumer Protection Act, 2019, the Central Government has been empowered to establish a Central Consumer Protection Authority (CCPA) or the Central Authority. The primary work of the CCPA will be to regulate matters relating to the violation of rights of consumers, unfair trade practices and false or misleading advertisements that are prejudicial to the interests of the public and consumers and to promote, protect and enforce the rights of consumers as a class. Misleading advertisements: As per the Consumer Protection Act, 2019, a misleading advertisement related to a product or service may demonstrate any of the following characteristics: advertisement which falsely describes such a product or service or gives a false guarantee which can mislead the consumers with respect to the nature, substance, quantity or quality of such product or service. S Any advertisement that deliberately conceals important information. IM Any Any advertisement which conveys an express or implied representation made by the manufacturer or seller or service provider and constitutes an unfair trade practice. M Deletion of healthcare from the definition of services: Healthcare services have been removed from the list of services covered under this Act. It was removed after a lot of opposition from medical fraternity that this Act is highly likely to be misused against them. in the pecuniary jurisdiction of the commissions: As per this Act, the pecuniary jurisdictions of the district, state and national commission have been increased. N Increase INTERMEDIARIES Under the Act, e-commerce is considered similar to direct selling. All online platforms used for selling goods and services are governed in a manner similar to direct selling. All these platforms and organisations can be held liable for consumer rights violation. The platforms and the providers that have been included under the new Act include e-marketplaces, product service providers, electronic service providers, online auction sites and service aggregators, intermediaries and endorsers. The government has also drafted the Consumer Protection (e-commerce) Rules 2020. The objective of drafting these rules is to set the guiding principles for e-commerce in India to prevent fraud, unfair trade practices and to protect the rights and interests of consumers. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education NOTE Every e-commerce entity is required to give the following information on its platform, displayed to its users, namely: a. its legal name b. principal geographic address of its headquarters and all branches c. website name and details d. contact details like e-mail address, fax, landline and mobile numbers of customer care as well as of grievance officer Business Law E-COMMERCE All e-commerce transactions related to the purchase and sale of goods/ services have been included in the Consumer Protection Act, 2019. PRODUCT LIABILITY S In business laws, organisations and individuals usually follow the rule of Caveat Emptor, which translates to let the buyer beware. In general, it means that the ultimate responsibility of products and services lies on the buyer. However, now this rule is not applied anymore and the burden of ensuring the product or service appropriateness has been shifted to the seller. The new Act of 2019 provides for protecting the interests of consumers by creating a mechanism for the settlement of consumer disputes. It also contains provisions for product liability and misleading advertisements. To this end, the Act also provides for the establishment of CCPAs. IM Product liability means that in any commercial relationship, the responsibility and accountability of buyers and sellers with respect to the products and services has to be fixed. According to Section 82 of the Consumer Protection Act, 2019, a complainant can claim compensation for product liability under two circumstances – when the complainant has suffered harm due to: M i. defective product manufactured by a product manufacturer ii. the fault of some service/product service provider/seller Section 83 of the Consumer Protection Act, 2019 says that a complainant has the right to bring a product liability action against a product manufacturer or a product seller or a service provider if he/she has suffered harm due to a defective product or service. N 250 Section 84 lists the grounds for liability of a product manufacturer. which are as follows: The product has a manufacturing defect. The product has a defective design. The product is not as per the manufacturing specifications. The product is in non-conformance of the express warranty. The product does not contain adequate instructions regarding the proper and correct usage of the product so that no harm is caused as a result of incorrect or improper usage. In case of product liability actions, product manufacturers can be held liable even if they are able to prove that they did not act with negligence or with the intention to defraud in making the express warranty of a product. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education CONSUMER PROTECTION ACT, 2019 251 Section 85 holds a service provider liable in the following cases: The service provided by the service provider was faulty, imperfect, deficient, inadequate in terms of quality, nature or manner of performance. An act of omission or commission or negligence or conscious withholding of any information due to which harm was caused. The service provider does not issue adequate instructions or warnings to prevent any harm. Non-conformity with an express warranty or the terms and conditions of the contract. S As per Section 86, a product seller can be held liable in the following situations: the seller had exercised substantial control over the designing, testing, manufacturing, packaging or labelling of a product that caused harm When IM When the seller had altered or modified the product due to which harm was caused the seller has made an express warranty of a product independent of any express warranty made by a manufacturer and the harm is caused due to failure of such express warranty made by the product seller the product has been sold by the product seller and the identity of product manufacturer of such product is not known, or if the identity is known, the service of notice or process or warrant cannot be effected on him When N When M When the seller fails to exercise reasonable care in assembling, inspecting or maintaining the product such as failing to convey the warnings or instructions of the product manufacturer with respect to the dangers involved, proper usage of the product and the harm was caused due to such failure. Section 87 lays down cases under which liability action can be exempted. A product liability action cannot be brought: against the product seller if the product was misused, altered, or modified at the time of harm. against the product manufacturer on the basis of failure to provide adequate warnings or instructions if the product was purchased by an employer for using it at the workplace and the product manufacturer had provided warnings or instructions to such employer. against the product manufacturer on the basis of failure to provide adequate warnings or instructions if the product was sold as a component or material to be used in another product NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law and the manufacturer had provided all the necessary warnings or instructions to the buyer but the harm was caused due to the end product in which the component or material was used. against the product manufacturer on the basis of failure to provide adequate warnings or instructions if the product was legally meant to be used or dispensed under the supervision of an expert(s). against the product manufacturer on the basis of failure to provide adequate warnings or instructions if the complainant was under the influence of alcohol or any other prescription drug at the time of using the product and such medicine was not prescribed by any medical practitioner. the product manufacturer if the complainant suffers harm due to his own negligence and could not take precautions that are commonly known to users of such products. S against IM REVISION OF JURISDICTION AMOUNTS Under the Consumer Protection Act, 2019, the government will constitute multiple bodies for redressing consumer disputes. M At the base level, Consumer Protection Councils (CPCs) would be set up at three levels namely district, state and national level. These will basically serve as advisory councils and will provide advice to the Central Government for the promotion and protection of consumers’ rights under this Act at the national, state and district levels. After the CPCs, the second level of the consumer redressal is the Consumer Disputes Redressal Commissions (CDRCs) that will be set up at three levels. This is also called the three-tier Consumer Dispute Redressal Commission. All the consumer dispute complaints are submitted in these Commissions (Courts). The complaints may be sent to the district level, state level or national commission based on the pecuniary jurisdiction. N 252 Pecuniary jurisdiction is the ability of a court to hear a case depending upon the amount of money or the value of money involved in the case. The pecuniary jurisdiction of the commissions at three levels is shown in Table 6.1: Table 6.1: Pecuniary Jurisdiction of the Commissions at Three Levels Level of Commission Pecuniary Jurisdiction Amount District Commissions District commissions can entertain complaints where the value of goods or services does not exceed ` 1crore. State Commissions State commissions can entertain complaints where the value of goods or services falls in the range of ` 1 crore and ` 10 crores. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education CONSUMER PROTECTION ACT, 2019 253 Level of Commission Pecuniary Jurisdiction Amount National Commission National commission can entertain complaints where the value of goods or services is above ` 10 crores PROVISION OF ADR TO DISPOSE CONSUMER COMPLAINTS The Consumer Protection Act, 1986, did not have a provision for alternate dispute resolution. However, in accordance with Section 74 of the new Consumer Protection Act, 2019, the State Government will establish mediation cells to be attached to all the district and state commissions of that state. In addition, the Central Government will establish a consumer mediation cell to be attached to the National Commission. IM E-FILING OF COMPLAINTS S If the parties to a dispute that is pending with a commission agree to settle their disputes using mediation, the commission can refer the matter to mediation. The Consumer Protection Act, 2019 allows for the filing of complaints using electronic or online means, also called e-filing. A consumer consumer who alleges that there has been a use of unfair trade practice with respect to such goods or service. Any N A M Section 35 of the Act deals with the manner in which the complaint can be made. This section states that a complaint may be filed with a district commission by any of the following: recognised consumer association and in such case the aggrieved consumer may or may not be a member of such association. One or more consumers can file a complaint as a class after taking permission of the District Commission if all of them have a similar interest and the complaint is made for the benefit of all consumers. The Central Government, the Central Authority or the State Government. These complaints can also be filed electronically. CENTRAL CONSUMER PROTECTION AUTHORITY AS THE NEW REGULATOR One of the most significant features of the Act of 2019 is that it calls for the setting up of a regulatory body known as the Central Consumer Protection Authority (CCPA). This regulator is to be set-up because, under the previous version of the Act, there was no provision for a central regulator to look after the consumer rights issues. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education NOTE It must be remembered that every complaint must be filed along with a prescribed fee and the fee will also be payable in an electronic form. 254 Business Law The primary objective of setting up the CCPA is to regulate the matters related to the violation of consumers’ rights and take suitable actions to prevent unfair trade practices. Apart from this, some other objectives of the CCPA are as follows: Regulating the unfair trade practices Regulating false or misleading advertisements Promoting, protecting and enforcing the rights of consumers as a class Ensuring that no publication of any advertisement which is false or misleading Initiating an enquiry in case of consumer’s rights violations and/or unfair trade practices in the following three cases: CCPA has received a complaint. CCPA has received directions from the central government. IM The S The The CCPA may also take suo moto cognisance of the consumer rights violations in any form. Undertaking an action against the accused, if proved guilty. M The CCPA is headed by a Chief Commissioner and other commissioners that are appointed by the Central Government. The headquarters of the CCPA would be set up at a place within the National Capital Region (NCR) and the regional offices of CCPA will be established at multiple places across India as decided by the Central Government. N The Central Authority has the authority to engage any number of experts and professionals who have knowledge and expertise in matters related to consumer rights and welfare, consumer policy, law, medicine, food safety, health, engineering, product safety, commerce, economics, public affairs or administration as it deems fit to help the CCPA in discharging its functions. NOTE The Director-General may delegate all or some of his powers to the Additional Director-General or Director, Joint Director or Deputy Director or Assistant Director for conducting inquiries or investigations and these need to be submitted with CCPA in the written form. The CCPA is authorised to regulate its business transactions and also allocate its business among the Chief Commissioner and Commissioners as specified by regulations. The Chief Commissioner has the powers of general superintendence, direction and control for all administrative matters of the CCPA. The CCPA will also have an Investigation Wing that would be headed by a Director-General and would be responsible for conducting enquiry and investigation in matters that are referred to it by the CCPA. The Central Government has been empowered to appoint a Director-General and any number of Additional Director-General, Director, Joint Director, Deputy Director and Assistant Directors as it deems fit and these members would exercise their powers and discharge their NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education CONSUMER PROTECTION ACT, 2019 255 functions in accordance with the general control, supervision and direction of the Director-General. The District Collector of a district enjoys certain powers. If the District Collector receives a complaint referred by the CCPA or from any Commissioner of a regional office, then, he must inquire into the complaint falling in his jurisdiction regarding: Violation of rights of consumers as a class Consumer Unfair False rights violation trade practices or misleading advertisements S After conducting the enquiry, the District Collector has to submit his report to the CCPA or to the Commissioner of a regional office which is the same source through which the complaint was received. IM A complainant may file a complaint in written or electronic mode to the District Collector or the Commissioner of the regional office or to the CCPA in case of violation of consumer rights, unfair trade practices, misleading advertisements, etc., which are prejudicial to the interests of consumers as a class. The powers and functions of the CCPA are as follows: promoting and enforcing the rights of consumers as a Preventing the violation of consumers’ rights Preventing unfair trade practices class that no person engages himself in unfair trade practices N Ensuring M Protecting, Ensuring that no false or misleading advertisement is made of any goods or services which contravenes the provisions of this Act Ensuring that no person takes part in the publication of any false or misleading advertisement Enquiring or ordering an investigation into violations of consumers’ rights or unfair trade practices, either suo motu or on a complaint received or on the directions from the Central Government Filing complaints before the District Commission, the State Commission or the National Commission Intervening in the proceedings of any of the three consumer courts namely District Commission, State Commission or National Commission for any case of consumer rights violation or unfair trade practices Reviewing the matters and factors inhibiting the enjoyment of consumer rights, including safeguards for protecting consumers and recommending appropriate remedial measures for their effective implementation NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law Recommending the adoption of international covenants and best international practices on consumer rights Ensuring effective enforcement of consumer rights Undertaking and promoting the research related to consumer rights Spreading and promoting consumer rights awareness Encouraging co-operation among NGOs and other institutions working for consumer rights Using unique and universal goods identifiers for preventing unfair trade practices and protecting consumers’ interests Issuing safety notices for alerting consumers against dangerous or S hazardous or unsafe goods or services the Central and State Government departments and ministries regarding the consumer welfare measures IM Advising Issuing guidelines for preventing unfair trade practices M The Central Authority may conduct or order preliminary inquiry after receiving any information or complaint from the Central Government or on its suo moto cognizance to see if a prima facie case is made out of violation of consumer rights or any unfair trade practice or false or misleading advertisement. If, after enquiry, it is found that there exists a prima facie case, the CCPA can direct Director General or District Collector to conduct an investigation. After the CCPA is satisfied that there is sufficient evidence to prove consumer rights violation or unfair trade practices by a person, the CCPA has the power to order: N 256 Recalling goods or withdrawing the dangerous, hazardous or unsafe services Reimbursing the purchasers against the price of goods or services recalled Discontinuing unfair practices that are harmful to consumers’ interest Modifying such advertisements Imposing a penalty of up to ` 10 lakhs on the manufacturer or endorser of the good/service for the first offence Imposing a penalty of up to ` 50 lakhs on the manufacturer or endorser of the good/service for the subsequent offences Prohibiting the endorser of such false and misleading advertisement from endorsing any good/service for a maximum period of one year for the first offence NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education CONSUMER PROTECTION ACT, 2019 257 Prohibiting the endorser of such false and misleading advertisement from endorsing any good/service for a maximum period of three years for every subsequent offence Imposing a penalty of up to ten lakh rupees if any person publishes or is a party to the publication of a misleading advertisement If a person has published or arranged for publication in the ordinary course of business, no penalty is to be awarded Where an endorser is able to show that he exercised due diligence to verify the truth of the claims made in the advertisement in the ordinary course of his business, he shall not be liable to any penalty. FALSE OR MISLEADING ADVERTISEMENTS IM S Before describing the provisions related to the false and misleading advertisements contained in the Consumer Protection Act, 2019, let us first study some relevant definitions as follows: M According to Section 2 (1), advertisement means any audio or visual publicity, representation, endorsement or pronouncement made by means of light, sound, smoke, gas, print, electronic media, internet or website and includes any notice, circular, label, wrapper, invoice or such other documents. According to Section 2 (18), endorsement in relation to an advertisement, means— i. Any message, verbal statement, demonstration N ii. Depiction of the name, signature, likeness or other identifiable personal characteristics of an individual; or iii. Depiction of the name or seal of any institution or organisation, which makes the consumer to believe that it reflects the opinion, finding or experience of the person making such endorsement. According to Section 2(19), establishment includes an advertising agency, commission agent, manufacturing, trading or any other commercial agency which carries on any business, trade or profession or any work in connection with or incidental or ancillary to any commercial activity, trade or profession, or such other class or classes of persons including public utility entities in the manner as may be prescribed; According to Section 2(28), misleading advertisement in relation to any product or service, means an advertisement, which— i. falsely describes such product or service ii. gives a false guarantee to, or is likely to mislead the consumers as to the nature, substance, quantity or quality of such product or service NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education NOTE If any party to a consumer complaint is aggrieved by any order passed by the CCPA, then, he/she may file an appeal to the National Commission within 30 days of receiving such an order. Business Law iii. conveys an express or implied representation which, if made by the manufacturer or seller or service provider thereof, would constitute an unfair trade practice iv. deliberately conceals important information The Consumer Protection Act, 2019, contains strict penalties for misleading or false advertisements. The CCPA has the authority to regulate matters relating to the violation of unfair trade practices and false or misleading advertisements. The CCPA has the authority to impose a penalty of up to ` 10 lakhs on a manufacturer or an endorser for the first offence and imprisonment of up to two years if it is found responsible for the false or misleading advertisement. S For any subsequent offence, the manufacturer or endorser may be fined a penalty of up to ` 50 lakhs and the imprisonment may extend up to five years. M IM The inclusion of endorsers under the Consumer Protection Act, 2019 implies that now the celebrities who endorse or promote false or misleading advertisements and adulterated goods can be penalised under this Consumer Protection Act, 2019. In addition, the endorsers may be prohibited from doing any promotions or endorsements for a period of one year for the first offence and a period of up to three years for any subsequent offence. HEALTHCARE DELETED FROM DEFINITION OF SERVICES In its present form, the Consumer Protection Act, 2019 does not cover healthcare in the list of services listed under the definition of service. Interestingly, the bill that was passed by the Lok Sabha included healthcare under services. In Parliament, an amendment known as Healthcare Amendment was introduced to exclude healthcare from the list of services. It was a direct result of opposition from the medical fraternity and there were genuine concerns that Consumer Protection Act, 2019 may be misused against them. Now, after this amendment, it is not clear whether or not healthcare as a service will be included under the Consumer Protection Act, 2019. N 258 MEDIATION Under Consumer Protection Act, 2019, there is a provision to establish a mediation cell to be attached with each District and State Commission (to be done by State Government) and also for National Commission along with all its regional benches (to be done by Central Government). This provision has been added to provide a resolution for consumer disputes by mediation. If both the parties to a dispute want to seek settlement by the way of mediation either at the time of admission of a complaint or any later stage, the concerned consumer court shall refer the matter to mediation. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education CONSUMER PROTECTION ACT, 2019 259 PENALTIES In case any party defies any order of the commission, the punishment of imprisonment shall be for atleast 1 month, or a fine, which shall not be less than twenty-five thousand rupees, but which may extend to one lakh rupees, or both. 6.2.5 Difference between Consumer Protection Act, 1986 and Consumer Protection Act, 2019 IM S Instead of amending the Consumer Protection Act, 1986, the Government of India repealed it and introduced the new consumer act titled the Consumer Protection Act, 1986. This Act was introduced to make way for numerous measures and to further tighten the existing rules for safeguarding the rights of consumers in India. The new law also takes care of the fact that India has been witnessing a booming e-commerce industry and the methods of providing goods and services to consumers have changed and now includes online sales, tele-shopping, direct selling and multi-level marketing apart from the traditional methods. Some major differences between the Consumer Protection Act, 1986 and the Consumer Protection Act, 2019 are shown in Table 6.2: Table 6.2: Difference between Consumer Protection Act, 1986 and Consumer Protection Act, 2019 Consumer Protection Act, 1986 This act considered all goods and services while free and personal services were excluded Consumer Protection Act, 2019 This act considers all goods and services, including telecom and housing construction, and all modes of transactions (online, teleshopping, etc.). It excludes free and personal services and healthcare services. zz District: Up to ` one crore Pecuniary Jurisdiction of Commission zz District: Up to ` 20 lakh zz State: Between ` 20 lakh and up to ` one crore zz State: Between ` one crore and up to ` 10 crore zz zz National: Above ` 10 crore Composition of Commissions zz National: Above ` one crore District: Headed by current or former District Judge and two members. zz District: Headed by a president and at least two members. zz State: Headed by a current or former High Court Judge and at least two members. zz State: Headed by a president and at least four members. zz zz National: Headed by a current or former Supreme Court Judge and at least four members. National: Headed by a president and at least four members N M Basis of difference Ambit of Law NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 260 Business Law Basis of difference Penalties Consumer Protection Act, 1986 Imprisonment between one month and three years or fine between ` 2,000 to ` 10,000, or both. Consumer Protection Act, 2019 Imprisonment up to three years, or a fine not less than ` 25,000 extendable to ` one lakh, or both. self assessment Questions 1. Which of the following cannot be a complainant as per the Consumer Protection Act, 2019? a. Consumer b. Central Government c. A minor d. CCPA IM a. True S 2. Under the Consumer Protection Act, 2019, consumers of multi-level marketing would now have a legal recourse in case of fraud. b. False 3. ____________ means that in any commercial relationship, the responsibility and accountability of the sellers with respect to the products and services has to be fixed. M Activity N Prepare a synopsis of any consumer dispute case between a hotel service provider and a guest. Explain the important points of judgment. 6.3 RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER You are already aware that any person who buys any good or avails any service in exchange for a consideration is called a consumer. Also, the consumer may purchase the goods or services using traditional modes as well as online modes. However, any person who obtains a good for resale or for any commercial purpose is not considered as a consumer. On 15th March 1962, the former US President John F. Kennedy established four basic rights of consumers. These four rights are as follows: 1. Right to safety: This right ensures that consumers have a defence against the injuries and harm caused by products if the users use the goods in a manner as has been prescribed. Right to safety also protects consumers from marketing and advertising of goods and services that may be harmful to life and property. ? DID YOU KNOW All over the world, 15th March is celebrated as Consumer Rights Day. Example: A substandard pressure cooker may cause injury or harm to consumers, so the consumers have the right to safety against the loss caused by such substandard products. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education CONSUMER PROTECTION ACT, 2019 261 2. Right to be informed: This right means that consumers have access to appropriate information to aid them in making intelligent and informed product choices. It means that manufacturers and service providers should provide complete and truthful information. Consumers have a right to be informed about the quality, quantity, purity, standard and price of goods or services so that they may be protected against unfair trade practices and misleading information. Example: At the time of purchasing cosmetics or skin-related products, every consumer has the right to ask the shopkeeper about the information like suitability of the product as per skin type, quality standards, etc. S 3. Right to choose: This right ensures that the consumers have a right to choose among various product offerings and that consumers are given a variety of options at competitive prices offered by different companies. IM Example: There are different brands of tea like Tata, Taj Mahal, Red Label, Wagh Bakri, etc. Consumers have the right to choose the preferred tea for consumption. M 4. Right to be heard: This right ensures that consumers are able to raise their complaints and concerns related to a product which ensures that their disputes can be handled efficiently and responsively. N Example: Heena received a parcel from an e-commerce company and got a defective product. She has the right to raise a complaint related to the product. In 1985, the United Nations added four more rights to the existing four rights in order to protect consumers as follows: 1. Right to satisfaction of the basic needs: This right is related to a consumer’s right to have access to the basic, essential goods and services, such as food, clothing, shelter, healthcare, education, public utilities, water and sanitation. 2. Right to redress: This right relates to the consumers’ right to seek redressal in terms of a fair settlement of just claims, compensation for misrepresentation, unscrupulous exploitation of consumers’ unsatisfactory services, unfair trade practices, etc. 3. Right to consumer education: Consumers have a right to acquire the knowledge and skills needed for making informed decisions. The consumers must also be aware of the basic rights and duties of consumers. 4. Right to a healthy environment: Consumers have a right to live and work in a safe, clean, healthy and sustainable environment that does not threaten their well-being. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education NOTE In India, consumers enjoy all eight consumer rights. Business Law With the introduction of the Consumer Protection Act, 2019, consumers have been given five new rights as follows: 1. Right to file a consumer complaint anywhere: Consumers can file a consumer complaint from anywhere in any District or State Commission. The courts accept applications not only on the basis of geographical jurisdiction but on the basis of pecuniary jurisdiction. S 2. Right to get compensation for product liability: Consumers have the right to file a complaint against a manufacturer or seller or a service provider and claim compensation for the loss or damage caused due to any deficiency in the product or service or in case of a manufacturing defect or when the goods do not conform to the warranty that was provided by the manufacturer or seller or service provider. IM 3. Right to present case via video conferencing: The new law has a provision for hearing of a complaint using video conferencing in addition to the traditional mode of hearing in person in the District Commissions. M 4. Right to file a complaint against unfair contract: The Consumer Protection Act, 2019 has a provision that allows consumers to file a complaint against sellers or service providers for any of the unfair trade practices or one-sided contracts that favour sellers or service providers and impact the rights of consumers. 5. Right to know the reason for complaint rejection: The law gives the consumers the right to know the reason due to which their complaint is rejected by the commission. N 262 self assessment Questions 4. The right to _______ ensures that the consumers are able to raise their complaints and concerns related to a product which ensures that their disputes can be handled efficiently and responsively. 5. The Consumer Protection Act, 2019, gives the consumers the right to know the reason due to which their complaint is rejected by the commission. a. True b. False Activity Discuss the measures taken by the Central and State Governments for educating consumers. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education CONSUMER PROTECTION ACT, 2019 263 6.4 CONSUMER PROTECTION COUNCILS (CPCs) Under the Consumer Protection Act, 2019, the Central Government will establish the Consumer Protection Councils (CPCs) at three levels, namely Central, State and District levels. These are named as: Central Council) State Consumer Protection Council (CCPC or the Central Consumer Protection Council (SCPC or the State Council) District Council) Consumer Protection Council (DCPC or the District S 6.4.1 FUNCTIONS OF CPCs IM CPCs have been created as advisory bodies whose function is to advise for the promotion and protection of consumers’ rights within their jurisdictions. 6.4.2 CENTRAL CONSUMER PROTECTION COUNCIL (CCPC) M The Central Government will form the CCPC or the Central Council as an advisory body that will be chaired by the Minister-in-Charge of the Department of Consumer Affairs. The CCPC must meet at least once a year. The objective of the CCPC is to advise for the promotion and protection of the consumers’ rights at the national level. N 6.4.3 STATE CONSUMER PROTECTION COUNCILS (SCPCs) All the states will form the SCPC or the State Council as an advisory body that will be chaired by the Minister-in-charge of the Department of Consumer Affairs in the State Government. The SCPCs must meet at least twice a year. The objective of the SCPC is to provide advice for the promotion and protection of consumers’ rights within their states. 6.4.4 DISTRICT CONSUMER PROTECTION COUNCILS (DCPCs) All the states will form the DCPC or the District Council as an advisory body that will be chaired by the collector of the district. The DCPCs must meet at least twice a year. The objective of the DCPC is to provide advice for the promotion and protection of consumers’ rights within their respective districts. self assessment Questions 6. Under the Consumer Protection Act, 2019, the Consumer Protection Councils (CPCs) have been created as regulatory bodies. a. True b. False NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 264 Business Law 7. The objective of the _____________ is to provide advice for promotion and protection of the consumers’ rights within their states. Activity List a few activities that have been carried out by the CPCs for the protection of consumer rights. 6.5 CONSUMER DISPUTES REDRESSAL IM S In highly industrialised and service-oriented economies such as India, consumers are always at a risk and may fall prey to unfair practices, warranty violations, etc. All these are considered consumer rights violations. For all such violations, consumers have a right to lodge consumer disputes with the appropriate consumer disputes redressal machinery. 6.5.1 CONSUMER DISPUTES REDRESSAL MACHINERY M As per the Consumer Protection Act, 2019, consumers can get a resolution to their consumer complaints with the three-tier structure. Under this structure, the Consumer Courts are set up at three levels as follows: District Consumer Disputes Redressal Commission (DCDRC), also known as the District Commission N State Consumer Disputes Redressal Commission (SCDRC), also known as the State Commission National Consumer Disputes Redressal Commission (NCDRC), also known as the National Commission 6.5.2 ? DID YOU KNOW If the consumer court does not admit the complaint within 21 days, the complaint will be deemed to have been admitted. PROCEDURE OF DISPUTE RESOLUTION Under the Consumer Protection Act, 2019, disputes are resolved through consumer courts or the Consumer Commissions. Whenever there is a dispute among two parties the consumer court based on the pecuniary jurisdiction, needs to admit or reject the consumer complaint within 21 days of filing the complaint. When a complaint is admitted in the court, the courts have two options. If the parties to a dispute agree, the court may refer the matter to the mediation cell attached with the concerned court. There can be three outcomes of mediation as follows: i. All the points of the dispute are mutually resolved by both the parties and the court passes an order stating the same. This is a case of successful mediation. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education CONSUMER PROTECTION ACT, 2019 265 ii. None of the points of the dispute are mutually resolved by the parties and the court passes an order stating the same. This is a case of failed mediation. In this case, the matter is moved back to the court. iii. The parties to a dispute can resolve one or more points of disputes but not all. This is a case of partially successful mediation. Here, the designated Commission shall record settlement of the issues that have been so settled and continue hearing other issues that could not be resolved through mediation. 6.5.3 PROCEDURE FOR FILING A COMPLAINT BEFORE THE CONSUMER PROTECTION BODY IM S The first step in filing a complaint with the consumer protection body is to file a complaint in a written or electronic form with the concerned Consumer Commission or the consumer court. As already discussed, the complainant may be an individual consumer, the State Government or the Central Government or even the CCPA. The complaint is accepted only if it is accompanied by the requisite amount of fees. M After the Consumer Commission receives the complaint, it has to decide whether or not to admit the complaint. The Consumer Commission has to decide whether to admit or reject the complaint within 21 days and if the Consumer Commission does not give any decision within this period, the complaint is deemed to be admitted automatically. N If a case is admitted and if the Consumer Commission finds certain elements of the settlement which both parties can accept, the Consumer Commission can ask the parties to settle their dispute through mediation within five days from the date of submitting such mediation application. The proceedings of the case continue as per the results of mediation. 6.5.4 NATURE AND SCOPE OF REMEDIES As per Section 39(1) of the Consumer Protection Act, 2019, where the District Commission is satisfied that the goods complained against suffer from any of the defects specified in the complaint or that any of the allegations that are contained in the complaint about the services provided or any unfair trade practices or claims for compensation under product liability are proved, the District Commission has the authority to issue an order to the opposite party directing him to do one or more of the following, namely: (a) Removing the defect from the goods in question (b) Replacing the defective goods with similar new goods that are defect-free NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education NOTE If the Commission finds the allegations against the product manufacturer to be true, it shall make an order in accordance with Section 39 of the Act. 266 Business Law (c) Returning the total price or the charges paid by the complainant along with the interest on such price (d) Paying compensation to the consumer for any loss or injury suffered by the consumer due to the negligence of the opposite party (e) Awarding compensation in case of product liability action (f) Removing the defects in goods or deficiencies in the services (g) Discontinuing the unfair trade practices or restrictive trade practices and not repeating them (h) Not offering sale of hazardous or unsafe goods (i) Withdrawing the offer for sale of hazardous or unsafe goods S (j) Discontinuing the manufacture of hazardous goods and restraining from offering hazardous services IM (k) Awarding a sum determined by the commission if the commission is of the opinion that loss or injury has been suffered by a large number of consumers who cannot be identified conveniently M (l) Issuing corrective advertisement to neutralise the effect of misleading advertisement at the cost of the opposite party responsible for issuing such misleading advertisement (m) Providing adequate costs to parties N (n) Discontinuing and restraining from issuing of any misleading advertisement 6.5.5 APPEALS AND LIMITATIONS The various appeals and their period of limitation under the Consumer Protection Act, 2019 are as follows: If a person has been aggrieved by any order that has been passed by the CCPA, then he/she may file an appeal with the National Commission within 30 days from the date of receipt of such order. If a person has been aggrieved by an order made that has been passed by the District Commission, then, he/she may file an appeal against such order with the concerned State Commission within 45 days from the date of such an order. If NOTE An appeal always lies with the National or State Commission if the State or District Commission respectively has passed an ex parte order. a person has been aggrieved by an order made that has been passed by the State Commission, then, he/she may file an appeal against such order with the concerned National Commission within 30 days from the date of such an order. If a person is aggrieved by an order made by the National Commission, then he/she may appeal against such order to the Supreme Court within 30 days of such order. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education CONSUMER PROTECTION ACT, 2019 267 self assessment Questions 8. Whenever there is a dispute among two parties and one or both of them reach the consumer court, the court needs to admit or reject the consumer complaint within ______ days of filing the complaint. a. 30 b. 15 c. 14 d. 21 a. True b. False Activity S 9. If a person has been aggrieved by any order that has been passed by the CCPA, then, he/she may file an appeal with the National Commission within 30 days from the date of receipt of such order. COMPARISON OF CONSUMER LAW IN OTHER COUNTRIES M 6.6 IM Describe the various orders that can be passed by a commission while giving any judgment with respect to a consumer complaint. In general, most countries have consumer protection measures that comprise consumer protection acts, national policy on consumer protection and a master or strategic plan for consumer protection. N The governments of most countries have constructed a regulatory framework comprising various laws, price and distribution controls, regulators, standards for manufacturers and service providers to protect the interests of consumers against any exploitation. You have already learned about the consumer protection measures that have been taken in India along with the enactment of the recently introduced Consumer Protection Act, 2019. India has now amended its consumer laws in line with global standards. However, it still lags behind certain countries like the USA, which has stringent and advanced laws for consumer protection. For instance, the USA has strict laws for drug manufacture and sale and for checking adulteration. There are strict provisions for non-compliance. There are four main objectives that form the foundation of any country’s state policy and include: 1. Consumers are fully informed and can take decisions. 2. Consumers are not discriminated on the basis of their gender, race, colour, region, income level, religion, culture, caste, etc. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education NOTE Consumers International is an organisation for consumer rights groups and it was established in 1960. The goal of this organisation is to ensure that consumer rights are not ignored. It has members from over 120 countries. 268 Business Law 3. Marketing of goods and services is done keeping in mind the safety and security of public at large. 4. The welfare of society is considered of prime importance. Know More The Federal Service for Surveillance on Consumer Rights Protection and Human Wellbeing or Rospotrebnadzor is the federal service responsible for the supervision of consumer rights protection and human wellbeing in Russia. State policies are constructed to ensure that there are no misleading or false advertisements, and the pricing, selling and retailing practices are kept fair. Consumers are also regulated so that they may not file false claims against the sellers. In the USA, various self-regulatory bodies may carry considerable influence on organisations and government. In India, there is no concept of self-regulatory bodies and only the government regulatory bodies have the authority and influence over government and industries. IM S Researchers in countries like the USA also work to understand if the marketing practices of the country benefit or harm the different sections of society. Such countries establish laws to ensure that the children and other psychologically vulnerable sections do not fall prey to the marketing tactics of organisations. When compared to the USA, India remains behind and needs to work on these aspects. M Various countries protect their consumers against uncertainty in warranty and all the manufacturers need to give a proper warning with respect to the risks related to the goods, shares and mutual funds, etc. India also has in place provisions for implicit and explicit types of warranties and conditions but the level of awareness in the general public is quite low. N The Indian Government has prescribed minimum standards for products or services in order to minimise physical risks faced by government or voluntary organisations. In India, general insurance for automobile buyers is mandatory, which acts for product safety. In India, the minimum standards are fixed for a large number of products by the Bureau of Indian Standards. Consumer education measures are also being promoted by the government. self assessment Questions 10. The USA has strict laws for drug manufacture and sale and for checking adulteration. a. True b. False Activity Make a list of ten developed countries of the world and study their consumer protection laws. Compare these laws and their provisions with the consumer laws of India. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education CONSUMER PROTECTION ACT, 2019 269 S 6.7 Summary The use of digital means has offered various benefits as well as challenges related to consumer protection. To meet these challenges faced by consumers, the Indian Government enacted the Consumer Protection Act, 2019. The objective of the Consumer Protection Act, 2019 is to provide timely and effective administration and settlement of consumer disputes. Some important features and provisions of the Consumer Protection Act, 2019 are: Broadening grounds for filing complaints Introduction Advertising of product liability claims IM New of e-commerce S Inclusion the term consumer Introduction of the CCPA (Central Consumer Protection Authority), a regulatory body Including within its scope misleading advertisements of healthcare from the definition of services Increase in the pecuniary jurisdiction of the Commissions M Deletion The pecuniary jurisdictions of the Consumer Disputes Redressal Commissions (CDRCs) at three levels are: commissions can take up cases whose valuation is up to ` 1 crore. State N District commissions can take up cases whose valuation is in the range of ` 1 crore and ` 10 crores. National commission can take up cases whose valuation is above `10 crores. In accordance to Section 74 of the Consumer Protection Act, 2019, the State government will establish mediation cells to be attached to all the district and state commissions of that state. The primary objective of setting up the CCPA is to regulate matters related to the violation of consumer’s rights and take suitable actions to prevent unfair trade practices. The Consumer Protection Act, 2019 contains strict penalties for misleading or false advertisements. Various rights of a consumer are: The right to safety The right to be informed The right to choose NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law The right to be heard The right to satisfaction of the basic needs The right to redress The right to consumer education The right to a healthy environment The right to file a consumer complaint anywhere The right to receiving compensation for product liability The right to present a case via video conferencing The right to file a complaint against unfair contract The right to know the reason for the complaint rejection Protection Council have been created as advisory bodies whose function is to provide advice for the promotion and protection of consumer’s rights. disputes are resolved through the consumer courts or the consumer commissions. IM The S Consumer the commission receives the complaint, it has to decide whether or not to admit the complaint. The commission has to decide whether to admit or reject the complaint within 21 days and if the commission does not give any decision within this period, the complaint is deemed to be admitted automatically. M After State N 270 policies are constructed to ensure that there are no misleading or false advertisements, and the pricing, selling and retailing practices are kept fair. Consumers are also regulated so that they may not file false claims against the sellers. key words Consumer dispute: A dispute where the person against whom a complaint has been made denies or disputes the allegations contained in the complaint E-commerce: The process of buying and selling goods and services using digital means Pecuniary jurisdiction: The jurisdiction of a court to hear a matter based on the amount involved in the consumer dispute Product liability action: A manufacturer or seller or service provider is held liable for a defective product that reaches a consumer Unfair trade practices: The practices that involve the adoption of unfair methods or deceptive practices to promote the sale, supply or use of goods or services NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education CONSUMER PROTECTION ACT, 2019 271 6.8 Descriptive Questions 1. Explain the objective, scope and significance of the Consumer Protection Act, 2019. 2. What are the provisions for product liability and false or misleading advertisements in the Consumer Protection Act, 2019? 3. What are the various rights that are enjoyed by a consumer in India? 4. Discuss the Consumer Disputes Redressal mechanism under the Consumer Protection Act, 2019. 6.9 Answers and Hints Q. No. Answer IM Topic S ANSWERS FOR SELF ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS Consumer Protection Act, 2019 Rights of a Consumer c. A minor 2. a. True 3. Product liability 4. be heard 5. a. True 6. b. False 7. SCPC 8. d. 9. a. True 10. a. True M Consumer Protection Councils 1. Consumer Disputes Redressal N Comparison of Consumer Law in Various Countries 21 HINTS FOR DESCRIPTIVE QUESTIONS 1. The main objective of the Consumer Protection Act, 2019 is to protect the rights of consumers and establishing various authorities for timely and effective administration and settlement of all consumer disputes. Refer to Section 6.2 Consumer Protection Act, 2019 2. According to Section 82 of the Consumer Protection Act, 2019, a complainant can claim for compensation for product liability in certain specific cases. Refer to Section 6.2 Consumer Protection Act, 2019 3. With the introduction of the Consumer Protection Act, 2019, the consumers have been given five new rights namely right to file a consumer complaint anywhere, right to get compensation for product liability, right to present case via video conferencing, right to file a complaint against unfair contract and right to know NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education ? Business Law the reason for complaint rejection. Refer to Section 6.3 Rights of a Consumer 4. Under the Consumer Protection Act, 2019, the disputes are resolved through the consumer courts or the Consumer Commissions. Refer to Section 6.5 Consumer Disputes Redressal 6.10 Suggested Readings & References Suggested Readings Tiwari, G. (2014). Understanding Laws Consumer Rights (1st ed.). Lexis Nexis. A. (2016). Practical Guide to Consumer Protection Law (4th ed.). Universal Law Publishing Co Pvt Ltd. S Kaushal, E-REFERENCES Retrieved 27 April 2020, from http://egazette.nic.in/ WriteReadData/2019/210422.pdf IM (2020). Roysam, V. (2020). Marketers say, ‘so jaograhak so jao’. Consumers, M do you know these important rights?. Retrieved 27 April 2020, from https://yourstory.com/2017/03/consumer-rights N 272 NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education C h 7 a pt e r RIGHT TO INFORMATION ACT, 2005 N 7.4 IM 7.3 Introduction The Right to Information (RTI) Act, 2005 7.2.1 Objectives of the RTI Act Self Assessment Questions Activity Public Authorities (Chapter II of the Act) Obligations/Duties of Public Authority (Chapter II of the Act) 7.3.1 Framework of Public Information Authority (Section 5) 7.3.2 7.3.3 Public Information Officers (PIO) and their Duties Self Assessment Questions Activity Procedure for Obtaining Information (Sections 6 and 7) Self Assessment Questions Activity Information Exempted from Disclosure (Section 8) Self Assessment Questions Activity Information Commissions (ICs) Central Information Commission (CIC) (Chapter III of the Act) 7.6.1 State Information Commission (SIC) (Chapter IV of the Act) 7.6.2 7.6.3Powers and Functions of Information Commissioners (Chapter V of the Act) Procedure for Appealing to CIC and SIC (Section 19) 7.6.4 Penalties (Section 20) 7.6.5 7.6.6Jurisdiction 7.6.7 Role of Central and State Governments Self Assessment Questions Activity M 7.1 7.2 S Contents 7.5 7.6 NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law CONTENTS 7.7 7.8 M IM S 7.9 7.10 7.11 7.12 Impact of the RTI Act, 2005 Self Assessment Questions Activity Leading Case Studies Self Assessment Questions Activity Summary Descriptive Questions Answers and Hints Suggested Readings and References N 274 NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education RIGHT TO INFORMATION ACT, 2005 275 Introductory Caselet ROLE OF RTI IN UNEARTHING POLITICAL SCAMS N M IM S The Right to Information (RTI) Act , 2005 not only brought about greater transparency and accountability in the functioning of various governmental agencies but also helped bust multiple scams in the country. It is rightly called the ‘sunshine law’ due to its potential to expose the scandalous actions of the high and the mighty. Since its inception, the law has been contributing in revealing scams worth billions, whereby the taxpayers’ money or public property has been looted by the corrupt politicians and corporations. Some of the infamous scams that had been brought into light include Public Food Distribution Scam in Assam (2007), the 2G Scam (2008), Adarsh Society Scam (2010) in which the defence was cornered by several well-known politicians and bureaucrats, Commonwealth Games Scam and scams involving diversion of Dalit funds, Wakf Board Land Scam in Karnataka (2012), the Coal Allocation Scam (2012), Indian Red Cross Society Scam, and many others. The significance of the legislation lies in compelling the leaders working in various positions to improve governance for the socio-economic betterment of the citizenry, rather than personal aggrandisement. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Case Objective This caselet discusses how the Right to Information (RTI) Act has been contributing in revealing scams worth billions, whereby the taxpayers’ money or public property has been looted by the corrupt politicians and corporations. Business Law Learning objectives After studying this chapter, you will be able to: Discuss the salient features of the Right to Information (RTI) Act, 2005 Know about the various public authorities established under the Act and their obligations Explain the Information Exempted from Disclosure Understand the procedure for filing requests to obtain information Describe the Central and State Information Commission Comprehend the impact of the Right to Information Act, 2005 >> >> >> >> S >> >> In the previous chapter, you have studied consumer-oriented laws such as the Consumer Protection Act, 2019. This chapter discusses the RTI Act, 2005 (hereinafter referred to as ‘RTI Act’). The right to information is the pivot of a participatory democracy, which aims to bring about accountability and good governance. The higher the ease of access about the quality of governance, the higher shall be the degree of responsiveness of the public authorities towards their responsibilities. M Quick Revision IM 7.1 Introduction Denial of access to information induces a feeling of helplessness and the consequent public alienation from the government. This chapter describes the significant provisions of the RTI Act to highlight the manner in which a common citizen can approach designated public authorities to seek information for determining whether they are functioning towards their envisaged objectives. The right to information has been indirectly guaranteed by the Constitution of India. The need, however, was to enact legislation that may establish a practical regime enabling the citizens to secure relevant information about the functioning of various administrative and political authorities. To meet this end, Parliament enacted the RTI Act in 2005. It is a comprehensive legislation taking all matters of governance falling within the ambit of all levels of government, namely the Central, State, Local, as well as those financed by the government. N 276 In this chapter, you will study the objectives of the RTI Act. Next, you will study the public authorities and their framework. The chapter will then discuss the procedure for obtaining information. Then, you will study the role of Information Commissions (ICs). Finally, the chapter discusses the impact of the RTI Act. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education RIGHT TO INFORMATION ACT, 2005 277 7.2 THE RIGHT TO INFORMATION (RTI) ACT, 2005 In a democratic country, ‘transparency’ and ‘accountability’ in the government administration play a key role in its growth and devel opment. Information empowers society by making the citizens more informed and aware. Before 2005, the citizens of India had no fundamental right to access any information that was dealt by a public authority. The RTI Act provides a statutory right to citizens to access information from a public agency within a definite time period. This Act facilitates transparency in government administration and functioning. ? DID YOU KNOW The RTI Act has six chapters and two schedules. IM (i) inspection of work, documents, records; S According to Section 2(j) of the RTI Act, 2005 the term “right to information” means the right to information accessible under this Act which is held by or under the control of any public authority and includes the right to— (ii) taking notes, extracts, or certified copies of documents or records; (iii) taking certified samples of material; M (iv) obtaining information in the form of diskettes, floppies, tapes, video cassettes or in any other electronic mode or through printouts where such information is stored in a computer or in any other device; N The type of information that may be obtained under the RTI Act is defined in Section 2(f) as ‘any material in any form, including records, documents, memos, e-mails, opinions, advices, press releases, circulars, orders, logbooks, contracts, reports, papers, samples, models, data material held in any electronic form and information relating to any private body which can be accessed by a public authority under any other law for the time being in force’. The RTI Act was passed ‘to provide for setting out the practical regime of right to information for citizens’. The main aim of the Act is to provide secure access to information for promoting transparency and accountability. According to the Preamble to the RTI Act, it aims: To be able to access the required information from public authorities To encourage transparency and accountability at work To set up Central Information Commission (CIC) and State Information Commission (SIC) 7.2.1 OBJECTIVES OF THE RTI ACT The main objective of this Act is to set up a practical regime where citizens can get secure access to information which is under the control NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education NOTE The type of information that may be obtained under the RTI Act is defined in Section 2(f) and covers all mediums and modes of information which can be accessed by a public authority established under any law in force. 278 Business Law of public authorities; thereby encouraging transparency and accountability in the working of public authorities. It aids in preventing corruption by holding the government and its instrumentalities answerable to the citizenry. With the principal goal of providing secure access to information available with the public authorities, the RTI Act seeks to attain the following objectives: To set out a practical regime of right to information To secure access to information under the control of public authorities and give power to citizens to question the government To promote transparency and accountability in the working of every public authority contain corruption and hold the government and its instrumentalities accountable to those governed To S To preserve the confidentiality of sensitive information uphold democratic ideals by the virtue of transparency in information IM To self assessment Questions M 1. The RTI Act entitles a citizen of India to seek information from any __________ authority. N 2. The main aim of the RTI Act is to promote _______ and _______. Activity Briefly describe some cases known to you or which you may have read somewhere about the way the RTI Act, 2005 was used by any Indian citizen(s) to obtain information. 7.3 NOTE According to Article 19 of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights: ‘Everyone has the right to freedom of opinion and expression; this right includes freedom to hold opinions without interference and to seek, receive, and impart information and ideas through any media regardless of frontiers’. PUBLIC AUTHORITIES (CHAPTER II OF THE ACT) Basically, public authorities include all the repository of information that the citizens have the statutory right to have under the RTI Act, 2005. As per Section 2 (h) of the RTI Act, 2005 means ‘Public authority refers to any authority or body or institution of self-government established or constituted: (i) by or under the Constitution; (ii) by laws made by the Parliament or state legislature; (iii) all bodies so notified by the Central or State government; (iv) also, bodies owned, controlled, or substantially financed by the government whether directly or indirectly, including non-governNMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education RIGHT TO INFORMATION ACT, 2005 279 ment organisations substantially financed, directly or indirectly by funds provided by the appropriate Government’. As per the RTI Act, there are two sets of organisations that are considered to be ‘public authority’. The first one involves bodies that are formulated by the enactment of the legislation or constitution of India, such as all the political parties, state legislatures such as Securities and Exchange Board of India (SEBI), Reserve Bank of India (RBI), and Telecom Regulatory Authority of India (TRAI). The second type of public authorities includes bodies that are substantially financed by the government. For instance, planning commission or education institutions created by law, etc. Therefore, they owe their existence to the funds given directly or indirectly by the government. These authorities can be at the state level or district level or sub-district level. IM S Also, the RTI Act mandates that every public authority shall proactively disclose information pertaining to it and maintain its documents and records to facilitate the right to information under the Act. These authorities have statutory or public duties that are to be performed for the benefit of the public. 7.3.1 OBLIGATIONS/DUTIES OF PUBLIC AUTHORITY (Chapter II of the Act) M Various obligations of a public authority are as follows: To maintain all records duly catalogued, indexed, and computerised to facilitate the proper exercise of the right to information [Section 4 (1) (a)] provide access to computerised records with public authorities all over the country through a network To N To publish within 120 days from the enactment of RTI Act, the details of particulars of the organisation, its functions and duties, the powers vested in officials, the name of the particular officer who shall provide information for framing of rules and regulations, etc. [Section 4 (1) (b)] To publish all relevant facts relating to important policies as well as the decisions affecting the general public [Section 4 (1) (c)] To disseminate all the information widely and in a manner that it is easily accessible to public [Section 4 (3)] To give reasons for its administrative or quasi-judicial decisions and make the same available to the affected persons [Section 4 (1) (f)]; it is the suo motu responsibility placed on public authorities [Section 4 (1) (d)] To provide as much information suo motu to the public at large at regular intervals through various means of communication NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education ? DID YOU KNOW It is mandatory for public authorities under the RTI Act to periodically publish information about its organisation, employees, rules, regulations, remuneration received by its employees, budgetary allocations, proposed expenditures, etc. Business Law 7.3.2 FRAMEWORK OF PUBLIC INFORMATION AUTHORITY (Section 5) Every public authority, within 100 days of enactment of the Act, shall designate the Central Public Information Officers (Central PIO) or the State Public Information Officers (State PIO) in their respective public or administrative offices. These designated officers shall be responsible for providing necessary information to the public. The Central PIO or the State PIO officer shall provide reasonable help to the persons seeking information from them. Any officer whose assistance is required by the above-mentioned officers shall render such assistance at a reasonable time. At every sub-divisional level and sub-district level, Central PIO or State PIO, as applicable, shall be designated to receive requests for information and to arrange to provide the same. S 7.3.3 PUBLIC INFORMATION OFFICERS (PIO) AND THEIR DUTIES IM Public Information Officers (PIO) are required to furnish the necessary information as demanded by the public. The various duties to be undertaken by the PIO are as follows: To deal with requests from persons seeking information; and where the request cannot be made in writing, to render reasonable assistance to the person to reduce the same in writing the information requested is held by or its subject matter is closely connected with the function of another public authority, the PIO shall transfer such request within 5 days to that other public authority and inform the applicant immediately. M If To seek the assistance of any other officer for the proper discharge N 280 of his/her duties. Section 7 obligates the PIO to provide the information expeditiously within 30 days of the receipt of the request provided the requisite fees has been paid, either provide the information on payment of such fee as may be prescribed or reject the request for any of the reasons specified in Sections 8 or 9 of the Act. If the requested information concerns the life or liberty of a person, the same shall be provided within 48 hours of the receipt of the request. If the PIO fails to give a decision on the request within the period specified, he/she is deemed to have rejected the request. Where a request has been rejected, the PIO needs to communicate to the requester: (a) the reasons for such rejection, (b) the period within which an appeal against such rejection may be preferred, and (c) the particulars of the appellate authority. To provide information in the form in which it is sought unless it would disproportionately divert the resources of the public authority or would be detrimental to the safety or preservation of the record in question. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education RIGHT TO INFORMATION ACT, 2005 281 If the PIO allows only partial access, where such part is not exempted from disclosure and such part can be easily severed from the part exempt, the PIO should give a notice to the applicant informing: that only part of the record requested, after severance of the record containing information which is exempt from disclosure, is being provided. S The PIO should give reasons for the decision, including any findings on any material question of fact, referring to the material on which those findings were based; the name and designation of the person giving the decision; the details of the fees calculated by him/her and the amount of fee which the applicant is required to deposit; and his/her rights with respect to review of the decision regarding non-disclosure of part of the information, the amount of fee charged, or the form of access provided. the information sought has been supplied by a third party or is treated as confidential by that third party, the PIO shall give a written notice to the third party within 5 days from the receipt of the request and take its representation into consideration. The third party must be given a chance to make a representation before the PIO within 10 days from the date of receipt of such notice. IM If self assessment Questions a. M 3. A public authority is an authority, body, or institution of self-government. True b. False N 4. The RTI Act seeks to attain the following objectives: a. To set out a practical regime of right to information b. To secure access to information under the control of public authorities c. To promote transparency and accountability in the working of every public authority d. All of the above Activity Find out and discuss the process for filing RTI. 7.4 PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING INFORMATION (SectionS 6 and 7) This RTI Act provides a statutory right to the citizens to inspect documents, works, records, notes, certified copies of documents, etc., relating to the private body or public offices that can be assessed by NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 282 Business Law NOTE During the enquiry of any complaint under the Act, the Commission shall be entitled to examine any record which is under the control of the public authority, and the public authority shall not be entitled to withhold any such record on any grounds. the public authority. The procedure to obtain information under the RTI Act, 2005 starts with making a request in writing or via electronic media in Hindi or English, depending upon the official language of the region/state in which the request is being made along with a fee. The concerned public authority in such cases can be either State PIO or Central PIO. The applicant making a request for information need not provide any reason for requesting the required information except his/her contact details. Applications without fee are straightaway rejected by the public authority. The following factors that need to be considered by an applicant while obtaining the information under the RTI Act: Application: The RTI Act has not prescribed any particular format IM S for seeking information under this law. The request for getting the information is required to be submitted in writing or by using the electronic means in English, Hindi, or the official language of the state. The request should clearly state the information sought for. There is no need to give reasons for seeking the information in the application. Time limit and fees: The time limit for obtaining information is as follows: The time limit of supplying the information is 30 days from the date of receipt of the application. the information relates to the life and liberty of a person, it shall be provided within 48 hours of the receipt of the application. M If N An additional 5 days shall be added to the above-mentioned time limits if the information is to be furnished by the Assistant PIO. If the interest of a third party is involved, then an additional 10 days are to be provided making the total time of response to a total of 40 days. The PIO shall furnish the information free of cost if the above time limits are breached. Fee: The norms for the application are as follows: The application fee must be reasonable and prescribed through a notification from time-to-time. People living below the poverty line should not be charged. The information must be furnished free of cost if the PIO fails to furnish the information within the prescribed time. The applicant has the right to seek a review of the fees charged by the PIO by submitting an application to the appropriate appellate authority. The prescribed fee shall be paid in the form of demand draft, postal order, or in cash for obtaining the information. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education RIGHT TO INFORMATION ACT, 2005 283 Grounds for refusal to provide information: The following are the grounds for the refusal to provide information: If the information is covered under the exemption from disclosure under Section 8. If the information infringes the copyright of any person other than the State as per Section 9. self assessment Questions 5. It is mandatory to mention the reason for which information is required under the Right to Information Act, 2005. a. True b. False S Activity 7.5 IM Visit the RTI Act’s website to find the details of the fee applicable to people living below the poverty line. INFORMATION EXEMPTED FROM DISCLOSURE (Section 8) Information, the disclosure of which would prejudicially affect the following: and integrity of India N Sovereignty Security, M Under the RTI Act, the following types of information are exempted to be provided to the public: strategic, scientific, or economic interests of the state Relations with foreign states or lead to incitement of an offense For instance, in Nusli Wadia, Mumbai vs. Ministry of External Affairs, Appeal No. CIC/OK/A/2008/00245, dated 1st October, 2008, the information about the Jinnah House sought by the appellant was declined on the ground that the disclosure of the information would prejudicially affect the relations of India with a foreign state. Information, which has been expressly forbidden to be published by any court of law, tribunal, or the disclosure of which may constitute contempt of court Information, the disclosure of which would cause a breach of privilege of Parliament or the state legislature Information relating to commercial confidence, trade secrets, or intellectual property, the disclosure of which would harm the competitive position of a third party unless the competent authority is satisfied that larger public interest warrants the disclosure of such information NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 284 Business Law Information available to a person in his/her fiduciary relationship, unless the competent authority is satisfied that the larger public interest warrants the disclosure of such information Information received in confidence from the foreign government Information, the disclosure of which would endanger the life or physical safety of any person or identify the source of information or assistance given in confidence for law enforcement or security purposes Information, which would impede the process of investigation or apprehension or prosecution of offenders Cabinet papers including records of deliberations of the Council of Ministers, Secretaries, and other officers S information, the disclosure of which is not related to any public activity or interest or which would cause unwarranted invasion of the privacy of the individual IM Personal self assessment Questions 6. The Public Information Officer can reject the application: If private rights are affected b. If copyright is to be infringed c. Both a and b d. None of the above M a. N Activity Give examples of the information that is exempted from disclosure. 7.6 INFORMATION COMMISSIONS NOTE A two-tier appeal mechanism is provided under the Act for persons who do not receive information from a PIO or who are aggrieved by a decision of the PIO. An Information Commission is considered as an adjudicator or second appellate authority that manages and approves the disclosure of information under RTI Act. It plays a crucial role in deciding whether to allow or deny the disclosure of information to the applicant. These commissions are the interpreters of public interest as they help the citizens in raising the request for information under the RTI Act. Information Commission have two separate bodies to hear complaints and appeal under the RTI Act—State Information Commission (SIC) and Central Government Commission (CIC). 7.6.1 CENTRAL INFORMATION COMMISSION (CIC) (Chapter III of the Act) ? DID YOU KNOW You can file RTI online by visiting the rtionline.gov.in website. CIC deals with the matter pertaining to public authorities under the central level. The Section 12 of the RTI Act deals with the CIC. The NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education RIGHT TO INFORMATION ACT, 2005 285 headquarter of the CIC is in Delhi. As per Section 12(2), the Central Information Commission (CIC) shall consist of the following members: 1. A Chief Information Commissioner 2. Such number of Central Information Commissioners, not exceeding ten, as may be deemed necessary The Chief Information Commissioner and the Information Commissioners shall be appointed by the President on the recommendation of a committee consisting of the Prime Minister (who shall be the chairperson of the committee), leader of opposition in the Lok Sabha, and Union Cabinet Minister to be nominated by the Prime Minister. S 7.6.2 STATE INFORMATION COMMISSION (SIC) (CHAPTER IV OF THE ACT) The constitution of SIC is provided in Section 15 of the Act. The SIC shall be constituted by the State government, which will consist of the following: IM a. The State Chief Information Commissioner b. Such number of State Information Commissioners, which shall not exceed ten M The State Chief Information Commissioner and State Information Commissioners shall be appointed by the Governor of the State on the recommendation of a committee consisting of the following: a. The Chief Minister, who shall be the chairperson of the committee b. The leader of opposition in the Legislative Assembly N c. The cabinet minister who shall be nominated by the Chief Minister The Central or State Information Commissioner and other commissioners appointed are required to be the persons having varied experience in areas of law, science, technology, social service, management, journalism, mass media, or administration or governance. The Central or State Information Commissioner or other commissioners appointed cannot be the members of Parliament or legislature. They cannot hold any office of profit of any political party. The headquarters of the CIC or SIC shall be based as per the notification in the official gazette and the CIC or SIC may, with the prior approval of the Central or State government (as case may be), establish the office at any other place. The Central or State Information Officer shall hold the office for a term of 5 years from when he/she has entered his/her office and shall not be eligible for re-appointment. 7.6.3 POWERS AND FUNCTIONS OF Information Commissioners (Chapter V of the Act) The powers of both CIC and SIC are contained in Section 18 of the Act. The following are the powers of the Information Commissioners: To conduct an enquiry NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law To exercise the powers of a civil court To examine any record during the enquiry To take disciplinary action against an information officer To impose a monetary penalty The duty of the Information Commissioners involves: Receiving and filing complaints in case of non-appointment of PIO, or refusal to accept the application. The Central and State Information Commissioners are empowered to enquire about the complaint of any person: has not been able to submit a request to the Central/ State PIO either for the reason that no such officer has been appointed under the provisions of this RTI Act or his/her application under this RTI Act has been rejected for further forwarding S Who has been denied access to the information requested under this RTI Act IM Who Who has not been given a response to a request or access to information within the time limit specified Who has been required to pay any fee which he/she feels is unreasonable M Who believes that the information given is completely misleading Who has not been given a response for the information enquired for The Central/State Information Commissioner while enquiring into N 286 the matter shall have the same rights as are available to a court under the Civil Procedure Code, 1908 in respect of the following matters: Summoning or enforcing the attendance of persons and compelling them to give oral or written representation Receiving evidence on affidavits Requisitioning Issuing Any any public record from any court or office summons for the examination of witnesses other matter which may be prescribed 7.6.4 PROCEDURE FOR APPEALING TO CIC AND SIC (Section 19) In case the PIO of a public authority does not supply the information within the specified time or supplies incorrect and incomplete information, the RTI Act has made appeal provisions to enable the citizens to approach the appellate authorities. Making an appeal is a two-step process: (i) appeal is made to the appellate authority and (ii) appeal is made to the appropriate Information Commissioners. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education RIGHT TO INFORMATION ACT, 2005 287 In every public authority, an officer is appointed to hear appeals. This officer is senior in rank to the Central PIO or State PIO, as the case may be, and is referred to as the appellate authority. FIRST APPELLATE AUTHORITY Any person who does not receive the decision within the time limit specified in the RTI Act or who is aggrieved with any of the decisions of the PIO may file an appeal within 30 days from the expiry of such period or from the receipt of the decision to the officer who is senior in rank to the PIO as the case may be who is the First Appellate Authority. However, the aggrieved party may appeal even after 30 days, if sufficient reason is shown for the delay. S SECOND APPELLATE AUTHORITY APPEAL BY A THIRD PARTY IM The second appeal shall be filed within 90 days from the date by which decision should have been made or is actually received. The appeal shall be made before the Information Commissioners. N M An appeal against the order of PIO of disclosing third party information shall be filed by concerned third party before the First Appellate Authority within 30 days from the date of order. Also, where an appeal is filed by an aggrieved party relating to the information of a third party (usually where the PIO initially rejected the application for disclosing information of a third party), then the concerned PIO must send a written notice to such third party within 5 days of receipt of application and give them an opportunity to be heard on why such information shall not be disclosed. DISPOSAL OF APPEAL (SECTION 19(6)) In case an appellate authority decides that more information should be provided to the appellant in addition to what has already been furnished by the PIO, it may either: a. pass an order directing the PIO to give such information to the appellant b. he/she himself may give information to the appellant In the first case, the appellate authority should make sure that the desired information has immediately been supplied to the appellant. TIME LIMIT OF APPEAL The first appellate authority should dispose-off the appeal within 30 days of receipt of the appeal. The appellate authority can also take 45 days to dispose-off the appeal in exceptional cases; however, it should record the reasons for the delay in writing. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law 7.6.5 PENALTIES (Section 20) A penalty of ` 250 per day may be imposed on the PIO by CIC/SIC, as the case may be, till the time the information is furnished for failing to furnish the information on time or for furnishing misleading information. However, the total amount of penalty imposed shall in no case exceed ` 25,000. Further, if CIC/SIC is of the opinion that the PIO has not provided the requisite information due to any mala fide intentions, it can recommend disciplinary action to be taken against the concerned PIO (Section 20). 7.6.6 JURISDICTION M IM S Section 23 of the Act has excluded the jurisdiction of civil courts in respect of any suit, application, or other proceedings filed against any order made under the RTI Act. The complete code for appeal and challenge has been laid out in the Act. The appeal against the decision of the information officer shall be made to the first appellate authority. The second appeal shall be made to the Information Commissioners. However, the orders of the authorities under the Act or the denial of the information can be challenged by way of the writ petition before the High Court or by means of a Special Leave Petition before the Supreme Court in terms of Article 226 or 32, as the case may be. The Supreme Court after reference may remove the State/Central Commissioner and thereupon the Governor or the President, as the case may be, may remove them from their office. 7.6.7 ROLE OF CENTRAL AND STATE GOVERNMENTS The role of the Central government or the State government in the RTI Act, 2005 includes the following: N 288 a. To develop or organise educational programmes to advance the understanding of the public about the provisions of the RTI Act b. To encourage the public authorities to participate in the development and implementation of educational programmes c. To promote timely and effective dissemination of the information by public authorities about their activities d. To train the central/state public information officers and facilitate the provision of relevant training materials self assessment Questions 7. The Chief Information Officer shall have the same rights as specified in: a. Civil Procedure Code, 1908 b. India Evidence Act, 1872 NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education RIGHT TO INFORMATION ACT, 2005 289 c. Negotiable Instrument Act, 1996 d. All of the above 8. The first appellate authority should dispose-off the appeal within ______ of the receipt of the appeal. a. 30 days b. 20 days c. 15 days d. 25 days 9. It is the responsibility of the public information officer of a public authority to supply correct and complete information within the specified time. a. True b. False S 10. The second appeal against the decision of a public information officer shall be made to the: Information Commission b. First appellate authority c. Supreme Court d. Any public office of your choice M Activity IM a. Make a list of the powers held by the Information Commissioners under the RTI Act. N 7.7 IMPACT OF THE RTI ACT, 2005 As mentioned earlier, the Central Government has been playing an active role in the implementation of the provisions of the RTI Act, 2005 in all the states and union territories. It offers all the citizens a statutory right to ask information on issues that affect their lives. The citizens are entitled to know their rights, benefits, and services through the RTI Act, since it becomes easy to get access to reliable, timely, and understandable information on government activities. The impact of RTI is palpable as it aids in mitigating the corruption in public life by fostering transparency and accountability in the functioning of government institutions. Public administrations are more open to scrutiny as their accountability has increased. For instance, RTI exposed that 94% of rice and 87% of wheat for the poor were siphoned by the rationing shopkeepers and food grain officers. Therefore, various steps were taken by the government to streamline the Public Distribution System. This law aims to ensure informed citizenry and transparency of information. It is a people-friendly legislation. It is much easier for citizens to get their passports, ration cards, pension, birth certificates, income NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education NOTE Every state has an Information Commission involving a Chief Information Commissioner and a few information commissioners. Business Law tax refunds, etc. People are massively using the RTI Act to get their work done and they feel empowered. With greater transparency in governance, RTI Act has given a boost to the freedom of speech and expression. All the levels of government, centre, state, or village-level Panchayats should put their record in the public domain. self assessment Questions 11. The impact of RTI is palpable as it aids in mitigating the ___________ in public life by fostering transparency and accountability in the functioning of government institutions. Activity S Research on the Internet and find out how the RTI Act has revealed the scam in the Crawford Market redevelopment issues in Mumbai. IM 7.8 LEADING CASE STUDIES M Reserve Bank of India vs. Jayantilal Mistry (Supreme Court, 2015): The issue, in this case, has been as to whether the Reserve Bank of India can deny providing information pertaining to other banks on the ground of economic interest, commercial confidence, and the fiduciary relationship with other banks. RBI also considered the information sought to be exempt under Section 8(1) (a), (d), and (e) of the Act. It was further contended that as the regulator and supervisor of the banking system in the country, the disclosure of information is barred in view of public interest. In delivering the judgement, the Supreme Court observed that RBI is supposed to uphold public interest and not the interest of individual banks. RBI neither has a fiduciary relationship with any of the banks nor is it legally bound to further the benefit of any public or private sector bank. There is not even a relationship of ‘trust’ between them. Instead, the RBI has the statutory duty to uphold public interest in addition to safeguarding the interests of the depositors, the country’s economy, and the banking sector as a whole. Consequently, the RBI must act with transparency and desist from hiding information that might embarrass individual banks. It is obligatory for it to comply with the provisions of the RTI Act and to disclose the information sought by the respondents herein. If the information is available with a regulatory agency with which RBI does not have a fiduciary relationship, it cannot withhold the disclosure of the same. N 290 Girish Ramchandra Deshpande vs. CIC & Ors. (Supreme Court, 2012): The Apex Court had held that the details disclosed by a person in his/her income tax returns constitute ‘personal information’ which is exempt from disclosure under Section 8(1) (j) of the Act. Such kind of personal information cannot be disclosed except in case where the Central PIO or the State PIO or the Appellate Authority is satisfied that disclosure of such information will aid in the larger public interest. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education RIGHT TO INFORMATION ACT, 2005 291 Harinder Dhingra vs. Bar Associations, Rewari, Faridabad, Panchkula (CIC, 2016): The case involved the seeking of information regarding the number of complaints against the advocates for violation of the Advocates Act, 1961 and the number of advocates who had violated the provisions of Advocates Act, 1961. To this, the CIC held that the Bar Council is a statutory body. It has been constituted under the Advocates Act, 1961 to protect and maintain the ethical standards of advocates and to admonish the members for misconduct. Since such information forms the core function of the Bar Council, it cannot be denied to the appellant as it does not fall within the ambit of exemption under the RTI Act. self assessment Questions True b. False Activity IM a. S 12. Section 8 of the RTI Act, 2005 relates to the exemption from disclosure of information. 7.9 Summary Right to Information (RTI) Act was passed ‘to provide for setting out the practical regime of right to information for citizens’. The main aim of the Act is to provide secure access to information for promoting transparency and accountability. N The M Using the Internet, find out about the role played by PIO with respect to the RTI Act. The main objective of the RTI Act is setting up of a practical regime where citizens can have secure access to information that is under the control of public authorities in order to promote transparency and accountability in the working of public authorities. Every public authority, within 100 days of enactment of the RTI Act, shall designate the Central Public Information Officers (Central PIO) or the State Public Information Officers (State PIO) in respective public or administrative offices. The procedure for obtaining the information under the RTI Act involves four main steps—Application, Time limit, Fee, and Grounds for rejection. In accordance with the doctrine of severability, only the part of the record that does not contain any information which is exempt from disclosure and can reasonably be severed from the part containing the exempt information may be provided to the applicant. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education S Business Law Section 12 of the RTI Act provides that the Central government shall, by notification in the Official Gazette, constitute a body which shall be known as Central Information Commission (CIC) to exercise the powers and to perform the functions assigned to it under the Act. The general superintendence, direction, and management of the affairs of the CIC shall vest in the Chief Information Commissioner. The State Information Commissioner and other commissioners appointed are required to be the persons having varied experience in areas of law, science, technology, social service, management, journalism, mass media, or administration or governance. The powers of the Central and State Information Commissions are contained in Section 18 of the RTI Act. S In case the PIO of a public authority does not supply the information IM within the specified time or supplies incorrect and incomplete information, the RTI Act has made appeal provisions to enable the citizens to approach the appellate authorities. A penalty of ` 250 per day may be imposed on the PIO by the Central/State Information Commission, as the case may be, till the time the information is furnished for failing to furnish the information on time or for furnishing misleading information. People are massively using the RTI Act to get their work done and M they feel empowered. With greater transparency in the governance, RTI Act has given a boost to the freedom of speech and expression. key words N 292 Appropriate government: The public authority that is owned, controlled, or substantially financed by the respective Central or State government Information: Any information in the form of documents, memos, mails, logbooks, contracts, etc. Official gazette: A official journal in which the government publishes public information Public Information Officer: An officer appointed at the Central or State level, as the case may be, to provide information to citizens about its organisation and its functioning ? 7.10 Descriptive Questions 1. What is the main aim of the RTI Act? List some of its features. 2. Discuss the main obligations of a public authority. 3. List the various duties assigned to a public information officer. 4. Describe the procedure of obtaining information under the RTI Act. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education RIGHT TO INFORMATION ACT, 2005 293 5. Explain the role of the Central Information Commission. 6. Write a detailed note on the impact of RTI Act, 2005. 7.11 Answers and Hints ANSWERS FOR SELF ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS Topic Q. No. a. public 2. transparency and accountability 3. a. True 4. d. All of the above Procedure for Obtaining Information (Sections 6 and 7) 5. b. False Information Exempted from Disclosure (Section 8) 6. Public Authorities (Chapter II of the Act) Information Commissions (ICs) 7. 8. Impact of the RTI Act, 2005 a. Civil Procedure Code, 1908 a. 30 days a. True 10. a. Information Commission 11. corruption 12. a. True N Leading Case Studies c. Both a and b M 9. S 1. IM The Right to Information (RTI) Act, 2005 Answer HINTS FOR DESCRIPTIVE QUESTIONS 1. The Right to Information Act was passed ‘to provide for setting out the practical regime of right to information for citizens’. Refer to Section 7.2 The Right to Information (RTI) Act, 2005 2. The main aim or objective of this RTI Act is to set up a practical regime where citizens can get secure access to the information which is under the public authorities control to encourage transparency and accountability in the public authorities working. Refer to Section 7.2 The Right to Information (RTI) Act, 2005 3. Public Information Officers are required to furnish the necessary information as demanded by the public. Refer to Section 7.3 Public Authorities (Chapter II of the Act) 4. The procedure for obtaining the information under the RTI Act involves four main steps: Application, Time limit, Fee, and Grounds for rejection. Refer to Section 7.4 Procedure for Obtaining Information (Sections 6 and 7) 5. Section 12 of the RTI Act provides that the Central government shall, by notification in the Official Gazette, constitute a body NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law which shall be known as Central Information Commission to exercise the powers and to perform the functions assigned to it under the RTI Act. Refer to Section 7.6 Information Commissions (ICs) 6. The impact of RTI Act is palpable as it aids in mitigating the corruption in public life by fostering transparency and accountability in the functioning of government institutions. Refer to Section. 7.7 Impact of the RTI Act, 2005 7.12 Suggested Readings & References Suggested Readings Galgotia. S; Singhal, K. (2006). Indian business laws. New Delhi: S Aggarwal, Padhi, P. (2013). Legal aspects of business. New Delhi: PHI Learning. R; Bagavathi. (2010). Business law. New Delhi: S. Chand. IM Pillai, Tulsian, P. (2014). Business law. New Delhi: McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited. E-REFERENCES (2020). Retrieved 4 May 2020, from http://nromoef.gov.in/Guide%20 M For%20the%20Public%20Authorities.pdf (2020). Retrieved 4 May 2020, from https://cic.gov.in/sites/default/ files/Impact%20of%20the%20Right%20to%20Information%20Act. pdf N 294 aburman, V. (2020). What entities are public authorities under the RTI Act?. Retrieved 4 May 2020, from https://anirudhburman. org/2013/09/27/publicauthoritiesunderthertiact/ NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education C h 8 a pt e r COMPETITION ACT, 2000 IM Introduction Competition—What and Why 8.2.1 Need for a Competition Policy 8.2.2 Genesis of Competition Law Comparison of the US and Indian Competition Laws 8.2.3 Self Assessment Questions Activity Competition Act, 2002 8.3 8.3.1 Objectives of the Competition Act, 2002 8.3.2 Features of the Competition Act, 2002 8.3.3 Acquisition Self Assessment Questions Activity 8.4 Anti-competitive Agreements 8.4.1 Vertical Agreements 8.4.2 Horizontal Agreements Cartels 8.4.3 8.4.4 Bid Rigging Self Assessment Questions Activity 8.5 Competition Commission of India (CCI) 8.5.1 Composition of CCI Powers and Jurisdiction of the CCI 8.5.2 8.5.3 Inquiry into Certain Agreement and Dominant Position of Enterprises 8.5.4 Powers and Jurisdiction of the Director General Procedure for Enquiry into the Complaints (Section 19) 8.5.5 8.5.6Anti-competitive Acts taking place Outside India but having Adverse Effect on Competition in India (Section 32) N M 8.1 8.2 S Contents NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law CONTENTS Enforcement Powers of CCI Self Assessment Questions Activity 8.6 Combination Regulation of Combinations (Section 6) 8.6.1 8.6.2Factors to be considered in Determination of Adverse Effect of Combination on Competition in Relevant Market (Section 20(4)) Self Assessment Questions Activity 8.7 Penalties Imposed Under the Competition Act, 2002 Self Assessment Questions Activity Leading Cases under the Competition Law in India 8.8 Self Assessment Questions Activity Summary 8.9 Descriptive Questions 8.10 Answers and Hints 8.11 8.12 Suggested Readings and References M IM S 8.5.7 N 296 NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education COMPETITION ACT, 2000 Introductory Caselet ABUSE OF DOMINANCE N M IM S M.P. Mehrotra alleged Jet Airways and Kingfisher for entering into an anti-competitive alliance. These airlines have entered into an alliance in October 2008. This alliance has lessened the competition in the market as two dominant airlines proposed cooperation in order to reduce cost and increase services. Such practices affect the market position of other players negatively as the combined market share is approximately 60% of both the airlines. Such instance is termed as the ‘abuse of dominance’. However, both the airlines have argued that the alliance was performed due to the global recession in order to foster joint fuel management, common ground handling and cross-selling of flight tickets. Their aim was to increase operational and commercial cooperation. However, these airlines were alleged for the violation of Sections 3 and 4 of the Competition Act as they formed a cartel by dominating the market share and hampering the competitor’s market and profit share. The Competition Commission of India (CCI) held both the airlines responsible for violating Sections 3 and 4 of the Act because such tricks of the trade can lessen the competition within the market. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Case Objective This caselet relates to stopping anti-competitive practices. 297 Business Law Learning objectives After studying this chapter, you will be able to: Explain the meaning of the term competition Understand the origin of competition law Compare the competition laws of the US and India Highlight the objectives and features of the Competition Act, 2002 Describe various types of anti-competitive agreements including vertical agreements and horizontal agreements Discuss the role of Competition Commission of India (CCI), its composition, powers, and jurisdiction Explain the role of Director General, his/her powers and jurisdiction Explain the meaning of combinations Examine how combinations are regulated Identify the factors that are considered while determining an Appreciably Adverse Effect on Competition (AAEC) in the relevant market List the penalties imposed under Competition Act, 2002 >> >> >> >> >> >> IM >> >> >> S >> M >> 8.1 INTRODUCTION Quick Revision In the previous chapter, you studied about the Right to Information (RTI) Act, 2005 and its objectives. You also studied about public authorities, the procedure for obtaining information, information that is exempted from disclosure, the role of Information Commissions (ICs) and the impact of the RTI Act, 2005. This chapter discusses the Competition Act, 2000 which governs competition policies and practices in the Indian market. N 298 Competition refers to a situation that exists in a market in which organisations and sellers attract buyers independently for achieving some business objectives such as increasing profits or increasing sales, increasing turnover or increasing the market share. However, in order to gain maximum market share and other objectives, organisations usually resort to various strategies and tactics. At times, these tactics may also be of a nature that hinders fair competition in the market and creates a market situation in which the players do not get a level playing field. If all big players collude and engage in such anti-competitive practices, it creates a situation of disadvantage for all other players in the market. In order to ensure that organisations do not indulge in any anti-competitive practices, the governments of all countries enact laws that can help them in dealing with all such cases of anti-competition laws. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education COMPETITION ACT, 2000 The Indian legislature had also passed the Competition Act, 2002. This Competition Act, 2002 defines various anti-competitive practices such as entering into anti-competitive agreements, abuse of dominant position and combinations. The different authorities involved, penalties and punishments for violations and the procedure using which the authorities decide whether or not violation has indeed taken place are all described under this Competition Act, 2002. In this chapter, you will study about the importance of competition, the role of competition policy and competition laws in India. You will also study about the Competition Act, 2002 (which is the competition law of India) and its various aspects. 8.2 COMPETITION—WHAT AND WHY IM S Business competition is a condition wherein organisations in the same industry engage or participate in an attempt to gain or win something by establishing superiority over others. While doing business, business owners have to face competition in every form such as price, quality, design, sales, location, etc. In markets, competition can be direct, indirect or potential. M Competition is not necessarily negative; in fact, healthy competition among organisations is actually good for businesses. For example, competition helps in keeping the prices of products under control. Competition is important for organisations as it helps to: Encourage organisations to find out about the actual needs, wants, and demands of customers organisations to serve customers better than their competitors in a bid to gain maximum market share N Motivate Analyse the strengths and weaknesses of organisations to compete aggressively and gain more market share Create an optimum combination of product offerings that would satisfy the needs of customers Focus on making more efforts with respect to marketing, branding, customer service and customer retention Inculcate a culture of innovation and improve the existing products Encourage businesses to learn about the working of markets, positioning brands how to produce and sell efficiently, and so on Provide various options to customers to choose from Increase the demand for goods, which encourages competitors to develop more unique products Find its areas of competitive advantage NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 299 300 Business Law 8.2.1 NEED FOR A COMPETITION POLICY In simple terms, a competition policy refers to the legal framework or structure that the government of any country establishes to regulate markets and monopoly organisations. The main aim of the competition policy of any country is to maintain healthy competition and protect individual competitors. A competition policy involves rules to ensure that businesses compete fairly with each other. Unfair competition usually involves the use of certain unfair business practices which can harm other businesses. A few advantages of competition policy are: Controlled or reduced price quality Increased choice for consumers Increased innovation S Improved IM A competition policy also enhances consumer welfare by controlling practices that could restrict healthy competition. The rationale for having a competition policy is to: Prevent organisations from undertaking activities that can harm competition and consumer welfare monopolies M Curb Promote healthy competition Regulate how businesses are conducted N Create a level playing field and promoting effective competition Encourage businesses to compete on the basis of their strengths as against anti-competitive agreements and/or conduct Make it for weaker businesses which require that profitable businesses forgo their market share 8.2.2 Know More Articles 38 and 39 of the Constitution of India address the competition law. GENESIS OF COMPETITION LAW In India, no formal competition policy or competition law existed prior to independence. However, after India gained independence in 1947, the government started regulating competition among businesses by using policies, laws, rules, regulations and executive orders; and this continued till 1969 when the Indian government enacted the Monopolies and Restrictive Trade Practices (MRTP) Act, 1969. In 1990-91, the liberalisation, privatisation and globalisation reforms were implemented, which led to the opening up of the Indian economy. Following these reforms, the MRTP Act, 1969 was repealed and the new competition law called the Competition Act, 2002 was enacted. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education COMPETITION ACT, 2000 301 The MRTP Act, 1969 was the first competition law of India that defined restrictive trade practices. However, this law was not adequate for promoting competition and trade, and reducing anti-competitive practices. The MRTP Act, 1969 was based on the following laws: Sherman Clayton Act of the US Study Hint Act of the US The Monopolies and Restrictive Trade Practices (Inquiry and Control) Act, 1948 of the UK The Resale Prices Act, 1964 of the UK The Restrictive Trade Practices Act, 1964 of the UK US Federal Trade Commission Act, 1914 as amended in 1938 of Canada Combines Investigation Act, 1910 of Canada IM The S The The MRTP Act, 1969 was meant to regulate the concentration of economic power, competition law and consumer protection. This Act was applicable to almost all areas of business such as production, distribution, pricing, investment, procurement, packaging, advertising, sales promotion, mergers, amalgamations, takeovers, undertakings, etc. M The primary objectives of the MRTP Act were: prevent the concentration of economic power To control monopolies To prohibit monopolistic, restrictive and unfair trade practices N To The MRTP Act underwent various amendments, the most important of them being in the years 1984 and 1991. Despite various amendments, the Indian government felt a need for a new competition law. In 1999, then Finance Minister, Yashwant Sinha, stated that “The MRTP Act has become obsolete in certain areas in the light of international economic developments relating to competition laws. We need to shift our focus from curbing monopolies to promoting competition. The Government has decided to appoint a committee to examine this range of issues and propose a modern competition law suitable for our conditions”. In October 1999, the Indian government set up the Raghavan Committee to give its recommendations for modernising the competition law in line with global developments. This committee was set up to suggest the legislative framework, which may entail a new law or suitable amendments in the MRTP Act, 1969. The Raghavan Committee presented its report to the government in May 2000. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education The Resale Prices Acts 1964, a body of UK legislation providing for the control of RESALE PRICE MAINTENANCE (RPM) by suppliers of a product. Business Law The Raghavan Committee suggested the preparation of a new and improved competition law. Thereafter, the Government of India presented the new draft competition law in November 2000 and this competition bill was introduced in the Parliament. This bill was referred to the Standing Committee. Based on the recommendations of the standing committee, the Competition Act, 2002 was enacted on 13th January, 2003. The MRTP Act was repealed and was replaced with the Competition Act, 2002, with effect from 1st September 2009. 8.2.3 COMPARISON OF THE US AND INDIAN COMPETITION LAWS S The US was the first to employ a system of competition law, whereas India has enacted antitrust laws in the recent past. India has created an extremely institutional environment and a coherent competition law. IM The US Competitive Law regime is based on three statutes, which are as follows: Act: The Sherman Antitrust Act of 1890 states that contracts in restraint of trade and contracts that attempt to create a monopoly are not valid. As per this law, only those contracts that are unreasonably in restraint of trade are prohibited. This law was enacted to prevent any unreasonable contract, combination, or conspiracy in restraint of trade and monopolisation, attempted monopolisation or conspiracy or combination to monopolise. Any organisation or individual that violates this law can be fined up to $100 million (for organisations) and $1 million (for individuals) along with a prison sentence of up to 10 years. M Sherman N 302 Clayton Act: This Act was enacted to address certain areas not addressed by the Sherman Antitrust Act. The scope of this law is as follows: Preventing mergers and acquisitions that may substantially lessen the competition or tend to create a monopoly Preventing discriminatory prices, services and allowances in dealings between merchants, requiring large firms to notify the government of possible mergers and acquisitions The Federal Trade Commission Act: This law bans all unfair methods of competition and deceptive acts or practices. In the US, there are six institutions that help in implementing the competition law of US, which are as follows: The Department of Justice Juries The Federal Trade Commission Private The Courts State NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Parties Attorney Journals COMPETITION ACT, 2000 303 In the case of India, the antitrust law is the Competition Act, 2002. The institutions that help in implementing the competition law of India include the following: Competition National Commission of India Company Law Appellate Tribunal (NCLAT) Supreme Court Competition Commission of India, the National Company Law Appellate Tribunal (NCLAT) and the Supreme Court. self assessment Questions a. True b. False S 1. The Clayton Act of 1890 states that contracts in the restraint of trade and contracts that attempt to create monopoly are valid. a. Wider choice for consumers b. Reduced competition c. Decreased prices Activity M d. Improved quality IM 2. Which of the following is not a sign of healthy competition policy? N Find out which of the countries have the strongest and weakest competition policy. 8.3 COMPETITION ACT, 2002 The Competition Act, 2002 was enacted on 13th January, 2003 to regulate and govern competition and related practices in India. It includes a set of criminal and civil provisions that help in preventing anti-competitive practices in the Indian market. The Competition Act, 2002 regulates combinations (acquisition, acquiring of control, merger, and acquisition). There are three negative instances that are curbed out with the help of the Competition Act. The first is when the existing enterprises enter into an agreement among themselves in order to limit competition in the market; the second is the abuse of dominant position in the market segment; and the last is the merger of two or more enterprises leading to the formation of monopolies. This law came into force to restrict practices having an adverse effect on competition. There are four major elements of the Competition Act, 2002, which are as follows: 1. Anti-competitive Agreements (Section 3) 2. Abuse of Dominant Position (Section 4) NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education ? DID YOU KNOW With the rapid pace of international economic development, the focus of competition law has shifted from curbing monopolies to the promotion of competition. Business Law 3. Combination Regulations (Sections 5 and 6) 4. Competition Advocacy (Section 49) 8.3.1 OBJECTIVES OF THE COMPETITION ACT, 2002 The Competition Act, 2002 is based on the philosophy of modern competition laws. It prohibits anti-competitive agreements and abuse of the dominant position by organisations. The Act also regulates combinations (acquisition, acquiring of control, merger, and acquisition), which may lead to appreciable adverse effects on competition in India. This Act ensures the adequate promotion and sustainability of competition. Some important objectives of the Competition Act, 2002 are as follows: provide a legal framework for ensuring the implementation of competition policies S To prevent anti-competitive practices To penalise organisations engaging in any such acts To protect free and fair competition and freedom of trade To protect the interests of consumers To prevent monopolies To prevent needless intervention by the government M IM To To establish the Competition Commission of India (CCI) 8.3.2 FEATURES OF THE COMPETITION ACT, 2002 Features of the Competition Act, 2002 Figure 8.1 shows major features of the Competition Act, 2002: N 304 Prohibits Anti-Competitive Agreements Prohibits Abuse of Dominant Position Provides for Regulation of Combinations Enjoins Competition Advocacy Figure 8.1: Features of the Competition Act, 2002 Let us now study these features of the Competition Act, 2002 in detail. Prohibits anti-competitive agreements (Section 3): An agreement is considered anti-competitive if it causes or may potentially cause an adverse effect on competition. An important feature of the Competition Act, 2002 is to prohibit anti-competitive agreements such as tie-in arrangements, exclusive supply and distribution agreements, etc. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education COMPETITION ACT, 2000 Prohibits abuse of dominant position (Section 4): The abuse of a dominant position means that an organisation or a group of organisations which is in a superior or dominant position in a certain market engages in acts which might be aimed at one of the following: Eliminating Deterring the future entry by new competitors Preventing tion or disciplining competitors competition or creating a kind of monopoly situa- Examples of abuse of dominant position include indulging in unfair or discriminatory conditions or restricting the production of goods or services and restricting market access. S Provides for regulation of combinations (Section 6): In the context IM of businesses, combination may refer to any type of corporate restructuring such as merger, amalgamation, acquisition of shares, acquiring of control, etc. M If one organisation (or a group of organisations) is able to regulate combinations, it can potentially cause adverse effect on competition within the concerned market. The Competition Act, 2002 also regulates operations and activities of combinations. It is important to note that the operation of this Act is not limited to combination transactions within India but it also regulates combination transactions that take place outside India. competition advocacy (Section 49): Under the Competition Act, 2002, the CCI has been entrusted with various tasks such as facilitating competition advocacy, creating awareness and providing training. The term ‘competition advocacy’ refers to all the activities carried out by the CCI that aim at promoting competition. Apart from this, the basic task of the CCI is to enforce the competition law. N Enjoins 8.3.3 Acquisition To understand competition we need to understand the definition of the Acquisition as below: ACQUISITION According to Section 2 (a), acquisition means, directly or indirectly, acquiring or agreeing to acquire— (i) shares, voting rights, or assets of any enterprise; or (ii) control over management or control over assets of any enterprise. In simple terms, acquisition is a kind of corporate restructuring wherein an organisation acquires all or majority number of shares of another organisation. As a result, the acquiring organisation gains NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 305 Business Law control over the acquired assets or organisation. For example, a social media start-up ShareChat has recently acquired a meme-sharing app Memer. APPRECIABLE ADVERSE EFFECTS ON COMPETITION (AAEC) This term, Appreciable Adverse Effects on Competition (AAEC), is not defined in the Competition Act, 2002; only references have been made to it. It has already been mentioned that one of the primary objectives of the Competition Act, 2002 is to establish the CCI; and it is the responsibility of the CCI to prevent practices that have an adverse effect on competition. IM S Section 3 (1) of the Competition Act, 2002 states that no enterprise or association of enterprises or person or association of persons shall enter into any agreement in respect of production, supply, distribution, storage, acquisition, or control of goods or provision of services, which causes or is likely to cause an appreciable adverse effect on competition within India. There are no clear instructions or rules which can be used to state whether an agreement causes or is likely to cause AAEC. However, Section 19 (3) of the Competition Act, 2002 lists certain factors that the CCI must consider while determining whether or not an agreement has an AAEC. These factors are: M creation driving of barriers to new entrants in the market; existing competitors out of the market; foreclosure accrual N 306 of competition by hindering entry into the market; of benefits to consumers; improvements of services; or in production or distribution of goods or provision promotion of technical, scientific, and economic development by means of production or distribution of goods or provision of services Public Sector Undertaking (PSU) The Public Sector Undertakings are statutory organisations where majority stake is held by government. It is relevant to discuss the enforcement of competition law on PSUs. In India, PSUs are engaged in two kinds of functions, namely sovereign functions and non-sovereign functions. The Competition Act, 2002 can be applied only to the non-sovereign functions of the PSUs. Competition Appellate Tribunal (COMPAT) The central government has established the National Company Law Appellate Tribunal (‘NCLAT’, an Appellate Tribunal), also known as NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education COMPETITION ACT, 2000 the Competition Appellate Tribunal (COMPAT) in accordance with Section 53A of the Competition Act, 2002. The two main objectives and purpose of the Act are as follows: To hear and dispose any appeals against any directions issued or decisions or orders passed by the CCI To adjudicate on the claim for compensation that may arise from the findings of the CCI In May 2017, the central government dissolved the CAT and replaced it with NCLAT. Now, NCLAT is the appellate body that works under the Competition Act, 2002. The right to appeal to NCLAT remains unchanged. It is also the relevant authority to seek compensation under the Competition Act, 2002. S GROUP Exercise IM According to the Competition Act, 2002, a group refers to two or more enterprises which may directly or indirectly are in a position to do one of the following: 20% or more of the voting rights in the other enterprise Appoint more than 50% of the members of the Board of directors in the other enterprise the management or affairs of the other enterprise PREDATORY PRICING M Control N Predatory price has been defined under Section 4 of the Competition Act, 2002. It refers to selling of goods or services at a price that is even below the cost of producing them. By selling goods at predatory prices, large groups or organisations usually aim at reducing or eliminating their competitors. ANTITRUST LAW Antitrust law is nothing but another name for competition laws enacted by the government of any country. The objective of establishing antitrust law is to protect consumers from predatory pricing and ensuring existence of fair competition in markets. In India, the Competition Act, 2002 is the antitrust law. MONOPOLY A monopoly is a type of market that exists when a specific person or enterprise is the only supplier of a particular commodity. Section 19 empowers the Commission to inquire whether an organisation enjoys a monopoly or a dominant position. It is one of the primary objectives of the Competition Act, 2002, to prevent the monopoly organisation NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 307 Business Law from engaging in unfair trade practices that impact consumers negatively. PERFECT COMPETITION Perfect competition refers to a hypothetical market structure where competition exists at its highest possible level. If such a market structure exists in reality, perfect competition will help in producing the best possible outcomes for consumers and society. Some of the important characteristics of perfect competition are as follows: Large number of producers Large number of consumers Entry are price takers S Producers and exit are easy IM When there are a large number of players, no market participant can affect market prices. If any market player attempts to change market dynamics, the buyers can go for any of the available alternatives. M When an organisation is able to act independently of market forces, it achieves a dominant position. In a perfectly competitive market, no single organisation can determine the price of the product. It must be remembered that perfect competition is an ideal condition and not reality. Taking an account of all these conditions, the Competition Act, 2002 specifies various factors that the CCI takes into account while determining if an organisation is dominant or not. N 308 OLIGOPOLY An oligopoly is a type of market structure wherein there are only a few producers who constitute a dominant majority of the market system. Oligopoly players do enjoy certain pricing power but not as much as in the case of monopoly. The oligopoly market needs to be regulated by the government and the competition law because if the government does not regulate it, the oligopolists may collude with each other in order to control prices and markets. MONOPOLISTIC COMPETITION Monopolistic competition is a type of market structure wherein there are many producers but all of them sell differentiated products. The differentiation is done by differing branding, quality, etc. This differs from a monopoly where different products offered by different producers are perfect substitutes of each other. In monopolistic competition, goods are not perfect substitutes for each other. This type of market system is a combination of monopoly and perfect competition. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education COMPETITION ACT, 2000 RELEVANT MARKET At times, the CCI may require determining what a relevant market is under the Competition Act, 2002. The Act states that for determining whether a market constitutes a relevant market, the CCI shall have due regard to the relevant geographic market and relevant product market. The Act defines the relevant market as the market which may be determined by the commission with reference to the relevant product market or the relevant geographic market or with reference to both the markets. S The Competition Act, 2002 defines the relevant geographic market as a market comprising the area in which the conditions of competition for supply of goods or provision of services or demand of goods or services are distinctly homogenous and can be distinguished from the conditions prevailing in the neighbouring areas. IM The Competition Act, 2002 defines the relevant product market as a market comprising all those products or services which are regarded as interchangeable or substitutable by the consumer, by reason of characteristics of the products or services, their prices, and intended use. self assessment Questions a. Section 2 b. Section 3 N c. Section 4 M 3. Which section of the Competition Act, 2002 deals with the abuse of dominant position? d. Sections 5 and 6 4. Under the Competition Act, 2002, the CCI has been entrusted with various tasks such as __________, creating awareness, and providing training. 5. The Competition Act, 2002 prohibits any agreement that is related to the production, supply, distribution, storage, and acquisition or control of goods or services and which has caused or may potentially cause an __________. 6. The CCI consists of a Chairperson and not less than two and not more than 6 members which are appointed by the central government. a. True b. False Activity Find out the instances of rigged bidding in the recent past in the Indian market. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 309 Business Law 8.4 ANTI-COMPETITIVE AGREEMENTS Section 3 of the Competition Act, 2002 relates to the prohibition of anti-competitive agreements. The anti-competitive agreements are the types of agreements that unduly benefit a person or group and which might harm competition in any particular market. All such agreements are prohibited under Competition Act, 2002. S As per section 3(1) of the Competition Act, 2002, no enterprise or association of enterprises or person or association of persons shall enter into any agreement in respect of production, supply, distribution, storage, acquisition, or control of goods or provision of services, which causes or is likely to cause an appreciable adverse effect on competition within India. If any agreement violates Section 3(1) of this Competition Act, 2002, it would be void. IM Based on the provisions contained in Sections 3(3) and 3(4), the anti-competitive agreements can be classified into horizontal agreements and vertical agreements. 8.4.1 VERTICAL AGREEMENTS M Vertical agreements are the types of agreements that are formed among non-competing enterprises or individuals working at different stages or levels of production in respect of production, supply, distribution, storage, sale or price of goods, etc. Such agreements among manufacturers and wholesalers can adversely affect competition in the market and are known as vertical anti-competitive agreements. Various types of vertical agreements as per Competition Act are as follows: N 310 Tie-in arrangement: A tie-in arrangement means any agreement that requires a purchaser of goods to purchase some other goods as a condition for such purchase. For such an arrangement, the purchaser of certain goods must purchase some goods along with the goods required by him/her as a precondition for effecting the primary purchase. Such tie-in agreements are used by sellers to increase their sale and earn more profit. For example, a pencil manufacturer and seller agrees to sell pencils to a customer only if the customer purchases sharpeners also. Exclusive agreement: An exclusive agreement may be of two types—exclusive supply agreement and exclusive distribution agreement. Under exclusive supply agreement, the supplier restricts the purchaser of the goods from acquiring or dealing in goods other than those offered by the supplier. Such agreements are entered into by a seller or supplier because he/she enjoys a dominant position in the market. For example, an automobile manufacturer purchases engines from a particular supplier and he/she enters NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education COMPETITION ACT, 2000 into an agreement with the supplier that he/she would not make the same engine for any other buyer. Under exclusive distribution agreement, restrictions are imposed on the supply of certain goods which may limit the availability of the goods. At times, such restrictions with respect to allocation of any area or market or sale of goods are also covered under this Competition Act, 2002. price maintenance: Any agreement to sell goods on condition that the prices to be charged on the resale by the purchaser shall be the prices stipulated by the seller unless it is clearly stated that prices lower than those prices may be charged is called resale price maintenance. In simple words, resale price maintenance involves any attempt by an upstream supplier to control or maintain the minimum price at which a product can be resold by a customer. Such restrictions ensure that the resellers do not compete too fiercely which leads to lower profits. If an agreement prescribes that a product is resold at a specific margin or limits, the discount offered by a reseller restricts a reseller’s ability to set a price; such agreements are prohibited. to deal: Any agreement that restricts or may potentially restrict the persons or classes of persons to whom goods are sold or from whom goods are bought are prohibited under the Act. Such agreements are considered as anti-competitive. 8.4.2 M Refusal IM S Resale HORIZONTAL AGREEMENTS N Horizontal agreements are agreements that are entered into by two or more competing businesses working at the same level in the market, and the purpose of such agreements is to ensure that all businesses cooperate and manipulate competition among all competitors in the market. The businesses cooperate with respect to pricing, production, and distribution of the products. Such agreements are presumed to be anti-competitive due to their pernicious effect on competition. Various types of horizontal agreements are discussed as follows: Fix prices: Price fixing is one type of horizontal agreement wherein two or more competitors collude to increase, decrease, fix or stabilise prices in a specific market. In this way, businesses are able to manipulate the prices, which cause an unfair advantage to them. When price manipulation leads to setting same prices on their products, it negatively affects others in the marketplace. Limit or control production supply: Two or more businesses may enter into an agreement to limit or control the production output. The production output is fixed by fixing a particular production level or setting quotas for production. For example, competing producers of antiseptic liquid meet and allocate annual NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 311 312 Business Law sales volume ration amongst themselves as the idea being gaining control over the market. Allocate customer/products/territories or market division agreements or market-sharing: At times, two or more businesses may enter into an agreement with one another to share market in terms of customers they serve, the products they produce and the territories they serve. In other words, businesses may restrict their sales of goods and services to certain geographic areas. This leads to the development of monopoly which is an anti-competitive activity. 8.4.3 S A cartel refers to an association of organisations that work in the same industry and they collude with each other for preventing, restricting, reducing or eliminating competition. Such a collusive agreement may be explicit or tacit in nature. Businesses involved in a cartel take decisions or steps which would help them to dominate the market and control market prices. Such collusive decisions lead to the creation of a monopoly or a duopoly. IM ? DID YOU KNOW The association of organisations on a horizontal arrangement are known as cartels. CARTELS M Most cartels and collusive agreements are illegal. When cartels are able to convert the perfectly competitive market into a monopoly or a duopoly, they gain control over all critical business areas such as pricing and market control. Collusive agreements usually lead to anti-competitive practices such as price-fixing and market-sharing. Such practices are aimed at reducing output and raising prices. N Cartels may also indulge in making decisions that lead to misallocation of resources. For instance, cartels may willfully create an artificial shortage of goods or services demanded by customers. Most cartels are illegal; however, export cartels in most countries and at international level are legal. For example, the Organisation of the Petroleum Exporting Countries (OPEC) is a legal international cartel. 8.4.4 ? DID YOU KNOW Bid rigging is an unfair trade practice of making secret agreements, where the firms agree not to compete against each other in the market. BID RIGGING Bid rigging is an illegal practice or agreement created between different organisations or persons that are engaged in production of identical or similar products or trading of services which leads to eliminating or reducing competition for bids. It adversely affects or manipulates the bidding process. Under bid rigging, different competing parties collude with each other and choose a winner of the bidding process by making all competitors submit uncompetitive bids. Rigged bidding creates an illusion of real bidding even though the result of bidding is already predetermined. Due to this manipulation, competitors do not get a fair chance for participating in the bidding process which creates a case of unfair competition. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education COMPETITION ACT, 2000 313 The Competition Commission of India has the power to prohibit such anti-competitive agreements which involve bid rigging. Bid rigging involves the submission of non-competitive bids that are submitted by organisations with the help of corrupt officials and a set of orchestrated collusive activities. There are three major types of bid rigging, which are as follows: 1. Cover bidding: It is also known as complementary bidding. Under cover bidding, a group of bidders submit collusive bids so that some other bidder can win the contract. S 2. Bid suppression: It occurs when many bidders agree not to bid or they withdraw their bids. This is done in order to make a particular bidder win the bid. IM 3. Bid rotation: It refers to a process wherein all bidders take turns to submit a low bid with an intention to make each bidder win on a rotational basis. self assessment Questions M 7. Under_____________, the supplier restricts the purchaser of the goods from acquiring or dealing in goods other than those offered by the supplier. 8. Which of the following is not a vertical agreement? a. Price fixing b. Tie-in agreement N c. Exclusive distribution agreement d. Resale price maintenance Activity Find out about the cartels which were recently in news. 8.5 COMPETITION COMMISSION OF INDIA (CCI) The Competition Commission of India (CCI) is the regulatory authority that oversees competition in Indian market. It was established with an aim to enforce the Competition Act, 2002. This Act was amended by the Competition (Amendment) Act, 2007. This amended Act led to the establishment of the CCI. The primary objective of the CCI is to create a fair and competitive business environment. CCI is able to do that with the help of all the stakeholders including industry members, government and international jurisdictions. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education NOTE The judicial function under the Competition Act is performed by CCI as it possesses the power of the civil court. 314 Business Law CCI believes that competition is a means for ensuring that the common people of India can access a range of goods and services at competitive prices. It aims to regulate competition so that the producers can have maximum incentive for facilitating innovation and bringing specialisation. Healthy competition in markets leads to reduced costs and increased choice available to consumers. Therefore, the CCI works towards providing a level playing field to the market participants and at the same time take care of the interests of the consumers as well. Eliminating practices having AAEC and sustaining competition IM Promoting S The CCI is the body through which the central government aims at achieving the objectives of the Competition Act, 2002. The CCI consists of a Chairperson and not less than two and not more than 6 members which are appointed by the central government. The major activities of the CCI are as follows: Protecting Ensuring the interests of consumers the freedom of trade in Indian markets Undertaking public awareness M Creating competition advocacy Imparting training on competition issues to its staff, within and outside country NOTE COMPOSITION OF CCI N 8.5.1 The objectives of the Act are sought to be achieved through the aegis of the CCI which has been established by the central government with effect from 14 October, 2003. As per Section 8 of the Competition Act, 2002 as amended by the Competition (Amendment) Act, 2007, the CCI comprises of a Chairperson and other members which may range from two to six in number. The members of the CCI are appointed by the central government and they serve as full-time members. The central government selects the members of the CCI based on certain characteristics, which are: Members must be persons of proved ability, integrity, and standing. Members must possess certain special knowledge. Members must have a professional experience of at least 15 years in international trade, economics, business, commerce, law, finance, accountancy, management, industry, public affairs, or competition matters, including competition law and policy. Each member, including the Chairperson is appointed for a term of 5 years and is eligible for re-appointment. No member can remain a member after reaching 65 years of age. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education COMPETITION ACT, 2000 8.5.2 POWERS AND JURISDICTION OF THE CCI After inquiring into agreements or abuse of dominant position, CCI can pass appropriate orders. It can order the division of enterprise enjoying the dominant position. CCI has powers to grant interim relief, award compensation, regulate its own procedure and review and rectify its own orders. CCI has the power to inquire into acts taking place outside India but having their effect on competition in India. Apart from this, the powers of the CCI are as follows: Eliminating the business practices that have Appreciably Adverse Effect on Competition (AAEC) Conducting inquiry into certain agreements and dominant position of enterprises related to any anti-competitive agreements inquiry into cases of combinations and determining if such an agreement has AAEC Regulating IM Conducting S Conducting suo moto inquiries if they receive any such information its own procedure for discharging its functions, as it is not bound by rules of Civil Procedure Code, 1908 Imposing monetary penalty Issuing interim orders if the CCI is satisfied that it is a case of anti Awarding M competitive agreements or abuse of dominant position compensation after making inquiry into allegations Reviewing its own order if no appeal is filed within 30 days from the order and the aggrieved party applies to the Commission in competition advocacy N Engaging As of now, the jurisdiction of the CCI has been widely debated. There have been cases wherein some other courts have stayed the verdict of the CCI. There are various jurisdictional challenges related to CCI encroaching the jurisdiction of another regulator or court. The CCI actually faces a lot of issues because it sees an overlap between its own jurisdiction and that of other regulators. The Competition Act, 2002 does not specify any rules based on which the CCI can decide the cases to be taken cognisance of. There have been numerous instances of overlap and exercise of authority between CCI and other regulators. This often leads to delay in justice. Exhibit Examples of Jurisdictional Disputes involving the CCI 1. In 2018, the TRAI and CCI were involved in a case dispute for which they approached the Supreme Court. Both TRAI and CCI laid claim that they have NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 315 Business Law exclusive jurisdictional rights on matters related to anti-competitive issues in the telecom industry. S 2.JCB and Bull Machines are construction equipment manufacturers. There was a dispute between JCB and Bull Machines. JCB filed a civil suit against Bull Machines for infringement of its intellectual property to restrict Bull Machines from accessing the market. This case was pending before the High Court but the Bull Machines proceeded against JCB before the CCI on the grounds that JCB had denied market access to Bull Machines by obtaining an injunction from the High Court. CCI took cognisance of this matter. JCB moved the High Court against the CCI as the institution of this investigation would have inter-alia translated into the CCI pre-deciding the outcome of the civil suit even though the same is pending disposal before the High Court. IM Source: https://www.mondaq.com/india/antitrust-eu-competition-/392738/jurisdiction-of-the-cci-navigating-through-muddy-waters [Retrieved on DD-MM-YYYY] 8.5.3 INQUIRY INTO CERTAIN AGREEMENT AND DOMINANT POSITION OF ENTERPRISES M The CCI has the power to inquire into any alleged violation of Sections 3 and 4, i.e., anti-competitive agreements and abuse of dominant position by taking suo moto cognisance (on its own motion) or in the following cases: When the CCI receives any information from any person, consumer, N 316 or their association which is accompanied with the required fee amount When the CCI receives a reference made to it by the central government or state government or statutory authority 8.5.4 POWERS AND JURISDICTION OF THE DIRECTOR GENERAL According to Section 2 (g) of the Competition Act, 2002, ‘Director General’ (DG) means the Director General that has been appointed under Section 16 (1) of the Competition Act, 2002 and it includes any Additional, Joint, Deputy, or Assistant Directors General appointed under that section. Section 16 of the Competition Act, 2002 relates to the appointment of DG of the CCI. This section states that the central government may appoint a DG for assisting the CCI. The DG helps the CCI in conducting inquiry into the contraventions of any provisions of the Competition Act, 2002 along with certain other functions as specified in the Act. The office of the DG also comprises Additional, Joint, Deputy, NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education COMPETITION ACT, 2000 or Assistant General. All the Additional, Joint, Deputy or Assistant Director Generals, advisers, consultants, and officers are required to exercise their powers and discharge their functions under the supervision and direction of the DG. The appointment, number, the manner of appointment and the salary and allowances of the Additional, Joint, Deputy, or Assistant Director Generals, advisers, consultants, and officers is decided by the central government. The DG and the other officers who are appointed must be the persons of integrity and proven ability. Such officers must have experience related to investigation and having knowledge of accountancy, management, business public administration, international trade, law, economics, etc. IM S The DG does not have powers to initiate investigation by taking suo motu cognisance of any matter. The DG has to follow the process by submitting information to the CCI. Thereafter, the CCI can cause an inquiry in accordance with Section 19 of the Act. The CCI can order for an investigation to be initiated by the DG. The CCI must not form any opinion before the investigation is initiated. 8.5.5 PROCEDURE FOR ENQUIRY INTO THE COMPLAINTS (SECTION 19) N M The CCI has to follow a thorough procedure for carrying out an enquiry into any complaint received by it. Whenever the CCI receives any complaint or reference from the central government or state government or from a statutory authority or on its own knowledge or information (received from a consumer, trade association, etc.), there can be two situations. In the first situation, the CCI is satisfied that there exists some substance in the complaint; then, in such a situation, the CCI directs the DG to investigate the matter. If the CCI receives any complaints or information that is similar to any previously received information, then all the new information should be clubbed with the previously available information. In the second situation, the CCI is not satisfied with the matter referred to it and it does not find that a prima facie case is made out; then, the CCI closes the matter and passes orders as it deems fit. The CCI also has to send a copy of this order to the central government or the state government or to the authority from which the complaint was received. When a case is referred to the DG, he/she carries out a thorough investigation and prepares a report of his/her findings. If the report of the DG states that there was no contravention of any provisions of the Competition Act, 2002, the complainant may rebut and appeal against the findings of the DG to the CCI. Following this, the CCI hears the NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 317 318 Business Law case of the complainant. If the CCI agrees with the recommendations of the DG, it shall close the matter and pass necessary orders. However, if, after examining all the objections and suggestions, the CCI is of the opinion that the matter requires further investigation, then the CCI may order the DG to conduct further enquiry. If the report of the DG finds that there has been a contravention of the provision(s) of the Competition Act, then the CCI may order further inquiry if it feels the need for such further inquiry. 8.5.6 ANTI-COMPETITIVE ACTS TAKING PLACE OUTSIDE INDIA BUT HAVING ADVERSE EFFECT ON COMPETITION IN INDIA (SECTION 32) IM S The CCI has the power to inquire into an anti-competitive agreement or agreement that involves the abuse of dominant position or agreement with respect to combinations if such an agreement is likely to have an appreciable adverse effect on competition in the relevant market in India. This is applicable even if: An anti-competitive agreement has been entered into outside of India party to such agreement is outside India Any enterprise abusing the dominant position is outside India M Any A combination has taken place outside India Any party to combination is outside India N Any other matter or practice or action arising out of such agreement or dominant position or combination is outside India 8.5.7 ENFORCEMENT POWERS OF CCI Know More While formulating the competition policy (including a review of competition law), the central government may ask for the opinion of the CCI, which is termed as competition advocacy. The CCI has the authority to impose monetary penalty on a defaulting party/person. If a person fails to pay the monetary penalty imposed, the CCI has the authority to recover such penalty in accordance with the regulations specified by regulations. self assessment Questions 9. The Competition Commission of India (CCI) is the regulatory authority that oversees ___________ in the Indian market. 10. No member of the CCI can remain a member of this body after reaching 65 years of age. a. True b. False NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education COMPETITION ACT, 2000 Activity Make a list of a few anti-competitive agreements that have recently been pointed out by the CCI. 8.6 COMBINATION S The acquisition of one or more enterprises by one or more persons or acquiring of control or merger or amalgamation of enterprises under certain circumstances (exceeding monetary limits of assets or turnover as specified in Section 5 of the Act and given below) shall be construed as a combination. The combination is defined as acquisition of one or more enterprises by way of merger or acquisition or control over the enterprise. Regulating the combinations is one of the primary tasks of the Competition Act, 2002 and the Competition Commission of India. IM 8.6.1 REGULATION OF COMBINATIONS (SECTION 6) Some important provisions of Section 6 of the Regulation of Combinations of the Competition Act, 2002, are as follows: No individual or organisation should enter into a combination that individual or organisation that proposes or enters into a combination deal should give notice to the CCI containing the details of such combination deal within 30 days of approval of the proposal relating to merger or amalgamation, referred to by the board of directors of the enterprises concerned with such merger or amalgamation, or execution of any agreement or other document for acquisition or acquiring of control. N Any M has caused (or can potentially cause) an AAEC within the relevant market in India. All such combinations shall be void. Execution of any agreement or other document for acquisition or acquiring of control. No combination would come into existence till 210 days have been passed after giving notice to the CCI. The CCI has to deal with the notice in a manner as prescribed in Sections 29, 30 and 31 of the Competition Act, 2002. Provisions of Section 6 do not apply to share subscription or financing the facility or any acquisition, by a public financial institution, foreign institutional investor, bank or venture capital fund, pursuant to any covenant of a loan agreement, or investment agreement. In the case of acquisition involving public financial institutions, foreign institutional investors, banks, or venture capital funds NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 319 Business Law must file with the CCI details of such deal within 7 days of the date of acquisition. 8.6.2 FACTORS TO BE CONSIDERED IN DETERMINATION OF ADVERSE EFFECT OF COMBINATION ON COMPETITION IN RELEVANT MARKET (SECTION 20(4)) S Section 20 of the Competition Act relates to the inquiry of combinations by the CCI. According to this section, the CCI may inquire into the cases of combinations such as acquisition, merger, amalgamation, etc., by taking into account its own knowledge or information in order to determine if such a combination has caused or may potentially cause an AAEC in India. In the same way, if the CCI receives a notice under Section 6 of the Act, as mentioned (in the previous paragraph) regarding entering into a combination, it shall inquire into whether such a combination would cause AAEC in India. IM However, the CCI may initiate such an inquiry into the combination only within one year after such a combination has taken effect and no later than that. M This section also states that the central government should enhance or reduce the value of assets or the value of turnover every two years in consultation with the CCI and must notify the same. The CCI needs to determine if a combination will have an AAEC in the relevant market or not by considering the following factors: Actual N 320 and potential levels of competition through imports in the market Extent Level of barriers to entry into the market of combination in the market Degree of countervailing power in the market Likelihood that the combination would result in the parties to the combination being able to significantly and sustainably increase prices or profit margins Extent of effective competition likely to sustain in a market Extent to which substitutes are available or are likely to be available in the market Market share, in the relevant market, of the persons or enterprise in a combination, individually, and as a combination Likelihood that the combination would result in the removal of a vigorous and effective competitor or competitors in the market Nature and extent of vertical integration in the market Possibility Nature of a failing business and extent of innovation NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education COMPETITION ACT, 2000 Relative advantage, by way of the contribution to the economic development, by any combination having or likely to have appreciable adverse effect on competition Whether the benefits of the combination outweigh the adverse impact of the combination, if any self assessment Questions 11. No individual or organisation should enter into a combination that has caused (or can potentially cause) an AAEC within the relevant market in India. All such combinations shall be__________. b. One year c. Two years d. Three years Activity IM a. Six months S 12. The CCI may initiate an inquiry into the combination only within _______ after such a combination has taken effect. Find out the examples of a few combinations which had an adverse effect on competition in the relevant market in India. PENALTIES IMPOSED UNDER THE COMPETITION ACT, 2002 M 8.7 N Chapter VI of the Competition Act, 2002 (which contains Sections 42–48) deals with the penalties that can be imposed under this Act. All sections of this Act came into effect from 2009 except Section 44 which came into effect from 2011. These sections have been amended from time to time. Sections contained in Chapter VI are as follows: Section 42: Contravention of orders of Commission Section 42A: Compensation in case of contravention of orders of Commission Section 43: Penalty for failure to comply with directions of Commission and Director General Section 43A: Power to impose a penalty for non-furnishing of information on combinations Section 44: Penalty for making false statement or omission to furnish material information Section 45: Penalty for offence in relation to furnishing of information Section 46: Power to impose lesser penalty NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 321 Business Law Section 47: Crediting sums realised by way of penalties to Consolidated Fund of India Section 48: Contravention by companies SECTION 42: CONTRAVENTION OF ORDERS OF COMMISSION Section 42 of the Competition Act, 2002 relates to the penalty that can be imposed for the contravention of the orders of the CCI. The CCI may order an inquiry of its orders or directions that it orders while exercising its powers. The CCI may order or give directions under the following sections: Section 27: Orders by Commission after inquiry into agreements or abuse of dominant position 28: Division of enterprise enjoying dominant position Section 31: Orders of Commission on certain combinations S Section IM Section 32: Acts taking place outside India but having an effect on competition in India Section 33: Power to issue interim orders Section 42A: Compensation in the case of contravention of orders of Commission 43A: Power to impose penalty for non-furnishing of information on combinations M Section If any person fails to comply with the orders or directions issued under the above sections, then he/she can be punished with a fine of up to ` 1 lakh for each day during which such non-compliance occurs. The total amount of such fine may extend up to ` 10 crores. N 322 If the person does not comply with the orders or directions or fails to pay the fine imposed under this section, he/she can be awarded an imprisonment for up to 3 years or a fine which may extend to ` 25 crores or both. SECTION 42A: COMPENSATION IN CASE OF CONTRAVENTION OF ORDERS OF COMMISSION This section was inserted by the Competition (Amendment) Act, 2007. This section states that any person may make an application to the Appellate Tribunal for an order for the recovery of compensation from any enterprise for any loss or damage that he/she may have suffered because of the following reasons: Enterprise violating the directions issued by the CCI Contravening the orders of CCI under Sections 27, 28, 31, 32, and 33 NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education COMPETITION ACT, 2000 Contravention, without any reasonable ground, of any restriction subject to which any approval, sanction, direction, or exemption has been accorded SECTION 43: PENALTY FOR FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH DIRECTIONS OF COMMISSION AND DIRECTOR GENERAL This section states that if a person fails to comply with either the directions of the CCI under Sections 36(2) and 36(4) or the directions of the DG under Section 41(2), without any reasonable cause, then the person can be fined an amount of up to ` 1 lakh for each day during which such failure continues subject to a maximum of ` 1 crore. The amount is decided by the CCI. S Section 41(2) states that the DG shall have all powers as are conferred upon the CCI as mentioned in Section 36(2) of the Competition Act, 2002. IM SECTION 43A: POWER TO IMPOSE PENALTY FOR NONFURNISHING OF INFORMATION ON COMBINATIONS M Section 43A of the Act states that if any person or enterprise fails to give notice to the CCI when they are entering into a combination agreement [under Section 6(2) of the Act], the CCI may impose a penalty of up to 1% of the total turnover or the assets of the combination. This provision was inserted into the Act by the Competition (Amendment) Act, 2007. N SECTION 44: PENALTY FOR MAKING FALSE STATEMENT OR OMISSION TO FURNISH MATERIAL INFORMATION Section 44 is related to statements made before the Commission in connection with Combination Agreement. Section 44 states that the CCI can impose a penalty not less than ` 50 lakh but not more than ` 1 crore on any person, who is a party to a combination, if that person: Makes a false statement Omits to state any material information SECTION 45: PENALTY FOR OFFENCE IN RELATION TO FURNISHING OF INFORMATION This section is related to statements or documents required to be furnished under any provisions or orders under this Act. A person who furnishes or has to furnish certain documents or information may be fined with an amount of up to ` 1 crore in the following cases: (a) If the person makes any statement or furnishes any document which is false or if the person furnishes document which he/she believes is false NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 323 Business Law (b) If the person omits any material fact which he/she knows is material to the case (c) If the person changes, suppresses, or destroys any document which is required to be furnished out of his/her own free will SECTION 46: POWER TO IMPOSE LESSER PENALTY S Section 46 empowers the CCI to impose a lesser penalty on the person or individual than what amounts are mentioned for penalties specified in the Act. However, the CCI can exercise this power only when it is satisfied that any producer, seller, distributer, trader, or service provider included in any cartel on which there are allegations of violation of Competition Act has made full and true disclosure in the respect of these alleged violations. Also, disclosure of such information must be vital to impose upon such person a lesser penalty. The CCI cannot impose a lesser penalty in the following cases: the CCI receives the report of investigation before such disclosures are made; or IM If If the person who is making the disclosure does not continue to cooperate with the CCI till the proceedings come to an end; or the CCI is satisfied that a producer, seller, distributor, trader, or service provider which is a part of a cartel had not complied with the condition on the basis of which the lesser penalty was imposed; or M If If the CCI is satisfied that a producer, seller, distributor, trader, or service provider which is a part of a cartel had given false evidence; or Where N 324 the CCI realises that the information provided is not vital, and thereby the person providing the information may be liable to be tried in respect of that offense. SECTION 47: CREDITING SUMS REALISED BY WAY OF PENALTIES TO CONSOLIDATED FUND OF INDIA Section 47 of the Competition Act, 2002 states that the amount that the CCI receives by imposing penalties must be credited to the consolidated fund of India. SECTION 48: CONTRAVENTION BY COMPANIES Section 48 of the Competition Act, 2002 states that when there is a person committing any contravention of any of the provisions of this Act or of any rule, regulation, order, or direction issued under this Act, is a company; then, every person who is in charge of and was responsible to the company for the conduct of the business of the company at the time when the contravention was committed along with the business will be considered as guilty of the contravention. The CCI will carry on NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education COMPETITION ACT, 2000 punishment proceedings against such persons and businesses. However, such a person will not be punishable in the following cases: If the person proves that the alleged contravention was committed without his/her knowledge If the person proves that he/she had exercised all due diligence to prevent such contravention self assessment Questions 13. Section 47 of the Competition Act, 2002 states that all the amount that the CCI receives by imposing penalties must be credited to the_____________. IM Activity S 14. Amit was a party to a combination and he had made a false statement with the CCI. What is the maximum penalty that CCI can impose on Amit? Explain how non-furnishing of information can hamper the proceedings of the cases being handled by CCI. LEADING CASES UNDER THE COMPETITION LAW IN INDIA M 8.8 N CASE LAW 1: RELIANCE BIG ENTERTAINMENT PRIVATE LIMITED VersuS TAMIL NADU FILM EXHIBITORS ASSOCIATION [CCI] (Case No. 78 of 2011) This case was contested between M/s Reliance Big Entertainment Private Limited (hereinafter referred to as the ‘Informant’) and Tamil Nadu Film Exhibitors Association (now known as Tamil Nadu Theatre Owners Association). The former was the informant whereas the latter was the opposite party. This case was filed by the M/s Reliance Big Entertainment Private Limited against Tamil Nadu Film Exhibitors Association (hereinafter referred to as the ‘Opposite Party’ or ‘TNFEA’) under Section 19(1)(a) of the Competition Act, 2002. The informant alleged that the TNFEA had contravened the provisions of Sections 3 and 4 of the Act. The informant organisation was incorporated under the provisions of the Companies Act, 1956. This organisation was engaged in the business of production and distribution of cinematographic films. TNFEA was a trade association registered under the Tamil Nadu Societies Registration Act, 1975 and it has control over its members who are film exhibitors/theatres in Tamil Nadu. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 325 Business Law Facts of the case An agreement was made between the informant and M/s Balaji Real Media Private Limited on 28-07-2011. As per this agreement, the informant was entitled to distribute a film titled ‘Osthi’ in Tamil language. This movie was a remake of Hindi film ‘Dabbang’. This film was to be released on 08-12-2011. The informant entered into an agreement with M/s Kural TV Creations Private Limited (‘M/s Kural TV’) and granted exclusive distribution rights of the film to M/s Kural TV on 09-09-2011 for Tamil Nadu, Kerala, and Karnataka. informant entered into an agreement with M/s Sun TV Network Limited on 18-11-2011 granting the Satellite Rights of the film. S The On 29-11-2011, Shri T. Rajhendherr, MD of M/s Kural TV informed IM the informant via an e-mail that the TNFEA has decided not to screen the said film in any of the screens of its members since the said film’s satellite rights were granted to M/s Sun TV. Rajhendherr also attached a copy of the letter issued by the TNFEA to its theatre members on 24-11-2011. Rajhendherr also informed the informant that he was unable to block and book the theatres because of this act of TNFEA. 29-11-2011, the informant received another e-mail from Shri Ashok Kumar of M/s PVR Cinemas. PVR Cinemas was a member of the TNFEA. In this e-mail, Ashok Kumar had attached a letter issued by the TNFEA to it on 24-11-2011 in which the TNFEA has asked PVR Cinemas to check with them before confirming the said film along with another film, viz. Mambttiyan. M On N 326 The informant also informed the CCI that it had learnt from various newspaper sources that M/s Sun TV owed some money to a few members of the TNFEA and it had ordered for recovering all the money from M/s Sun TV by banning all films which are produced or distributed by M/s Sun TV. TNFEA has also banned films whose satellite rights were granted to M/s Sun TV. The informant told the CCI that the TNFEA’s ban on the given film on theatres in Tamil Nadu because its satellite rights were granted to M/s Sun TV was unfair and were clearly in contravention of the provisions of the Act. The informant alleged that TNFEA was acting in an arbitrary manner. The film of the informant was boycotted by TNFEA with an aim to secure a claim of its members against a third party, i.e., M/s Sun TV. The informant claimed that it was not related to the third party in any manner and the dues that had to be paid by it. The informant contented that TNFEA’s decision to ban the said film was an abuse of dominant position. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education COMPETITION ACT, 2000 On the basis of the above facts of the case, the informant prayed the following: TNFEA should be restrained and it should be ordered not to compel its members for not dealing with the film (Osthi) of the informant including all its upcoming films also. TNFEA should be restrained and it should be ordered to not allow the release and exploitation of the said film and forthcoming films of the informant. TNFEA should be restrained from imposing any unfair and unjustified restrictions on the release and exploitation of the informant’s said film. should be restrained from entering into any anticompetitive agreements with its members. TNFEA S TNFEA should be restrained from abusing its dominant position. M/s IM The CCI considered this case and after considering all the facts, it noted the following: Sun TV owed money to a few members of TNFEA. resorted to arm twisting tactics and threatening and in order to recover its money by ordering that theatres associated with TNFEA not to exhibit the film with which M/s Sun TV was associated. M TNFEA Following this, the CCI ordered the DG to investigate the matter for contravention of Sections 3(3) of the Act. N The DG submitted its report in which it had concluded that the TNFEA is the biggest and most powerful association of cinema theatre owners in Tamil Nadu and it is in a position to control the market and restrict the services in the market for the producers and distributors. The case proceedings took place for a considerable amount of time and the CCI passed an order. The main points of the order are as follows: CCI directed the TNFEA not to indulge in such anti-competitive conduct in future CCI imposed penalty on TNFEA CASE LAW 2: Indian National Shipowners’ Association (INSA) Versus Oil and Natural Gas Corporation Limited (ONGC) (Case No. 1 of 2018) The present information was filed by Indian National Shipowners’ Association (INSA) (hereinafter, the ‘Informant’) under Section 19(1) (a) of the Competition Act, 2002 (hereinafter, the ‘Act’) against Oil and Natural Gas Corporation Limited (hereinafter, the ‘Opposite ParNMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 327 Business Law ty’/‘OP’/‘ONGC’) alleging a contravention of the provisions of Section 4 of the Act. Facts of the case Informant is a representative body of various ship owners formed in the year 1929. At the time of filing of the information, it had 42 members which included Indian shipping companies and offshore oilfield service providers, i.e., companies providing services such as offshore logistics services to offshore oilfield operators such as ONGC, Cairn India Limited (CAIRN), Reliance Industries Limited (Reliance), British Gas Exploration and Production India Limited (BGEPIL), etc. The member companies of the Informant include Shipping Corporation of India Limited (‘SCI’), Global Offshore Services Limited (‘Global Offshore’), Ocean Sparkle Limited (‘OSL’), TAG Offshore Limited (‘TAG Offshore’), Triton Maritime Private Limited (‘Triton’), Greatship (India) Limited (‘Greatship’), etc. is stated that ONGC, in order to undertake Oil & Natural Gas (hereinafter, O&NG) Exploration and Production (E&P) activities seek support services from offshore oilfield services providers (such as the member companies of the Informant) pursuant to a competitive bidding process. One of the services is the charterhire of offshore support vessels (hereinafter, the ‘OSVs’) which are specialized vessels that support various stages of offshore O&NG E&P activities undertaken by ONGC. There are several types of OSVs, amongst which the following two are predominantly used for the offshore E&P activities in the Indian Exclusive Economic Zone (‘EEZ’). M IM It S The N 328 a.Anchor Handling Tug Supply Vessel (‘AHTSV’) designed to tow rig anchors from one location to another and to lift and position rig’s anchors; and b. Platform Supply Vessels (‘PSV’) to carry out supply duties and transit of manpower, fuel, fresh water, tools, and materials (such as pipes and cement) to offshore drilling locations. The Informant submitted that for procuring the services of the aforesaid OSVs, ONGC used to float International Competitive Bidding (hereinafter, the ‘ICB’) tenders which contained detailed technical eligibility requirements, bid evaluation criteria, a model contract comprising General Conditions of Contract (hereinafter, the ‘GCC’) and Special Conditions of Contract (hereinafter, the ‘SCC’), collectively referred to as the ‘Charter Hire Agreement’ (hereinafter, the ‘CHA’). The CHA sets out the terms and conditions which govern the contractual relationship between ONGC and the successful bidder. The Informant claimed that ONGC possesses a dominant position in the hiring of OSVs and owing to such dominant position, it had been able to put one-sided clauses in the CHAs in the nature of boiler plate agreements, allegedly not open for negotiations. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education COMPETITION ACT, 2000 Further, the CHAs between ONGC and the respective member companies of the Informant contained certain clauses which were alleged to be onerous in nature and favourable to ONGC. Specifically, the Informant alleged the following clauses of the CHA to be one-sided, unfair and hence, abusive: i. Clause 14.2 of the SCC: Unilateral right to terminate the agreement; ii. C lauses 18.2 and 23 of the GCC: Unilateral termination in case of force majeure; iii. Clauses 27.1.2 and 27.1.4 of the GCC: Onerous clauses in relation to appointment of arbitrator. addition to the above, the Informant alleged that the ONGC issued termination notices for few contracts with its member companies which is indicative of abuse on its part owing to the dominant position held by it. Based on these allegations, the Informant alleged contravention of Section 4(2)(a)(i) of the Act by ONGC. Commission examined the aforesaid facts and after hearing both the parties, in a preliminary conference held on 17-05-2018, was prima facie satisfied that the allegations raised by the Informant in the information had merit. Prima facie, the Commission found ONGC to be dominant in the ‘market for charter hire of OSVs (PSVs and AHTSVs) in the Indian EEZ’. Further, with regard to the unilateral right of termination (Clause 14.2 of SCC), the Commission found the said stipulation as well as its invocation by ONGC against some of the member companies of the Informant to be prima facie abusive in nature. However, the allegations with regard to unilateral termination in case of force majeure (Clauses 18.2 and 23 of the GCC) and alleged onerous clauses in relation to appointment of arbitrator (Clauses 27.1.2 and 27.1.4 of the GCC) were not found to be abusive in nature. N M The IM S In Based on the finding with regard to unilateral right of termination being prima facie abusive, the Commission vide its order dated 12-06-2018 directed the DG to carry out a detailed investigation into the matter under Section 26(1) of the Act. Thereafter, the DG proceeded to delineate the relevant market in the matter. The DG observed that the present case pertained to allegations of abuse of dominant position by ONGC as a procurer of services towards its suppliers (i.e., the OSVs). Relying on the approach adopted by the Commission in past few cases [Rajat Verma and Public Works (B&R) Department (Case No. 70 of 2014 decided on 09-07-2018), Adcept Technologies Private Limited and Bharat Cooking Coal Limited (Case No. 16 of 2013 decided on 0805-2013), and VE Commercial Vehicles Limited and UPSRTC (Case no. 80 of 2015 decided on 07-01-2016)] which pertained to abuse of buyer power, the DG applied the demand-side substitutability NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 329 Business Law in an inverse manner. The DG undertook the assessment of available suppliers and their ability to switch to alternative sales opportunities, both product-wise and geographically. The DG also referred to similar cases in matured jurisdictions wherein while dealing with cases of buyer power, the market was delineated by considering whether suppliers have alternative distribution channels for their goods or services. The DG observed that the physical characteristics/end-use of goods (i.e., OSVs) demonstrates that the relevant product comprises specialised vessels used for performing specific tasks to support offshore O&NG E&P activities, which in the present case pertains to two specific OSVs, namely AHTSV and PSV. 14.2 of the SCC which gives unilateral right of termination without assigning any reasons to ONGC, in itself is not found abusive given the disproportionate risk that ONGC has to bear in case of such termination by the OSVs; especially when the Commission has found, in the given facts and circumstances, that the invocation of such clause was not in bad faith. It is unambiguously established by the evidence on record that the conduct of ONGC was driven solely in response to an exceptional change in market conditions. Further, the right of termination for convenience was exercised by ONGC for the first time in thirty years of the existence of such clause in the CHA and there is no evidence that any party has raised any objections to the existence of such clause all this while. Had it been found that ONGC invoked this clause capriciously and/or frequently in order to make illegitimate gains at the expense of the other contracting party, the Commission may have had the occasion to look at this case differently. No such situation seems to exist in the present case. Thus, the Commission is of the considered view that in the present case the conduct of ONGC does not tantamount to an abuse of dominant position within the meaning of Section 4 of the Act. Hence, the case is directed to be closed. M IM S Clause N 330 Source: https://www.cci.gov.in/sites/default/files/01-of-2018.pdf self assessment Questions 15. In the case of Reliance Big Entertainment Private Limited vs. TNFEA, the TNFEA had abused its dominant position. a. True b. False Activity Prepare a synopsis of any case judgement held by the CCI. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education COMPETITION ACT, 2000 8.9 Summary S Competition is not necessarily negative, and in fact healthy competition among organisations is actually good for businesses. Competition policy involves applying rules to ensure that the businesses and companies compete fairly with each other. Presence of a healthy competition policy ensures wider choice for consumers and helps in reducing prices and improving quality. Monopolies and Restrictive Trade Practices (MRTP) Act was meant to regulate concentration of economic power, competition law, and consumer protection and was applicable to almost all areas of business such as production, distribution, pricing, investment, procurement, packaging, advertising, sales promotion, mergers, amalgamations, takeovers, undertakings, etc. S The Competition Act, 2002 was enacted on 13th January, 2003 to regulate and govern the competition and related practices in India. IM The 3 of the Competition Act, 2002 relates to the prohibition of anti-competitive agreements. The Competition Act, 2002 is based on the philosophy of modern competition laws. It prohibits anticompetitive agreements and abuse of the dominant position by enterprises. M Section objectives of the Act are sought to be achieved through the aegis of the Competition Commission of India (CCI) which has been established by the central government with effect from 14th October, 2003. The N The CCI is the regulatory authority that oversees competition in Indian market. The primary objective of the CCI is to create a fair and competitive business environment. Section 20 of the Competition Act relates to the inquiry of combinations by the CCI. According to this Section, the CCI may inquire into the cases of combinations such as acquisition, merger, amalgamation, etc., by taking into account its own knowledge or information in order to determine if such a combination has caused (or may potentially cause) an Appreciably Adverse Effect on Competition (AAEC) in India. key words Antitrust laws: The laws that are created primarily for promoting competition among sellers and limiting monopolies Contravention: The act of violating any provision of a law NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 331 Business Law Corporate restructuring: Any action that is taken by a corporate entity to modify its capital structure or its operations Monopoly: A type of market in which a single enterprise has an exclusive possession of a market Restrictive trade practices: The practices restricted in a particular market ? 8.10 Descriptive Questions 1. What is the meaning of competition and competition policy? 2. Explain the objectives and features of the Competition Act, 2002. S 3. Define the terms Cartel, AAEC, and Bid Rigging. 4. Explain the various types of vertical and horizontal agreements. IM 5. What are the powers and jurisdiction of the Director General of the CCI? 6. Describe the factors that must be considered while determining the adverse effect of the combination on competition in the relevant market. M 8.11 Answers and Hints ANSWERS FOR SELF ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS Topic Q. No. Competition—What and Why 1. b. False 2. b. Reduced competition 3. c. Section 4 4. competition advocacy 5. Appreciable Adverse Effect on Competition (AAEC) 6. a. 7. exclusive supply agreements 8. a. 9. competition 10. b. 11. void 12. b. 13. consolidated fund of India 14. ` 1 crore N 332 Competition Act, 2002 Anti-competitive Agreements Competition Commission of India (CCI) Combination Penalties Imposed under Competition Act, 2002 NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Answer True Price fixing False One year COMPETITION ACT, 2000 Topic Q. No. Leading Cases under Competition Law in India Answer 15. a. True HINTS FOR DESCRIPTIVE QUESTIONS 1. Business competition is a condition wherein various organisations and individuals compete in the same industry or field. A competition policy refers to the legal framework or structure that the governments of any country establish in order to regulate the markets and monopoly organisations. Refer to Section 8.2 Competition—What and Why IM S 2. There are four major features of the Competition Act, 2002: Prohibits anti-competitive agreements; Prohibits abuse of dominant position; Provides for regulation of combinations; and Enjoins competition advocacy. Refer to Section 8.3 Competition Act, 2002 3. According to Section 2 (c), cartel includes an association of producers, sellers, distributors, traders, or service providers who, by agreement amongst themselves, limit, control, or attempt to control the production, distribution, sale or price of, or, trade in goods or provision of services. Refer to Section 8.3 Competition Act, 2002 N M 4. The anti-competitive agreements are the types of agreements that unduly benefit a person or group and which might harm the competition in any particular market. All such agreements are prohibited under Competition Act, 2002. Refer to Section 8.4 Anti-competitive Agreements 5. The DG helps the CCI in conducting inquiry into the contraventions of any provisions of the Competition Act, 2002 along with certain other functions as specified in the Act. Refer to Section 8.5 Competition Commission of India (CCI) 6. The CCI needs to determine whether or not a combination will have an AAEC in the relevant market by considering factors such as actual and potential levels of competition through imports in the market, the extent of barriers to entry into the market, etc. Refer to Section 8.6 Combination 8.12 Suggested Readings & References Suggested Readings Pathak, A. (2020). Legal Aspects of Business (7th ed.). McGraw Hill HED. Dhall, V. Competition Law Today (2nd ed.). Oxford. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 333 Business Law E-REFERENCES (2020). Retrieved 6 May 2020, from https://www.oecd.org/ investment/toolkit/policyareas/competition/Competition%20 Policy%20Guidance,%20Thomsen.pdf (2020). Retrieved 6 May 2020, from https://assets.publishing. service.gov.uk/media/57a08d5b40f0b652dd00190e/CRCwp2.pdf Pierce, R. (2020). Comparing the Competition Law Regimes of the United States and India. Retrieved 6 May 2020 from https://papers. ssrn.com/sol3/papers.cfm?abstract_id=2951944 V. (2020). Competition Commission of India - Hyundai Case Study - India Business Law Journal. Retrieved 6 May 2020 from https://www.vantageasia.com/hyundai-case-a-lesson-for-cci/ M IM S Editor, N 334 NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education C h 9 a pt e r EMPLOYEE RELATED LAWS IM Introduction Factories Act, 1948 9.2.1 Objectives and Applicability 9.2.2 Key Provisions and Features of the Law Occupation of Occupier (Employer) and Responsibilities of Occupier 9.2.3 Self Assessment Questions Activity Industrial Disputes Act, 1947 9.3 9.3.1 Objectives and Applicability 9.3.2 Examples Self Assessment Questions Activity 9.4 Minimum Wages Act, 1948 9.4.1 Objectives and Applicability 9.4.2 Key Provisions and Features Self Assessment Questions Activity 9.5Employees Compensation Act, 1923 9.5.1 Objectives and Applicability Key Provisions and Features 9.5.2 Self Assessment Questions Activity Employees Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act, 1952 9.6 9.6.1 Objectives and Applicability 9.6.2 Key Provision and Features 9.6.3Calculation of Provident Fund and Apportionment of the Fund against Various Schemes Self Assessment Questions Activity N M 9.1 9.2 S Contents NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law CONTENTS 9.8 9.8.1 9.8.2 9.8.3 9.8.4 9.8.5 9.8.6 9.9 9.9.1 9.9.2 M 9.10 9.10.1 9.10.2 9.10.3 9.10.4 S 9.7.1 9.7.2 Payment of Bonus Act, 1965 Objectives and Applicability Key Provisions and Features Self Assessment Questions Activity Payment of Gratuity Act, 1972 Objectives and Applicability Entitlement of Gratuity (Section 2A) Calculation of Gratuity Time of Payment of Gratuity Forfeiture of Gratuity [Section 4(6)] Maximum Limit and Amount of Gratuity Payable Self Assessment Questions Activity Maternity Benefit Act, 1961 Objectives and Applicability Key Provisions Self Assessment Questions Activity Code on Labour Laws Code on Wages Code on Industrial Relations Code on Social Security Code on Safety, Health and Working Conditions Self Assessment Questions Activity Summary Descriptive Questions Answers and Hints Suggested Readings & References IM 9.7 N 336 9.11 9.12 9.13 9.14 NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education EMPLOYEE RELATED LAWS 337 Introductory Caselet INDUSTRIAL DISPUTE IN TEA PLANTATION Sheila was a 30-year old plantation woman worker at Thellar Tea Estate in Munnar. There are six members in her family. Many years ago, Thellar Tea Estate was facing an acute shortage of plantation labour and the management of the estate recruited many workers from Tamil Nadu. The management was willing to provide basic facilities such as food, shelter, clothes and a reasonable wage to workers. In those days, the cold climate of the tea plantation was one of the main difficulties faced by plantation workers. IM S They had to collect 18 kg of tender leaves every day from a field. Incentives were given if they collected more than this amount. In the past, the management was very keen to provide all amenities for the welfare of the workers, including health facilities and financial assistance. The management maintained that healthy workers were very important for the work of the estate. The major welfare efforts of the management were as follows: The workers were given raincoats and woolens during the wet and cold seasons employees were given an assistance of ` 50 for procuring food grains from ration shops M The The concept of partial payment was introduced to avoid delay in payment of wages management promptly provided incentives for additional work done by the workers No N The major disputes took place between workers and the management as there was an environment of trust between the two The workers were assisted with the education of their children. The estate started a crèche near the workers’ quarters and appointed women to look after the children of workers. The children in the crèche were provided with free food and milk. Estate vehicles were provided to take sick workers to hospitals in case of emergencies Provident fund was also provided for permanent workers However, trouble started in the estate as soon as there was a change of leadership about five years back. The old members of the management were now gone and the estate was taken up by the new management and leadership. With this change of ownership, the plight of the workers started. The new manage- NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Case Objective This caselet shows the impact of the industrial dispute and role of management in solving the dispute. Business Law Introductory Caselet ment communicated to workers that the estate was facing a financial crisis in the tune of ` 5 crores due to the excessive welfare schemes provided to the workers. The new management came up with the following guidelines for the workers: No increase in the wages of the workers for the next seven years as a result of the financial loss faced by the estate The estate would be downsized and voluntary retirement would be sought from the permanent employees The temporary workers would leave the estate within five months current welfare facilities would be reduced in the coming years Increase S The in working hours and workers would be required to collect more kilos of tea leaves every day workers would be barred from taking casual as well as sick leaves IM The No special consideration for sick workers No raincoats or woolens for workers M The management also took several additional steps to curb the excess financial outlay. These steps were as follows: Discontinuance Reduction N 338 of the ` 50 ration allowance in the present daily wage of workers from ` 80 to ` 50 Discontinuance of the incentive system Discontinuance of crèches for the children of the workers Announcement of the voluntary retirement scheme Zero tolerance for trade union activities Discontinuance of educational assistance for workers’ children Reduction in the number of members in a family employed in the estate from three to two Apart from this, there were frequent delays in the payment of wages. Moreover, the payment of bonuses was also delayed. The workers also reported cases of harassment and injustice to the management, which chose to take no action and remained silent. These cases have been listed as follows: Use of goondas by the management to evacuate workers from their quarters Silence of trade union leaders to the actions of the management NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education EMPLOYEE RELATED LAWS 339 Introductory Caselet Sexual harassment of women labourers at work Discrimination in the amount of wages for female and male workers Stringent disciplinary measures Frequent cuts in the power supply of the workers’ quarters The workers were of the view that they were being harassed in order to get them evicted from the plantation so that the management could appoint new workers N M IM S As a consequence, the workers called one-day strike against the management, pointing out the issues at work. However, the management decided to do nothing. The workers now went on a weeklong strike. This had the desired result because the management realised, though reluctantly, that production was getting affected. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law Learning objectives After studying this chapter, you will be able to: Understand the previous laws affecting employment such as >> a. Factories Act, 1948 b. Industrial Disputes Act, 1947 c. Minimum Wages Act, 1948 d. Employees Compensation Act e. Employee Provident Fund and sions Act, 1952 Payment of Bonus Act, 1965 S f. Miscellaneous Provi- g. Payment of Gratuity Act, 1972 Quick Revision IM >> h. Maternity Benefit Act State the importance of code on labour laws and provide features of each of the Code 9.1 Introduction M In the previous chapter, you have studied about the Competition Act, 2000. In this chapter, you will study employment-related laws. In India, there are about 60 laws concerning labour dealing with working conditions, industrial relations, monetary benefits and social security issues in Indian ministries and commercial establishments. The main objective of these laws is to promote the welfare of workers and employees and improve their social life. There are three categories of labour laws in the country as follows: N 340 A. Laws framed and administered by the Central Government such as the law relating to provident fund, mines, beedi workers, industrial disputes etc. B. Laws framed by the Central Government but administered by the State Governments such as the law on factories, employment exchanges (compulsory notification of vacancies), bonded labour, trade unions, employees’ compensation, etc. C. Laws framed by Central Government but administered by both the Central and the State Governments include laws such as the payment of wages, gratuity, child labour, apprenticeship, equal remuneration, contract labour and inter-state migrant workers. This chapter contains a snapshot of the various laws designed to promote the welfare of workers, improve industrial relations, provide various monetary benefits and finally to ensure that they have some social security after completing their tenure. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education EMPLOYEE RELATED LAWS 341 9.2 FACTORIES ACT, 1948 The Factories Act, 1948 came into force on April 1, 1949. The Factories Act, 1948 has been enacted with an object to protect workers for which different provisions are imposed on the owner and the occupier of factories. It is the principal law concerning working conditions designed to protect labour against industrial and occupational hazards. For this purpose, it seeks to impose certain boundaries on the owner and protect the right of the labour. It is considered to be the social welfare legislation. On August 7, 2014, the Factories (Amendment) Bill, 2014, was introduced in the Lok Sabha. The amendments in the bill were on the basis of the modification or changes in manufacturing practices and technologies, ratification of ILO conventions, recommendations of committees, judicial decisions and the decisions taken in the conferences of chief inspectors of factories. IM 9.2.1 OBJECTIVES AND APPLICABILITY S The Factories Act, 1948 has given many new provisions that protect workers employed in a factory against industrial and occupational hazards. There are many provisions related to health, safety and welfare provisions of workers. Apart from these, some provisions are also taken related to working hours of child, young persons and female workers in a factory. NOTE N M The Factories Act, 1948 regulates working conditions in manufacturing or commercial establishments. These establishments come under the definition of the term “factory” as used in the law. In 1881, the first law relating to the subject was passed in India. Then, various laws came into existence in the years 1891, 1911, 1922 and 1934. The most comprehensive law came in the year 1948. It offers detailed provisions for the health, welfare and safety of workers inside factories. It talked about the working conditions of workers with respect to the hours of work, minimum age, leave with pay and so on. Consequently, the Factories Act, 1948 was amended several times. The objectives of the Factories Act, 1948 are as follows: To promote the health, welfare and safety of workers employed in factories To prevent the haphazard growth of factories by providing the provisions of approval for plans prior to the creation of a factory To regulate working conditions in factories by regulating working hours, leaves, holidays, overtime, employment of children, women and young persons The scope and coverage of the Factories Act, 1948 are as follows: It aims to improve the working conditions in factories across India It provides basic minimum requirements to ensure safety, health and welfare of workers It also governs the following: Approval sion of factory building plans before construction/exten- Issue of licenses and regulation of factories running without license NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education NOTE The term ‘suo motto’ is usually applied to actions taken by a court without any prior motion or request from the parties. 342 Business Law Renewal of licenses Inspection NOTE To renew the licence of a factory, the following documents should be submitted: yyAn application in form number 3 (duplicate) yyTreasury receipt challan with prescribed fees yyOriginal licence yyProcess flowchart of factories in case of complaints/accidents/suo motto 9.2.2 KEY PROVISIONS AND FEATURES OF THE LAW Since the object of the Factories Act, 1948 is to protect the interest of workers from exploitation, the Act recommends certain standards for safety, welfare and working hours of workers, apart from other provisions. The main provisions of the Factories Act, 1948 are as follows: Compulsory approval, licensing and registration of factories: It is mandatory to obtain a licence before a factory is started. The State Government may make rules related to the licensing and registration of factories. As an initial step towards the approval for licensing, detailed plans or any class of description of factories must be submitted to the Chief Inspector or the State Government. Later, the plans and specifications of a factory and its location are presented in the required format in writing to the Chief Inspector or the state government for its registration. IM As per Section 18, it is important to make proper arrangements for cool drinking water during summers, if the factory employs more than 250 workers. S NOTE Health M TURN TO THE WEB Details regarding the provisions of safety of workers in the Factories Act, 1948, can be taken from the following link: measures: Factories Act, 1948 is intended to ensure that the conditions in factories do not affect the health of workers adversely. Various provisions for cleanliness, disposal of wastes and effluents, ventilation and temperature, lighting, artificial humidification, spittoons, overcrowding, dust, fumes, drinking water, latrines and urinals to ensure good working conditions for the workers. It is important to repaint the inside walls, partitions, ceiling or top of rooms, passages and staircases once in every 5 years. No person in the factory shall be allowed to spit at any place other than spittoons. In case of violation, fine of not more than 5 rupees shall be paid. N https://labour.gov.in/sites/ default/files/Factories_Act_1948. pdf NOTE Under Section 40B of the Factories Act, 1948, it is important to appoint a safety officer by the occupier in case: a. Where 1000 or more workers are ordinarily employed b. Where the state government is of the opinion that manufacturing process involves any kind of risk such as body injury, poisoning disease or other hazard to health The state government can direct or prescribe the occupier the number of safety officers to be appointed. Safety measures: Following are the some of the important provisions under these sections regarding the safety of workers: Dangerous machinery such as electric generators must be securely fenced. Work on or near machinery in motion must be carried out only by specially trained adult male workers wearing tightly fitting c1othes. All floors, steps, stairs, passage and gangways shall be of sound construction and properly maintained. Handrails shall be provided where necessary. Safe means of access shall be provided to the place where the worker will carry on any work. No worker shall be made to carry a load so heavy as to cause him injury. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education EMPLOYEE RELATED LAWS 343 Hazardous processes: State governments have the power to make a site appraisal committee for advising on the initial location of factory (hazardous factory) and expansion of any such factory. The chairman of this committee will be the chief inspector of the state. Welfare measures: Factories Act, 1948 lays out the provisions of welfare measures comprise washing, storing, drying, first-aid, welfare officers, shelters, etc., for the workers. It ensures social security of workers. Working hours: Factories Act, 1948 imposes certain restrictions on the working hours and provides the provisions for rest and leaves. For an adult worker, 48 hours a week and 9 hours a day are fixed as standard working hours. of women and young persons: Factories Act, 1948 deal with the stringent provision of women and young persons. These sections particularly deal with the length of working hours with regard to women and young persons and the age of employment. The maximum daily hours of work shall be 9 hours for women. IM S Employment Leave: There are provisions related to weekly holidays, compensatory holidays and annual leaves. Factories Act, 1948 provides the grant of a leave period with wages to every worker who has worked for a period of 240 days or more in a factory during a calendar year. Such workers are allowed to leave with wages during the subsequent calendar year. M Annual N 9.2.3 OCCUPATION OF OCCUPIER (EMPLOYER) AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF OCCUPIER Occupier is the person who has the ultimate control over the affairs of a factory and is responsible for various functions. He cannot be anyone who is a mere servant charged with specific duties in regard to control of the machinery, workmen or office, for example, a manager [Emperor vs. Ram Pratap 20 (1905) Bom 423]. The term ‘occupier’ includes: Proprietor Partner (owner) in case of sole proprietary concern of a partnership firm Director of a Company [J K Industries Ltd. vs. Chief Inspector of Factories & Boilers & Ors. (1997 SC)] Person nominated by government in case of government factory CASE LAW JK Industries Ltd. and others vs. Chief Inspector of Factories and Boilers and others (1996) Facts: In this case, the Supreme Court noted that where a company owns or runs a factory, it is the company that has the ultimate control over the affairs of the factory and would therefore be the occupier. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Know More Women shall not be required or allowed to work in any factory between the hours of 6 AM and 7 PM. Business Law self assessment Questions 1. The __________is the principal law concerning working conditions designed to protect labour against industrial and occupational hazards. 2. Name the person who has the ultimate control over the affairs of a factory and is responsible for various functions. Activity S Use the Internet and make a table showing the nature of offences and penalties related to those offences under the Factories Act, 1948. 9.3 INDUSTRIAL DISPUTES ACT, 1947 M IM Industrial dispute is a major area of study in industrial relations and labour laws. Employers worldwide spend a significant amount of time and resources in solving industrial disputes. In simple, industrial disputes refer to various conflicts and differences taking place between workers and employers in an industry. Industrial disputes can take different forms, such as gheroas, strikes and demonstrations. The disputes can originate from the side of employees, employers or both. Whatever is the source, industrial disputes result in a significant loss in production. Therefore, it is crucial for the management of an organisation to understand the nature, reasons and ways of addressing industrial disputes to fulfill business objectives. N 344 The Industrial Disputes Act, 1947, (hereinafter referred to as the ‘ID Act’) offers the procedure and machinery for the investigation and settlement of industrial disputes by setting up of an in-house grievance settlement authority to ensure fair terms between the employer and the employees. The enactment of this ID Act was done to ensure peace and harmony by resolving industrial disputes through negotiations in order to facilitate industrial development. This ID Act made it mandatory for establishments having more than 100 employees to constitute work committee to facilitate good relations between workers and employers. 9.3.1 OBJECTIVEs AND APPLICABILITY The ID Act extends to the whole of India and applies to all the industrial establishments that carry on business, manufacturing units, trade and services. The main aim is to ensure industrial peace by protecting the interest of the workmen. The main objectives of this ID Act are: To maintain a better relationship between labourers and industries by providing a medium of setting disputes through adjudicating authorities NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education EMPLOYEE RELATED LAWS 345 To prevent illegal and unauthorised lockouts and strikes To help the labour that has been wrongfully dismissed or laid-off To provide an easier platform or committee for dispute resolution between the labour and industry through conciliation and collective bargaining To set up a permanent conciliation committee to resolve industrial disputes for speedy settlement The ID Act also prohibits the pendency of the conciliation and adjudication settlement proceedings by providing a more organised and legal way of settling disputes. The ID Act provides provisions to eliminate all forms of intimidation, coercion and violence. S CASE LAW Workmen of Dimakuchi Tea Estate vs. Dimakuchi Tea Estate (1958) IM Facts: In this case, the Supreme Court laid down the following objectives of the ID Act: (i) Promotion of measures of securing and preserving amity and good relations between the employer and workmen M (ii) Investigation and settlement of industrial disputes between employers and employers, employers and workmen, or workmen and workmen with a right of representation by registered trade union or federation of trade unions or an association of employers or a federation of associations of employers N (iii) Prevention of illegal strikes and lockouts (iv) Relief to workmen in the matter of lay-off and retrenchment (v) Promotion of collective bargaining Applicability This law extends to the whole of India and shall come in force on the first day of April, 1947. The Industrial Disputes Act, 1947, applies to every industrial establishment carrying on any business, trade, manufacture or distribution of goods and services irrespective of the number of workmen employed therein. RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES There are three types of redressal machinery adopted to resolve industrial disputes known as conciliation, adjudication and voluntary arbitration. Let us discuss these in detail: 1. Conciliation: It is the state intervention to resolve the disputes by bringing together the representatives of employers and employees before a third party to reconcile and discuss the conNMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law flicting interest. The third-party acts as a facilitator in the conciliation process. A board of conciliation and conciliation officers are appointed by the State and Central government, whenever required. These authorities assist and persuade disputing parties to reach on a settlement. However, there is no force or power to force a settlement and it totally depends upon the consent of both the parties. S 2. Voluntary arbitration: It is a process in which a third party is appointed that acts neutral or impartial and listens to both conflicting parties in order to acquire the information related to disputes. Then, it makes a decision or judgment that binds both parties. Both parties have good faith in the arbitration process because the third party is appointed through mutual content. It is a flexible and informal process to build a healthy industrial relationship. IM 3. Adjudication: It is the legal remedy to settle industrial disputes by involving legal authorities appointed by the government. It is a legal or mandatory authority to settle industrial dispute by a tribunal or labour court. In case of industrial dispute, there is three-tier machinery, which involves labour courts, industrial tribunals and national tribunals. M It is mandatory to resolve a dispute through adjudication in case where disputing parties jointly or separately apply for it or in case when the dispute is related to public utility services provided that there is a notice of lockout or strike. Table 9.1 shows the differences between strike and lockout: N 346 Table 9.1: Differences between Strike and Lockout Strike Lockout Acts as a weapon to workers Acts as a weapon to employers Involves cessation of work Involves closure of place of business Impedes production Does not impede production Happens with a collective decision of employees Takes place with the decision of employer The ID Act provides certain regulations for the settlement of industrial disputes through conciliation, arbitration and adjudication or working committees. It also lays down a provision for the payment of compensation for layoff and retrenchment. 9.3.2 EXAMPLES Strike in Hero Honda Motors Limited The joint venture of Hero Group of India and Honda of Japan faced a financial loss of ` 100 crore because of a labour strike in 2006. In NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education EMPLOYEE RELATED LAWS 347 Hero Honda Gurgaon Plant, 4000 workers were involved in the strike during April 2006. They demanded hike in wages, medical benefits at par and extra casual leaves. This resulted halt in production; thereby lead to financial loss. These contractual workers were paid very low wages and do not even get any pay slip. Therefore, under the aegis of Industrial Dispute Act, 1947, a mutual negotiation was done between Haryana’s Additional Labour Commission Management and workers’ representatives for settlement. It resulted in 30% hike in the salary and provision of two casual leaves in a month was provided to the workers. WORKER RELATIONS IN HERO MOTOCORP LIMITED IM S Hero MotoCorp Limited is a company with a market share of 46% in the two wheeler market. The company started in the year 1983 and has been wracked by continuous problems with workers. No wonder, the rate of attrition in the company has been quite high. The company analysed this situation and took the various steps to formulate better and more worker-friendly policies. It also initiated better pay-outs. All these steps have considerably helped in the retention of workers and registering the appreciable growth of the company. This case highlights the significance of industrial relations in the growth of any company as evidenced by the case of Hero MotoCorp Limited. M Devkinandan K. Mishra VS. Sayaji Iron and Engineering Company PVT. LTD & ANR – RespoNdent (S) N In this case, the appellant was working as a machinist charge-hand, who used to supervise the work of other machinists. He was alleged for not performing his supervising work. He was suspended because of ‘misconduct’ as he was found sleeping on duty. A charge sheet was filed against him and he was terminated. He, in his defence, argued that he was working as a workman and not as a supervisor, whereas the respondents stated that the people involved in managerial roles are not considered as workmen. The Labour court passed the judgment that the petitioner was a supervisor and not a workman. Later, in the Supreme Court, the misconduct was not considered as a grave crime and the petitioner was reinstated and awarded with the continuity of service and be paid 30% of his wages. self assessment Questions 3. Which of the following is not a tier of the adjudication machinery? a. Labour courts b. ILO c. Industrial tribunals d. National tribunals NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 348 Business Law Activity With the help of the Internet, gather information about some major industrial disputes in India that took place in the last 10 years. Compare these disputes and find out their respective causes. 9.4 MINIMUM WAGES ACT, 1948 The Minimum Wage Act, 1948, provides protection to the labour against the dangers of unfair methods and exploitation. Although social welfare is a prime aim of determining the minimum wage structure, its immediate aim is to settle the dispute between employers and employees and bring justice to the interests of both labour and capital. It aims to establish harmony between them and facilitate cooperation in task of production. The main object of this legislation on wages is to regulate and fix the quantum of wages. Effective implementation of legislation for workers for receiving a minimum wage is the hallmark of any progressive nation. It is one of the fundamental premises of a genuine and harmonious workplace. In India, Minimum Wages Act, 1948 offers for the fixation and enforcement of minimum wages in respect of scheduled employment. NOTE NOTE Minimum wages can be defined as the minimum amount of compensation an employee must receive for the discharge of his/her duties and performing labour. Typically, a contract or legislation by the government establishes minimum wages. The Minimum Wages Act, 1948 was passed to provide fixed minimum wages in case of certain occupations. N M Under Section 2(h) of the Minimum Wage Act, 1948, wages means all remuneration, capable of being expressed in terms of money, which would, if the terms of the contract of employment, express or implied, were fulfilled, be payable to a person employed in respect of his employment or of work done in such employment. IM S In 1928, the Minimum Wages Fixing Machinery Convention was held at Geneva. It was organised by International Labour Organisation (ILO) for eliminating labour exploitation, checking wages level and increasing their bargaining power. NOTE The Minimum Wages Act, 1948, contains 38 provisions, including Sections 22A to 22F and 30A. The Minimum Wages Act, 1948, protects employees from exploitation by ensuring that they are paid their entitled wages, which enables them to afford the basic necessities of life. According to this Minimum Wages Act, 1948, it is illegal to pay an employee less than the minimum wages amount. Fluctuations in the rate of minimum wages are common and vary across countries and sometimes across states or provinces. The minimum Wages Act, 1948, ensures that workers and employees earn wages that are sufficient for their livelihood. 9.4.1 OBJECTIVES AND APPLICABILITY The objective of the Minimum Wages Act, 1948, is to promote the welfare of workers by fixing a minimum rate of wages in certain industries where the labour is not organised and there is prevalence of sweat labour. The Minimum Wages Act, 1948 seeks to prevent exploitation of workers by ensuring that they are paid the prescribed minimum wages for their subsistence and efficiency. The objects of the Minimum Wages Act, 1948, are as follows: To fix and revise minimum wages in certain employments or establishments NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education EMPLOYEE RELATED LAWS 349 To prevent exploitation of unorganised labour To prevent the employment of sweated labour in the interests of general public To prescribe minimum wage rates, keeping into account the capacity of the employer The main objective of the Minimum Wages Act, 1948 is to safeguard the interests of workers who are employed in the unorganised sector. The Minimum Wages Act, 1948 lays down provisions for the fixation of minimum wages in certain specified employment. It acts as a binding force on employers to pay their workers the minimum wages fixed under the Minimum Wages Act, 1948 at definite time periods. S Applicability IM Dr. B.R. Ambedkar, the father of our constitution, drafted the Minimum Wages Bill on April 11, 1946. The bill was introduced and enforced on March 15, 1948 due to delay by constitutional changes. M The Minimum Wages Act, 1948 is applicable to the whole of India. The provisions of this Act are applicable to every employer that employs more than 1000 employees in a state. The provisions of the Minimum Wages Act, 1948 do not apply to the employees undertaken by the central government or railways unless the same has been consented by the central government. NOTE All the provisions of the Act equally apply to both male and female workers. N 9.4.2 KEY PROVISIONS AND FEATURES There are two methods of fixing minimum wages, i.e., Committee Method and Notification in Official Gazette method. The following are some of the main provisions of this Minimum Wages Act, 1948: Fixing of minimum rate of wages by the appropriate government Minimum rate of wages in respect of scheduled employments Procedure for fixing and revising minimum wages Appointment of an advisory board by the central government to coordinate the work of committee and sub-committees Wages in kind (under this Act, minimum wages shall be paid in cash. However, appropriate government will authorise the payment of minimum wages either wholly or partly in kind Payment of minimum rate of wages (rate not less than the minimum rate of wages fixed) Normal working hours NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Know More The norms for fixation/ revision of employee minimum wages are according to the recommendations set by the Indian Labour Conference in its session held in 1957. These norms are as follows: yyThree consumption units for one earner. yyMinimum food requirements of 2700 calories per average Indian adult. yyClothing requirements of 72 yards per annum per family. yyRent corresponding to the minimum area provided for under the government’s Industrial Housing Scheme. yyFuel, lighting, and other miscellaneous items of expenditure to constitute 20 per cent of the total minimum wages. 350 Business Law The number of hours which shall constitute a normal working day, shall be: 99 for an adult – 9 hours 99 for of a child – 4 &1/2 hours Overtime wages (payment for every hour or for part of an hour worked in excess of the number for hours constituting normal working day). Maintenance of registers and records (particulars in register include the work performed by employee, wages paid to employee, receipt given by employees and such other particulars as may be prescribed). Penalties. of inspector by appropriate government. S Appointment IM self assessment Questions 4. Which of the following are some of the main provisions of the Minimum Wages Act, 1948? a. Fixing of minimum rate of wages by the appropriate government M b. Minimum rate of wages in respect of scheduled employments c. Procedure for fixing and revising minimum wages N d. All of these NOTE As per the Employees Compensation Act, 1923, “partial disablement” means, where the disablement is of a temporary nature, such disablement as reduces the earning capacity of a workman in any employment in which he was engaged at the time of the accident resulting in the disablement, and, where the disablement is of a permanent nature, such disablement as reduces his earning capacity in every employment which he was capable of undertaking at that time. Activity Trace the history of setting of the provisions for the Minimum Wages Act, 1948, and prepare a chronology of the events that led to the final provisions of the Act. 9.5 EMPLOYEES COMPENSATION ACT, 1923 The Workmen’s Compensation Act, 1923, has been renamed as the Employees Compensation Act, 1923 (hereinafter referred to as ‘ECA 1923’) via the Workmen’s Compensation (Amendment) Act, 2009. ECA 1923 came in force on the first day of July, 1924. It is the first social security legislation in India. This Act contains 4 chapters further divided into 36 sections and 4 schedules. It protects the workers from hardships arising from accidents during work. In case of injury/accident arising out of and in the course of employment and resulting in disablement or death, payment is ensured and enacted as per provisions of the ECA 1923. The payment of compensation to workmen or NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education EMPLOYEE RELATED LAWS 351 their dependents is ensured by law. The law provides for the payment by certain classes of employers to their workmen of compensation for injury by accident. 9.5.1 OBJECTIVE AND APPLICABILITY The law imposes an obligation on the employer to compensate the employees for accidents arising out of and in the course of employment. The liability of the employer is not due to any wrongdoing committed by the employer but a statutory obligation. The compensation of the employee is not in lieu of wages but due to injury sustained by him. The conditions for liability are as follows: IM ii. The employment must not be of a casual nature. S i. The concerned person must be employed within the meaning of the law. iii. The employment must be for the purpose of employer’s trade or business. iv. The capacity in which he is employed must be set out in Schedule II of the ECA. N M If an employee or worker dies during the course of employment while undertaking the performance of his duty, his family or dependents shall be provided relief in monetary terms so that their livelihood is not affected. This relief is also provided in the case of disablement. The liability of the employer for injury or death arising in the course of and out of employment is unilateral so that he remains liable even if there is no negligence on his part. The ECA provides protection against occupational diseases. The compensation under the ECA is linked to the worker’s wage and relevant factors based on the worker’s age. The Employee’s Compensation Act, 1923, extends to the whole of India. 9.5.2 KEY PROVISIONS AND FEATURES By virtue of Workmen’s Compensation (Amendment) Act, 2000, all kinds of workers have been brought within the ambit of the ECA irrespective of the nature of the job for which they were employed. Hence, workers employed on a casual basis or otherwise than for the purpose of employer trade or business are covered under the ECA. Employees who have been engaged through the labour contractor or otherwise, who suffer any injury that makes them disabled or incapable for earning the similar income or in other words, reduces their earning capacity are entitled for compensation. The employer shall be liable to NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 352 Business Law compensate the workers who have suffered an accident in the course of the employment which leads to: a. Death: The Death clause is applicable when the employee or worker dies on the account of the accident. b. Permanent total disablement: This applies when the earning capacity of the worker is lost permanently. Example: Shamyak has lost his leg in an accident while working in the printing business. He can no longer work as a worker or do any work of a similar nature. Shamyak can be considered 100% disabled under the Employees Compensation Act, 1923. c. Permanent partial disablement: Permanent partial disablement takes place when the earning capacity of the worker is reduced. IM S Example: Satyam, who worked in a manufacturing business, got his fingers of the legs cut off by an accident. This is an example of a “Partial Disablement” because this accident has reduced his capacity to work in any such employment of similar nature. d. Temporary disablement, total or partial: This applies when the earning capacity of the worker is lost for a certain period. M The amount of compensation payable to a worker depends upon the wages drawn by the worker and the nature of the injury caused. N Self Assessment Questions 5. The objective of the _________________ is to provide for payment of compensation to workmen and their dependents in case of injury and accident in the course of employment and resulting in disablement or death. Activity Calculate the compensation of a 35 year old worker who meets with an accident and dies while at work. Salary at the time of death was ` 2,500. The relevant factor is ` 197.06. NOTE Provident fund is a retirement benefit scheme for all the salaried employees and help the employees to save some part of their salaries every month which they can use at the time of retirement. 9.6 EMPLOYEES PROVIDENT FUND AND MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS ACT, 1952 The Employees Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act, 1952 (hereinafter referred to as the ‘EPF Act’) is applicable to the whole of India. The EPF Act aims to set up provident fund, pension fund and deposit linked insurance as a means of social security. It becomes applicable for establishments with 20 or more employees. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education EMPLOYEE RELATED LAWS 353 9.6.1 OBJECTIVES AND APPLICABILITY The EPF Act has been enacted to provide social security to the employees after their retirement and to their dependents in case of the employee’s death. Under the EPF Act, the following three schemes have been provided: 1. Employees’ Provident Fund Scheme, 1952: Under this scheme, the employee contributes up to 12% of basic wages, DA, including cash value of food concession, and retaining allowance. All accumulations under the fund including contributions from the employer are refunded with interest on superannuation/ voluntary retirement/permanent disability/migration from India. This scheme allows making a partial withdrawal from the account. IM S 2. Employees’ Pension Scheme, 1995: In this scheme, the contributory gets a monthly pension after he/she retires. The amount of pension depends on the pensionable salary, which is the average monthly salary in 12 months preceding the date of exit from the membership of the Employees Provident Fund, and the length of service. The pension is paid on superannuation on attaining 58 years of age/retirement/death during service/ death after superannuation/ permanent total disablement. N M 3. Employees’ Deposit Linked Insurance Scheme, 1976: This scheme is for those who are members of the provident fund scheme for the purpose of providing life insurance benefit to the employees of any establishment or class of establishments to which the EPF Act applies. Here, the employees need not make any contribution but the employer has to contribute 1% of the total pay of the employee. In this scheme, if the employee dies, the dependents are paid a lump sum amount. 9.6.2 KEY PROVISION AND FEATURES The key provisions provided in the EPF Act addresses the post retirement needs of employees and their welfare. As per the EPF Act, every employee of a commercial establishment with salary up to ` 15,000 or less is entitled to join the Employee Provident Fund. However, employees with salary more than ` 15,000 can also join the scheme. The retirement benefit plan requires contribution from both the employer and employee. For employees, 12% of wages or more can be contributed and for employers, 12% of wages go for contribution out of which 3.67% goes to provident fund and 8.33% goes to pension fund. Every employer is required to pay the contribution amount received from the employee before or on 15th of the following month. An employee can withdraw funds from the provident fund provided that he/she does not have employment for a two month period. Next, the EPF Act has Employees’ Pension Scheme which provides the provision of superannuation pension, retiring pension and perma- NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law nent total disablement pension to employees who are covered under the Section 6A of the Employees’ Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provision Act, 1952. Also, the benefits of pension provided to the beneficiaries such as widow or orphan child is also provided in the EPF Act. Next, this Act also offers life insurance benefits scheme to the employees. Under this scheme, on the death of the employee, the nominee is entitled to receive a lump sum insurance amount. 9.6.3 CALCULATION OF PROVIDENT FUND AND APPORTIONMENT OF THE FUND AGAINST VARIOUS SCHEMES S The contribution of employer and employee is calculated on the basis of Wages and Dearness Allowances (DA) paid on daily, weekly, fortnightly or monthly basis. The following are the percentage of salary contributed by employer and employee in various schemes: Fund: IM Provident Employee’s contribution: 12% on Basic + DA Employer: (a) 3.67 % on Basic + DA M (b) Administration Charges: 0.01 % on Basic + DA Pension Scheme: Employee’s contribution: No Contribution N 354 Employer: 8.33% on basic + DA Insurance Scheme: Employee’s contribution: No Contribution Employer: 8.33% on Basic + DA Self Assessment Questions 6. The Employees Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act, 1952, is applicable to the __________. 7. The Employees Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act, 1952, provides for which of the following? a. The Employees Provident Fund Scheme b. The Employees Pension Scheme c. The Employees Deposit Linked Insurance Scheme d. All of the above NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education EMPLOYEE RELATED LAWS 355 Activity Using the Internet, prepare a report on how the contribution amount is calculated and deposited under the various schemes of the Employees Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act, 1952. 9.7 PAYMENT OF BONUS ACT, 1965 IM S The Payment of Bonus Act, 1965 (hereinafter referred to as the ‘PBA 1965’) was made applicable from 25th September 1965. This law is applicable where 20 or more employees are employed. The law shall continue to apply notwithstanding that the number of persons employed falls below 20 [Section 1]. It offers the regulation for the amount of bonus that is to be paid to the employees in an establishment on the basis of productivity and profit. The PBA, 1965 is applied on the establishment that has more than 20 or more persons employed. 9.7.1 Objectives AND APPLICABILITY M The law provides for the payment of bonus to the persons employed in certain establishments and for matters connected therewith. However, the Act has not defined the term ‘bonus’, which involves the sharing of the prosperity of the concern with those employed therein. The objectives of the PBA, 1965 are: To impose a legal obligation on employer to pay the bonus to employees offer redressal mechanism in case of non-compliance To designate minimum and maximum percentage of bonus To prescribe the formulae for calculating bonus N To Applicability This law extends to the whole of India. 9.7.2 KEY PROVISIONS AND FEATURES The law extends to the whole of India and covers all the employees [Section 2(13)] receiving salary or wages up to ` 21,000 per month [as amended by the Payment of Bonus (Amendment) Act, 2016] and engaged in any kind of work whether skilled, unskilled, manual, supervisory, managerial, administrative, technical or clerical, in the factory or establishment of the employer provided the employee has worked for at least 30 days in that particular accounting year (Section 8). The minimum bonus payable is 8.33% of the salary or wages of the employee during the accounting year. This is payable even if the NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 356 Business Law employers suffer a loss. The maximum bonus payable under the Act is 20% of the basic salary and wages. The bonus is paid within 8 months of the closure of the accounting year and is paid on an annual basis. There shall be no bonus to a worker who has been dismissed for fraud, riotous behaviour, theft, misappropriation and sabotage of property. On 31 December 2015, this Act was amended by the Payment of Bonus (Amendment) Act, 2016 with retrospective effect from 1st April 2014 as the threshold of the applicability of the Act has been increased from ` 10,000 to 21,000 per month. Also, the wage ceiling for bonus calculation has been increased from ` 3,500 to ` 7,000 per month. This amendment in the act has been brought into effect from the 1st April, 2014. S self assessment Questions IM 8. The minimum bonus payable is _____ of the salary or wages of the employee during the accounting year. 9. The Payment of Bonus Act has 40 sections. (True/False) Activity M Explain how minimum bonus shall be calculated under the Payment of Bonus Act, 1965, by using the Internet. 9.8 PAYMENT OF GRATUITY ACT, 1972 The Payment of Gratuity Act, 1972 (hereinafter referred to as the ‘PGA 1972’) consists of 15 sections. Its main objective is to reward the employee for his past meritorious services on his leaving the job after 5 years or more or on retirement. This law is a social security enactment or an extension of labour laws that has a sole aim of providing gratuity. Gratuity is defined as a monetary award provided to the working employees for providing uninterrupted services during the employment period. N NOTE The term ‘gratuity’ derives from the Latin word “gratuitous” which means given freely. 9.8.1 OBJECTIVES AND APPLICABILITY Gratuity is an additional retirement benefit paid voluntarily by the employer to the employee for sincere and continuous services rendered by him/her. The payment of gratuity is mandatory provided he has rendered continuous services for a period of five years or more. The PGA 1972 is applicable to the following: a. Employees engaged in factories, mines, oilfields, plantations, ports, railways and companies b. Every shop and establishment within the meaning of any law for the time being in force if 10 or more persons are employed or were employed, on any day of the preceding twelve months NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education EMPLOYEE RELATED LAWS 357 c. Every motor establishment or class of establishment in which 10 or more employees are or were employed on any day of the preceding 12 months d. Such other establishments or class thereof in which 10 or more persons are employed or were employed, on any day of the preceding twelve months as specified in the government notification Applicability The PGA 1972 extends to the whole of India. NOTE Gratuity is payable to employees who have rendered a continuous service of five years or more, interrupted only on account of sickness, accident, leave, absence from duty without leave (not amounting to break in service under the relevant standing orders), lay off, strike, or lockout or cessation of work not due to the fault of the concerned employee. An employee of a seasonal establishment shall be deemed to be in continuous service if he has actually worked for not less than 75% of the number of days for which the establishment was in operation. IM S 9.8.2 ENTITLEMENT OF GRATUITY (section 2a) CASE LAW M Irel (india) limited vs p. N. Raghava panicker (2020) N Facts: In this case, the court held that a trainee is not excluded from the definition of the term ‘employee’ under the gratuity act, but only an ‘apprentice’ is excluded. Section 2(e) of the payment of gratuity act, 1972 defines an “employee” which excludes only apprentice. The act says “employee means any person (other than an apprentice)...”. 9.8.3 CALCULATION OF GRATUITY The basic formula for calculating gratuity amount is: Gratuity = Last Drawn Salary × 15/26 × Number of years of service The ratio of 15/26 represents 15 days out of 26 working days in a month Last Drawn Salary = Basic Salary + Dearness Allowances Provided that for calculating gratuity amount of piece-rated employees, the average of the total wages received by him for a period of three months immediately preceding the termination of his employment, and, for this purpose, the wages paid for any overtime work shall not be taken into account. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 358 Business Law In case of seasonal employee, 7 days wages for each season is taken into consideration. NOTE Here, Shaan has completed 14 years of service. The 7 months of his first year (August 2005 to March 2006) is to be counted as one year as it is more than six months of service. Gratuity = (Basic + DA) × 15/26 × number of years. Example: If Shaan had joined a job on 01-08-2004 and retired or got his job terminated on 30-04-2018, with last drawn basic salary of ` 30,000 and DA of ` 13,000, his gratuity will be: (` 30,000+ ` 13,000)× 15/26 × 14 = ` 3,47,307.70 9.8.4 TIME OF PAYMENT OF GRATUITY S Gratuity is payable on the termination of employment after rendering of a continuous service for not less than five years due to any of the following: a. Superannuation IM b. Retirement or resignation c. Death or disablement due to accident or disease NOTE M In the case of death of the employee, the gratuity is payable to the nominee and if there is no nomination, then to his heirs. Where an employee has been discharged before the completion of a minimum period of service as prescribed in the PGA. 1972, there shall be no liability for payment of gratuity. However, completion of 5 years of service is not mandatory where termination of service has been due to death or disablement. 9.8.5 FORFEITURE OF GRATUITY [SECTION 4(6)] N Gratuity can be forfeited in the following circumstances: a. Any act, willful omission or negligence causing damage to the employer’s property or loss to the employer. In such a case, the forfeiture shall be to the extent of damage or loss. b. Riotous or disorderly conduct or any other act of violence on the part of the employee. c. Any act constituting moral turpitude committed in the course of employment. d. Leaving employment before the completion of the continuous service period of 5 years. 9.8.6 MAXIMUM LIMIT AND AMOUNT OF GRATUITY PAYABLE The minimum amount of the gratuity paid under the PGA, 1972 is 3.5 lakhs. The maximum gratuity amount cannot exceed 20 lakhs (earlier it was 10 lakhs), rupees, which is exempted from Income Tax. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education EMPLOYEE RELATED LAWS 359 CASE LAW Arasuri Ambajimata Mandir devasthan Trust vs. Jaitabhai Patel, Shramjivi General Works Union (1983) Facts: It was held that the post in Temple trust is controlled by State Government. It is not a post under State government. So as to fall under the exclusion under section 2(e) and hence it falls under the definition of employee and is entitled to gratuity under the act which means though the temple is not mentioned in the section (e) of the act, court held that it is applicable under this act. self assessment Questions a. True b. False S 10. The main objective of the Payment of Gratuity Act is to reward the employee for his past meritorious services on his leaving the job after 5 years or more or on retirement. IM 11. Gratuity is payable to the employee if he/she has served a minimum of ______ years with the company. b. 7 c. 3 d. 10 Activity M a. 5 N Use the Internet to identify the cases in which the gratuity can be forfeited and how the gratuity amount is calculated. 9.9 MATERNITY BENEFIT ACT, 1961 Indian law has made it mandatory for certain commercial establishments to provide maternity benefits to women employees during and after pregnancy and childbirth. The Maternity Benefit (Amendment) Act, 2017, has added various benefits such as added paid leaves, work from home in the Maternity Benefit Act, 1961. This law deals with the regulations of maternity paid maternity leaves for women employees at the time of childbirth or adoption. These maternity benefits aid in improving the survival rates of children and the healthy development of both mother and child. This law has provided the woman employee a right to carry profession guaranteed under the Indian Constitution. 9.9.1 OBJECTIVES AND APPLICABILITY This Maternity Benefit Act, 1961 extends to the whole of India and it applies to commercial establishments with 10 or more employees. A woman employee needs to complete a period of 80 days in the establishment in order to get entitled to the maternity benefit. The NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 360 Business Law NOTE The covered woman employee is entitled to receive maternity benefit at the rate of the average daily wages for the period of maximum prescribed maternity leave with a condition that the woman covered under maternity benefit has worked for at least 80 days in the last 12 months. enactment of this Maternity Benefit Act, 1961 is done to regulate the employment of women employees for a certain period during the pregnancy and after the childbirth. Every factory, shop, plantations, government establishments, mines or commercial establishment has to follow this Act. 9.9.2 KEY PROVISIONS The Maternity Benefit (Amendment) Act, 2017 has amended various provisions pertaining to duration of maternity paid leaves and various other benefits which are described in the sub-section. Table 9.2 shows the amendments done in the Act: S Table 9.2: Amendments in the Maternity Benefit Act Maternity Benefit Act, 1961 Maternity Benefit (Amendment) Act, 2017 MATERNITY BENEFIT The maximum time period of maternity benefit was 12 weeks This amendment Act has increased the duration of the paid maternity leaves from 12 weeks to 26 weeks, out of which most of the 8 weeks of such benefits can be opted by the woman employees prior to the date of expected delivery. CRECHE FACILITY No such benefit was given It has become essential for commercial establishments of 50 or more employees to provide the facility of ‘Creche’ to the employees. WORK FROM No such benefit HOME was given OPTION Can be availed after the expiry of 26 weeks – the employer and claimant to decide the terms mutually N M IM Provisions NO INCREASED BENEFIT FOR THIRD CHILD Know More When a modern medical technology known as Surrogacy is used, the woman employee gets entitled to maternity leave for 12 weeks from the day the child is handed over to her. In the case of a third child, the maternity paid leaves is provided only for 12 weeks out of which 6 weeks leaves can be taken prior to the expected date of delivery. The increased paid maternity leave benefit is only provided for the first two children. CASE LAW Dr. Rachna Chaurasiya vs. State of U.P. and others passed (2017) Facts: Division Bench of the Court directed the State Government to grant maternity leave to all female with full pay of 180 days, irrespective of nature of employment, i.e., permanent, temporary/ad hoc or contractual basis. State respondent was further directed to grant Child Care Leave of 730 days to all female employees, who are appointed on regular basis, contractual basis, adhoc or temporary basis having minor children with the rider that the child should not be more than 18 years of age or older. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education EMPLOYEE RELATED LAWS 361 CRÈCHE FACILITY This provision is effective from July 1, 2017. It has become essential for commercial establishments of 50 or more employees to provide the facility of ‘Creche’ to employees. The working mothers have the right to visit minimum crèche four times a day. WORK FROM HOME In case where the nature of work assigned to a woman is of such nature that she may work from home, the employer may allow her to do so after availing of the maternity benefit for such period and on such conditions as the employer and the woman may mutually agree.’ S CASE LAW Rakhi P.V. and Others V. State of Kerala & Another [2018 (2) KHC 251 IM Facts: It was held that a woman employee cannot be denied maternity benefits merely because her status is a contractual employee. And held that a women cannot be compelled to choose between motherhood and employment. self assessment Questions M 12. As per the Amendments in the Maternity Benefit Act, the work from home option can be availed after the expiry of 26 weeks of maternity leave (the employer and claimant to decide the terms mutually) a. True b. False N 13. A woman employee needs to complete a period of _________ days in the establishment in order to get entitled to the maternity benefit. Activity Research the Internet and find out real-life examples of organisations penalising for not following The Maternity Benefit (Amendment) Act, 2017. 9.10 CODE ON LABOUR LAWS The code on Labour laws was introduced in order to streamline labour laws businesses in India. These reforms are performed to ensure accountability, transparency and effective implementation of labour laws. 9.10.1 CODE ON WAGES The Code on Wages, 2019 (hereinafter referred to as the ‘CW 2019’) is the act that was introduced in Lok Sabha in July and approved by the NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law Know More The Payment of Wages Act, 1936 The Minimum Wages Act, 1948 The Payment of Bonus Act, 1965 The minimum wages decided by the State or Central government are set as the minimum wages that have to be paid by employers. Employers cannot reduce the standard minimum wages fixed by the government, they have to pay wages higher than the floor wages. Therefore, the Code on Wages prohibits employers from paying less than the minimum wages. The Code on Wages protects the interest of workers. Also, the government has fixed the minimum working hours in a normal day. Therefore, if the employees or workers perform their duty or service more than a normal working day, they are entitled to overtime wages that has to be at least twice the normal rate of wages. Also, the Code on Wages provides the provisions for penalties for offences committed by the employer such as paying less than the due wages or for contravening the provisions of the Code on Wages. The maximum amount of penalty can be either the imprisonment for the three months and a fine up to one lakh rupees. M IM In 2019, the Ministry of Labour and Employment introduced four bills to consolidate 29 central laws. These codes regulate: (i) Wages, (ii) Industrial Relations, (iii) Social Security, and (iv) Occupational Safety, Health and Working Conditions. While the Code on Wages, 2019, has been passed by the Parliament, bills on the other three areas were referred to the Standing Committee on Labour. The Standing Committee has submitted its report on all three bills. The government has replaced these bills with new ones on September 19, 2020. Parliament in August, 2019 and assented by the President of India on 8th August 2019. The Code on Wages regulates the bonus and wages payment in all the commercial establishments. The Code on Wages 2019 subsumes the following legislations: S 362 9.10.2 CODE ON INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS N The Industrial Relations Code, 2020 was introduced in Lok Sabha in November 2018 and after passing from the Lok Sabha and Rajya Sabha, it received the President’s assent on 28th September, 2020. It results in calmer industrial environment as it would introduce the recognition of trade unions and notice period for the resolution of industrial disputes, strikes and lock-outs. It subsumes: The Industrial Dispute Act, 1947 The Trade Union Act, 1926 The Industrial Employment Act Any employer or worker cannot go for strike without giving a prior notice of 14 days in order to reduce the workers’ ability to strike and employees to lock-down. It also defines the constitution of Industrial tribunals to resolve industrial disputes. Also, in order to lay off or retrenching workers, an organisation with 100 or more employees or workers need to take prior permission from the State or Central government. In this code, the registration of Trade Union is same as mentioned in the Trade Union Act, 1926 which states that at least 10% of the workers or all the workers need to be the members of the Union on the date of application for union registration. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education EMPLOYEE RELATED LAWS 363 9.10.3 CODE ON SOCIAL SECURITY Social security is defined as a measure to assure access to health care and income security to workers. The Code on Social Security, 2020 came into force on 28th September, 2020 as notified in the Official Gazette. It replaces nine laws related to social security, which are: 1. The Employees’ Compensation Act, 1923 2. The Employees’ State Insurance Act, 1948 3. The Employees’ Provident Funds and Miscellaneous Provisions Act, 1952 5. The Maternity Benefit Act, 1961 6. The Payment of Gratuity Act, 1972 IM 7. The Cine Workers Welfare Fund Act, 1961 S 4. The Employment Exchanges (Compulsory Notification of Vacancies) Act, 1959 8. The Building and Other Construction Workers Welfare Cess Act, 1996 9. The Unorganised Workers’ Social Security Act, 2008 N M Under this law, the central government may introduce various social security schemes for the worker’s benefit. These schemes can include provisions for Employee’s Provident Fund (EPF) Scheme, Employees’ Pension Scheme (EPS) or insurance schemes, etc. The provision of penalties is also available in the code for various offences such as failure of payment from employer contribution etc. 9.10.4 CODE ON SAFETY, HEALTH AND WORKING CONDITIONS The Code on Occupational Safety, Health and Working Conditions, 2020 involves the regulation of health and safety conditions of workers with 10 or more employees or workers in mines or docks. It has replaced 13 labour related laws relating to safety, health and working conditions which are: 1. The Factories Act, 1948 2. The Contract Labour (Regulation and Abolition) Act, 1970 3. The Mines Act, 1952 4. The Dock Workers (Safety, Health and Welfare) Act, 1986 5. The Building & Other Construction Workers (Regulation of Employment and Conditions of Service) Act, 1996 6. The Plantations Labour Act, 1951 NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law 7. The Inter-State Migrant Workmen (Regulation of Employment and Conditions of Service) Act, 1979 8. The Working Journalist and other News Paper Employees (Conditions of Service and Miscellaneous Provision) Act, 1955 9. The Working Journalist (Fixation of rates of wages) Act, 1958 10. The Cine Workers and Cinema Theatre Workers Act, 1981 11. The Motor Transport Workers Act, 1961 12. The Sales Promotion Employees (Conditions of Service) Act, 1976 S 13. The Beedi and Cigar Workers (Conditions of Employment) Act, 1966 IM The central and state governments fix the working hours, working conditions and welfare facilities for various types of establishments. It would simplify and consolidate the existing health and safety laws. All the factories, mines, docks, buildings, construction company labour, construction workers, plantation labour, contract labour, cine workers, etc., are included in this code. According to the Code on Occupational Safety, Health and Working Conditions, 2020, the following are the duties of employers: a workplace that is free from hazards that may cause injury or diseases M Providing Providing free annual health examinations to employees in notified establishments Issuing N 364 appointment letter to employees Informing relevant authorities in case an accident at the workplace leads to death or serious bodily injury of an employees Also, the certified government would notify the factories, mines, docks, etc., to include working and welfare facilities such as canteen, ambulance rooms, and temporary housing. The commercial establishments are also asked to include medical officers to certify, examine and supervise the health of workers. Also, they have to maintain suitable working conditions and medical facilities for the employees. self assessment Questions 14. The Industrial Relations Code amalgamates essential elements from which of the following acts? a. The Trade Union Act, 1926 b. The Industrial Employment Act, 1946 NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education EMPLOYEE RELATED LAWS 365 c. The Industrial Dispute Act, 1947 d. All of the above 15. The code on __________ 2019 is the Act that was introduced in Lok Sabha in July and approved by the Parliament in August, 2019. Activity Research on the Internet and find out the comparison of existing laws with the labour code. 9.11 Summary S S In India, there are various laws that ensure equitable remuneration IM for employees working in various organisations and factories. Besides this, there are various provisions to ensure that even after retirement or in case of an accident, sufficient amount of money is accumulated for the survival of the employees and their dependents. this direction, the Acts enacted by the Parliament include the Provident Fund Act, Gratuity Act, Minimum Wages Act, Bonus Act, Workmen Compensation Act, etc. M In The government of India has enacted various labour laws, including the Industrial Disputes Act, 1947, to improve industrial relations and establish industrial peace. Maternity Benefit (Amendment) Act, 2017, is regarded as a vital piece of labour to provide maternity benefit and certain other benefits. Under N The the virtue of labour reforms initiatives, the ministry of labour has decided to amalgamate 44 labour laws under four labour codes. These reforms are performed to provide flexibility in retrenchment and to ensure accountability, transparency, effective implementation of labour laws. The government also keeps on amending these acts from time to time for the betterment of labourers and employees. key words Bonus: The payment made to employees over and above the salary Occupational disease: A chronic ailment that occurs as a result of work or occupational activity NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law Permanent partial disability: The disability that is permanent in nature but not completely disabling Permanent total disability: A condition when the individual becomes totally and permanently disabled due to accidental bodily injury, adverse sickness or fatal disease Strike: The stoppage of work by employees Trade unions: A continuous association of wage earners and employees ? 9.12 Descriptive Questions 1. Explain the objectives of the Factories Act, 1948. S 2. Explain the objectives of Industrial Disputes Law. IM 3. Discuss the obligation of the occupier as per the Factories Act, 1948. 4. What is Employees Compensation Act? Discuss its scope. 5. Explain the scope and major provisions made in the Payment of Bonus Act. M 6. Discuss the various schemes provided under the Employees Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act. 7. Define the conditions of applicability for the Payment of Gratuity Act, 1972. 8. Discuss the scope and major provisions made in the Minimum Wages Act, 1948. N 366 9. What are the objectives of the Maternity Benefit Act? 9.13 Answers and Hints ANSWERS FOR SELF ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS Topic Factories Act, 1948 Q. No. Answer 1. Factories Act, 1948 2. Occupier Industrial Dispute Act, 1947 3. b. ILO Minimum Wages Act, 1948 4. d. All of these Employee Compensation Act, 1923 5. Employee’s Compensation Act, 1923 Employees Provident Fund & Miscellaneous Provisions Act, 1952 6 Whole of India NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education EMPLOYEE RELATED LAWS 367 Q. No. Payment of Bonus Act, 1965 Payment of Gratuity Act, 1972 Maternity Benefit (Amendment) Act, 2017 Code on Labour Laws Answer 7. d. All of the above 8. 8.33% 9. a. 10. a. True 11. a. 12. a. True 13. 80 14. d. 15. Wages True 5 All of the above IM HINTS FOR DESCRIPTIVE QUESTIONS S Topic 1. The Factories Act, 1948 is the principal law concerning working conditions designed to protect labour against industrial and occupational hazards. Refer to Section 9.2 Factories Act, 1948 M 2. An industrial dispute is settled according to the Industrial Disputes Act, 1947. Refer to Section 9.3 Industrial Disputes Act, 1947 N 3. The Factories Act, 1948 is the principal law concerning working conditions designed to protect labour against industrial and occupational hazards. Refer to Section 9.2 Factories Act, 1948 4. The Employees Compensation Act, 1923 came in force on the first day of July, 1924. It is the first social security legislation in India. Refer to Section 9.5 Employees Compensation Act, 1923 5. The Payment of Bonus Act was made applicable from 25th September, 1965. Refer to the Section 9.7 Payment of Bonus Act, 1965 6. The Employees Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act, 1952 is applicable to the whole of India. Refer to Section 9.6 The Employees Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act, 1952 7. The Payment of Gratuity Act, 1972 consists of 15 sections. Its main objective is to reward the employee for his past meritorious services on his leaving the job after 5 years or more or on retirement. Refer to Section 9.8 Payment of Gratuity Act, 1972 8. The Minimum Wages Act, 1948 ensures that workers and employees earn wages that are sufficient for their livelihood. Refer to Section 9.4 Minimum Wages Act, 1948 NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Business Law 9. The Act was enforced to provide maternity benefit and certain other benefits to women and regulate their employment in certain establishments for a certain period before and after childbirth. Refer to Section 9.9 Maternity Benefit (Amendment) Act, 2017 9.14 Suggested Readings & References SUGGESTED READINGS Abbott, K., Pendlebury, N., &Wardman, K. (2013). Business law. Andover: Cengage Learning. Emerson, R. (2016). Business Law. Hauppauge: B.E.S. Publishing. G., &Singhania, R. (2008). Employment law in India. Hong Kong: CCH Hong Kong Ltd. S Sahi, IM E-References (2020). Retrieved 15 May 2020, from http://adapt.it/adapt-indicea-z/wp-content/uploads/2014/09/Labour_Employment_Laws_ India.pdf Retrieved 15 May 2020, from https://knowledge.leglobal. org/wp-content/uploads/sites/2/LEGlobal-Employment-LawOverview_India_2019-2020.pdf M (2020). Employment & Labour Law 2020 | India | ICLG. (2020). Retrieved N 368 15 May 2020, from https://iclg.com/practice-areas/employmentand-labour-laws-and-regulations/india NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education C 10 h a pt ENVIRONMENT-RELATED LAWS S Contents N M IM 10.1 Introduction Laws Aimed at Protecting and Conserving the Environment 10.2 10.2.1 The Environment Protection Act (EPA), 1986 10.2.2 The National Green Tribunal (NGT) Act, 2010 The Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981 10.2.3 10.2.4 The Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974 10.2.5The Hazardous and Other Wastes (Management and Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016 The Wildlife Protection Act, 1972 10.2.6 10.2.7 The Forest Conservation Act, 1980 10.2.8 The Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991 The Biological Diversity Act, 2002 10.2.9 10.2.10Cases where Companies have faced Consequences of Violating Environment Protection Laws in India Self Assessment Questions Activity 10.3 Summary 10.4 Descriptive Questions Answers and Hints 10.5 10.6 Suggested Readings and References NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education e r 370 Business Law Introductory Caselet BHUSHAN STEEL’S VIOLATION OF THE ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION ACT (EPA) Case Objective This caselet discusses about violations of the Environment Protection Act (EPA). Bhushan Steel Limited (BSL) was a prominent player in the steel industry. It was engaged in the manufacturing and marketing of Cold Rolled Close Annealed (CRCA) coils, galvanised sheets, precision tubes, high-tensile steel, hardened and tempered steel strips, wire rods, colour-coated sheets, etc. In 2018, BSL was acquired by Tata Steel and is now known as Tata Steel BSL. IM S Also, in 2012, the State Pollution Control Board (SPCB) served the BSL with a closure notice because the plant was lacking various environment protection measures, which restrained the company from pursuing construction activities. In 2012-13, BSL faced allegations for expanding its work at Meramandali, Dhenkanal district of Odisha in violation of the Environment Protection Act (EPA), 1986. M In March 2012, the Ministry of Environment and Forest (MOEF) pointed out the violation of the EPA, 1986 and sent an expert team to the BSL plant to probe whether the BSL had indeed gone ahead with the expansion work to expand the production capacity from 3.1 million tonnes to 5.6 million tonnes. The team validated all the allegations and asked the state government to take an appropriate action. Following this, the state environment secretary ordered the district collector to file a case against BSL. N Following the orders of the state environment secretary, the District Collector (DC) of Dhenkanal filed a case against BSL in the court of local Sub-divisional Judicial Magistrate (SDJM) for violating the provisions of the EPA, 1986. The SDJM court admitted the case and a criminal case was registered against A. Berma (the Chief Operating Officer (COO) of the company) for violating Sections 15 and 16 of the EPA. If allegations against BSL are proved, the guilty can get a maximum punishment of five years jail or `1 lakh fine or both. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education ENVIRONMENT-RELATED LAWS Learning objectives After studying this chapter, you will be able to: Realise the need to protect and conserve the environment Describe the Environment Protection Act (EPA), 1986 Discuss the National Green Tribunal (NGT) Act, 2010 Examine the Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981 and the Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974 Outline the Hazardous and Other Wastes (Management and Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016 Describe the Wildlife Protection Act, 1972 State the significance of the Forest Conservation Act, 1980 Describe the Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991 Discuss the Biological Diversity Act, 2002 >> >> >> >> >> 10.1 Introduction IM S >> >> >> >> In the previous chapter, you studied various laws that are relevant for labour welfare. N M For the last three decades, the Indian environment law has been evolving for the good. Initially, India participated in the United Nations Conference on the Human Environment which resulted in the emergence of Indian environment in 1972. It had been realised in that conference that a framework of laws was necessary to deal with environmental hazards that would result from the stage of development that India was entering in the 1970s. It is a common aspiration of countries to reduce the damage to the environment and work in a sustainable manner. However, due to multiple factors, almost all countries harm and exploit the environment. Therefore, various international organisations, like the United Nations, have come forward and laid down the standards and the basic law framework that can be adopted by countries to ensure that they are able to set environmental standards and can punish individuals or organisations that violate any of the environmental laws. In India, there are multiple environmental laws. Some of these laws are discussed in this chapter. These laws protect the environment; regulate the discharge of pollutants; handle hazardous substances; provide a speedy response in the event of accidents threatening environment; and award deterrent punishment to those who endanger human environment, safety and health. In this chapter, you will study about the Environment Protection Act (EPA), 1986; the National Green Tribunal (NGT) Act, 2010; the Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981; the Water (Prevention NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Quick Revision 371 372 Business Law and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974; the Hazardous and Other Wastes (Management and Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016; the Wildlife Protection Act, 1972; the Forest Conservation Act, 1980; the Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991 and the Biological Diversity Act, 2002. 10.2 IM Article 48A of the Constitution of India states that the state shall endeavour to improve and protect the environment and safeguard the flora and fauna of the country. In this highly industrialised world, it has become extremely important to protect and conserve environment and make a sustainable use of natural resources. This is also reflected in the constitutional framework of India and its international commitments. In the Constitution of India, the Fundamental Duties are laid out in Article 51A. This Article states that every citizen of India must protect and improve the natural environment such as forests, lakes, rivers, wildlife, etc. They must have compassion for all living creatures. Also, Article 48A of the Indian Constitution deals with the Directive Principles of the State Policies and stipulates that the state must also safeguard its forests and wildlife. S NOTE LAWS AIMED AT PROTECTING AND CONSERVING THE ENVIRONMENT N The regulation and administration of environmental protection laws in India are done by a combination of the MoEF, the Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) and the State Pollution Control Boards (SPCBs). M ? DID YOU KNOW In India, the thrust and necessity for putting in force a well-developed framework came after the UN Conference on Human Environment held in Stockholm, 1972. After the Stockholm Conference, in the same year, the National Council for Environmental Policy and Planning was set up under the Department of Science and Technology. The National Council for Environmental Policy and Planning was set up as a regulatory body to look after environmental issues, which later developed into the Ministry of Environment and Forest (MOEF). In 2014, the MOEF was renamed as the Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change (MOEFCC), which is the apex body that regulates and ensures environmental protection. It also lays down the legal and regulatory framework for environment protection. Starting from the 1970s, a lot of environment legislations have been introduced in India. Some of these environment-related legislations include: The National Green Tribunal (NGT) Act, 2010 The Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981 The Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974 The Environment Protection Act (EPA), 1986 The Hazardous Wastes Management (HWM) Regulations The Wildlife Protection Act, 1972 The Forest Conservation Act, 1980 NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education ENVIRONMENT-RELATED LAWS The Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991 The Biological Diversity Act, 2002 373 You will study about these legislations in the upcoming sections. 10.2.1 THE ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION ACT (EPA), 1986 Environmental protection is attributed to a blend of initiatives from the legislature, the executive and the judiciary. The EPA of India is the most important statute for the protection of environment in India. This Act was enacted on 23rd May, 1986 soon after the Bhopal Gas Tragedy (1984) and came into force on 19th November, 1986. This Act is applicable throughout India. IM S The EPA, 1986 provides for the protection and improvement of environment and the prevention of hazards to human beings, other living creatures, plants and property. EPA has been divided into 4 chapters and 26 sections. Some important definitions as per the EPA, 1986 are: Environment includes water, air and land and the interrelation which exist between water, air, land, human being, plants, animals other living creatures, micro-organism and property. pollutant means any solid, liquid, or gaseous substance present in such concentration as may be, or tend to be, injurious to environment. pollution means the presence in the environment of any environmental pollutant. Handling N Environmental M Environmental (in relation to any substance) means the manufacture, processing, treatment, package, storage, transportation, use, collection, destruction, conversion, offering for sale, transfer, or the like of such substance. Hazardous substance means any substance or preparation which, by reason of its chemical or physico-chemical properties or handling, is liable to cause harm to human beings, other living creatures, plant, micro-organism, property, or the environment. Occupier (in relation to any factory or premises) means a person who has control over the affairs of the factory or the premises and includes in relation to any substance, the person in possession of the substance. Prescribed means prescribed by rules made under this Act. Some important objectives of the EPA, 1986 are as follows: To implement decisions made at the UN Conference on the Human Environment held in Stockholm in 1972 NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education ? DID YOU KNOW In the Environment Protection Act, 1986, subject to the provisions of this Act, the central government shall have the power to take all such measures as it deems necessary or expedient for the purpose of protecting and improving the quality of the environment and preventing, controlling and abating environmental pollution. Business Law To create authority for government protection To coordinate activities of various regulatory agencies created under the Act To protect forests and wildlife in the country To create authorities for protecting the environment To fix the liability on persons carrying industrial operations or handling hazardous substances to comply with rules related to the prevention, control and abatement of environmental pollution To enact laws for environment protection To provide punishment provisions for those people who are involved in endangering human environment, safety and health ensure sustainable development S To To ensure the protection of life as laid down under Article 21 of the IM Constitution of India Some important provisions of the EPA, 1986 are as follows: of the central government: The government can make laws as and when needed, i.e., when they analyse the degradation of the environment. The various actions that the government can take under the Act inter alia include the following: M Power To fix the standards of quality of air, water, or soil for various areas and purposes To N 374 fix the maximum allowable limits of concentration of various environmental pollutants (including noise) for different areas To establish procedures and safeguards for the handling of hazardous substances To prohibit and restrict the handling of hazardous substances and the location of industries and carrying on of processes and operations in different areas To establish procedures and safeguards for the prevention of accidents which may cause environmental pollution and provide remedial measures for such accidents Under EPA, the government has the power to issue directions, make rules, prescribe standards of emission and obligation to furnish information. Power of the court: Section 22 of the EPA bars the jurisdiction of civil courts to entertain any suit or proceeding in respect of anything done, any action taken or order or direction issued by any of the authorities under this EPA. However, nothing can take away NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education ENVIRONMENT-RELATED LAWS the power of the Supreme Court to do justice, as it sees fit, related to EPA, 1986. National Environment Appellate Authority (NEAA): The NEAA Act, 1997 provides for the establishment of NEAA for discharging the following duties: i.To hear appeals with respect to restriction of areas in which any industry, operations, or processes or class of industries, operations, or processes shall or shall not be carried out subject to certain safeguards under the Environment Protection Agency (EPA) and for matters connected therewith or incidental thereto. S ii.To bring transparency and accountability in the process and ensure a smooth and expedited implementation of developmental schemes and projects. 10.2.2 N M IM Section 11 of the NEAA Act, 1997 says, any aggrieved person may file an appeal within 30 days of passing of an order granting environmental clearance in the areas in which any industries, operations, or processes shall not be carried out or shall be carried out subject to certain safeguards under the EPA. Also, NEAA may entertain an appeal even after the expiry of the said term if a sufficient cause for delay in filing such an appeal exists but not after 90 days from the date of such order. The NEAA is required to dispose of the appeal within 90 days from the date of filing of the same. However, it may, for reasons that are to be recorded in writing, dispose of the appeal within a further period of 30 days. THE NATIONAL GREEN TRIBUNAL (NGT) ACT, 2010 The National Green Tribunal Act (NGT Act) was enacted in 2010 with an aim to establish the National Green Tribunal (NGT) which would be responsible for dealing with cases related to environment protection, conservation of forests and other natural resources, etc., in an effective and speedy manner. The NGT also has to look after the enforcement of any legal rights relating to environment. It also has the powers to give relief and compensation for damages to persons and property. The most important provision and objective of this NGT Act is the establishment of the NGT to look after the laws as mentioned in Schedule I of the NGT Act as follows: Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974 Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Cess Act, 1977 Forest Conservation Act, 1980 Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981 NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 375 376 Business Law Environment Public Protection Act, 1986 Liability Insurance Act, 1991 Biodiversity Diversity Act, 2002 After the establishment of NGT, the National Environment Tribunal Act, 1995 and the NEAA Act, 1997 were repealed. The NEAA established under the NEAA, 1997 was also dissolved. M IM S The NGT has a full-time chairperson and members. There must be not less than 10 and maximum of 20 full-time judicial members (Section 4). Also, there must be not less than 10 and maximum 20 full-time expert members. Section 14(1) states that the Tribunal has jurisdiction over all civil cases involving a substantial question relating to environment (including enforcement of any legal right relating to environment) and such question arises out of implementation of any of the Acts mentioned in Schedule I (as mentioned above). The NGT has the power to settle disputes referred to disputes arising from implementation of abovementioned Acts and pass orders such as order for relief and compensation to the victims of pollution and other environmental damage; restitution of property damaged; and restitution of the environment in such areas [Section 15 (1)]. The principles guiding NGT are those of sustainable development, precautionary principle and polluter pays. NGT acts as the appellate authority for orders passed by Tribunals having powers under the Acts mentioned in Schedule I of the NGT Act, within a period of 30 days from the passing of such order/decision/direction (Section 16). N 10.2.3 THE AIR (PREVENTION AND CONTROL OF POLLUTION) ACT, 1981 Know More In 1981, the Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act was introduced and amended in 1987 for prevention and control of air pollution in India. The Air Act deals with the control of emission of noxious substances from industries and automobiles. However, it applies only to specified industrial processes, in notified areas, called the Air Pollution Control Areas (APCAs). The Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981 is also called the Air Act. This Air Act extends to the whole of India. The major objectives of this Act are as follows: To provide for the prevention, control and abatement of air pollution To provide for the establishment of the Pollution Control Boards (PCBs) at the central and state levels Two important terms defined under the Air Act are: Air pollutant means any solid, liquid, or gaseous substance (includ- ing noise) present in the atmosphere in such concentration as may be or tend to be injurious to human beings or other living creatures or plants or property or environment Air pollution means the presence in the atmosphere of any air pol- lutant NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education ENVIRONMENT-RELATED LAWS This Act contains 54 sections divided into seven chapters. Chapters II and III describe the roles and responsibilities of the central and state PCBs. Chapter IV relates to the prevention and control of air pollution or setting, regulation and monitoring of the pollution standards. Chapter VI deals with penalties that can be imposed and the procedure of inquiry into matters related to air pollution. Under this Air Act, the ambient air quality standards were established. These standards were meant for resolving the problems associated with air pollution. The PCBs that have been set up under this Air Act are responsible for ensuring that air pollution in the country can be controlled. The Boards also have the power to take action against entities which do not meet the required air quality standards. S This Air Act seeks to combat air pollution by deploying various provisions. Some major features of this Air Act are as follows: the use of polluting fuels and substances Regulating appliances that lead to air pollution IM Prohibiting Empowering the state government in consultation with the respec- tive State PCBs to declare any area as APCA (Air Pollution Control Area) (Section 19) Establishing or operating any industrial plant in the pollution con- air in Air Pollution Control Areas Inspecting processes the pollution control equipment and manufacturing N Testing M trol areas that require consent from the respective State PCBs Empowering the boards to cancel the consent on non-fulfilment of the required conditions Some major provisions of the Air Act are: Section 3 states that the Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB), which is constituted under Section 3 of the Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974, will also be responsible for exercising the powers and performing the functions of the CPCB for the prevention and control of air pollution under this Act. It means that the CPCB has powers and functions for dealing with matters relating to air pollution as well as water pollution. Section 4 states that in states where it has already set up the State Water Pollution Control Board, the same board will also be given the joint responsibility of controlling and monitoring air pollution as well. Such board would be called the State Pollution Control Board (SPCB). This SPCB will exercise powers and perform the functions as specified under this Act for preventing and controlling the air pollution. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 377 Business Law Section 5 states that in states where there is no existing Water Pol- lution Control Board, a new SPCB will be set up. Some of the functions of the CPCB, as given under Section 16, are as follows: Improve the quality of air Prevent, control, or abate air pollution in the country Advise the central government on any matter concerning the improvement of the quality of air and the prevention, control, or abatement of air pollution Plan and cause to be executed a nationwide programme for the prevention, control, or abatement of air pollution the activities of the State and resolve disputes S Co-ordinate among them technical assistance and guidance to SPCBs to, carry out and sponsor investigations and research relating to problems of air pollution and prevention, control, or abatement of air pollution IM Provide Perform such of the functions of any SPCB as may be specified M by Central Government in case of default by SPCB to comply with any directions of CPCB due to which grave emergency has arisen or it is in public interest. Under sub-section (2) of Section 18 Plan N 378 and organise the training of persons engaged or to be engaged in programmes for the prevention, control, or abatement of air pollution on such terms and conditions as the CPCB may specify Organise through mass media a comprehensive programme regarding the prevention, control, or abatement of air pollution Collect, compile and publish technical and statistical data relating to air pollution and the measures devised for its effective prevention, control, or abatement and prepare manuals, codes, or guides relating to prevention, control, or abatement of air pollution Lay down standards for the quality of air Collect and disseminate information in respect of matters relating to air pollution Perform such other functions as may be prescribed Some of the functions of the SPCB as given under Section 17, are as follows: To plan a comprehensive programme for the prevention, control, or abatement of air pollution and to secure the execution thereof NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education ENVIRONMENT-RELATED LAWS To advise the state government on any matter concerning the prevention, control, or abatement of air pollution To collect and disseminate information relating to air pollution To collaborate with the CPCB in organising the training of per- sons engaged or to be engaged in programmes relating to prevention, control, or abatement of air pollution and to organise mass-education programme relating thereto To inspect, at all reasonable times, any control equipment, industrial plant, or manufacturing process and to give, by order, such directions to such persons as it may consider necessary to take steps for the prevention, control, or abatement of air pollution inspect Air Pollution Control Areas at such intervals as it may think necessary, assess the quality of air therein and take steps for the prevention, control, or abatement of air pollution in such areas IM S To To lay down, in consultation with the CPCB and having regard To N M to the standards for the quality of air laid down by the CPCB standards for emission of air pollutants into the atmosphere from industrial plants and automobiles or for the discharge of any air pollutant into the atmosphere from any other source whatsoever not being a ship or an aircraft: Provided that different standards for emission may be laid down under this clause for different industrial plants having regard to the quantity and composition of emission of air pollutants into the atmosphere from such industrial plants advise the state government with respect to the suitability of any premises or location for carrying on any industry which is likely to cause air pollution To perform such other functions as may be prescribed or as may, from time to time, be entrusted to it by the CPCB or the state government To do such other things and to perform such other acts as it may think necessary for the proper discharge of its functions and generally for the purpose of carrying into effect the purposes of the Air Act. The officers of the SPCBs can take samples from any chimney, duct, etc., of any industry for the purpose of testing whether the emissions are within prescribed standards or not (Section 26). Such samples shall be sent to State Air Laboratories (Section 28) and examined by analysts appointed by the State Government (Section 29) and the reports of these analysts may be used in evidence at any proceedings under this Act (Section 30). NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 379 380 Business Law The Air Act contains the provision of imprisonment of minimum one year and 6 months which might be extended up to 6 years with fine for the violation of provisions mentioned in Sections 21 and 22. If the violation continues, an additional fine of ` 25,000 per day can also be imposed. If violations exceed for more than a year, then the culprit can be awarded a punishment ranging between 2 years and 7 years with fine (Section 37). A person aggrieved by any order of SPCB can appeal within 30 days to an Appellate Authority set up by the state government (Section 31). No civil court shall have jurisdiction to entertain any suit or proceeding arising under this Act (Section 46). S offences committed by companies, every person who, at the time the offence was committed, was directly in charge of, and was responsible to the company shall be deemed to be guilty and liable to be punished accordingly (Section 40). IM For For offences committed by a Government Department, the Head of the Department is the person responsible for department’s acts and hence he/she is liable to be proceeded against and punished under this Act (Section 40). Water is extremely essential for the survival of life. It is required for multiple reasons, drinking being the most important reason. Also, water is essential for the purpose of sanitation, cleaning, sewage disposal, agriculture, industry, bathing, preparation of food, etc. However, water is useful only if it is in a non-polluted form. For instance, dirty and polluted water flowing in a drain cannot be used for agriculture or bathing. Contaminated water can be extremely injurious to the health and safety of life. N NOTE M 10.2.4 THE WATER (PREVENTION AND CONTROL OF POLLUTION) ACT, 1974 The Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Cess Act, 1977 provides for the levy and collection of cess or fees on water-consuming industries and local authorities. It is important to maintain and use water wisely because India has a limited supply of fresh water and the standards of water safety are not up to the mark. According to the available data, the population of India is approximately 17.7% of the world population. India occupies only about 2.45% of the total land area of the world and has only about 4% of the world’s water resources. This is a major reason due to which India needs to manage its water resources in an efficient manner. Taking a stock of the water situation and in order to prevent and control water pollution, the Indian Parliament passed the Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974. It is also known as the Water Act. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education ENVIRONMENT-RELATED LAWS The major objectives of this Water Act are: To provide for the prevention and control of water pollution To provide for maintaining or restoring the wholesomeness of water To establish boards for preventing and controlling water pollution For conferring upon and assigning powers and functions to boards for achieving the above-mentioned objectives To establish central and state water testing laboratories which can be used by the boards in discharging their functions To penalise offenders for the contravention of the provisions of the Water Act deal with matters related to prevention and control of water pollution S To M IM The Water Act, 1974 consists of 64 sections divided into eight Chapters. Chapter I defines a few preliminary aspects. Chapter II deals with the central and state boards for preventing and controlling water pollution. Chapter III deals with Joint Boards. Chapter IV defines powers and functions of the boards. Chapter V contains various provisions for preventing and controlling water pollution. Chapter VII defines penalties and the procedure for prosecuting under this Act. Public health or safety Domestic, Life N Pollution refers to the contamination of water or the alteration of the physical, chemical, or biological properties of water, or the discharge of any sewage or trade effluent (whether directly or indirectly) which is likely to render such water harmful or injurious for: commercial, industrial, agricultural, or other uses and health of plants, animals, or aquatic organisms Some important features of this Water Act are as follows: Prohibiting the discharge of pollutants into water bodies, such as streams and wells, beyond a certain standard Laying down of penalties in case any entity does not comply with the standards Setting up of the Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) at the central that preventing and controlling water pollution Setting up of the State Pollution Control Board (SPCB) at the state levels, which work as per the directions of the state and the CPCB Defining important terms such as stream, outlet, sewer, pollution, trade effluent, etc. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 381 Business Law Directing the discharges into streams and wells and for opening new outlets for discharge requires the concerned entity to take consent from the concerned PCB Providing the entity affected by the actions of the PCB to appeal Providing penalties for offences related to violation of the Water Act Setting up of CPCB and SPCBs under the Act: Section 17 of the Water Act, 1974 lists the functions of SPCBs, which includes planning state-wide comprehensive training and education programme; inspect sewage or trade effluents; and review all purification plants. S 25 prescribes that before setting up any industry, plant, or process which is likely to discharge sewage or trade effluents into a stream or well or sewer or on land, prior consent of the SPCB is necessary. IM Section Under the powers of Section 32 to take emergency actions, SPCBs may issue orders to move matters which are causing pollution of a stream or well. for contravention of the provisions of and orders and directions issued under the Act are mentioned in Sections 41 to 45A, ranging from 6 months to maximum 6 years, or fine, or both. M Penalties 10.2.5 HAZARDOUS AND OTHER WASTES (MANAGEMENT and TRANSBOUNDARY MOVEMENT) RULES, 2016 N 382 India is a developing country and is on its way to progress. It is developing rapidly and its economy is growing fast. One of the most critical factors responsible for the growing economy of India is industrial development. When the level of industrialisation increases, it also leads to a simultaneous increase in the generation of hazardous wastes. Organisations majorly focus on maximising production and recovery with minimum disposal. In India, majority of the hazardous waste is produced by industries such as petrochemicals, pharmaceuticals, chemicals, fertilisers, textiles, general engineering, etc. As per the MOEFCC, hazardous waste is any waste which can potentially harm the health or environment due to its physical, chemical, or biological composition. The waste may be harmful alone or when in contact with other wastes. Most hazardous wastes have their own chemical composition. Most industries discharge these hazardous wastes without any treatment which ends up poisoning the land and NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education ENVIRONMENT-RELATED LAWS water posing serious threats to life in all forms, ecology and the environment. S Hazardous wastes that are dumped or stored on open land areas may seep and enter into the groundwater leading to contamination of aquifers and regional water supply. If such hazardous wastes are mixed into the groundwater, they can contaminate the agricultural produce and may cause serious health issues if it is used for drinking purpose by the public. Hazardous wastes are hazardous in nature because they usually contain heavy metals and carcinogens which may affect the health of public. When such contaminated food and water is consumed for a long period of time, it might lead to serious conditions such as gene alteration, reproductive abnormalities, physical deformities, permanent disorders, deaths, etc. Apart from the hazardous waste that is produced by industries, India also imports hazardous waste as raw material for recovering metals. Lack of political will Lack IM In India, the management of hazardous wastes is extremely ineffective due to the following reasons: of technical know-how for treatment and disposal of hazardous wastes of compliance and regulations Limited M Lack number of trained and skilled stakeholders N In India, hazardous industrial wastes are divided into two categories as follows: 1. Hazardous wastes produced from industries in India: Industries such as petrochemicals, pharmaceuticals, pesticides, paint and dye, etc., generate hazardous wastes in the form of metals, cyanides, pesticides, complex aromatic compounds and other chemicals. These hazardous wastes may be toxic, flammable, reactive, corrosive, or have explosive properties. 2. Hazardous wastes brought into India from foreign countries for recycling and re-processing: Imported waste is used by certain industries as raw material. Also, some amount of hazardous waste is used for recycling or extracting metals. Previously, Hazardous Wastes Management and Handling Rules were notified in 1989, and then expanded in 2008 to cover within its ambit transboundary movement—Hazardous Wastes (Management, Handling, and Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2008. The 2016 version of the rules Hazardous Waste Management Rules, 2016 (HWM Rules, 2016) has added ‘And Other Wastes’ to its scope, and it was notified on 4th April, 2016. Salient features of the HWM Rules, 2016 are as follows: Distinguishing between hazardous and ‘other wastes’ NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 383 Business Law Registering workers involved in recycling activities Exempting import of metal scrap, paper waste and some categories of electronic equipment for the reuse purpose from the requirement of obtaining the Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change permission Revising forms for permission, import/export, filing of annual returns, etc. in order of priority, the hierarchy of waste management. Section 4 of the HWM Rules, 2016 relate to the responsibilities of the occupier of hazardous and other waste generators for the management of hazardous and other wastes. Hazardous and other wastes can be managed by following certain steps as follows: S Recognising, Prevention IM Minimisation Reuse Recycling Recovery, utilisation including co-processing disposal M Safe The N 384 government agency that has been authorised by the state government for the matters related to the management of hazardous wastes has to allocate industrial space or shed for recycling, pre-processing and other utilisation of hazardous or other wastes in the existing and upcoming industrial park, estate and industrial clusters. The HWM Rules, 2016 have been further amended by the Hazardous and Other Wastes (Management and Transboundary Movement) Amendment Rules, 2019 (hereinafter referred to as ‘Amendment Rules, 2019’). Some important features of the Amendment Rules, 2019 are as follows: Banning the import of solid plastic waste into India even in the Special Economic Zones (SEZs) and in Export Oriented Units (EOUs) Exempting the silk waste exporters from the requirement of obtaining permission from the Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change (MOEFCC). Exempting the electrical and electronic assemblies and components that were manufactured in and exported from India for importing back if these are found defective within a year of export from the requirement of obtaining permission from the MOEFCC. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education ENVIRONMENT-RELATED LAWS Exempting industries that are exempted from obtaining permission under the Water Act, 1974 and the Air Act, 1981, from the requirement of obtaining authorisation under the HWM Rules, 2016. However, this exemption is applicable only if the hazardous and other wastes generated by such industries are handed over to the authorised actual users, waste collectors, or disposal facilities. The biggest problem facing India at the moment is the high density of plastic scrap imported by the country, especially since China banned these imports. However, the country has been making strides in developing methods for recycling plastic waste. 10.2.6 THE WILDLIFE PROTECTION ACT, 1972 S The rules have been further amended by the Hazardous and Other Wastes (Management and Transboundary Movement) Amendment Rules, 2019 (hereinafter referred to as ‘Amendment Rules, 2019’). M IM Article 48A of the Indian Constitution imposes a duty on the states to protect and improve the environment and safeguard the forest and wildlife. The Directive Principles of the State Policy also require that the states develop a mechanism and formulate laws for protecting wildlife. Article 51A also states that the citizens of the country have a fundamental duty to protect and improve the environment which includes forests, lakes, rivers and wildlife and to have compassion for living creatures. N Wildlife is an important part of the environment, which includes wild animals, plants, birds, etc. Due to unsustainable industrialisation and development, a lot of harm has been done and is continued to be done to forests and wildlife. In order to protect wildlife, the Indian Government enacted the Wildlife Protection Act, 1972. The major objectives of the Wildlife Protection Act, 1972 are as follows: To provide for the protection of wild animals, birds and plants and related matters To ensure the ecological and environmental security of the country To prohibit hunting of wild animals and birds To penalise and prosecute the people who violate any provision of the Wildlife Protection Act, 1972 To prevent extinction of animals To provide for provisions for hunting with a license within the restricted areas To empower the central and state governments to declare certain areas as sanctuaries and parks NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 385 386 Business Law Some of the important features of the Wildlife Protection Act, 1972 (Wildlife Act) are as follows: Defining various important terms such as animal, animal article, collector, forest officer, habitat, meat, license, permit, etc. Providing for the appointment of wildlife advisory board, wildlife warden and their powers and duties Helping in becoming a party to the Contravention of International Trade in Endangered Species of Fauna and Flora (CITES), 1976 Supporting in launching the national component of UNESCO’s Man and Biosphere Programme, 1971 Constituting National Board for Wildlife (a statutory organisation), National Tiger Conservation Authority, a statutory body under the Ministry of Environment IM Establishing S the apex body of all such advisory boards established under the Wildlife Act Making NOTE of a comprehensive list of endangered wildlife species Structuring lists in 6 Schedules appended to the Act that give pro- M tection to different classes of flora and fauna, e.g., those in Schedule I get absolute protection. Also, trade of animals under Schedules I and II is strictly prohibited and the act is made punishable. Establishing 5 types of ‘protected areas’ for protection and welfare of endangered species—Sanctuaries, National Parks, Conservation Reserves, Community Reserves and Tiger Reserves Providing various powers to officers to enforce the Wildlife Act Providing punishment to offenders N The Wildlife Protection Amendment Act, 2002 dictates that sanctuaries and national parks cannot be exploited for commercial purpose, while the local community is allowed to collect forest produce for their bona fide requirements. 10.2.7 NOTE As per the Forest Conservation Act, 1980, the restriction was made on the use of the forests for non-forest purposes. THE FOREST CONSERVATION ACT, 1980 A forest can be defined as a biotic community composed predominantly of trees, shrubs and climbers. It is an old saying that forests are the lungs of our land. This is in fact true because oxygen that humans and other animals require for survival is produced by plants and trees. Trees and plants provide not only oxygen but also various natural resources. Just like humans would die if their lungs did not function effectively, our environment will die slowly if the rate at which forests are being destroyed is not lowered or brought to zero. In order to ensure continuity of human life, conservation of forests is extremely crucial. Forest conservation means protecting and preserving forests and reversing deforestation and environmental pollution. It is only relevant to preserve something that is extremely critical for our own survival. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education ENVIRONMENT-RELATED LAWS The reasons that justify the major push for the conservation of forests are as follows: Trees produce oxygen. Trees absorb carbon dioxide (CO2) which is a major component of air pollution. Forests prevent soil erosion. Forests keep soil pollution under control. Forests help in maintaining water cycle and the underground water table. Forests help in maintaining the moisture level in the ecosystem. Forests are the natural home and habitat for innumerable animals, Controlled deforestation Afforestation Protecting Improved against forest fires farming practices IM Some ways in which forests can be conserved include: S birds, insects, reptiles, aquatic animals and various types of flora. M In order to manage forest conservation and related activities, the Government of India enacted the Forest Conservation Act, 1980. This law was amended in 1988. To N The main objectives of this Forest Conservation Act, 1980 are as follows: To ensure the judicious use of forest produce To check the diversion of forest land for non-forest purposes provide for the protection and conservation of forests and related matters Some important features of this Forest Conservation Act, 1980 are as follows: Discourages private sector from any kind of involvement in state forest lands Disallows any kind of developmental activities in forest areas Provides for the judicious use of tribal and non-tribal forest land Provides for restrictions on the de-reservation of forests Restricts the use of forest land for non-forest purpose NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 387 388 Business Law Empowers the state governments to regulate and prohibit the clearing of any land for cultivation, pasturing of cattle, etc., in any forest Empowers the central government to constitute a committee for advising on imposing restrictions on de-reservation of forests or use of forest for non-forest purposes as per Section 3 of the Forest Conservation Act, 1980 Empowers the state governments to declare any land or waste land as reserve forest 10.2.8 S It has already been stated that there has been a remarkable growth in the number and types of industries that have been set up in India. When the number of industries increases, the probability of industrial accidents also increases. There is a risk to the workmen employed in such industries, to the general public staying in nearabout areas and to the owners of the industries. IM Know More In various instances, an industry or business may cause an unexpected and unintentional damage to a third party. There are usual circumstances wherein the members of the public interact with a business such as clients visiting the office, employees working off-site, and customers receiving deliveries from a business. All these circumstances do not involve the business owner directly. In any of these circumstances, some kind of unwelcome event like an accident may take place. For example, a business had installed an advertisement signboard on a busy street which suddenly falls over a person standing under it which leads to an injury or death. Public liability insurance offers protection from risks associated with all such liabilities. If a business is not covered under public liability insurance, the business can be sued by the third party or its representative which suffers injury, illness, damage to property, or death. N M As per the EPA, 1986 and the Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991, the businesses dealing in a hazardous environment must take suitable insurance. THE PUBLIC LIABILITY INSURANCE ACT, 1991 In order to deal effectively with the cases of public liability, the Government of India enacted the Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991 which was amended in 1992 and the Public Liability Insurance Rules, 1991. The prime objective of enacting the Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991 and the related rules is to provide for public liability insurance and for providing immediate relief to persons affected by accidents while handling hazardous substances and all such related matters. This law is applicable to all owners associated with production or handling of the hazardous chemicals. In India, there are three main types of public liability insurance: Public liability insurance related to industrial risks: Such insur- ance is used by manufacturers and warehouses. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education ENVIRONMENT-RELATED LAWS Public liability insurance related to non-industrial risks: Such insurance is used by businesses that do not manufacture any products, such as hospitals, retail outlets, IT companies, BPOs, schools, colleges, clubs, etc. Insurance related due to handling of hazardous substance: Such a policy is usually used by businesses to protect themselves from legal liability to indemnify third parties in case of any sudden or unintentional accident while they are handling any hazardous substance which results in death, injury, or damage to any property. Some important features of this Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991 are as follows: fault liability (Section 3): The owner of a business is liable to give relief if any person dies or gets injured or suffers damage to his/her property. It must be remembered that the death, injury, or damage to property should be due to an accident only. S No of the owner to take out insurance policies (Section 4): Before starting the handling of hazardous substances, a business owner has to take out insurance policies to insure against his/her liability to provide relief in case of an accident, have it renewed from time to time. IM Duty Verification and publication of accident by Collector (Section 5): N M For any accident that occurs within the jurisdiction of a Collector, the Collector is dutybound to verify the occurrence of such an accident. In addition, he/she must also invite applications for claim for relief under Section 6 of Public Liability Insurance Act,1991. Application for claim for relief (Section 6): In case of an accident, an applicant has to make an application for relief to the Collector within five years from the date of occurrence of such accident. The application can be filed by any of the following: By the person who sustains injury or his/her authorised agent By legal representative of the person who died in accident or his/her authorised agent By owner of property to which damage was caused by his/her authorised agent Award of relief (Section 7): After receiving the application for relief, it is the duty of the collector to hold an inquiry into the claim made by the applicant. First, the applicant has to make an application with the collector. Thereafter, the collector has to hear all the parties. After hearing all parties, the collector holds inquiry and makes an award determining the amount of relief. It means that the Collector will decide upon the amount that must be paid by the insurer or owner to the applicant. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 389 390 Business Law Establishment of Environment Relief Fund (Section 7A): Section 7A of this Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991 provides for the establishment of an Environment Relief Fund by the central government. If the Collector orders the payment of relief amount, such payment has to be made through the Environment Relief Fund. Provisions as to other right to claim compensation for death, etc. (Section 8): This provision states that in the event of death of the victim, or injury or damage to property, the compensation claimed under the Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991 shall be in addition to any other right to claim compensation under any other legislation. Biological diversity (or biodiversity) refers to the variety of life forms that exist in our ecosystem. Presence of biological diversity is critical for the sustenance and functioning of the ecosystem in which they are present. Ecosystems provide an array of natural gifts that are critical for survival of life on Earth. For instance, we get oxygen, food, water, soil, fuel, etc., from ecosystem. The ecosystem also provides ecological services such as preventing soil erosion, moderating storms, mitigating climate change, etc. All these gifts and services that ecosystems provide us help in supporting life. In the absence of all these, life in all forms would come to an end. M IM ? DID YOU KNOW Convention on Biological Diversity is a multilateral treaty. The objective is to develop national strategies for the conservation and sustainable use of biological diversity, and it is often seen as the key document regarding sustainable development. THE BIOLOGICAL DIVERSITY ACT, 2002 S 10.2.9 N On 5th June 1992, India signed the United Nations Convention on Biological Diversity (CBD). To give effect to the CBD held at Rio De Janeiro in 1992, the Indian Government enacted the Biological Diversity Act, 2002. The main objectives of the Biological Diversity Act, 2002 are as follows: To conserve the biological diversity in India To regulate access to Indian biological resources To ensure fair and equitable benefit sharing arising from the utilisation of those biological resources and knowledge To ensure the sustainable use of the components of the biological diversity To establish governing bodies such as the National Biodiversity Authority (NBA) at the national level, the State Biodiversity Boards (SBBs) at the State level and Biodiversity Management Committees (BMCs) at the local level. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education ENVIRONMENT-RELATED LAWS Some important features and provisions of the Biological Diversity Act, 2002 are as follows: The NBA and the SBBs have to consult the BMCs while making decisions related to bioresources and related knowledge within their respective jurisdictions. Knowledge of local communities must be respected and protected. Traditional biodiversity knowledge must be protected. Benefits derived from the biological resources must be shared with local people because they act as the conservers of biological resources and all related knowledge. the foreign nationals and organisations must seek prior approval from the NBA in order to obtain any biological resources or knowledge. S All the Indian scientists and individuals must take prior approval from the NBA for transferring the results of their research to foreign nationals or organisations. IM All Certain biodiverse areas should be declared as biological diversity heritage sites in order to conserve and develop these areas. Threatened species must be protected and rehabilitated. to be constituted as per the Biological Diversity Act, 2002 by the respective state governments. Check biopiracy M Committees Protect the rich biodiversity and the associated knowledge of India Indian N against use by foreign individuals and organisations if such organisations and individuals do not share the benefits that arise due to such biodiversity and organisations. organisations must give intimation to the respective SBBs if they wish to obtain any bioresource and the SBB has a right to restrain such organisation from obtaining the said resources if the organisation violates conservation, sustainable use and benefit sharing. State governments in consultation with local bodies can notify heritage sites. Create Biodiversity Fund at the national, state and local levels and its use for conservation of biodiversity. No person can apply for any Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) by any name in or outside India for any invention that is based on a research or biological resource obtained from India without obtaining a prior approval from the NBA. BMC has to prepare the People’s Biodiversity Register (PBR) after consulting the local people. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 391 Business Law Exhibit Powers of NGT The NGT deals with civil cases related to environment under the following Acts: i. The Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974 ii. The Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Cess Act, 1977 iii. The Forest (Conservation) Act, 1980 iv. The Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981 v. The Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 S vi. The Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991 vii. The Biological Diversity Act, 2002 IM If there is any violation related to any of these laws or of any decision made by the Government under these laws, such a violation can be challenged before the NGT. M 10.2.10 CASES WHERE COMPANIES HAVE FACED CONSEQUENCES OF VIOLATING ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION LAWS IN INDIA In India, despite having laws for protecting the environment, there are various organisations and individuals that openly violate these laws. Let us study about a few cases to demonstrate the violations of the environment protection laws in India: N 392 In 1989, a writ petition was filed in the Supreme Court against Hin- dustan Agro Chemicals Limited. The writ petition alleged that the said organisation was polluting the land and water in Bichhri Village of Udaipur, Rajasthan. The verdict of this case was announced in 2011. The verdict of the Supreme Court was as follows: In 1996, the court observed that ‘toxic untreated waste waters were allowed to flow out freely and because the untreated toxic sludge was thrown in the open in and around the complex, the toxic substances have percolated deep into the bowels of the earth polluting the aquifers and the sub-terrain supply of water’. It said water in the wells and the streams had become unfit for human consumption and the soil was unsuitable for cultivation. In November 1997, the court ordered the company to immediately pay ` 37.4 crore towards the costs of remediation. Following the judgement, the company filed several interlocutory applications. Calling the applications as delaying tactics, the Supreme Court in 2011 asked NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education ENVIRONMENT-RELATED LAWS the company to pay the fine along with compound interest @12 per cent per annum from November 1997 till the amount is paid or recovered. The company was also asked to pay costs of litigation. In 2019, the NGT ordered the UP’s PCB to prepare a report for matter related to disposal of bio-medical waste by M/s Medical Pollution Control Committee, Growth Center which is a Common Bio-Medical Waste Treatment Facility (CBMWTF) located near Jhansi, Uttar Pradesh. The UPPCB filed its report and found various discrepancies at CBMWTF as follows: Plant machinery of CBMWTF was not working properly because it was undergoing modernization. Incineration of bio-medical waste was done at wrong tempera- S ture. Bio-medical waste transported from various medical facilities was stored within the CBMWTF. was transporting dry-wet bio-medical waste to its sister concern at Panki, Kanpur without the permission of UPPCB. IM CBMWTF The case is still being heard and final order is awaited. M self assessment Questions 1. The term ___________ includes water, air and land. a. NEAA b. CPCB c. NBA N 2. Which of the following authorities looks after the enforcement of any legal rights relating to environment? d. NGT 3. Under the __________ Act, ________, a concerned entity has to take consent from the concerned PCB to direct the discharges into streams and wells. 4. When the level of industrialisation increases, it also leads to a simultaneous increase in the generation of hazardous wastes. a. True b. False 5. Which of the following industries does not produce hazardous wastes? a. Petrochemical b. Pulp and paper NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 393 Business Law c. Pharmaceutical d. Paint 6. Article _______ of the Indian Constitution states that the individual citizens of the country have a fundamental duty to protect and improve the environment. a. 29 b. 21 c. 51A Activity S d. 14A S IM Perform a research on the Internet and find out the real-life examples of the organisations who violated the environment protection laws in India. 10.3 Summary In the Constitution of India, the fundamental duties are laid out in M Article 51A. This Article states that it is the duty of every citizen of India to protect and improve the natural environment such as forests, lakes, rivers, wildlife, etc. The N 394 regulation and administration of environmental protection laws in India is done by a combination of the Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change (MoEFCC), the Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) and the State Pollution Control Boards (SPCBs). The EPA, 1986 provides for the protection and improvement of environment and the prevention of hazards to human beings, other living creatures, plants and property. The National Green Tribunal Act (NGT Act) was enacted in 2010 by the Indian Government with an aim to establish the National Green Tribunal (NGT) which would be responsible for dealing with cases related to environment protection, conservation of forests and other natural resources. The Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981 provides for the prevention, control and abatement of air pollution. The major objective of the Water (Prevention and Control of Pollu- tion) Act, 1974 is to provide for the prevention and control of water pollution. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education ENVIRONMENT-RELATED LAWS For effectively dealing with the hazardous wastes, India has devised certain rules and regulations known as the Hazardous Waste (Management, Handling and Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016. The major objective of this Act is the minimisation of wastes and maximisation of the disposal rates. The major objective of the Wildlife Protection Act, 1972 is to provide for the protection of wild animals, birds, plants and related matters In order to manage forest conservation and related activities, the Indian Government enacted the Forest Conservation Act, 1980. order to deal effectively with cases of public liability, the Indian Government enacted the Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991 which was amended in 1992 and the Public Liability Insurance Rules, 1991. S In 5th June, 1992, India signed the United Nations Convention on Biological Diversity (CBD). To give effect to the CBD held at Rio De Janeiro in 1992, the Indian Government enacted the Biological Diversity Act, 2002. IM On main objective of the Biological Diversity Act, 2002 is to conserve the biological diversity in India. key words An action that is against any law N Contravention: M The Environmental pollution: The contamination of the physical and biological components of the earth, which hampers the environmental processes Hazardous wastes: The wastes that are potentially harmful for health and safety of humans, animals and the environment Pollution standards: The prescribed limits of environmental pollution 10.4 Descriptive Questions 1. Write a brief note on the important environment-related legislations enacted in India. 2. What are the key objectives of the Environment Protection Act, 1986? 3. Explain the important bodies set up for controlling pollution. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education ? 395 Business Law 10.5 Answers and Hints ANSWERS FOR SELF ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS Topic Answer 1. environment 2. d. 3. Water, 1974 4. a. True 5. b. Pulp and paper 6. c. 51 A NGT IM S Laws Aimed at Protecting and Conserving the Environment Q. No. HINTS FOR DESCRIPTIVE QUESTIONS M 1. Some important environment-related legislations include the National Green Tribunal Act, 2010; the Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981; the Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974; the Environment Protection Act, 1986; the Hazardous Waste Management Regulations, etc. Refer to Section 10.2 Laws Aimed at Protecting and Conserving the Environment 2. Some key objectives of the Environment Protection Act, 1986 are to create authority for government protection, to coordinate the activities of various regulatory agencies created under the Act, etc. Refer to Section 10.2 Laws Aimed at Protecting and Conserving the Environment N 396 3. The Pollution Control Boards that have been set up at the central and state levels namely the CPCB and the SPCBs which are responsible for ensuring that the air and water pollution in the country can be controlled. Refer to Section 10.2 Laws Aimed at Protecting and Conserving the Environment 10.6 Suggested Readings & References SUGGESTED READINGS Gupta, K. (2006). Environmental legislation in India. New Delhi: Atlantic. Sahasranaman, P. (2012). Handbook of environmental law. New Delhi, India: Oxford University Press. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education ENVIRONMENT-RELATED LAWS E-REFERENCES Top 6 Environmental Acts Enacted in India. (2020). Retrieved 20 May, 2020, from https://www.biologydiscussion.com/environment/ top-6-environmental-acts-enacted-in-india/16775 (2020). Retrieved 20 May, 2020, from http://awsassets.wwfindia.org/ downloads/mle_024_block_2.pdf B. (2020). Bhushan Steel in soup for violating Environment Protection Act. Retrieved 20 May 2020, from https://www.business-standard.com/article/companies/bhusan-steel-in-soup-for-violating-environment-protection-act-112070900073_1.html N M IM S Reporter, NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education 397 S IM M N C 11 h a pt e S CASE STUDIES CONTENTS N M IM Case Study 1 National Insurance Company Ltd., vs. Seema Malhotra (2001 Supreme Court) Case Study 2Ravinder Raj vs. Maruti Udyog Limited and M/S Competent Motors Co. Pvt. Ltd. (2011 Supreme Court) Case Study 3Kanodia Knits Pvt. Ltd., vs. Registrar of Companies Delhi & Haryana (Company Appeal No. 216 of 2018) Case Study 4 Sampelly Satyanarayan Rao vs. Indian Renewable Energy Development Agency Ltd. (2016 Supreme Court) Case Study 5Tulsi Narayan Garg vs. The M.P. Road Development Authority, Bhopal and Ors (2019 Supreme Court) Case Study 6TDM Infrastructure Pvt. Ltd., vs. UE Development India (2008 Supreme Court) Case Study 7 National Insurance Company Ltd. vs. Hindustan Safety Glass Works Ltd. (2007 Supreme Court) Case Study 8Institute of Chartered Accountants of India vs. Shaunak H. Satya (2011 Suprme Court) Case Study 9Rajni Maindiratta vs. Directorate of Education (2017, High Court of Delhi) Case Study 10 Competition Commission of India vs. Bharti Airtel Ltd. & ANR (2018 Supreme Court) Case Study 11 Labour Unrest at Maruti Suzuki India Ltd. Case Study 12State of Rajasthan vs. Salman Khan and Others (2012 High Court of Rajasthan) NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education r 400 Business Law n ot e Case Study 1 s NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY LTD., VS. SEEMA MALHOTRA (2001 SUPREME COURT) Case Objective On 21st December 1993, the insured, Yash Paul Malhotra signed an insurance contract with National Insurance Company. He had insured a Maruti car for a sum of ` 1,50,000 and gave a premium cheque to the insurance company. In return, the insurance company issued a cover note in accordance with Section 149 of the Motor Vehicles Act, 1988. Unfortunately, the insured met with an accident in which he died and the vehicle was damaged. Subsequently, the bank on which the cheque was drawn by the insured intimated the insurance company about the dishonour of the premium cheque due to insufficiency of funds in the account of the deceased. At this, the insurance company informed the insured party and also intimated them of the cancellation of the insurance policy with immediate effect. IM S This case study discusses the facts and judgement of the case, National Insurance Company Ltd., vs. Seema Malhotra on issue of Consideration in a contract FACTS N M The widow of the insured filed a claim for the loss of the vehicle, which the insurance company repudiated. At this, the respondents moved the State Consumer Protection Commission. The State Commission rejected the claim for the absence of consideration (premium). The decision of the Commission was challenged in the Jammu & Kashmir High Court. The Division Bench of J&K High Court ruled that the insurance company is liable on the ground where it chose the policy cancellation from the date of bouncing of the cheque though it has been liable from the date of the accident. ISSUE Whether the insurer is liable to honour the contract of insurance in the event of dishonour of the premium cheque. JUDGEMENT The Supreme Court held that the insurer can cancel the policy notwithstanding the issue of the cover note if the premium cheque given to it gets dishonoured due to the cardinal rule of ‘no consideration, no contract’. According to Section 64VB of the Insurance Act, 1938, in case of the absence of any consideration, there can be no contract. Therefore, the insurer repudiating the contract was justified after the bouncing of the premium cheque. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Case Study 1 : NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY LTD. VS. SEEMA MALHOTRA (2001 SUPREME COURT) 401 Case Study 1 n Only the premium received by insurance companies may provide them profits assuming that no accident or damage occurs. To obligate an insurance company to pay for the damages without receiving any premium runs contrary to the principles of equity. When an insurer provides insurance to indemnify the insured against the damage, loss or liability arising from an uncertain contingent to the insured, it is known as an insurance contract. As per section 64 VB of the Insurance Act, 1938, No risk to assumed unless premium is received in advance- IM S (1) No insurer shall assume any risk in India in respect of any insurance business on which premium is not ordinarily payable outside India unless and until the premium payable is received by him or is guaranteed to be paid by such person in such manner and within such time as may be prescribed or unless and until deposit of such amount as may be prescribed, is made in advance in the prescribed manner. M (2) For the purposes of this section, in the case of risks for which premium can be ascertained in advance; the risk may be assumed not earlier than the date on which the premium has been paid in cash or by cheque to the insurer. N Under Section 64 VB (1), the insurer is not liable until he receives the amount of the premium. However, Section 64VB (2) makes the receipt of the premium a pre-condition for honouring the obligation to indemnify by the insurer. The crucial question is about the legal position under the law of contracts when the premium is paid by means of a cheque, which gets bounced. In this context, there are three relevant provisions under the Indian Contract Act, 1872, namely: Sections 51, 52 and 54. These provisions have been included under the ‘Performance of Reciprocal Promises’ title. Section 51 is concerned with a contract that deals with reciprocal promises to be simultaneously performed. In this type of contract, the promisee is released from performing his promise only if the promisor is ready to perform his part of the promise willingly. Section 52 provides the provision for the reciprocal promises that are not expressly provided in the contract but have to be performed. These promises must be performed in an order that the nature of the transaction warrants it. Section 54 of the Insurance Act, 1938 provides that when a contract consists of reciprocal promises, such that one of them cannot be performed, or that its performance cannot be claimed till the other NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education o t e s Business Law e Case Study 1 s has been performed, and the promisor of the promise last mentioned fails to perform it, such promisor cannot claim the performance of the reciprocal promise, and must make compensation to the other party to the contract for any loss which such other party may sustain by the non-performance of the contract. S A contract of insurance is a reciprocal promise in which the payment of premium must be actually paid before the insurer could be held liable to indemnify the insured. When an insurer breaks his promise to pay promised premium amount, or if the premium cheque is dishonoured or returned, then, under Section 25 of the Contract Act, 1872 the insurance agreement is considered as void. Under Section 25 of the Contract Act, 1872 an agreement made without consideration is void. As per Section 65 of the Contract Act, 1872 a contract is considered void when any person who has received any advantage under the contract restores it to the person from whom he has received it. Therefore, an insurer is entitled to receive his money back when he has disbursed the insured amount before the cheque was dishonoured or returned to the insured, whereas if the insured person pays the premium after the cheque was dishonoured but prior to the date of the accident, then the case would be entirely different. The payment of consideration in cash can then be treated as a payment in the order in which the nature of the transaction required it. However, in this case, no such event has happened. Therefore, the insurer can legally refuse to pay the amount claimed by the respondents. IM ot M n On the basis of the above arguments, the Supreme Court upheld the contention of the appellant insurance company and set aside the impugned judgement of the Division Bench of the J & K High Court. N 402 questions 1. Explain the provisions of 64 VB (1) and 64 VB (2) of the Insurance Act. (Hint: Section 64 VB (1) says that the insurer is not liable until he receives the amount of the premium. Section 64VB (2) says that the receipt of the premium is a precondition for honouring the obligation to indemnify by the insurer.) 2. Do you think that the insurer is liable to honour the contract of insurance in this case? Give reasons. [Hint: The principle of equity is disturbed as the premium amount was not received by the insurer. Also, read Section 64 VB (1) and 64 VB (2).] NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Case Study 2: RAVINDER RAJ VS. MARUTI UDYOG LIMITED AND M/S COMPETENT MOTORS CO. PVT. LTD. (2011 SUPREME COURT) 403 Case Study 2 n o t e s RAVINDER RAJ VS. MARUTI UDYOG LIMITED AND M/S COMPETENT MOTORS CO. PVT. LTD. (2011 SUPREME COURT) FACTS IM S Mr. Ravinder Raj, the complainant filed a case against M/S Competent Motors who was the first respondent and Maruti Udyog Limited, the second respondent. He booked a car from the dealer M/S. Competent Motors by paying ` 78,351 as an initial booking amount. Then, on 5th April 1989, the balance amount was called upon and he paid the remaining amount. The official billing of the car was done on 5th April 1989. Then, the car was delivered to him on 13th April 1989. However, the price of the vehicle was escalated by ` 6000 during the intervening period. Therefore, he had to pay an amount of ` 7000 extra for receiving the delivery of the car. The complainant filed a case with the complaint number 1133/1990 to get a refund of the excess amount paid against the pro forma invoice. ISSUE N M Whether the consumer is liable to pay the increased amount of excise duty on the product when he had already paid the initial booking amount, also considering the fact that the excise duty increased after the Company had sent a letter of allotment to the consumer, but the billing date is at a later date, after the price had increased. JUDGeMENT The District forum rejected the petition. After verifying details, the Commission came to the conclusion that the prices, in this case, were revised as there was an increase in the Central Excise Duty. The district forum dismissed the complaint and declined the refund of the extra amount paid by the complainant because an increase in the future tax rate is not in the hands of the producer, therefore, he should not bear the extra burden. The additional amount asked by the dealer is to be deposited to the government authorities. The amount was not retained by the dealer or by Maruti Udyog Limited. However, when appealed in the State Commission, the Commission directed the respondents to refund the extra amount received by them. Both the respondents filed an appeal before the National Commission, which reversed the decision of the State Commission and ruled in the favour of the car dealership and manufacturers. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Case Objective This case study discusses the facts and judgement of the case, Ravinder Raj vs. Maruti Udyog Limited and M/S Competent Motors Co. Pvt. Ltd. on a purchasers liability to pay tax in transaction once goods are sold. Business Law e Case Study 2 s National Commission considered Section 64A (2) of The Sales of Goods Act 1930, which states, Any contract for the sale or purchase of goods without the stipulations about the payment of tax where the tax was not charged at the time of making the contract, or for the sale or purchase of such good any increase in the tax or any part of tax is payable, the seller may add the amount equivalent to the increase in tax to the contact price and he shall be entitled to be paid and to sue for the recovery of the additional amount. S Therefore, the respondents possess the right of an unpaid seller stated in Section 46A (1) of the Act. Considering all the facts and findings, the revised petition was heard on 28th July 2008 which stated that the verdict passed by the State Commission was refuted and the conclusions passed by the District Forum were approved. Therefore, the complainant was asked to file an affidavit by stating whether the said undertaking is correct or not. However, he avoided filing an affidavit denying its veracity. Against the said order of the National Commission, a Special Leave petition was filed in the Supreme Court of India by the Petitioner Ravinder Raj, his main contention was that the delay in the delivery of the car was not his fault – neither failure nor negligence on his part – hence he should not bear the brunt of the increase in price. However, the Apex Court found that the receipt given to the petitioner clearly indicated that the price prevailing on the date of billing would apply. The price on the date of billing included the increased rate of excise duty. Keeping in view this fact, and Sections 46(1) and 64A(2) of the Sale of Goods Act, 1930, Supreme Court dismissed the petition of the consumer and held that he is liable to pay the amount due on the increase of excise duty. IM ot M n N 404 questions 1. As per your understanding, do you think the extra amount paid by the complainant would have to be paid by the dealer or manufacturer? (Hint: The increased excise duty shall not be borne by the manufacturer or dealer.) 2. Which section of ‘The Sales of Goods Act, 1930’ defended the respondents in this case? (Hint: Section 64A (2) of ‘The Sales of Goods Act, 1930’ states the sellers have the right to ask for the additional amount on the contract price in case of an increase in the tax or duties as a purchaser is bound to pay the additional amount.) NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Case study 3: KANODIA KNITS PVT. LTD. VS. REGISTRAR OF COMPANIES DELHI & HARYANA (Company APpeal no. 216 of 2018) 405 Case Study 3 n o t e s KANODIA KNITS PVT. LTD., VS. REGISTRAR OF COMPANIES DELHI & HARYANA (Company APpeal no. 216 of 2018) FACT Case Objective IM S This appeal has been filed against the order of the National Company Law Tribunal (NCLT). The appellant company, Kanodia Knits Private Limited had two directors, who were also its shareholders, namely Mr. Ajay Kanodia and his wife Mr. Anjana Kanodia with 100% shareholding. The appellant, Mr. Ajay Kanodia, and the appellant company’s name were struck off by the Registrar of the Companies (ROC) because the company had not been carrying any business activity, operations or financial transactions for the past few years. Also, the company did not get the status of a dormant company under Section 455 of the Companies Act, 2013. Before NCLT, the appellant claimed that they had not received any notice under Section 248 (1) of the Act. ISSUE JUDGeMENT M Whether the name of the appellant company was liable to be struck off from the Register of ROC. N The ROC replied against the appellant’s complaint that the appellant company had not submitted financial statements from the financial year starting from 31st March 2004 till 31st March 2011. On part of the appellant, no convincing documents were provided to prove that the company was operational during the last few years, which is why the ROC struck off its name in June 2017. Also, as per ROC, it had issued the notice under Section 248 (5) of the Companies Act, 2013 to the company on 21st March 2017, a copy of the same was filed with the court. The appellant did not respond to the notice. Therefore, further steps to strike off the name of the company were taken. The appeal was dismissed by the court because the company documents could not prove that the organisation was working. The NCLAT (Appellate Tribunal) examined the audited balance sheets of the company, bank statements, and other documents brought on record by the appellant company and concluded that the company was neither carrying on business, nor was it in operation when its name was struck off by the Registrar from ROC. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education This case study discusses the facts and judgement of the case, Kanodia Knits Pvt. Ltd., vs. Registrar of Companies Delhi & Haryana where Registrar of Companies have a right to strike off the names of non-operational company under Companies Act, 2013. Business Law e Case Study 3 s Hence, there is no just reason to restore the name of the company on the ROC. questions 1. What were the main reasons that the appellant company name was struck off from ROC? (Hint: The company had not been carrying any business activity, operations or financial transactions from the past few years. Also, the company did not get the status of a dormant company under Section 455 of the Companies Act, 2013.) S 2. On what grounds the appeal was dismissed in this case? (Hint: The company documents could not prove that the organisation was working.) IM ot M n N 406 NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Case study 4: Sampelly Satyanarayan Rao vs. Indian Renewable Energy Development Agency Ltd. (2016 SUPREME COURT) 407 Case Study 4 n o t e s Sampelly Satyanarayan Rao vs. Indian Renewable Energy Development Agency Ltd. (2016 SUPREME COURT) FACTS ISSUE IM S The appellant is the Director of the Company whose cheques have been dishonoured. The case involves the loan of ` 11.5 crores, in the agreement it was stated that for loan installment repayment, post-dated cheques will be issued by the company, signed by its Director, by way of security. Cheques to the tune of ` 10.3 crores were dishonoured and the appellant was named as a co-accused in criminal complaints against the company by the respondents. The appellant contends that on the date the cheques were issued, no debt or liability was created or it was due, hence the dishonour of post-dated cheques did not fall within the dishonour of cheques rules. Whether dishonoured post-dated cheques given by way of security fall within the ambit of Section 138 of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881. M Judgement N The appellant contended that the effect of the agreement was that the deposit of post-dated cheques towards the repayment of instalments was of “security”, and hence did not create any debt or liability, post-dated cheques were given towards the amount payable in the future. High Court turned down Appellant’s contention, from which arose this appeal to the Supreme Court. It was held that the dishonour of cheque issued for discharge of later liability is clearly covered by the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 (as amended by the Amendment Act of 2002). It is to be noted that whether a post-dated cheque is for “discharge of debt or liability” depends on the nature of the transaction. If on the date of the cheque liability or debt exists or the amount has become legally recoverable, then Section 138 of the N.I. Act is attracted and not otherwise. questions 1. Which Act addresses the dishonour of cheque as an offence because of insufficient funds? (Hint: As per the Negotiable Instruments (Amendment and Miscellaneous Provisions) Act, 2002, the dishonour of cheques due to insufficiency of funds was deemed to be an offence.) NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Case Objective This case study discusses the facts and judgement of the case, Sampelly Satyanarayan Rao vs. Indian Renewable Energy Development Agency Ltd. on issuance of post dated cheques and its dishonour. Business Law e Case Study 4 s 2. What is the issue in this case study? S (Hint: Whether dishonoured post-dated cheques given by way of security fall within the ambit of Section 138 of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881) IM ot M n N 408 NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Case Study 5: Tulsi Narayan Garg vS. The M.P. Road Development Authority, Bhopal and Ors. (2019 SUPREME COURT) 409 Case Study 5 n o t e s Tulsi Narayan Garg vS. The M.P. Road Development Authority, Bhopal and Ors. (2019 SUPREME COURT) FACTS M IM S Here, the appellant is the proprietorship firm. The appellant and first respondent entered into an agreement, where the appellant has to construct and maintain two roads. As per the agreement, the completion data was twelve months, culminating on 21st October 2009. However, the first respondent being a state party invoked clause 52 of the agreement and terminated the agreement. The reason for this termination given was the slow progress of work by the appellant. Clauses 44.1 and 53.1 of the agreement were used by the first respondent to invoke and send a notice to the appellant for ascertaining the liquidated damages that were challenged by the appellant before the high court of Madhya Pradesh. The same was disposed of, with the option to the appellant of challenging the order by virtue of arbitral tribunal, which the appellant undertook before the MP Arbitral tribunal under Section 7, Adhiniyam, 1983. When the same was pending, the respondent served notice to the appellant for certain packages to recover the above-said damages. The appellant then challenged this action stating that the questions of damages were sub-judice before the arbitral tribunal. N ISSUE Whether a party to an agreement may be an arbiter in his own cause. Rule 1. Agreement clauses 44.1 r/w 53.1: The case wherein the liquidated damages are needed to be paid on the frustration of the agreement by the contractor, the parties must follow the procedure as mentioned under Clause 24 of the agreement. 2. S. 24 of the agreement: The clause specifies a procedure for the redressal of disputes under the contract through the arbitration tribunal. Judgement The three-member bench of Hon’ble Mr. Justice N.V. Ramana, Hon’ble Ms. Justice Indira Banerjee and Hon’ble Mr. Justice Ajay NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Case Objective This case study discusses the facts and judgement of the case, on the issue of whether a person having interest in the matter can be an arbitrator Tulsi Narayan Garg vs. The M.P. Road Development Authority, Bhopal and Ors. Business Law e Case Study 5 s Rastogi (Bench) has reaffirmed the position of law laid down in State of Karnataka vs. Shree Rameshwara Rice Mills Thirthahalli, which stated that a party to an agreement cannot be an arbiter in his own cause. The Bench observed that if the demand raised by a state authority has been challenged by the contractor and the same is pending adjudication, then initiation of recovery proceedings against the contractor by the concerned state authority at this stage is not justified and cannot be considered as legally sustainable in law. Source: https://fastforwardjustice.com/a-party-to-an-agreement-cannot-be-an-arbiter-inhis-own-case/ S questions 1. Describe the facts of this case. (Hint: The agreement between parties where the appellant has to construct and maintain two roads, a state party invoked clause 52 of the agreement and terminated the agreement. Clauses 44.1 and 53.1 of the agreement were used by the first respondent to invoke and send a notice to the appellant.) IM ot 2. What was the Judgement given by the court? M n (Hint: The judgements of the High Court were quashed and set aside, disposal of the instant appeals and the Arbitral Tribunal may not be influenced/inhibited by the observations made and decide the pending reference petition independently in accordance with the law.) N 410 NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Case study 6: TDM INFRASTRUCTURE PVT. LTD. VS. UE DEVELOPMENT INDIA (2008, SUpREME COURT) 411 Case Study 6 n o t e s TDM INFRASTRUCTURE PVT. LTD. VS. UE DEVELOPMENT INDIA (2008, SUpREME COURT) FACTS Case Objective IM S The case involves the resolution of a dispute between two companies both of which were incorporated under the Indian Companies Act, 1956. The respondent company namely UE Development India Private Limited (UED) had been awarded a contract for up-gradation by the National Highways Authority of India. A portion of this contract was subcontracted to the TDM Infrastructure Private Limited (TDM). All the TDM’s directors and shareholders were residents of Malaysia. The contract between the parties provided for the resolution of disputes between them by means of reference to arbitration under the provisions of the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996. The seat of the arbitration was to be New Delhi. N M On the occurrence of the dispute, the parties failed to decide on the nomination of an arbitrator. Consequently, in accordance with the provisions of Arbitration and Conciliation Act, TDM requested the Chief Justice of India to appoint an arbitrator in terms of Section 11(5) and Section 11(9) of the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996. Section 2(f) of the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 has defined the international commercial arbitration’ to mean an arbitration relating to disputes arising out of legal relationships, whether contractual or not, considered as commercial under the law in force in India and where at least one of the parties is: (i) A body corporate which is incorporated in any country other than India; or is(iii) a company or an association or a body of individuals whose central management and control is exercised in any country other than India. The application by the TDM to the Chief Justice of India was challenged by the respondent on the ground that the petitioner being a company registered in India must be held to be a company situated and controlled in India and therefore not entitled to approach the Chief Justice of India for the nomination of an arbitrator. ISSUE Whether the agreement between the contending parties falls within the purview of Section 2 (1)(f) of the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 and constitutes ‘international commercial arbitration. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education This case study discusses the facts and judgement of the case, TDM Infrastructure Pvt. Ltd. vs. UE Development India on the issue of whether Indian domiciled entities can opt for international commercial arbitration. Business Law e Case Study 6 s JUDGEMENT Section 2(1) (f) of the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 relates to international commercial arbitration in which a legal relationship between the parties is commercial or otherwise under the law in force in India. This legal relationship is established between an individual who is a national or habitually resident in some other country. The ‘nationality’ or ‘habitually residence’ of a body corporate in any country other than India should also receive a similar construction. The determination of nationality of parties particularly in the case of international commercial arbitration is crucial from the standpoint of the appointment of an arbitrator. For the purpose of the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996, a company incorporated in India can only have Indian nationality. Under Section 2 (1) (f) of the Act, if both the parties possess Indian nationalities, then the arbitration between them cannot be said to be international commercial arbitration. Notwithstanding the control and management of a company being located outside India, it will still be regarded as an Indian company by virtue of its being registered in India. In the event of its dispute with another company, which is also an Indian entity, it will not be permissible to have recourse to foreign law as the governing. If a company is registered in India, although its directors or shareholders are based outside India, it would be an Indian outfit for the purpose of the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996. S t IM o M n N 412 Therefore, when both the parties are incorporated in India, Clause (ii) of Section 2(f) would apply and not Clause (iii) thereof. The dispute between two domestic companies shall fall outside the purview of “international commercial arbitration”. Also, if a company is incorporated in India but its central management and control are exercised in any country other than India, then it cannot be included in the definition of international commercial arbitration. Section 28 (1) (a) of the Act will be attracted to the case in view of Section 2(6) of the Act which excludes the domestic arbitration from derogating from the provisions of Indian law. This is part of the public policy of the country. Therefore, if both the companies involved in a dispute are domiciled in India by virtue of their incorporation under Indian law, they will have Indian nationality. Any dispute between them shall be a domestic dispute. They cannot derogate from the provisions of the Indian law in view of its being the public policy of the country. Since there is no case of international commercial arbitration, it is wrong to approach NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Case study 6: TDM INFRASTRUCTURE PVT. LTD. VS. UE DEVELOPMENT INDIA (2008, SUpREME COURT) 413 Case Study 6 n the Chief Justice of India for the purpose of the nomination of an arbitrator under International Commercial Arbitration. questions 1. Discuss the judgment of the court passed in this case under the clauses of the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996. (Hint: For the purpose of the Act, a company incorporated in India can only have Indian nationality. Under Section 2 (1) (f) of the Act, if both the parties possess Indian nationalities, then the arbitration between them cannot be said to be international commercial arbitration.) S arbitration from 2. What distinguishes domestic international commercial arbitration? Give reasons in support of your answer. N M IM (Hint: The process of international arbitration can be held in India in accordance with the same domestic arbitration process. However, international arbitration involves one party or domiciled or controlled from outside India or when the subject matter is abroad.) NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education o t e s 414 Business Law n ot e Case Study 7 s NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY LTD., Vs. HINDUSTAN SAFETY GLASS WORKS LTD. (2007 SUPREME COURT) FACTS Case Objective The case involves the purchase of two insurance policies by the respondent Hindustan Safety Glass Works Ltd. from the appellant, National Insurance Company. The insurance was subsequently renewed for another year. The policies included the damage or loss due to flood and inundation besides buildings, machinery, stock, fixture and furniture, etc. On account of heavy rains in 1992, there was a heavy accumulation of rainwater inside and around the factory of the insured, which caused considerable damage to raw materials, stocks and goods, furniture, etc., in the factory of the respondent. The respondent filed a total claim of ` 72 lakhs. The insurance company appointed a surveyor to assess the loss. The surveyor estimated the loss to be worth of ` 24 lakhs. Since the company did not agree with the report of the surveyor, it appointed another surveyor who also gave the same estimated amount of loss as given by the first surveyor. Despite notice to the insurance company, no reply was given by the insurance company. As a result, a complaint was filed by the insured with the National Commission under the provisions of the Consumer Protection Act, 1986. The insured claimed an amount of ` 52.32 lakhs along with a number of expenses incurred for loss minimisation as well as interest. N M IM S This case study discusses the facts and judgement of the case, National Insurance Company Ltd., vs. Hindustan Safety Glass Works Ltd. on the issue of relief to consumers under Consumer Protection Act, 1986 The National Commission decided the dispute in the favour of the respondents and it is against this finding that an appeal has been filed in the Supreme Court. ISSUES (i) Is the plea of a claim that has become time-barred valid? (ii) Did the National Commission give the correct decision against the insurance company? JUDGEMENT The Supreme Court accepted that financial loss has been caused to the insured company on account of heavy and unusual rains for which the claim was filed the very next day of the incident. However, the surveyor appointed by the insurance company submitted its report after more than one year of his appointment. Another year was taken by the second surveyor. Two years were NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Case Study 7: NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY LTD., Vs. HINDUSTAN SAFETY GLASS WORKS LTD. (2007 SUPREME COURT) 415 Case Study 7 n spent in assessing the loss suffered by the insured. This delay is attached to the insurer because the insured had paid the claim amount well within time. Therefore, it cannot be allowed to prejudice the claim of the insured. Moreover, the insurance company rejected the claim of the insured much after the lodging of the claim. It is for such reasons that the Consumer Protection Act, 1986 has been enacted to help provide relief to hapless consumers. questions IM S Therefore, a consumer must not face any disadvantage when a service provider itself is responsible for causing a delay in the settlement of the claim of consumers. Thus, the plea of the time bar will not be available to the insurance company. The insurance company could not explain the reasons for considering the report of the second surveyor as tainted. In any case, the loss or damage has been caused to the insured company as already held by the National Commission. Hence, the appeal of the insurance company against the finding of the National Commission was dismissed. M 1. What is the meaning of the period of limitation for filing a case under the provisions of the Consumer Protection Act, 1986? N (Hint: Section 24-A of the Consumer Protection Act, 1986 states that the period of limitation to file a case is 2 years from the date of the course of action.) 2. On what grounds did the National Commission and the Supreme Court overrule the limitation plea taken by the insurance company? (Hint: A consumer must not face any disadvantage when a service provider is responsible for causing a delay in the settlement of the consumer’s claim.) NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education o t e s 416 Business Law n ot e Case Study 8 s INSTITUTE OF CHARTERED ACCOUNTANTS OF INDIA Vs. SHAUNAK H. SATYA (2011 SUPRME COURT) Case Objective The appellant in the case is the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India (ICAI), which is a body corporate engaged in the function of conducting examinations for the enrolment of those passing out as Chartered Accountants. The first respondent was declared not successful in the Chartered Accountants’ final examination in November, 2007. Thereupon, he applied for verification of marks. It was done and no discrepancy was found in the evaluation of the answer script. On receiving this information, the respondent sought the following information under 13 heads in terms of the RTI Act, 2005: S This case study discusses the facts and judegment of the case, Institute of Chartered Accountants of India vs. Shaunak H. Satya on the scope of exemption of disclosures under Right to Information Act, 2005. FACTS IM 1. Educational qualification of the examiners and moderators with subject-wise classifications 2. Procedure established for evaluation of exam papers 3. Instructions issued to the examiners, and moderators oral as well as written, if any M 4. Procedure established for selection of examiners & moderators N 5. Model answers, if any, given to the examiners and moderators, if any 6. Remuneration paid to the examiners & moderators 7. Number of students appearing for exams at all levels in the last 2 years (i.e., PE1/PE2/PCC/CPE/Final with break up) 8. Number of students that passed at the 1st attempt from the above 9. From the number of students that failed in the last 2 years (i.e., PE1/PE2/PCC/CPE/Final with break up) from the above, how many students opted for verification of marks as per Regulation 38 10. Procedure adopted at the time of verification of marks as above 11. Number of students whose marks were positively changed out of those students that opted for verification of marks 12. Educational qualifications of the persons performing the verification of marks under Regulation 38 and remuneration paid to them NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Case Study 8: INSTITUTE OF CHARTERED ACCOUNTANTS OF INDIA Vs. SHAUNAK H. SATYA (2011 SUPRME COURT) 417 Case Study 8 n 13. Number of times that the council has revised the marks of any candidate, or any class of candidates in accordance with regulation Not satisfied with the information provided by the ICAI, the respondent appealed before the apex court. ISSUES (i) Do the instructions and solutions to the questions given by the ICAI to the examiners and moderators constitute the intellectual property of the ICAI so that the disclosure thereof is exempt under Section 8(1)(D) of the RTI Act? S (ii) Will the access to the afore-noted information sought by the respondent involves an infringement of the ICAI’s copyright and therefore liable to be rejected under Section 9 of the RTI Act? IM (iii) Is the aforementioned information made available to examiners and moderators in their fiduciary capacity and therefore exempted under Section 8(1)(E) of the RTI Act? JUDGeMENT N Question (i) M (iv) Was the High Court justified in directing the appellant ICAI to furnish five items of information to the respondent relating to Regulation 39(2) of Chartered Accountants Regulations, 1988? Question papers, instructions regarding evaluation and solutions to questions (or model answers) which are furnished to examiners and moderators in connection with evaluation of answer scripts constitute literary works and are intellectual property and are, therefore, subject to a copyright. The paper setters and authors thereof (other than employees of ICAI), who are the first owners of the literary work are required to assign their copyright in regard to the question papers/solutions in favour of ICAI. Hence, Section 8(1) (d) of the RTI Act does not bar or prohibit the disclosure of question papers, model answers (solutions to questions) and instructions, if any, given to the examiners and moderators after the examination and after the evaluation of answers scripts is completed since at that stage, such disclosure will not harm the competitive position of any third party. The apex court rejected the contention of the ICAI that if information is exempt once, it continues to be exempt for all time to come. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education o t e s Business Law e Case Study 8 s Question (ii) Section 9 of the RTI exempts the furnishing of information which would involve an infringement of copyright subsisting in a person other than the State. The provision of the information in respect of which ICAI holds a copyright does not amount to the infringement of a copyright subsisting in a person other than the State. Question (iii) S Therefore, ICAI cannot claim protection against disclosure under Section 9 of the RTI Act nor does the furnishing of information by an examining body, in response to a query under the RTI Act be termed as an infringement of copyright in view of the provisions of Sections 51 and 52(1)(a) of Copyright Act. As regards the ICAI contention that the information is held in a fiduciary capacity and therefore protected by Section 8(1) (e), it was pointed out that the impugned section has used the words “information available to a person in his fiduciary relationship” rather than the words “information available to a public authority in its fiduciary relationship”. The use of the words “person” in the impugned provisions widens its scope. Accordingly, the instructions and solutions to questions communicated by ICAI to the examiners, head examiners and moderators in their fiduciary relationship is exempted from disclosure under Section 8(1)(D) of RTI Act. IM ot M n Question (iv) N 418 As regards the scheme of the moderation of marks by the ICAI, its objective is to bring about uniformity in evaluation. The ICAI must disclose the said standards of moderation drawn up by it. Source: https://indiankanoon.org/doc/1548289 questions 1. Summarise the issues and the decisions of the court on each of the questions raised in this case. (Hint: Read Section 8(1) (d), Section 9, of the RTI Act and Sections 51 and 52(1)(a) of Copyright Act.) 2. Discuss the judgment of the court given in this case under the provisions of Sections 51 and 52(1)(a) of the Copyright Act. (Hint: The furnishing of information by an examining body, in response to a query under the RTI Act cannot be termed as an infringement of the copyright in view of the provisions of Sections 51 and 52(1)(a) of Copyright Act.) NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Case Study 9: Rajni Maindiratta vs. Directorate of Education (2017, HIGH COURT OF DELHI) 419 Case Study 9 n o t e s Rajni Maindiratta vs. Directorate of Education (2017, HIGH COURT OF DELHI) FACTS Case Objective S The appellant, Aditi, filed an RTI application to obtain information on affiliation, extension and upgradation provided to Vidya Bharti School, Rohini. She approached the Commission on 05.06.2014 to provide an opportunity to her for inspection. The CIC put her application on hold after it was discovered that she filed the RTI application only after she was removed from the school. She had already filed a petition before the Delhi School Tribunal against the termination order. CIC ruled that she should wait for the final verdict of the Tribunal rather than taking the RTI route. ISSUE JUDGeMENT IM Whether the appellant’s application for information was rightly rejected by the school and hence the ruling of the CIC was correct. N M CIC adjudicated about 20 appeals filed by the petitioner. It admonished the petitioner after verifying the motives for filing the RTI. It expressed the opinion that since the appellant is using RTI for personal vengeance and lack of public interest behind her request for information dated 6th May, 2015, her application has been correctly rejected. The Commission noticed vengeance and total lack of public interest behind her requests for information. It is highly unethical and immoral for such a guilty teacher to abuse RTI. After CIC’s verdict, the appellant approached the High Court of Delhi in second appeal in order to get access to requested documents. The High Court stated that Though undoubtedly, the reason for seeking the information is not required to be disclosed but when it is found that the process of the law is being abused, the same becomes relevant. Neither the authorities created under the RTI Act nor the Courts are helpless if they witness the provisions of law being abused and, in fact, they owe a duty to immediately put a stop to such nuisance activities. On 08.10.2015, the appeal was dismissed with the observation that the appellant has been using the RTI route for personal vengeance instead of public interest. Her motives were totally unethical and immoral and she wanted to build up pressure on the school’s management and harass the school authorities. NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education This case study discusses the facts and judgement of the case, Rajni Maindiratta vs. Directorate of Education on the issue of abuse of Right to Information Act, 2005. Business Law e Case Study 9 s questions 1. What were the reasons that her second appeal was dismissed by the courts? (Hint: She has been using the RTI application to satiate her personal agenda of harassing the school. There was no motive of public interest.) 2. Why did the CIC suggest the appellant to wait for the verdict of the Delhi School Tribunal? S (Hint: CIC had adjudicated about 20 appeals filed by the petitioner. It has admonished the petition after verifying the motives of filing the RTI. Therefore, she should wait for the final verdict of the tribunal rather than taking the RTI route.) IM ot M n N 420 NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Case Study 10: COMPETITION COMMISSION OF INDIA VS. BHARTI AIRTEL lTD & ANR (2018 SUPREME COURT) 421 Case Study 10 n o t e s COMPETITION COMMISSION OF INDIA VS. BHARTI AIRTEL lTD. & ANR (2018 SUPREME COURT) FACTS IM S A complaint was filed under Section 19 of the Competition Act, 2002 by Reliance Jio Infocomm Ltd. (RJIL) against three telecom operators namely Bharti Airtel, Vodafone and Idea Cellular, for adopting anti-competitive agreement and cartelisation. Upon receipt of the complaint, the Commission directed the Director-General to conduct an investigation into the complaint filed by Reliance Jio. Against the order of the investigation, four writ petitions were filed in the High Court of Delhi by Bharti Airtel, Vodafone, Idea Cellular, and the Cellular Operators Association of India, with a prayer for quashing the investigation order. The High Court ordered the quashing of investigation on the ground that CCI has no jurisdiction to look into various agreements and contracts, which are to be settled by the authority under the Telecom Regulatory Authority of India (TRAI) Act, 1997. Aggrieved by the decision of the High Court, both the CCI and Reliance Jio filed a petition in the Supreme Court. M ISSUE (i) What are the powers of TRAI and CCI in regard to investigation in this matter? N (ii) Whether there exists an anti-competitive agreement or cartelisation by the parties against whom Reliance Jio has filed the complaint before the Competition Commission of India (CCI). JUDGeMENT After noting down various features of the Competition Act, 2002 the Supreme Court stated that since TRAI has been set up as an expert regulatory body to specifically govern the Telecom sector, the aforesaid aspects of the disputes need to be decided by TRAI, in the first instance. Only after the determination of the jurisdictional facts by the TRAI, the next questions raised by the appellants regarding whether there has been any concerted or anti-competitive agreement between the respondents shall be put to the CCI. Therefore, the CCI can go into the interrogation as to whether provisions violation of TRAI Act should be considered the ‘abuse of dominance’ or ‘anti-competitive agreements’. The apex court did not agree with the contention of the appellants that NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Case Objective This case study discusses the facts and judgement of the case, Competition Commission of India vs. Bharti Airtel Ltd. & ANR. Business Law e Case Study 10 s CCI can investigate the matter before the conduct of inquiry by the TRAI. The Apex court also rejected the argument of respondents that CCI has no jurisdiction in the matter. The function assigned to CCI is altogether different from that given to TRAI. Therefore, the appeal was dismissed. questions 1. Why was the appeal made by the CCI and Reliance Jio dismissed by the apex court? (Hint: The disputes need to be decided by TRAI in the first instance as TRAI has been set up as an expert regulatory body to specifically govern the Telecom sector.) S 2. Discuss the functions and the areas of jurisdiction of both CCI and TRAI. (Hint: CCI deals with matters related to unfair trade practices or anti-competitive agreements, abuse of dominance and combination, whereas TRAI has been set up as an expert regulatory body to specifically govern the Telecom sector.) IM ot M n N 422 NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Case Study 11: LABOUR UNREST AT MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LTD. 423 Case Study 11 n o t e s LABOUR UNREST AT MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LTD. Facts Maruti Suzuki India Limited, a subsidiary of Suzuki Motor Corporation of Japan, has been the leader of the Indian car market for many years. Maruti faced various problems in handling industrial relations with its labour force. In 2012, Maruti’s Manesar plant observed labour (contract workers) strikes, a lockout and the brutal murder of the General Manager of the company. These happenings led to a loss of ` 25 billion to the company. M IM S The main causes of the strikes were differences in salary, working conditions and the demand for a new union. As per the workers, the Maruti Udyog Kamgar Union (MUKU) that was in place was inefficient. Thus, after a lot of struggle, they set up a new union, Maruti Suzuki Workers’ Union (MSWU), with new committee members. The union negotiated for higher wages (contract workers were paid half the minimum wage of permanent employees), transportation facilities, regularisation of leave benefits and easing the robotic work. It demanded an increase in the basic salary, a monthly conveyance allowance of ` 10,000, a gift with every new car launch and a house/home loan for every worker. However, these demands were not fulfilled. N Violence broke out when a worker (Jiyalal) was suspended without any reason. Workers demanded the rejoining of Jiyalal. As per the workers, the management started the violence by getting hundreds of bouncers to attack the workers. The violence killed and injured many people. The Human Resource General Manager was charred to death by workers. As per the police, the Manesar violence was planned by some sections of workers and union leaders. The work at the Manesar plant was suspended, and it led to a loss of Rs. 75 crores per day. outcome Under the Industrial Disputes Act, 1947, a lockout was announced by the company, and it was announced that the workers will not be paid for the period of the lockout. The company also decided not to use contract workers in future. The managing director and chief executive of Maruti Suzuki India, Shinzo Nakanishi announced, We are going to de-recognise NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Case Objective This case study highlights the labour unrest at Maruti Suzuki India Limited issue of maintaining industrial relations. Business Law e Case Study 11 s Maruti Suzuki Workers’ Union and dismiss all workers named in connection with the incident. We will not compromise at all in such instances of barbaric, unprovoked violence. This case of violence at the Manesar plant is undoubtedly condemnable. For avoiding the repetition of such incidents, the organisation’s management needs to handle industrial labour issues with more understanding, kindness and humaneness. questions S 1. The Manesar incident underlines the fact that it is essential to ensure sound industrial relations for a smooth continuation of operations and the safety of the management, workers and plant. What were the main reasons for the failure of sound industrial relations in the Manesar strike? IM ot (Hint: Lack of communication between HR people and workers, discrimination between workers’ pay) 2. What could have been done to solve the grievances of the workers and avoid the Manesar violence? (Hint: Management should have dealt in an unbiased way and listened to workers) M n N 424 NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education Case Study 12: STATE OF RAJASTHAN Vs. SALMAN KHAN AND OTHERS (2012, High court of rajasthan) Case Study 12 n o t e 425 s STATE OF RAJASTHAN Vs. SALMAN KHAN AND OTHERS (2012, High court of rajasthan) FACTS Case Objective IM S In 1998, Salman Khan, one of the prominent bollywood actors was alleged of poaching two blackbucks, an endangered species, in Rajasthan. There were four other co-accused stars, Sonali Bendre, Tabu, Neelam and Saif Ali Khan, during the shooting of the film “Hum Saath-Saath Hain” on 26th September, 1998. As per the Wildlife (protection) Act, hunting of such species is prohibited by the law. Therefore, firstly, Salman Khan was arrested on 12th October, 1998 by the Forest Department and spent 18 days in imprisonment in Jodhpur Jail. Subsequently on February 17, 2006, Salman Khan was sentenced to undergo one-year imprisonment in Jodhpur Central Jail along with a fine of ` 5000. Later on, the case was transferred to the High Court. The State of Rajasthan also appealed to increase the period of sentence awarded to Salman Khan. An Appeal was filed against this order in the High Court. M ISSUE N The issue before the Hon’ble High Court of Rajasthan was that since the charge levied against the accused was that he has committed an act of mischief, as defined in Section 425 of the Indian Penal Code, whether the mischief or damage to animals herein would only mean domesticated animals or wild animals as well? JUDGeMENT As per the court judgment, A damage caused to the wild life even if the same cannot be evaluated or calculated in terms of money is definitely a loss to the ecology and as a result thereof, it can be considered to be a loss to the public and society at large… It is the firm opinion of this Court that by the act of using fire arms for killing wild life, the accused committed the offence of mischief as defined in Sections 425 and 429 IPC. Since the Clause Thirdly of Section 141 Indian Penal Code, 1860 (IPC) covers in its ambit, mischief, criminal trespass or other offence..., the provision of Section 141 IPC can very well be applied to an offence of mischief when committed in relation to a wild animal also. Accordingly, the term ‘other offence’ as mentioned in Section 141 covers in its ambit, an offence under Wild Life Protection Act. Therefore, every member of the unlawful assembly which participates in the act of hunting is definitely liable NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education This case study discusses the facts and judgement of the case, State of Rajasthan vs. Salman Khan and Others. Business Law e Case Study 12 s for being prosecuted for the offence under Section 51 of the Wild Life Protection Act with the aid of Section 149 IPC. According to Section 51 of the Wildlife (Protection) Act, it is not allowed to hunt or capture any animal species that are included in the Schedules I-IV. HM Saraswat, the lawyer of Salman Khan said that the act has been targeted in a “false and malicious campaign”. However, On 5th April, 2018, he was sentenced to five years imprisonment along with a fine of ` 10,000 after he was found guilty for killing two blackbucks in Jodhpur. The court took exactly twenty years to convict Salman Khan. All other co-accused, Saif Ali Khan, Tabu, Neelam and Sonali Bendre were acquitted by the court under the virtue of ‘benefit of doubt’ for the incident. The verdict states that The accused is a popular actor whose deeds are followed by people. Despite this, the accused hunted two black bucks. It is not justified to give Salman Khan the benefit of probation in view of the manner in which he hunted by shooting two innocent, moot black bucks that come under the purview of the Wildlife Conservation Act. After the court provided its sentence, the accused filed an application for bail in the session court. The appeal against the High Court’s verdict is still pending. S t IM o M n questions N 426 1. Who requested to increase the period of one-year imprisonment imposed on Salman Khan in the first sentence hearing under Section 51 of the Wildlife Protection Act? (Hint: The State of Rajasthan appealed to increase the period of sentence awarded to Salman Khan.) 2. What all penalties have been imposed on Salman Khan in the verdict of High Court? (Hint: An imprisonment of five years along with a fine of ` 10,000) NMIMS Global Access - School for Continuing Education